LabX 2014 Operating Guide

Transcription

Operating instructions
LabX
LabX 2014
Table of Contents
1 Introduction
15
2 Navigation and Operation
16
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 3 Options and Settings
3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.3.1 3.1.3.2 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.3.10 3.3.11 4 Login screen
Home - Ribbon bar
Quick start window
Versioned objects
Approving and releasing
Displaying signatures
Managing folders
Customizing table views
Managing messages
Defining messages
Displaying messages
Inserting hyperlinks
Inserting symbols
Zooming options
Supported languages
27
LabX licensing
License manager
License options
Activation
Online activation
Offline activation
User settings
Changing your own password
Registering fingerprints
Deleting fingerprints
Settings
Tag settings
Label settings
Account policies
Signature and release policies
E-Mail settings
Color settings for highlighting results
Overall result state settings
Page setup
Balance settings
Titration settings
Thermal Values settings
Operating Instruments
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.3.2 4.1.3.3 4.1.3.4 4.1.3.5 17
18
18
20
20
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
27
27
27
27
28
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
32
32
33
33
33
34
34
34
36
Balances
Configuring the Ethernet Interface
Configuring the serial interface
Operating the balance
The homescreen
Selecting analysis
Weighing of titration samples
Editing tasks
36
36
36
37
38
38
38
39
Table of Contents
3
4.1.3.6 4.1.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.2.1 4.2.2.2 4.2.2.3 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.4.1 4.3.4.1.1 4.3.4.1.2 4.3.4.2 4.3.4.2.1 4.3.4.2.2 4.3.4.2.3 4.3.4.2.4 4.3.4.2.5 4.3.4.3 4.3.4.3.1 4.3.4.3.2 4.3.4.3.3 4.3.4.3.4 4.3.4.3.5 4.3.4.3.6 4.3.4.3.7 4.3.4.4 4.3.4.4.1 4.3.4.4.2 4.3.4.4.3 4.3.4.4.4 4.3.4.5 4.3.4.5.1 4.3.4.5.2 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 4.3.5.3 4.3.5.4 4.3.5.4.1 4.3.5.4.2 4.3.5.5 4.3.5.6 4.3.5.7 4.3.5.8 4.3.5.9 4.3.5.9.1 4.3.5.9.2 4.3.5.9.3 4.3.5.9.4 4.3.5.9.5 4
Table of Contents
Logging out and locking the screen
Adding peripheral devices
Quantos
Configuring the interfaces
Operating Quantos
Switching on Quantos and logging in
The homescreen
Manual operations
Titration
Configuring the network settings
Configuring LabX connection
Installing USB drivers
Titrator settings
Global settings
Analysis and resources behavior
Solvent Control
Chemicals
Titrants
Auxiliary reagents
Calibration standards
Concentration and titer standards
Substances
Hardware
Sensors
Pumps
Peripherals
Titration stands
Auxiliary instruments
Homogenizer
Liquid Handler
User Settings
Shortcuts
Screen
Beep
Keyboard
Values
Blanks
Auxiliary values
Operating the instrument
Switching on the instrument and logging in
The homescreen
Selecting method
Editing tasks
Editing samples
Adding shortcuts
Task list
Controlling tasks while a task is running
Controlling tasks while a task is queued
Resetting
Manual operations
Stirrer
Sensor
Burette
Pump
Auxiliary instrument
39
39
39
39
40
40
41
42
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
49
50
50
51
52
53
54
55
55
59
60
65
70
71
71
72
72
72
73
73
73
73
74
74
74
75
75
76
77
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
84
87
88
4.3.5.9.6 4.3.5.10 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.4.1 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.3 4.4.4.4 4.4.4.5 4.4.4.6 4.4.4.7 4.4.4.7.1 4.4.4.7.2 4.4.4.7.3 4.4.4.8 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2 4.5.2.3 4.5.2.4 5 Sample changer
Creating Methods
LiquiPhysics
Configuring the Ethernet interface
Configuring the USB interface
The homescreen
Selecting method
Task list
Controlling tasks while a task is running
Controlling tasks while a task is queued
Manual operations
Drying
Rinse
Pump sample
Displaying results
Thermal Values
Configuring the Ethernet Interface
The homescreen
Instrument adjustment
Manual operations
Workbench
91
92
93
93
93
94
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
98
99
100
100
100
100
101
102
103
104
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.17.1 5.17.2 5.17.3 5.17.4 5.18 5.19 User interactions - Dialog
Shortcuts - Workbench
Sample series - Workbench
Methods - Workbench
Products - Workbench
Tasks - Workbench
Task editor - Workbench
Results - Workbench
Statistics - Workbench
Data transfer - Workbench
Measurements - Workbench
Measured values - Workbench
Graph - Workbench
Table of measured values - Workbench
Result buffer - Workbench
Pump - Workbench
Sensor - Workbench
Temperature sensor
Potentiometric Sensor
Polarized sensor
Conductivity sensor
Stirrer - Workbench
Sample changer - Workbench
105
105
106
106
107
107
108
109
109
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
112
112
113
114
114
115
116
Table of Contents
5
5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23 6 Analysis
Table of Contents
117
119
120
120
121
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.1.1 6.7.1.2 6.7.1.3 6.7.1.4 6.7.1.5 6.7.1.6 6.7.1.7 6.7.1.8 6.7.2 6.7.2.1 6.7.2.2 6.7.2.3 6.7.2.4 6.7.2.5 6.7.2.6 6.7.2.7 6.7.2.8 6.7.2.9 6.7.2.10 6.7.2.11 6.7.2.12 6
Auxiliary instruments - Workbench
Burette - Workbench
Start Auto SmartCodes - Dialog
Task resources - Dialog
Managing tasks
Adding tasks
Editing tasks
Controlling tasks
Assigning tasks
Auto ID generation
Managing shortcuts
Adding shortcuts
Editing shortcuts
Managing sample series
Add sample series
Editing sample series
Managing series sequences
Add series sequence
Editing series sequence
Managing products
Adding products
Editing products
Managing methods
Creating methods
Editing methods
Inserting method functions
Editing parameters
Importing and exporting methods
Method functions general
User interaction
Beep
Sample IDs
Message
Method information
Number
Selection
Text
Return values
Miscellaneous
Block instrument
Sample changer position
Peripheral communication
Recreate task
Label printer
Pause task
Task
Transfer data
Strip printer
Result
Report
Delay
121
121
122
123
123
124
125
125
125
126
127
128
128
129
129
129
130
131
132
132
132
134
135
135
137
137
137
137
138
139
139
141
142
143
143
143
144
144
146
146
147
148
149
149
150
152
153
6.7.2.13 6.7.2.14 6.7.2.15 6.7.2.16 6.7.3 6.7.3.1 6.7.3.2 6.7.3.3 6.7.3.4 6.7.3.5 6.7.3.6 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.1.1 6.8.1.2 6.8.1.3 6.8.2 6.8.2.1 6.8.3 6.8.3.1 6.8.4 6.8.5 6.8.6 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.1.1 6.9.1.2 6.9.1.3 6.9.1.4 6.9.1.5 6.9.1.6 6.9.1.7 6.9.2 6.9.2.1 6.9.2.2 6.9.2.3 6.9.2.4 6.9.3 6.9.3.1 6.9.3.2 6.9.3.3 6.9.3.4 6.9.3.5 6.9.3.6 6.9.3.7 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.3 6.10.2 6.10.2.1 6.10.2.2 6.10.3 Audit trail
Notify
Unblock instrument
Return values
Structural
Decision branch
Sample cycle
Decide
Sample scope
Do while
Return values
Use of fx, data binding, formulas
Examples of data binding
Info lines
Result
Message
Applying the data binding
Data binding
Using formulas
Formulas
Using task parameters
Messages
Conditions
Method functions balances
Performance
Adjustment - external weight
Eccentricity test
Repeatability test
Test - external weight
Test - internal weight
Adjustment - internal weight
Return values
Instrument
Info lines
Draft shield
Performance verification
Validation and settings
Measurement
Interval weight
Weight
Tare
Zero
Pretare
Automatic weight detection
Return values
Method functions Quantos
Instrument
Front door
Read / write dosing head
Analysis components
Dispense
Lock head
Return values
154
154
155
155
157
157
157
158
158
160
161
161
161
162
162
164
165
165
166
166
167
169
169
171
171
171
171
173
174
175
176
176
179
179
179
180
181
183
183
184
187
188
189
190
192
194
194
194
194
195
196
196
197
198
Table of Contents
7
6.11 6.11.1 6.11.1.1 6.11.1.2 6.11.1.3 6.11.1.4 6.11.1.5 6.11.2 6.11.2.1 6.11.2.1.1 6.11.2.1.2 6.11.2.1.3 6.11.2.1.4 6.11.2.1.5 6.11.2.1.6 6.11.2.2 6.11.2.3 6.11.2.4 6.11.2.5 6.11.2.6 6.11.2.7 6.11.2.8 6.11.2.9 6.11.2.10 6.11.2.11 6.11.2.12 6.11.2.13 6.11.2.14 6.11.2.15 6.11.2.16 6.11.2.17 6.11.2.18 6.11.2.19 6.11.2.20 6.11.2.21 6.11.2.22 6.11.2.23 6.11.2.24 6.11.2.25 6.11.2.26 6.11.2.27 6.11.2.28 6.11.2.29 6.11.2.30 6.11.2.31 6.11.3 6.11.3.1 6.11.3.2 6.11.3.3 6.11.3.4 6.11.4 6.11.4.1 6.11.5 6.11.5.1 6.11.5.2 8
Table of Contents
Method functions titration
Overview of method functions
Method functions T50 / T70 / T90
Method functions G20
Method functions V20 / V30
Method functions C20 / C30
Types and possible number of loops
Analysis components
Control type: Output 24 V
Control type: Stirrer
Control type: Out TTL (Single pin)
Control type: Input TTL (Single pin)
Control type: TTL (multipin)
Control type: RS-232
Auxiliary value
Blank
Calculation
Conditioning
Dispense (controlled)
Line Rinse
Dispense (normal)
Drain
Drift determination
Homogenizer
Instruction
Liquid Handling
Measure (normal)
Measure (MVT)
Park
Pump
Record
Rinse
Sync
Standby
Stating
Stir
Titration (EP)
Titration (EP Coul)
Titration (KF Vol)
Titration (KF Coul)
Titration (Learn EQP)
Titration (2-phase)
Titration (EQP)
Titration stand
Sample
Sample (Calib)
Sample (KF)
Sample
Sample (Titer)
Titer
Titer
Subfunctions
Hidden sub functions
Calibration
201
201
201
204
205
206
207
207
207
208
208
208
209
209
210
211
211
212
214
215
216
217
217
218
218
218
219
222
224
225
226
226
227
227
228
228
231
231
234
235
236
237
238
240
245
246
246
247
250
251
252
252
252
252
253
6.11.5.3 6.11.6 6.11.6.1 6.11.6.2 6.11.6.2.1 6.11.6.2.2 6.11.6.2.3 6.11.6.2.4 6.11.6.3 6.11.6.4 6.11.6.4.1 6.11.6.4.2 6.12 6.12.1 6.12.1.1 6.12.1.2 6.12.1.3 6.12.1.4 6.12.1.5 6.12.1.6 6.12.2 6.12.2.1 6.12.3 6.12.3.1 6.12.3.2 6.12.3.3 6.12.3.4 6.12.3.5 6.12.3.6 6.12.4 6.12.4.1 6.12.4.2 6.12.4.3 6.12.4.4 6.12.4.5 6.12.4.6 6.12.4.7 6.12.4.8 6.12.4.9 6.12.4.10 6.12.5 6.13 6.13.1 6.13.2 6.13.3 6.13.4 7 Mix Time
Evaluate and calculate
Indexing of method functions
Formulas
Using analysis data in formulas
Sample formulas
Constants within a Content Calculation
Mathematical functions and operators
Naming Conventions for Using Analysis Data in Calculations
Explanatory examples
Titration method function
Stating method function
Method functions LiquiPhysics
Common
Adjustment
Clean
Import adjustment data
Measurement
Atmospheric Pressure
Test
User interaction
Standard data
Analysis components
Calculate on instrument
Cell Test
Clean
Instruction
Temperature compensation
Wait
Subfunctions
Set sample parameters (Adjustment)
Set sample parameters (Test)
Set sample parameters (Measurement)
Measure (Adjustment)
Measure (Measurement)
Measure (Test)
Adjustment
Test
Fill
Online display
Return values
Method functions Thermal Values
Test melting point/range
Melting point/range
Return values
Data
254
255
255
256
256
258
258
259
260
268
268
270
272
272
272
273
274
274
275
276
277
277
278
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
284
285
286
287
288
290
291
292
292
293
295
297
297
297
300
302
304
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Editing search folder
Displaying additional results
Editing instrument settings
Managing results
Editing sample data
Recalculating results
Reevaluating
304
304
305
305
306
307
308
Table of Contents
9
7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.5.1 7.2.6 7.2.7 7.2.7.1 7.2.7.2 7.2.7.3 7.2.7.4 7.2.8 7.2.9 7.2.10 7.2.11 8 Resources
Table of Contents
309
310
310
310
311
311
311
311
311
312
312
313
314
315
8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.3.1 8.1.3.2 8.1.3.3 8.1.4 8.1.4.1 8.1.4.2 8.1.4.3 8.1.4.4 8.1.4.5 8.1.4.6 8.1.4.7 8.1.4.8 8.1.4.9 8.1.4.10 8.1.4.11 8.1.4.12 8.1.4.12.1 8.1.4.12.2 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.2.1 8.3.2.1.1 8.3.2.1.2 8.3.2.1.3 8.3.2.1.4 8.3.2.1.5 8.3.2.2 8.3.2.3 8.3.2.3.1 8.3.2.3.2 10
Results
Result details
Editing results comments
Raw data
Measured values
Balance
Quantos
Titration
Thermal Values
Task data
Statistics
Resource data
Method data
Managing instruments
Editing availability
Revoking lock
Adding instruments
Establishing a serial connection
Establishing a network connection
Establishing a USB connection
Managing instrument settings
Connection
Instrument server
Properties
Default assignments
Drivers
Maintenance
FACT
MinWeigh
Adjustment and test
Hardware
Chemicals - Titration
Global settings - Titration
Solvent Control
Editing ErgoSens settings
Managing drivers
Balance
Managing weights
Managing weight sets
Titration
Expired resources
Hardware
Sensors
Sensor calibration
Sensor test
Sensor calibration history
Sensor test history
Value ranges from sensor measuring units and control band
Pumps
Peripherals
Balance
Barcode reader
315
315
315
316
316
317
318
318
319
319
319
319
320
320
320
320
320
320
320
321
321
323
324
324
324
324
325
325
325
325
325
330
332
333
333
333
334
335
335
336
8.3.2.3.3 8.3.2.3.4 8.3.2.3.5 8.3.2.3.6 8.3.2.3.7 8.3.2.4 8.3.2.4.1 8.3.2.4.2 8.3.2.4.3 8.3.2.4.4 8.3.2.4.5 8.3.2.4.6 8.3.2.4.7 8.3.2.4.8 8.3.2.5 8.3.2.6 8.3.2.7 8.3.3 8.3.3.1 8.3.3.2 8.3.4 8.3.4.1 8.3.4.1.1 8.3.4.2 8.3.4.3 8.3.4.4 8.3.4.5 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.5 8.5.1 8.5.1.1 8.6 8.6.1 9 USB stick
Printer
Fingerprint reader
LevelSens
TBox
Titration stands
Manual stand
Auto stand
External stand
Rondolino TTL
Stromboli TTL
InMotion
Rondo60
KF stand
Homogenizers
Liquid Handlers
Values
Blanks
Auxiliary values
Chemicals
Titrants
Titrant history
Auxiliary reagents
Substances
LiquiPhysics
Managing adjustment sets
Managing test sets
Thermal Values
Managing reference substances
Managing lots
Managing value tables
Importing value tables
System
336
336
338
338
339
339
340
340
340
341
341
341
342
343
343
344
345
346
346
346
347
347
348
348
349
350
351
352
352
352
353
353
353
354
354
355
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.2 9.3.1.3 9.3.1.4 9.3.1.5 9.3.1.6 9.3.1.7 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.3.1 9.3.3.2 9.3.3.3 9.3.3.4 Audit Trail
Background jobs
Report templates
Reports
Creating a new report template
Editing a report template
Data management
General report functions
Automatic report generation
Data from multiple tasks in one report
Module-specific data source
The report editor
The report designer
Insert bands
Inserting detailed reports
Items on the Tool Box tab
Pivot grids
355
355
356
356
356
357
357
357
357
358
358
358
359
361
362
362
363
Table of Contents
11
9.3.3.5 9.3.3.6 9.3.3.7 9.3.3.8 9.3.3.9 9.3.3.10 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.2.1 9.6.3 9.7 9.7.1 9.7.2 10 Data Backup
Table of Contents
Database backup
LabX DB Maintenance
Automating data backup
Performing a manual data backup
Restoring a database
Initialize a database
Creating an archive
Publishing an archive
Displaying an archive
Appendix
376
376
377
378
378
378
379
379
379
381
11.1 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.7 11.1.8 11.1.9 11.1.10 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 12
363
364
364
364
364
364
364
365
365
365
368
368
368
370
370
372
372
372
373
374
374
374
375
376
10.1 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 10.2.5 10.2.6 10.2.7 11 Structuring a simple template
Linking items with data
Filtering the data
Using formatting rules
Reviewing in the preview
Further information
User management
Managing users
Managing roles
Assigning rights
Import and export
Adding import templates
Editing import templates
Adding export templates
Editing export templates
SmartCodes
Adding SmartCodes
Editing SmartCodes
SmartCodes examples
Importing and exporting SmartCodes
Managing schedules
Adding a schedule
Editing a schedule
Quick Guide
Where to find Information
Log on to LabX
The LabX User Interface
Connecting a Balance (RS)
Connecting a Quantos (Ethernet)
Connecting an Instrument (Ethernet)
Creating a Method
Starting the Method
Displaying the Result
Generating a Report
Items for export and import templates
Applicable operators
Applicable functions
Global variables
Data markings
Determination type
381
381
381
381
383
384
385
385
386
390
391
392
394
394
395
397
398
11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 11.12 11.12.1 11.12.2 11.12.3 11.13 11.13.1 11.13.2 11.13.3 11.13.4 11.13.5 11.13.6 11.14 Index
User-defined date and time formats
Standard date and time formats
User-defined time and date functions
Standard number format character strings
LiquiPhysics formula syntax and tables
Conditions and formulas
Result proposals
Color scales
Arithmetic model
Computations and accuracy
Infinity and NaN
Rounding
Trailing zeroes in calculations and results
Significant digits
Standard deviation
Grubbs table G (N, 90%)
398
401
402
402
403
403
405
406
407
407
408
408
408
408
409
409
411
Table of Contents
13
1 Introduction
- Laboratory Solutions Powered by LabX 2014 LabX 2014 supports the following instruments from METTLER TOLEDO:
● Excellence balances, XP, XS, XPE, XSE
● Quantos, automatic dosing systems
● Titration Excellence T50, T70 and T90, Compact Titration G20, V20/V30 and C20/C30 titrators
● LiquiPhysics™ Excellence, density meter and refractometer
● Thermal Value Excellence, melting point systems
LabX 2014 allows you to safely manage all your methods, including performing calculations. LabX guides you
through the procedure and the creation of reports, which can be fully customized. You can perform day-to-day
tasks directly on the touchscreen of the instruments, and you are guided step-by-step through the procedures.
Introduction
15
2 Navigation and Operation
An important element in the LabX user interface is the ribbon bar. The tabs on the ribbon bar show the most rel
evant commands for the different task areas in the applications. In this way, different commands are displayed
depending on which element is currently selected. When an object is displayed in the folder list, the ribbon bar
contains different commands to those displayed if a related object is selected in the table view.
Like the ribbon bar, a context menu contains commands. The commands in the context menu vary depending
on the object currently selected so that only relevant commands are available. Right-click on the desired object
in the table view or folder list.
For example, the first time you click on the folder for methods, the commands for methods are displayed on the
ribbon. The second time you click on the folder for methods, the commands for folder functions are shown in
the ribbon. To return to the commands for methods, click in the table view area. This behavior applies for all
table views.
16
1
Designation
LabX Button
2
Ribbon bar
3
Folder list
4
5
Navigation pane
Status bar
6
Reading pane
7
Context menu
8
Table view
Navigation and Operation
Description
Under this button you will find various menu options for the general settings
and for activating the software.
Commands are shown in the ribbon bar as control elements. Related groups
of commands are organized into tabs. Different tabs and commands are
contextually displayed based on the currently selected object.
Different groups of folder objects are displayed here depending on the
workspace selected in the navigation pane.
Folders shown are displayed depending on the workspace you select here.
The status bar displays the status of the connection, logged-in users and
number of clients. Connected instruments are also counted as clients.
The contents of the object selected in the folder list are displayed in the read
ing pane.
Like the ribbon bar, a context menu (right-click) contains commands. The
commands in the context menu vary depending on the object currently
selected so that only relevant commands are available.
When you select an object in the folder list, the contents are displayed in
table format.
9
Designation
Shortcuts
10
Links
11
Help
Description
This area displays all the shortcuts for the current user. These shortcuts are
each assigned to an instrument.
Various objects are available as links, which are structured according to top
ic. Links are direct jumps to predefined search folders. The filters can be
edited (and renamed), but cannot be deleted.
The context-sensitive help is accessed via the question mark in the upper
right-hand corner of the title bar or by using the Help button in dialog boxes.
Find further information on this topic in the LabX E-Learning Tutorial.
2.1 Login screen
The login dialog appears when LabX is started.
On a newly installed system, the standard administrator "PredefinedUser" is created and shown under User
Name.
– Without entering a password, click on [OK].
- or 1 Enter your user name. If LabX has been configured to allow this, the most recent user names to have logged
in can be selected from the drop-down list.
2 Enter your password and click on [OK].
- or Fingerprint readers can be used for authentication as an alternative to password entry. When a fingerprint read
er is active, this is indicated by a fingerprint icon at the time of log-in.
– Place the preferred finger on the fingerprint reader.
If the fingerprint is recognized, the relevant user is authenticated in the same way as if the user had entered
a user name and password.
See also
● Registering fingerprints (page 29)
17
2.2 Home - Ribbon bar
Parameter
Objects
Explanation
Add anytime new objects to the system. Functions available:
● New Method
● New Instrument
● New User
● New Role
Window Layout
Organize the window layout:
● Vertical Layout: To arrange the window panes vertically.
● Horizontal Layout: To arrange the window panes horizontally.
● Hide Preview: To hide the preview window.
Security
Help
Lock Screen: If choosen, LabX is locked on this PC and cannot be used by other
users.
● Quick Start: Will open the quick start window.
● E-Learning: Shortcut to the LabX e-learning videos. These videos briefly and
simply explain a number of LabX functions and options.
LabX Licensing
Activation: To open the activation wizard.
See also
● Account policies (page 31)
2.3 Quick start window
By default, the Quick Start window is displayed whenever LabX is started unless you check the option for it not
to be shown at startup. If you want this window to be displayed again, proceed as follows.
– Click on the LabX button and select [Quick Start]. The window opens.
This window contains several buttons which allow fast access to central functions.
Objects
Activation
18
Explanation
Shortcut to the License Manager. The License Manager is where you manage all
types of license keys, regardless of whether they are edition licenses, instrument
licenses or option licenses. After any change to the licenses, it will be necessary
to restart the system.
Objects
New Instrument
New Method
E-Learning
Help
Explanation
Shortcut for the direct addition of a new instrument into LabX. In order to establish
a connection, instruments must be connected to the computer and the connection
parameters must be known and set correctly.
Shortcut for the direct creation of a new method in LabX. In order to conduct an
analysis using an instrument, you need a method. A method represents the pro
gram for conducting the analysis. A method function is usually comprised of sev
eral sub-steps, which consist of parameters with selected values.
Shortcut to the LabX e-learning videos. These videos briefly and simply explain a
number of LabX functions and options.
Shortcut to LabX Help. The context-sensitive Help integrated in LabX provides a
complete description of all components and modules, and a detailed description
of all method functions and parameters.
See also
● Activation (page 27)
19
2.4 Versioned objects
For objects that are managed in versions, a new version is created every time you save. The history can be dis
played at any time, and older versions can be restored.
For example, a method can be created and undergo the release process. The released method is displayed on
instruments and used to execute tasks. This method can be further developed and refined, but the released ver
sion can still be used for measurements. The latest version does not become the released version until it is
released again. The following objects are "versioned objects":
● Methods
● Weights
● Report Templates
● Products
● Value Tables
Steps
Approval
Release
Delete
Explanation
A signing procedure can be defined for the approval of a versioned object. If no
signing procedure is defined, this step is skipped.
Versioned objects must be released before they can be used. By default, the
release is granted automatically by auto-release. However, this setting can be
deactivated.
A signing procedure can also be defined for deleting a versioned object. The
object is not deleted until all signatures have been obtained.
View History
1 Right-click on the desired version of the object in the table view, and choose [Old Versions] from the con
text menu. The corresponding dialog is opened.
2 Select a version from the list and choose the desired action.
If you choose Recover Version, an editor window is opened. This object is not saved as a new version until
you choose Save and Close.
If you choose View Version, an editor window is opened but you cannot edit or save the version.
Note
● Depending on the settings selected, the method must undergo a signature and release process.
● The restored version becomes the new, current version. The previous version can be seen in the version his
tory and can be restored if necessary.
See also
● Approving and releasing (page 20)
● Signature and release policies (page 32)
2.5 Approving and releasing
Signature and Release Policies
These policies control the use of signatures and the release of objects such as methods, products or report tem
plates.
Approve
A signing procedure can be defined for the approval of a versioned object. If this is the case, the object cannot
be released until all signatures have been obtained.
If this is the case, the object cannot be released until all signatures have been obtained. If the object is edited
and hence a new version is generated, this new version does not have any signatures.
These examples refer to methods, but can also be transferred to other versioned objects.
20
Approve Method
Navigation: Analysis > Methods
A method must be selected in the table view.
1 Select [Approve Method] in the ribbon bar. The corresponding dialog is opened.
2 Complete the displayed fields and click on [Sign].
If two signatures are required, the second is usually performed by a different person in an additional step.
The second signature can be performed immediately after the first, by the second person entering their user
data. However, the signing procedure can also be continued at a later time or on a different LabX Client. In this
case, the procedure is interrupted after the first signing step. If the object requiring a signature is a method, for
example, the method can be selected and approved on any LabX Client. You are then prompted to enter the
second signature.
Release and Auto release
Only a released object can be used productively. By default, auto-release is activated and the object is auto
matically released by the system as soon as possible.
If no approval is defined, the object is released by the system immediately when it is saved. If an approval is
required, the object is released as soon as the signing procedure has been completed.
If automatic release is switched off, the object must be released in an additional manual step. This means that
it is possible to edit the object without affecting day-to-day business and without using a signing procedure.
The object can also be released manually after approval. This means that the time of the signature is indepen
dent of the time of the actual implementation of the new version.
Release Method
A method must be selected in the table view. If a signing procedure has been defined for the object, the
object must be approved.
– Select [Release Method] in the ribbon bar.
The method is released.
See also
2.6 Displaying signatures
Signature and Release Policies
These policies control the use of signatures and the release of objects such as methods, products or report tem
plates.
With the exception of methods, report templates and sets of results, signatures obtained are visible in the read
ing pane when you select a suitable object in the table view. Signatures are displayed in two categories:
"Approval" and "Deletion".
The signatures obtained are visible for all of the relevant objects when you set them to be displayed via the
command Open read-only.
See also
21
2.7 Managing folders
Ribbon bar: Folders > Editing
For improved manageability, you can create several folders and subfolders for methods, products, sample
series, instruments and other objects. Objects and folders can be repositioned by dragging. Folders can be
renamed or deleted.
2.8 Customizing table views
When you select an object in the folder list, the contents are displayed in table format. You can select multiple
objects at a time. To do this, hold the Shift key and click on an object to select a range of objects or hold the
Ctrl key and click on the individual objects you wish to select.
If you right-click an object in the tree view, a context menu opens and displays a list of commands available for
selection.
1
2
3
4
22
Designation
Explanation
Title bar with quick search Specifies which objects are displayed. If you enter a search string, only
those objects are displayed whose name contains the search string.
Groups toolbar
To create groups in the list, you can drag a column header from the
title bar to the Groups toolbar. This function is cascadable; to enable
this, simply drag another element onto the Groups toolbar.
To undo the grouping, drag the items back to any point in the title bar.
Column header
In the column header, you can change the column width. When you
click on a column header, the column is sorted according to the
selected column. If you click on the column header again, the sort
order is reversed. You can remove a column by dragging a header out
of the column header.
Column selection
Right-click on the column header and choose [Column Chooser] to
display the list of available columns.
To add columns, you can drag items out of the window to any point in
the title bar.
5
Designation
Table view
6
Quick search
Explanation
When you select an object in the folder list, the contents are displayed
in table format. The table is displayed based on the selected settings
for sort order, grouping, and search criteria.
● Select [Latest] from the drop-down list. All methods are displayed
regardless of whether they have released status or not.
● Select [Released] from the drop-down list. Only the method ver
sions that have released status are displayed.
2.9 Managing messages
There are various groups of objects that can trigger messages.
For each of these groups, you can define which users or roles are to receive messages. Depending on the
group, various predefined messages are displayed. These settings are applicable globally to all objects. In
addition to these groups, the Notify method function can display individual messages.
Groups
Users
Instruments
Weights
Reference Substances
Messages
If the user has made too many login attempts and the account has been disabled.
These are messages of high importance that are displayed in red and flash.
When the service date has arrived. For changes to software or firmware versions.
On expiry of the certificate. (Only in conjunction with Excellence balance).
When the expiry date has arrived. (Only in conjunction with Thermal Values).
Resources
When the expiry date has arrived. (Only for the instrument type "Titration").
In the user management, you can specify how individual users should be informed; via e-mail or via.Mes
sages.
See also
● Notify (page 154)
● Managing users (page 365)
● E-Mail settings (page 32)
2.9.1 Defining messages
Defining a message
A corresponding group must be highlighted in the navigation tree.
- Instruments
- Weights
- Reference Substances
- Resources
- Users
1 Select [Set Messages] in the ribbon bar. An editor window is opened.
2 Enable or disable the options according to your requirements, and save the data.
Parameter
Enable Message
Message
Scheduled
Days in advance
Users to remind
Roles to remind
Explanation
Define whether messages are sent for objects of this type.
You can also define an additional text to be displayed in addition to the system
message.
Highlighting this option enables you to enter the number of days.
(Only in conjunction with weights.)
The message is displayed this number of days in advance.
(Only in conjunction with weights and if Scheduled = Yes is selected.)
Defines the users for the assignment.
In addition to users, you can also assign roles. The assignment is performed
cumulatively.
23
sages.
See also
2.9.2 Displaying messages
Messages generated by the system and methods are either displayed to the corresponding users in LabX under
Messages or sent to them via e-mail.
Navigation: Analysis > Messages or Quick Links > My Messages
– Select the required message in the table view.
The detailed message is displayed in the reading pane.
sages.
See also
● Managing messages (page 23)
2.10 Inserting hyperlinks
In the Comment boxes, it is possible to define hyperlink targets. By creating these links, you can link to files on
a particular Intranet/Internet page or a network server in your organization.
1 Highlight the desired text in a Comment box.
2 Right-click on the highlighted text and select Insert hyperlink from the context menu.
3 Enter the hyperlink. Example:
- C:\Documents and Settings\Administrator ...
- http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/Density
The hyperlink is active and is displayed in underlined blue text. To open the link, press and hold the Ctrl key
and click on the link.
2.11 Inserting symbols
In comment or text boxes, it is possible to insert numbers in superscript or subscript and some symbols like
"µ".
1 In a text box, place the insertion point in the desired location.
2 Click [Insert Symbol] in the ribbon bar and choose the desired element from the dialog.
The symbol is inserted in the desired location.
24
2.12 Zooming options
Note that scrolling and/or zooming is not available for all diagram types.
Rescaling and zooming the presentation
To zoom in or out of a chart's diagram, do one of the following.
Action
Press [SHIFT] and
click the diagram.
Press [ALT] and
click the diagram.
Press [SHIFT] and
select a region on
the diagram.
Effect
After pressing the SHIFT key, the mouse pointer is changed to . Then, move the
mouse pointer to the chart region to be zoomed, and click the left mouse button (hold
ing the SHIFT key).The chart's diagram is zoomed in by 3 times.
After pressing the ALT key, the mouse pointer is changed to . Then, move the mouse
pointer to the region to be zoomed out, and click the left mouse button (holding the ALT
key).The chart's diagram is zoomed out by 3 times.
After an end-user presses the SHIFT key and the mouse pointer is changed to , select
a region on a chart using the left mouse button.
Then, after releasing the left mouse button, a chart is zoomed into the bounds of the
selected region on a diagram.
Use [CTRL] with the Pressing and holding the CTRL key while pressing the "+" key, a chart's diagram is
[+] or [-] keys.
zoomed in by 20 percent from the current axes ranges.
Pressing and holding the the CTRL key while pressing the "-" key, a chart's diagram is
zoomed out by 20 percent from the current axes ranges.
Use the mouse
wheel.
Use [CTRL] + [Z]
combination.
Scrolling the mouse wheel to zoom in and out of a chart's diagram.
Pressing the CTRL + Z keys returns the previous zoom state of a chart's diagram. Note
All subsequent operations of a similar kind (for instance, multiple "zoom in" opera
tions) are considered as a single transaction. Pressing CTRL + Z returns the zoom state
which existed before the first zoom operation in a zoom series.
Scrolling a Chart
Scrolling can be enabled for an axis, when a diagram is zoomed in, or when the axis visible range is reduced.
Action
Hold down the left
mouse button, and
drag it.
Use axes' scroll
bars.
Use [CTRL] + Arrow
keys [LEFT], [UP],
[RIGHT] or
[DOWN].
Effect
After holding down the left mouse button, the mouse pointer is changed from
to .
Then, move the mouse pointer holding the left mouse button, and a chart's diagram is
scrolled in the same direction as the mouse pointer is moved.
Click a scrollbar arrow, click the scrollbar near the thumb, or drag the thumb and move
it. In this instance, a chart's diagram is scrolled.
● Pressing CTRL + LEFT, a chart's diagram is moved to the left.
● Pressing CTRL + UP, a chart's diagram is moved up.
● Pressing CTRL + RIGHT, a chart's diagram is moved to the right.
● Pressing CTRL + DOWN, a chart's diagram is moved down.
2.13 Supported languages
LabX and connectable instruments sometimes do not support the same languages for the user interface. When
an instrument is connected, the user interface language on the connected instrument is changed to the lan
guage currently installed on the LabX installation.
Excellence instruments supported
Language
English
LabX
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
•
•
•
25
26
Language
LabX
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
Thermal Val
ues
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese
Russian 2)
Chinese
Japanese
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1)
If the language of the LabX installation is not available on the instrument, individual texts will be displayed on the instrument in Eng
lish.
2)
With a Russian installation of LabX, Russian keyboards are displayed on the balances for inputting text. Since not all characters can
be input using these keyboards, this must be taken into consideration when specifying user names and passwords on the PC.
3 Options and Settings
3.1 LabX licensing
For each system you will need a LabX "Edition license key" and for each instrument an "Instrument license".
Both an edition license key and an instrument license key are included in the scope of delivery of the LabX. In
addition, it is possible to purchase licenses for optional features, e.g. Report Designer, depending on the con
figuration. If you wish to connect several instruments to LabX, you will require additional instrument licenses.
You can purchase the instrument licenses from your local METTLER TOLEDO representative.
Reactivation is required if you add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire serv
er. The procedure for reactivation is similar to activation, but without the steps required for creating a new user
on the activation portal.
3.1.1 License manager
The License Manager is where you manage all types of license key, regardless of whether they are edition
licenses, instrument licenses or option licenses. The list showing all installed licenses ensures that you always
have an overview of the system. The status informs you whether the system is active or when this period will
expire. From this screen, you are also able to go directly to the activation feature.
In license options, you can deactivate specific options or modules.
Navigation: LabX > LabX Licensing
Adding a license
1 Follow the navigation and select [License Manager]. The relevant dialog appears.
2 Click on [Add License] and then enter the relevant license number.
After any change to the licenses, it will be necessary to restart the PC.
See also
● License options (page 27)
3.1.2 License options
The license keys installed determine which option and edition functions are available. In the license options you
can deactivate specific options or editions.
For example, the user management feature is available as standard in LabX Server Edition version, but it can
be deactivated across the entire system if desired. If you uncheck the relevant checkbox, this function will no
longer be available in the clients.
1 Follow the navigation and select [License Options]. The relevant dialog appears.
2 Activate or deactivate the option licenses and instrument licenses according to your requirements.
After any change to the licenses, it will be necessary to restart the PC.
See also
● LabX licensing (page 27)
3.1.3 Activation
A non-activated version of LabX will only run for 45 days. 5 days before this period expires, you will be
prompted to activate LabX each time you start LabX. Once this period has expired, you will be prompted to acti
vate the application the next time you attempt to start LabX. It will no longer be possible to start LabX until you
have activated it.
Options and Settings
27
Reactivation is required if you add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire serv
er. The procedure for reactivation is similar to activation, but without the steps required for creating a new user
on the activation portal.
3.1.3.1 Online activation
Before you activate your system, make sure that all licenses are registered. Activation is required whenever you
add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire server.
For online activation, the PC must be connected directly to the Internet.
1 Click on the LabX button and select LabX Licensing > Activation. The LabX activation wizard appears.
2 Under Activation type choose Direct (internet connection required).
3 Follow the instructions on the screen.
LabX is activated.
See also
● License manager (page 27)
● Offline activation (page 28)
3.1.3.2 Offline activation
Before you activate your system, make sure that all licenses are registered. Activation is required whenever you
add or remove licenses or if you replace hardware components or the entire server.
Select this method of activation if you have no direct link to the Internet.
1 Click on the LabX button and select LabX Licensing > Activation. The LabX activation wizard appears.
2 Under Activation type select Manual (using activation key and license file) and click on [Next].
3 Click on [Save License Key File] and enter the export path, e.g. to a USB stick. Then click on [Next].
4 Take the USB stick to another PC with Internet access.
The following steps are performed on a PC with Internet access.
1 In the web browser's address bar, enter http://www.mt.com/activate-labx to go to the "Software Activation
Portal".
2 Click on New user to create a new user. Enter a user name and a valid e-mail address. You will then
receive your login information and a generated password via e-mail.
3 Click on the link in the e-mail and enter the generated password in the Login browser window that is dis
played. Then complete your profile data.
4 Click on Activation, enter the path for the license key file and click on Submit to upload.
5 Complete the fields in the Instruments tab and save the details. In the system overview tab, you can now
download the activation key file.
6 Please enter all the details for your installed system under My systems. These will be relevant for software
updates.
7 Take the USB stick back to the PC on which you installed LabX.
The following steps are performed on the PC with LabX installed on it.
– Click on [Import Activation Key File] and enter the import path for the downloaded activation key file. Then
click on [Finish].
LabX is activated.
28
See also
● License manager (page 27)
3.2 User settings
The user settings apply to the user currently logged into LabX. These settings also apply to other workstations.
3.2.1 Changing your own password
All users can change their passwords. Administrators can also change or enter passwords under User manage
ment.
Navigation: LabX > User Identification
1 Log on to LabX with the required user.
2 Follow the navigation and select [Change Password]. The relevant dialog appears.
3 Enter your old password in the Current password box.
4 Enter the new password in the New password box and again to confirm in the Confirm new password box.
5 Click the [OK] button to confirm your entries.
The password has been changed.
3.2.2 Registering fingerprints
Fingerprint readers can be used for authentication as an alternative to password entry. In contrast to a conven
tional login with a user name and password, the user simply places a finger on the fingerprint reader. If the fin
gerprint is recognized, the relevant user is authenticated in the same way as if they had entered a user name
and password.
When a fingerprint reader is active, this is indicated by a fingerprint icon during the following actions.
● Logging on to LabX
● Releasing a screen lock
● Signing various objects
To register fingerprints, a fingerprint reader must be connected to the PC and a driver must be installed on
the PC.
In addition, the user management with password must be fully activated for all users first so that fingerprints
can be registered.
2 Follow the navigation and select [Register Fingerprint]. The relevant dialog appears.
3 Place the preferred finger on the fingerprint reader and repeat the step as prompted.
4 Complete the action by entering your password.
The fingerprint has been registered.
Note
● A PC driver for the fingerprint reader can be found on the LabX installation DVD, in the directory “Drivers/Fin
gerprint Reader”.
● Fingerprint readers can also be operated in conjunction with LiquiPhysics instruments, but can be used only
for the log-in procedure on LabX. In order to do this, the fingerprint reader must have been activated on the
instrument. Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
Fingerprints are always registered on a PC as described above.
3.2.3 Deleting fingerprints
29
2 Follow the navigation and select [Remove Fingerprint].
The fingerprint has been deleted.
3.3 Settings
These global settings apply to all LabX users on all workstations.
3.3.1 Tag settings
Tags can be used for grouping together different objects and thereby improving transparency. A tag consists of
a selectable color and freely definable text.
Tags are displayed in the table view and the reading pane. Multiple tags can be assigned to one object. Tags
are used for the following objects:
● Methods
● Products
● Sample Series
● Tasks
● Resources
● Report Templates
● Results (at sample level, i.e. all results that belong to the same sample receive the same tags)
● Reports
● User
Navigation: LabX > Options and Settings
Editing tags
1 Follow the navigation and select [Tag Settings]. The Tag Editor window opens.
2 Click on [New] to add a new tag.
- or Modify an existing tag.
3 In the Editor window, you can edit the color and the name of tags.
Applying tags
The commands for assigning tags to objects are found in the Edit group in the ribbon bar.
This example refers to a method.
1 Tag the required object in the table view (multiple selection is possible).
2 Click on [Tag...] in the ribbon bar.
3 Select the tag to be assigned or removed from the list.
- or Select Tag... > [Tag Settings]. In the Editor window, you can edit the tags and at the same time assign
them to an object.
3.3.2 Label settings
30
Labels are headers for freely definable fields, in which you can enter additional information for the properties of
instruments, products, and sample series. A maximum of 6 additional fields can be defined and assigned text
labels. If labels are used for instruments, for example, the location can be entered.
1 Follow the navigation and select [Label Settings]. The Label Editor is opened.
2 Select an object in the left-hand column.
3 Activate the required number of fields, enter a field label for each one, and save the data.
The added fields are now available for the corresponding objects.
3.3.3 Account policies
Account policies are a combination of settings governing password and account lockout policies. Password
policies are a more effective way to secure most environments because they can impose complex passwords
and periodic password changes. The account lockout policy makes it possible to deactivate an account auto
matically after a sequence of failed login attempts.
Please note that if the LabX system is used in a GxP-regulated environment, the settings you select must com
ply with the regulations of the relevant authorities.
– Follow the navigation and select [Edit Account Policies]. The relevant dialog appears.
You can edit the settings according to your requirements.
Parameter
Login
Password
Password Expiration
Password Exclusion
Screen Lock
Explanation
Define the login behavior here.
Define password security settings here.
Define the settings for expiration of passwords here.
Here, you can define words or strings that are not permitted to be used in
passwords.
Here, you can define whether the screen should be locked after a defined
period.
Password complexity required *
* must include at least 3 of these 5 items: Lowercase characters, uppercase characters, digits, nonalphanumeric symbols, other Unicode characters.
Character
Lower case
Upper case
Digits
Non-alphanumeric characters
Other Unicode characters
Explanation
Normal lower case letters from the Latin character set.
Normal upper case letters from the Latin character set.
Characters used for representing numbers.
Special characters, for example: / * _ ( &
Use of characters, for example from Asian or Cyrillic alphabets.
31
3.3.4 Signature and release policies
Signing guidelines can be defined for different processes. You can define the signatures needed in order for
processes to be executed.
These settings apply to all user accounts.
● Approval of methods, reports, result sets, report templates, weights, value tables, etc.
● Deletion of methods, report templates, weights, etc.
● Revocation of an instrument block.
– Follow the navigation and select [Edit Signature and Release Policies]. The relevant dialog appears.
Parameter
Signature Policies
Review / Approve
Predefined Signature
Comments
Auto Release Policies
Explanation
Select the type of signature guideline. Two types are available: one simple guide
line with a single signature, and a more complex guideline requiring two signa
tures (Review / Approve). It is possible to configure the signature phases.
Here, you can specify the roles for the signing step and define the options for the
comments.
Here, you can specify a series of comments of which you can select one for each
of the signature phases, provided predefined comments are permitted.
Here, you can define the objects for which an automated release should take
place. “Auto-release” takes place as soon as the selected signing steps have been
completed. If no signature policies for the approval have been selected, the
release takes place immediately after saving.
See also
● Approving and releasing (page 20)
3.3.5 E-Mail settings
You use these settings to define which e-mail server is used for sending messages. See also Managing mes
sages (page 23) for this purpose.
These settings apply to all user accounts.
– Follow the navigation and select [E-Mail Settings]. The relevant dialog appears.
Parameter
Explanation
User Authentication
Authentication
Select the type of login. Windows login refers to the login under
type
which the LabX server component is running.
User Name
The user's login name.
(Only if Authentication type = Mail server login is selected.)
Password
The user's password.
Domain
Name of the domain.
Settings Validation
Test e-mail
Address to which a test e-mail should be sent.
address
SMTP Mail Server
Server name
Server name of the e-mail server.
Server port
E-mail server port.
32
Value range
Anonymous | Mail
server login | Windows
login
-
-
-
Parameter
Use SSL
Connection
timeout [s]
E-Mail Header
Sender e-mail
address
Explanation
Defines whether e-mails are sent in encrypted format.
Specifies the maximum time after which the connection process
is canceled.
Value range
Yes | No
1 … 600
Defines the e-mail address of the sender
-
3.3.6 Color settings for highlighting results
With these settings, you can define the color in which results should be displayed in the table view. Text and
background colors are displayed differently, depending on the status of the results and the tolerance ranges.
1 Follow the navigation and select [Result Highlighting Color Settings]. The Editor is opened.
2 Click on a color entry and select a color from the desired color system.
The color names are carried over from the color system when you make your selection. By default, RGB val
ues are always displayed when the editor opens.
Parameter
Result State Uncertain
Result State Not OK
Tolerance Range
Tolerance Range Unde
fined
Explanation
A parameter that is needed for the calculation has the Indeterminate status. For
example, as a result of overloading of a particular load cell.
A parameter that is needed for the calculation has the Not OK status. For example,
due to division by zero.
Depending on the tolerance ranges, T1 to T3 are assigned different colors.
If the tolerance ranges have not been defined, this color template will be applied.
3.3.7 Overall result state settings
Depending on the LabX module and the instrument type, the available options are different.
With these settings, you can control the status (Overall result state) of results, dependent on individual result
validations (Data markings). This describes the behavior when individual validation errors occur.
1 Follow the navigation and select [Overall Result State Settings]. The Editor is opened.
2 Assign a status to each of the annotations.
The status of results will be shown accordingly.
Parameter
OK
Uncertain
Not OK
Validation error behavior
Will be set, even if the validation is violated.
Will be set if the validation is violated.
Will be set if the validation is violated.
See also
● Data markings (page 397)
3.3.8 Page setup
With these settings, you define the header and footer fields and page size of general printings. These setting do
not apply for reports defined in Report Templates.
1 Follow the navigation and select [Page Setup]. The Editor is opened.
33
2 Click on the displayed positions on the layout and select the required items form the drop-down list.
Available items
Parameter
None
Document title
Logo image
Creation date
Page numbers
User Name
Explanation
No information is printed on the specified location.
The titles of the documents are printed on the specified location.
The LabX logo is printed on the specified location.
The creation dates are printed on the specified location.
Page numbers are printed on the specified location.
The user names are printed on the specified location.
Available ribbon bar functions
Parameter
Margins
Size
Explanation
Specify the size of the margins to improve the appearance of a printed report.
Under Custom Margins..., enter the width and height that you want.
Select the size of paper that you want from the list.
3.3.9 Balance settings
LabX is able to manage up to 50 MinWeigh standards, which are mapped to the MinWeigh methods of each
balance. The MinWeigh standards used in LabX are mapped to the standards for the balances in the Properties
for each balance with MinWeigh activated. You should, therefore, define the necessary MinWeigh standards in
LabX first before starting the mapping process. If you wish balancing to be carried out based on MinWeigh
standards, you must include an "Inspection and settings (page 181)" method function in the method and
select "Activate MinWeigh" in the method.
3.3.10 Titration settings
Define here which balance may connect to a titrator.
1 Follow the navigation and select [Titration settings]. The relevant dialog appears, displaying all available
balances.
2 Select the balances to be used with titrators.
3 Tap the button in the upper right corner to define the balance settings in titration mode (for example the dis
play readability).
The selected balances now display a Titration button on the homescreen.
See also
● Weighing of titration samples (page 38)
3.3.11 Thermal Values settings
These settings apply to all Thermal Values instruments.
– Follow the navigation and select [Thermal Values Settings]. The relevant dialog appears.
Parameter
Instrument Settings
34
Explanation
Here you can define the global settings for the displayed temperature unit and the
beeps.
Parameter
Videos
Explanation
It may be necessary to limit the number of saved videos in order to limit the size
of the database. A video pair occupies around 1.3 MB minumum of memory
capacity in the database.
If you have selected the "Limit video storage" option and the defined number of
videos is reached, the oldest video is deleted. The amount of memory capacity
used in the database will no longer increase when videos are saved.
35
4 Operating Instruments
4.1 Balances
4.1.1 Configuring the Ethernet Interface
To enable communication between LabX and instruments, the appropriate settings in the instruments must cor
respond with the settings in LabX.
LabX synchronizes the date and time on the instruments with the LabX Server each time a connection is made
and each time a task is started. When an instrument is connected, the user interface language on the connect
ed instrument is changed to the language currently installed on the LabX installation.
Defining Ethernet options
1 To call up the system settings, press the
displayed.
key and then the [System] button. The System window will be
2 Tap on [Peripherals]. The Peripherals window will be displayed.
3 Under LabX choose Ethernet Option > Define. We recommend that you use the default parameters.
Parameter
Communication mode
Remote Host Address
Remote Host Port Number
* Local Server Port Number
End of Line
Server only
<CR><LF>
* Port 8014 is proposed by default. This port number must be entered when adding instruments in LabX.
Making global settings
If the IP address of the instrument is obtained via DHCP, make sure that IP address reservation is enabled.
Please consult your IT administrator for IP address reservations.
displayed.
2 Click on [Option] to access the global settings of the Ethernet interface.
3 In coordination with your IT administrator, configure the parameters and save the setting.
4 On the home screen, tap on [Online].
Note
● A default gateway entry is also required if the instrument is not being operated in the same subnet as LabX.
Ensure the configuration’s default gateway address is defined in the same subnet as the IP address.
4.1.2 Configuring the serial interface
displayed.
3 Under LabX choose RS232 built-in > Define. We recommend that you use the default parameters.
4 Exit the settings and click on [Online] on the home screen.
Default parameters
Baud rate
Bit/Parity
36
9600
8 / none
Handshake
End of line
Character set
Xon/Xoff
<CR><LF>
Ansi/Win
4.1.3 Operating the balance
4.1.3.1 Switching on the balance and logging in
Switching on
1 Briefly press the [On/Off] button. A short test is executed.
2 Switch to the LabX mode. To do this tap on LabX [Online].
The connection to LabX is established.
Log on with displayed user
1 In the Login window tap on [Password] and enter the pass
word.
2 Next, select [Login].
Select a user and log on to the system
1 In the Login window tap, on the users displayed.
The list of recent logged-in users is displayed only if your
system is configured accordingly.
2 Select a user from the list,
- or press on the keyboard symbol and enter a user name recog
nized by the system.
3 The Login dialog is displayed again.
4 Click on [Password] to enter the password for the user dis
played and then select [Login].
37
4.1.3.2 The homescreen
The home screen displays various information. The LabX icon
indicates that the balance is in LabX mode. The current user is
also displayed.
The lower screen area contains shortcuts to methods, products
and sample series and two buttons for listing analyses and
tasks. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.
4.1.3.3 Selecting analysis
1 On the home screen, tap on [Analysis]. The folder containing
the methods, products and sample series is displayed.
2 Click on [Methods]. A list is displayed containing all meth
ods with folder structures similar to the list in LabX.
To access one folder higher, tap on C.
Selecting methods
1 On the Analysis screen, tap on [Methods]. A list is displayed
containing all methods, with folder structures similar to the
list in LabX.
2 Click on a method to start it.
After a method has been started, it is included in the list of tasks.
To go up to the parent folder, tap on the folder symbol at the top
right.
4.1.3.4 Weighing of titration samples
If a balance is defined to be used for titrators, an additional but
ton Titration is displayed.
1 Tap [Titration] on the homescreen.
All created or running titration tasks are shown. Tap the
button in the upper right corner to define the balance set
tings in titration mode (for example the display readabili
ty).
2 Tap the task for which you want to weigh the samples.
3 For running tasks you are requested to weigh the current
sample.
- or For created or waiting tasks choose one of the samples from
the list.
38
See also
● Titration settings (page 34)
4.1.3.5 Editing tasks
The task list can be accessed only if at least one task is
active.
1 On the home screen, tap on [Tasks]. The system displays a
list of all tasks for this balance.
2 Tap on the task that you want to edit.
The statuses shown in the example are Paused and Waiting.
4.1.3.6 Logging out and locking the screen
– On the home screen, tap on [Exit]. A selection is displayed.
● Choose Logout to log the current user out so that another
user may login.
● If you chooseLock Screen, the balance is blocked for other
users.
● Choose Offline to disconnect the balance from LabX and
operate it independently of LabX.
4.1.4 Adding peripheral devices
One single peripheral device can be operated on one balance. In this case, the desired interface is configured in
the settings of the balance itself. It is possible to select either RS232 or Ethernet interface, depending upon
which of these interfaces is already in use for LabX. To operate a peripheral device on a balance, you need an
additional interface option.
displayed.
2 Select Peripherals > LabX Controlled Device> RS232 built-in / Ethernet Option > Define.
3 Set the appropriate parameters.
4.2 Quantos
4.2.1 Configuring the interfaces
Quantos is operated via two Ethernet interfaces. One interface is located in the balance and is used to commu
nicate with LabX. The second interface is located in the Quantos Server that controls the communication
between LabX and the sample changer. You will find details about the Quantos Server settings in the documen
tation provided with the server.
39
Defining Ethernet options
displayed.
Parameter
Communication mode
Remote Host Address
Remote Host Port Number
* Local Server Port Number
End of Line
Server only
<CR><LF>
* Port 8014 is proposed by default. This port number must be entered when adding instruments in LabX.
Making global settings
displayed.
* No specific entries are recommended, since these settings depend on your IT infrastructure.
Note
4.2.2 Operating Quantos
4.2.2.1 Switching on Quantos and logging in
Switching on
1 Briefly press the [On/Off] button. A short test is executed.
2 Switch to the LabX mode. To do this tap on LabX [Online].
The connection to LabX is established.
Log on with displayed user
1 In the Login window tap on [Password] and enter the pass
word.
2 Next, select [Login].
40
1 In the Login window tap, on the users displayed.
The list of recent logged-in users is displayed only if your
system is configured accordingly.
2 Select a user from the list,
- or press on the keyboard symbol and enter a user name recog
nized by the system.
3 The Login dialog is displayed again.
Elements on the home screen
The home screen displays a variety of information. The LabX
symbol indicates that the instrument is in LabX mode, and the
current user is also displayed.
The lower screen area contains shortcuts to methods, products
and sample series and two buttons for listing analyses and
tasks. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.
Selecting analyses
– On the home screen, tap on [Analysis]. The window with
methods, products, sample series and manual operations is
displayed.
You can go to the higher level window with C.
Selecting methods
1 In the Analysis window tap on [Methods]. A list is displayed
list in LabX.
To go to the higher level folder, tap on the folder symbol at the
top right.
41
Editing tasks
The task list can be accessed only if at least one task is
active.
1 On the home screen, tap on [Tasks]. The system displays a
list of all tasks for this balance.
2 Click on the task that you want to edit.
The statuses shown in the example are Paused and Waiting.
Logging off and locking the screen
● Choose [Logout] to log the current user out so that another
user may login.
● If you choose [Lock Screen], the terminal is blocked for other
users.
● Choose [Offline] to disconnect the balance from LabX and
operate it independently of LabX.
4.2.2.3 Manual operations
Navigation: Home > Analysis > Manual operations
With the help of the manual operations, you may call up various functions of the instrument that are indepen
dent of the immediate execution of an analysis but which for example, may be helpful during the preparation of
the samples.
Dosing head
Parameters
Lock head
SafePos
Read informa
tion
Tapper opera
tion
42
Description
The Lock head option locks the dosing head in the holder prior to
dosing and thus prevents it from being removed inadvertently.
The SafePos option moves the dosing head after dosing to a safe
position and prevents it from coming into contact with the vial.
This option reads information from the RFID chip of the dosing
head connected.
Each dosing head has an RFID memory chip (RFID = Radio Fre
quency IDentification), which can exchange data with the instru
ment. You can remove the dosing head and insert it into another
Quantos and the data is then available there immediately.
The tapping motor may be activated here.
The tapper improves the material flow if it is inadequate. Tapping
prior to dosing prevents large quantities of powder from falling
down during the dosing process and possibly lead to overdos
ing.
Intensity [%] defines the intensity of the tapper prior to dosing.
Duration defines the duration of tapping prior to dosing.
Values
Lock | Unlock
Move Down | Move Up
Dosing head informa
tion
10 … 100
1 … 30
See also
● Read / write dosing head (page 195)
Front doors
Parameters
Front door
Description
Values
This specifies whether the front doors are to be opened or closed. Open | Close
Sample changer
Item
Home
Next position
Previous position
Next rack
Previous rack
Absolute position (0..30)
Relative position
(-30..30)
Adjust offset
Description
The sample changer moves to the "Home" position.
The sample changer moves one position forward.
The sample changer moves one position backward.
The sample changer moves ahead to the next rack.
The sample changer moves behind to the previous rack.
Absolute position that is approached by the sample changer.
The number of steps moved by the sample changer.
After each turn the automatic sample changer moves somewhat behind. In this
manner, it ensures that the vial stands freely on the weighing pan in the dosing
position. The factory setting is adjusted to the optional bottle adapter and ensures
that the vials are positioned exactly in the center when using this setting. It may
be necessary to change this setting if you use new vials with a different diameter.
Follow the instructions on the terminal for adjustment.
4.3 Titration
4.3.1 Configuring the network settings
Naviagation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Network settings
Configure these settings if you have your instrument connected to a network.
1 In coordination with your IT administrator, configure the parameters.
2 Save the setting and restart the instrument.
Parameters
Obtain IP
address auto
matically
IP address
Subnet mask
Standard gate
way
Description
Indicates whether the IP address should be automatically
obtained over the network.
Values
Yes | No
If the IP is not to be automatically obtained, you can enter it here. 000.000.000.000 …
255.255.255.255
If you want to run the titrator on a local subnetwork, you can
000.000.000.000 …
define the subnet mask here that you want to use to link the sub 255.255.255.255
net's IP address.
This is where you can enter the address of the standard gateway 000.000.000.000 …
for communication between the various networks.
255.255.255.255
43
See also
● Configuring LabX connection (page 44)
4.3.2 Configuring LabX connection
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > PC settings
If the connection is made via a network, observe the setting in Network settings.
1 In coordination with your IT administrator, configure the parameters.
Parameters
Connect to LabX
at start-up
Connection type
Status
Port number
Description
If this parameter is activated, a connection to LabX will be estab
lished on startup.
Defines how the titrator is connected to the PC, either via the net
work connection or via the USB connection.
Information on the connection status from the instrument to LabX.
Defines the port for a network connection of the titrator to LabX.
Only appears for Connection type = Network.
Values
Yes | No
Network | USB
Connected | Discon
nected
1024…65535
See also
● Configuring the network settings (page 43)
4.3.3 Installing USB drivers
An additional device-specific USB driver must be installed on the PC to which an titrator is connected.
Installing the USB driver
Ensure that the instrument is not connected to a USB interface on the PC.
1 Open the directory Drivers/Titrator USB Driver on the LabX installation DVD.
2 Double-click on "TitrationUSBDriverInstaller.exe" to start the installation, and follow the instructions on the
screen.
The USB driver is installed.
Selecting the USB driver
The USB driver must be installed on the PC.
– Connect the instrument to the PC using a USB cable.
A message "Installing" appears in the notification area of the task bar.
After a short time the message "Installed successfully" appears in the notification area of the task bar.
The instrument can now be added to LabX.
4.3.4 Titrator settings
Navigation: Home > Setup
This section tells you how to set up the titrator in accordance with your requirements so that you can carry out
titration.
44
Chemicals
Titrants
Auxiliary reagents
Substances
Sensors
Pumps
Peripherals
Titration Stands
Auxiliary Instruments
Homogenizer
Liquid Handlers
Shortcuts
Screen
Beep
Keyboard
Solvent Control
Blank
Auxiliary values
Hardware
User settings
Global settings
Values
Note
● These settings are stored on the instrument and in LabX and can be managed on the instrument or on the
PC.
Expired Resources
Navigation: Home > Setup
Resources for which monitoring was selected in the settings can expire. Tap [Expired Resources] to open an
overview of all expired resources with the type, name and date of expiry of the respective resource.
4.3.4.1 Global settings
Navigation: Home > Setup > Global settings
In Global settings, you can make general settings on the titrator that apply for all users.
Settings
Analysis and resources
behavior
Solvent Control
Explanation
Settings for monitoring the expiration dates and life span of resources (determin
ing the actions of the titrator before, during and after the performance of an analy
sis). Settings for the response of the titrator when resources are deleted or when
PnP resources are identified.
Prompts the user to replace the solvent. For information on the process for replac
ing the solvent (Manual operation).
Note
PC.
See also
● Global settings - Titration (page 321)
4.3.4.1.1 Analysis and resources behavior
The settings that you make here relate to the sequence of the analysis of samples or series with the aid of meth
ods.
● You can define the actions of the titrator when started, during an analysis and afterward.
● You can also program the response of the titrator to the deletion of resources or when it identifies PnP
resources.
45
Note
PC.
Navigation: Setup > Global settings > Analysis and resources behavior
Analysis sequence settings
The analysis sequence settings can only be modified if no tasks are currently being performed by the titrator.
You can make the following settings that influence the sequence of an analysis.
Parameters
Show required
resources at
start
Show SOP
Description
Values
When an analysis is started a screen appears displaying all
Yes | No
resources required for the analysis and their status (available,
not-available, locked or in use). If an individual entry is selected
from this screen then the user receives additional information
about the respective resource.
However, if "no" is selected, then the required resources are still
checked when the analysis is started and if necessary, an appro
priate error message is issued.
If an SOP (standard operating procedure) has been defined in the Yes | No
Title method function then this will be displayed before the
method is started provided that "yes" has been selected.
Note
● If Show required resources at start and Show SOP parameters were set to "Yes" at the start of a job series,
all SOPs and subsequently all resources for the individual sample series must be confirmed before the job
series is started. In this way a job series can be performed after it has been started without any further inter
ruption.
LabX: Warning
when not con
nected
Confirm after a
completed rack
rotation
Show results
after analysis
If "yes" is selected then a warning is issued when the analysis is Yes | No
started if there is no connection to LabX.
This setting affects analyses that are to be performed on the sam Yes | No
ple changer and require more beakers than can be accommodat
ed on the rack of the sample changer.
If Yes has been selected for this parameter, a warning message
is issued after a complete revolution of the sample changer and
before a position is approached on the tray that has already been
titrated. This warning must be acknowledged by the user.
If a manual or external titration stand is being used, then the
Yes | No
results for a sample are automatically displayed after they have
been analyzed and must be acknowledged by the user before the
analysis can be continued. With Auto stand the results are dis
played for a certain period and are not to be confirmed.
The activated parameter is valid for the following functions:
Analysis: the results for a sample are shown
Calibration/Loop: The results of the calibration are shown
(slope, zero point)
Sensor test: The results of the test are shown (slope, zero point,
drift and sensor test OK / not OK)
Check local
printer connec
tion and wait
Print autom. KF
protocols
46
When selected, the availability of a printer is checked at the
beginning of the method.
If not selected and no printer is connected, the method function
Record is skipped. If a printer is connected, the method function
Record is executed even if this parameter is not selected.
Controls printouts for manual drift, concentration, and blank val
ue determinations.
Yes | No
Yes | No
Save results
Defines if date, time, user, Methods ID, sample ID, results, result To USB-Stick | No
unit per sample is saved in a file. If this parameter is activated
and the stick is not detected during the data writing process, you
can stop the process or you can plug in another USB-stick for the
data writing and to continue the method run.
Only for Check USB-Stick connection and wait = Yes.
Check USB-Stick If this parameter is activated, the presence of a USB - Stick is val Yes | No
connection and idated at the start of the analysis.
wait
Resources behavior
Use the following parameters to configure how the titrator responds to the deletion of resources and its response
to the automatic identification of PnP resources.
Information
when deleting
resources
Information
when recogniz
ing PnP
resources
Defines if a confirmation will be requested before a resource is
deleted.
Yes | No
Defines if a confirmation will be requested every time a PnP
resource is identified.
Yes | No
Action when exceeding usable life
If it is determined by the titrator that the expiration dates of a resource have been exceeded, then the titrator may
perform various actions.
Warning
Block
None
The user is warned that the resource's usable life has been exceeded and the raw results and
results determined with the respective resource will be labeled accordingly.
The user is notified that the usable life of the resource has been exceeded and it is no longer
possible to start the analysis with the affected resource. (Methods that result in renewal of
this resource can however still be started.)
If you select "none" then the analysis is started without message in spite of the exceeded
usable life. The expiry of the expiration date will, however, be logged.
Parameters
Sensors
Description
The action is executed if the system determines at the start of an
analysis that the usable life of a sensor has been exceeded.
Titrants
analysis that the expiration date of a titrant has been exceeded.
Titer/conc. stds The action is executed if the system determines at the start of an
analysis that the expiration date of a titrant or a concentration
standard has been exceeded.
Auxiliary values This action is performed if the system determines at the start of
an analysis that the usable life of an auxiliary value that is to be
used in the analysis has been exceeded.
Blank values
This action is performed if the system determines at the start of
an analysis that the usable life of a blank value that is to be used
in the analysis has been exceeded.
Values
None | Warning | Block
Action when exceeding life span
If, at the start of an analysis, it is determined that the life span of a resource to be used for the analysis has
expired, the titrator can set various actions.
Warning
Block
None
Parameters
Sensors
The user is warned that the resource life span has been exceeded and the raw results and
results determined with the respective resource will be labeled accordingly.
The user is notified that the life span of the resource has been exceeded and it is no longer
possible to start the analysis with the affected resource.
The analysis is started in spite of the exceeded life span.
Description
analysis that the life span of a sensor has been exceeded.
Values
47
Titrants
analysis that the life span of a titrant has been exceeded.
Pump and stirrer detection
Stirrer detection Defines if the automatic stirrer detection is activated. This may be Yes | No
necessary, for example, if you connect additional devices via the
stirrer outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
Pump detection Defines if the automatic pump detection is activated. This may be Yes | No
pump outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
Monitoring the usable life of a resource
For certain resources, the titrator provides automatic monitoring of the usable life.
The usable life is the period after which the values for a specific resource should be remeasured. These values
depend on the nature of the resource:
● The calibration parameters of a sensor.
● The titer of a titrant.
● The numerical value of an auxiliary value.
● The numerical value of a blank.
● The lot/batch from which a concentration/titer standard is taken.
Whether the usable life should be monitored can be defined in the setup for each individual resource.
If monitoring is activated then additional parameters become available in the respective resource with which the
duration of the usable life can be determined. In addition a reminder may optionally be issued by the titrator
before the expiration dates expire.
Parameters
Time period
Usable life
Reminder
Days before
expiration
Description
Specifies the time range.
Defines the time span of the expiration dates either in days or
hours (depending on: Time period).
Determines whether the titrator should issue a warning before the
service life or usable life of a resource elapses.
Determines the number of days before the service life of the
resource that the titrator should issue a warning. The value
entered must be less than the value in Usable life.
Only if Time period = Days and Reminder = Yes.
Values
Days | Hours
Days: 1…1000
Hours: 1…104
Yes | No
0…1000
● If a resource is renewed (e.g. a sensor is recalibrated, or the titer of a titrant is re-determined), the
Date/Time field in the Setup for the affected resource is updated automatically and the expiration date (or the
time of expiration) is recalculated.
● In Analysis and resources behavior define how the titrator should deal with the relevant resource if the
expiration dates have been exceeded at the start of the analysis.
See also
● Analysis and resources behavior (page 45)
Monitoring the life span of a resource
The life span is the period after which a resource is exhausted and should be replaced. A life span can be
defined for the following resources:
● Sensors
● Titrants
Whether the life span should be monitored can be defined in the setup for sensors and titrants.
If monitoring is activated then additional parameters become available in the respective resource with which the
date of initial operation of the resource and the duration of its life span can be defined.
Define the following additional parameters:
48
Parameters
Description
Initial operation Here you can enter the date of initial activation of the resource.
Life span
Defines the life span of the resource in months.
Values
Date
0…100
In Global settings define how the titrator deal with the affected resource if its life span has been exceeded at the
start of an analysis.
See also
● Analysis and resources behavior (page 45)
4.3.4.1.2 Solvent Control
For Karl Fischer titration, the solvent must be replaced at regular intervals to prevent results from becoming cor
rupted. The titrator system monitors the usable life and the capacity of the solvent and the number of samples.
Before you can activate Solvent Control, at least one of the following monitoring parameters must be defined:
● The time interval for the use of the solvent.
● The capacity limit, i.e. a fixed maximum value of the total water volume of samples titrated (including
standby and pretitration) in the same solvent.
● Maximum number of samples to be titrated in the solvent.
In order to monitor the solvent, the system records and adds up the time, water volume and number of samples
for each titration. When the defined monitoring parameters have been reached, a system message is displayed.
The user then has an opportunity to replace the solvent. The Solvent Manager is started to pump the solvent
away. The cell is then filled with new solvent. All counters are reset to zero.
● For sample analysis using the Stromboli oven sample changer, the solvent can only be replaced in standby
mode before analysis of the first sample, or at the end of the series, in case the titrator returns to standby
mode.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Global settings > Solvent Control
Parameters
Monitoring
usable life of
solvent
Usable life
Enforce replace
ment when
exceeding
usable life
Autom.
exchange when
exceeding
usable life
Monitoring
capacity of sol
vent
Enter max.
amount of water
Enforce replace
ment when
exceeding
capacity
Autom.
exchange when
exceeding
capacity
Monitoring no.
of samples
Description
Values
Specifies whether the usable life of the solvent is to be monitored. Yes | No
Defines the time interval in days for the use of the solvent.
Forces the user to perform the solvent replacement immediately
after the message is issued.
1…104
Yes | No
The exchange of solvent is performed automatically when
exceeding the specified usable life.
Yes | No
Specifies whether the capacity of the solvent is to be monitored.
Yes | No
The maximum volume of water in [mg] for a solvent.
Only for Monitoring capacity of solvent = Yes.
0...106
exceeding the specified capacity of the solvent.
Yes | No
Yes | No
Specifies whether the system should monitor the number of sam Yes | No
ples.
49
Autom.
exchange at
max. no. of
samples
Enforce replace
ment at max.
no. of samples
Autom.
exchange at
max. no. of
samples
Stir
Fill time
Drain time
Maximum number of samples (concentration and blank value do 0...120
not count) after which the solvent is to be replaced.
Yes | No
exceeding the specified maximum number of samples.
Yes | No
Enables the stirrer during solvent exchange.
Defines the pumping time for filling a fluid (for Autom.
exchange).
Defines the pumping time for draining a fluid (for Autom.
exchange).
Yes | No
0...1000 | ∞
0...1000 | ∞
The duration of the hose drain operation should be as long as
possible to ensure that the hoses are completely free of fluid fol
lowing draining.
See also
● Pump (page 87)
4.3.4.2 Chemicals
In Chemicals, configure and manage the titrant, auxiliary reagents, concentration/titer standard, and other sub
stances. You can view and print out lists of chemicals that have already been defined. You can also specify
new chemicals or delete created chemicals.
Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump with which they can be added. Titrants (independently of the
type) must each be assigned to a drive.
Navigation: Setup > Chemicals
Settings
Titrants
Auxiliary reagent
Concentration and titer
standards
Substances
Explanation
Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive.
Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration
process.
Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors.
The titer standards required to determine the titer for the titrant used can be stored
and managed.
Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be
managed using name, empirical formula, molecular weight, and equivalent num
ber.
Note
PC.
See also
● Titrants (page 347)
● Auxiliary reagents (page 348)
● Calibration standards (page 349)
● Concentration and titer standards (page 350)
● Substances (page 351)
4.3.4.2.1 Titrants
Navigation: Setup > Chemicals > Titrants
50
Note
PC.
Adding a titrant
Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive (PnP with chip and traditional burettes without
chips).
For classical burettes, the relevant titrant data is entered manually. For PnP (Plug&Play) burettes, the data is
automatically read from the chip and automatically transferred to the instrument. If the chip is still blank, the
data must be entered in Setup or assigned to a titrant. The data is saved in both the titrator and in the chip.
Adding a titrant
– In Titrants choose [New].
The windows to edit the parameters opens.
Define the following parameters for each titrant here:
Parameters
Type
Description
The type of titrant. You can select from the following three types
of titrant:
General titration: Classical titrants for general titration.
Auxiliary reagent: If you are adding reagents manually using a
burette.
Karl Fischer titration: Karl Fischer titrant.
Name
Concentration
Specify a descriptive name of your choice.
The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L].
For Type = General titration.
Values
General titration | Aux
iliary reagent | Karl
Fischer titration
Arbitrary
0.00001…100
0.00001…104
The non-dimensional concentration of an auxiliary reagent.
For Type = Auxiliary reagent.
Titer
Reagent type
Nominal conc.
Current conc.
Monitoring
usable life
Lot/Batch
Fill rate
Burette volume
Drive
Serial number
The titer for the titrant.
The type of Karl Fischer titrant can be selected. This Influences
the control behavior of a titration.
Specified concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL].
Actual concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL].
Specifies whether the usable life of a resource or a value is to be
monitored.
The lot or batch of the reagent. Enter any designation.
The filling rate of the burette in percent. 100% stands for maxi
mum filling rate.
Select the burette volume in [mL].
Defines the drive on which you will use the burette containing the
titrant. Select the "PnP" entry for available but unused PnP
burettes.
The serial number of the relevant device type.
0.00001…10
1-comp | 2-comp
0.1…100
0.1…100
Yes | No
Arbitrary
30…100
1 | 5 | 10 | 20
1…8 | PnP
Arbitrary
Note
● Titrants (independently of the type) must each be assigned to a drive.
● A maximum of 100 titrants can be defined in the instrument.
● In PnP burettes, the serial number is entered automatically. This can, however, be changed.
4.3.4.2.2 Auxiliary reagents
Navigation: Home > Setup > Chemicals > Auxiliary reagents
51
Note
PC.
Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration process. Auxiliary reagents must be
added using a pump and can be used via the method functions Pumps and Rinse.
Adding an auxiliary reagent
– In Auxiliary reagents choose [New].
Define the following parameters for each auxiliary reagent here:
Parameters
Name
Pump
Description
Use this setting to select a pump.
Values
Arbitrary
List of available pumps
Note
● Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump with which they can be added.
● A maximum of 50 auxiliary reagents can be defined in the instrument.
4.3.4.2.3 Calibration standards
Navigation: Setup > Chemicals > Calibration standards
Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors. The instrument contains various calibration stan
dard lists for the calibration of pH sensors (pH buffer lists), ISE sensors (ISE standard lists) and conductivity
sensors (conductivity standard lists) (see Appendix). In this dialog, you can view and print the predefined lists
stored in the titrator, and create additional user-defined calibration standard lists for pH buffers and ISE and
conductivity standards.
Note
PC.
Adding a new user-defined calibration standard lists
1 In Calibration standards, choose [New].
2 Edit the parameters and save the settings.
After you have created a calibration standard list, you can add various buffers and standards to this list,
depending on the type selected.
Parameters
Type
Description
Select the corresponding type for the new calibration standard
list.
The unit of measure to be used will depend on the type selected.
Values
pH | pH | Auto pH |
ISE | Conductivity
Name
Arbitrary
Unit
pH | pM | pX | ppm |
mS/cm | µS/cm
Base list
Add the calibration standard lists of various pH buffers by select List of available calibra
ing them from the list.
tion standards
Only for Type = Auto pH.
Ref. temperature Define the reference temperature of the buffer.
-20…200
Note
● To delete a self-defined calibration standard list from the titrator, you must first access the parameters in the
list via [Info]. From this dialog, you can delete the calibration standard list from the titrator memory by
selecting [Delete].
● A maximum of 20 user-defined calibration standard lists and 10 auto pH buffer lists can be defined in the
titrator.
52
Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer)
After creating a calibration standard list of the type pH, add various pH buffers to it.
1 Add various pH buffers by choosing [New].
2 Enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard
list and tap [OK].
To reflect the temperature influence of a pH buffer, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each individu
al buffer composed of the temperature and corresponding pH value.
3 Choose a buffer and add various values by choosing [New].
4 Enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard
list.
5 Save the list by tapping [Save].
Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH buffer) of type Auto pH
For a calibration standard list of the type Auto pH, the various pH buffers are detected by the titrator auto
matically. In order to ensure positive identification, the pH values of the individual solutions must differ from
each other by at least two units.
1 Add various pH buffers to the calibration standard list by choosing [Add] and selecting them from the speci
fied list.
By doing so, the titrator offers only suitable pH buffers in order to ensure that the selected pH buffers always
differ from each other by at least two pH points.
Note
● The temperature dependency of the individual pH buffers is also taken from the base list and cannot be edit
ed, only viewed.
Adding an ISE Calibration Standard (ISE Standard)
After creating a calibration standard list of the type ISE, you can add various ISE standards to it.
1 Add various ISE standards to it by choosing [New].
2 Enter the corresponding value for the standard in the desired unit of measure, based on the reference tem
perature from the calibration standard list and tap [OK].
To reflect the temperature influence of an ISE standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding standard value.
Adding a Conductivity Calibration Standard (Conductivity Standard)
After creating a calibration standard list of the type Conductivity, add various conductivity standards to it.
1 Add various conductivity standards to it by choosing [New].
2 Enter the conductivity for each standard based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard
list and tap [OK].
To reflect the temperature influence of a conductivity standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for
each individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding conductivity value.
4.3.4.2.4 Concentration and titer standards
Navigation: Setup > Chemicals > Concentration and titer standards
Enter and manage the and titer standards required for titer determinations and the Karl Fischer water standards
for the concentration determination of KF titrants.
53
Note
PC.
Adding a standard
1 In Concentration and titer standards, choose [New].
Parameters
Type
Name
Purity
Concentration
Water content
Unit
Description
Defines the type of standard.
The purity of a solid standard, in percent.
Only for Type = solid.
The concentration of a liquid standard, in [mol/L].
Only for Type = liquid.
The water content of a Karl Fischer standard.
Unit for the water content of the Karl Fischer standard.
M
Density
The molar mass of a solid standard, in [g/mol].
The density of a liquid standard, in [g/mL].
Only for Type = liquid or KF.
Equivalent num The equivalent number "z" of the standard
ber
Lot/Batch
Monitoring
usable life
monitored.
Values
solid | liquid | KF
Arbitrary
0.001…100.000
0.00001…100
0.00001…106
mg/g | mg/mL | % |
ppm | mg/piece
10-5…103
0.0001…100
1…9
Arbitrary
Yes | No
Note
● All fields except for Lot/Batch must be filled before the standard can be saved.
● A maximum of 50 titer standards can be defined.
4.3.4.2.5 Substances
Navigation: Setup > Chemicals > Substances
Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be managed using name, empiri
cal formula, molecular weight, and equivalent number.
Note
PC.
– In Substances choose [New].
Parameters
Name
Empirical formu
la
Molecular
weight
Equivalent num
ber
Description
Defines the empirical formula of the substance.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Defines the molecular weight of the substance.
0.0001…104
The equivalent number "z" of the standard
1…9
Note
A maximum of 100 substances can be defined.
54
4.3.4.3 Hardware
In Hardware, configure all the hardware components connected to the titrator.
Navigation: Setup > Hardware
Settings
Sensors
Pumps
Peripherals
Titration Stands
Auxiliary Instruments
Homogenizer
Liquid Handlers
Description
Configure and manage sensors to be used with the titrator.
Configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator.
Peripherals encompasses all input and output devices that belong to the titrator
environment.
Configure the titration stands connected to the titrator.
Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL or 24 V
output, stirrer or RS-232 connection and that are to be used in a method.
Lists the available homogenizers according to their control type.
Specify the setup parameters, for example to assign the ports to the related con
nections.
Note
PC.
4.3.4.3.1 Sensors
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Sensors
You can configure and manage sensors to be used with the titrator as well as change settings already stored in
the titrator. The settings for an individual sensor can also be output to a printer. In addition, the corresponding
method for sensor calibration can be accessed from here.
Note
● A maximum of 50 sensors can be defined in the device.
● Each sensor is associated with a specific type. Each sensor type can deliver measured values in one or
more units of measure. The following table provides information regarding which units of measure can be
selected for a corresponding sensor type:
Sensor type
mV
pH
ISE
Phototrode
Polarized
Temperature
Conductivity
1)Plug
Default unit of measure
mV
pH
pM
%T
mV
°C
µS/cm
Eligible units of measure
mV
pH | mV
pM / pX | ppm | mV
%T | A | mV
mV | µA
°C | K | °F
µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS
and Play sensors (PnP) are available for pH or mV measurements.
● Changing the unit of measurement for a sensor may render the calibration parameters and expiration date
parameters meaningless and result in their subsequent omission. This may also mean that the calibration
parameters are recalculated by the titrator (for temperature sensors), or that another set of calibration para
meters is displayed (for ISE sensors).
PC.
To create a new sensor in the titrator, proceed as follows:
– In Sensors choose [New].
55
Plug and Play sensors (PnP)
● If a PnP sensor is connected to the sensor input, this automatically generates an entry in the setup. All infor
mation (sensor name, type or inputs) is updated by the titrator (if a PnP sensor is not connected, the entry
"PnP" appears for the sensor input ).
● The setup may contain several PnP sensors with identical sensor IDs but with different sensor input infor
mation. When the analysis starts, a validation is carried out during which the user is prompted to remove a
sensor. For several PnP sensors with the same ID, all entries apart from one are deleted when the sensors
are removed.
The following settings are available for configuring a sensor depending on the sensor type selected:
Sensor type: mV
Parameters
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Monitoring life
span
Sensor type: pH
Parameters
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Calibration
Description
The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will
depend on the sensor type selected.
The input to which you want to connect the sensor.
Values
Arbitrary
mV
Description
Values
Arbitrary
pH
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Specifies whether the life span of the resource is to be monitored. Yes | No
Determines the calibration type.
Does not appear for Unit = pH.
Zero point
The pH value where the sensor reads 0.0 mV.
Slope (TCalib) The slope of the sensor at the calibration temperature in
[mV/pH].
Internal temper Select this option if the sensor has an internal temperature sen
ature sensor
sor. In this case the system will automatically make an entry in
the sensor setup for the internal temperature sensor.
Calib. tempera Here you can enter the calibration temperature during the calibra
ture
tion.
Monitoring
usable life
monitored.
Monitoring life Specifies whether the life span of the resource is to be monitored.
span
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Linear | Segmented
-100…100
-100…100
Yes | No
-20…200
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
● The parameters zero point, slope and the corresponding calibration temperature are required to convert the
mV signal of the sensor to the selected unit. These appear only for the unit [pH].
56
Sensor type: Phototrode
Parameters
Description
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Wavelength
Zero point
Slope
Calib. tempera
ture
Monitoring
usable life
Monitoring life
span
Values
Arbitrary
mV | %T | A
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
The Phototrode DP5 features a selection of 5 fixed wavelengths
520 | 555 | 590 | 620 |
in [nm].
660
The percentage of transmittance where the sensor reads 0.0 mV. -100 … 100
The slope of the phototrode in [mV/%T].
-100…100
Here you can enter the calibration temperature during the calibra -20…200
tion.
Specifies whether the usable life of a resource or a value is to be Yes | No
monitored.
Note
● The parameter Calib. temperature cannot be edited for segmented calibration; in this case, the system dis
plays an information field.
Sensor type: Polarized
Parameters
Description
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Monitoring life
span
Values
Arbitrary
mV | µA
AB1/Sensor2 | More
depending on configu
ration
Arbitrary
Sensor type: Temperature
Parameters
Description
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Values
Arbitrary
°C | K | °F
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
Arbitrary
-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
Yes | No
Serial number
Zero point
The adjusted point from the theoretical value for reading 0.0 °C.
Monitoring
usable life
Monitoring life
span
monitored.
57
Sensor type: Conductivity
Parameters
Description
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
ature sensor
T compensation For the temperature compensation, the titrator converts the con
ductivity to a defined reference temperature.
Linear: The conductivity is linearly converted to a reference tem
perature. The linearity is described by the temperature coefficient
[%/°C].
Non linear: The conductivity is converted to a reference tempera
ture non-linearly, in accordance with the EN norm 27 888.
No: The conductivity is determined without temperature compen
sation.
Only appears for Unit = µS/cm or mS/cm.
T coefficient
The temperature coefficient in [%/°C] defines the percentage of
the change in conductivity for linear temperature compensation
for a temperature increase of 1°C.
Appears for T compensation = Linear only.
Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] for the temperature compensa
tion.
Appears for T compensation = Linear or Non linear only.
Cell constant
The cell constant in [1/cm] can be entered here. The cell con
stant is required for conversion of the measured sensor conduc
tance value [mS | µS] into the conductivity [mS/cm | µS/cm]. The
temperature compensation only affects the conductivity, not the
conductance.
ture
tion.
Monitoring
usable life
monitored.
span
Values
Arbitrary
µS/cm | mS/cm | µS |
mS
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Yes | No
Linear | Non linear | No
0.001…100
25.0 | 20.0
0…100
-20…200
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
● The temperature compensation is only performed for the units µS/cm and mS/cm (conductivity). Tempera
ture compensation is not conducted for units of measure µS and mS (conductance).
● The parameter Calib. temperature is required during the calibration to determine the temperature-dependent
conductivity of conductivity standards.
(Only appears for Unit = µS/cm or mS/cm.)
Sensor type: ISE
Parameters
Name
Unit
Sensor input
58
Description
Values
Arbitrary
pM | pX | ppm
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 | More
ration
Sensor input
Serial number
Calibration
The pX value where the sensor reads 0.0 mV.
The slope of the sensor at the calibration temperature in [mV/pX].
monitored.
Specifies whether the life span of the resource is to be monitored.
Zero point
Slope (TCalib)
Monitoring
usable life
Monitoring life
span
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Linear | Segmented
-100…100
-100…100
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
● For ISE sensors there are two independent calibration sets, one for the units "pM" or "pX" and one for the
unit "ppm".
● When calibrating an ISE sensor in ppm units, the sensor's slope and zero point are specified in pX or pM
units.
4.3.4.3.2 Pumps
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Pumps
You can configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator. Starting from the pump list, you can add
new pumps or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and pumps can be
deleted.
You can set up different pumps. For each pump, you need to specify an explicit, user-defined name, the pump
ing rate and the connection from which the pump should operate.
Note
● The Karl Fischer Solvent Manager is predefined in Setup when connecting to the back of the instrument, and
cannot be configured individually. All pump ports on the InMotion autosampler are available for connection.
● Only one Solvent Manager or Air pump can be defined per instrument.
PC.
Adding a pump
1 In Pumps choose [New].
Parameters
Type
Description
Defines the type of pump.
Values
Membrane |
Peristaltic | Solvent
Manager | Reversible |
Air pump
Arbitrary
0.1…1000
Name
Max. pump rate Displays the pump rate in [mL/min] when the pump is operated
at 100%. This is stated by the manufacturer or determined exper
imentally.
Pump output
The output where you want to operate the pump.
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
59
● A maximum of 20 pumps can be defined in the titrator.
● For Type = Membrane, the name parameter is predefined and is displayed as an info field.
4.3.4.3.3 Peripherals
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals
These settings encompass all input and output devices that belong to the titrator environment but that are not
essential instruments for processing an analysis (peripherals cannot be accessed in methods). The computer
also counts as a peripheral device. The list of all peripheral instruments defined in the titrator, together with the
parameters of each individual instrument can be printed out by a printer.
Note
PC.
Balance
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Balance
Balances can either be connected directly to the instrument or to LabX. here you find the description for a direct
connection to the instrument.
Note
PC.
Before defining a balance, you need to select the balance type. The titrator supports the following types of bal
ance:
Balance type
Mettler
Sartorius
More
Supported balances
AB | PB | PB-S | AB-S | PB-E | AB-E | College-S | SB | CB | GB | College-B |
HB | AG | PG | PG-S | SG | HG | XP | XS | XA | XPE | XSE | XVE | AX | MX |
UMX | PR | SR | HR | AT | MT | UMT | PM | AM | SM | CM | MS | ML
Sartorius
--
METTLER TOLEDO Balances
These balances support Plug'n'Play and are automatically recognized and configured by the titrator.
For automatic balance recognition, you need to ensure the following:
1. The balance has been started up and is connected to the titrator by a suitable cable,
2. The balance has been set to "Bidirectional" (if necessary, set the "Host" parameter accordingly),
3. The parameters for the RS-232 interface on the balance correspond with those on the titrator.
● As long as the balance is not connected to the titrator, the settings "Baud Rate", "Data Bit", "Stop Bit", "Pari
ty" and "Handshake" can be entered manually. These are however automatically overwritten with the values
identified by the PnP as soon as the user sets the same transmission parameters at the balance and the
titrator.
Sartorius | Others
After you have selected this option and the system has recognized the balance, you can define the following
parameters:
60
Parameters
Name
Serial number
Connection
Description
The serial port to which the device is connected. Possible con
nections are located on the mainboard, the analog board and the
conductivity board.
Baud rate
The baud rate for data transmission via the RS-232 interface.
Data bit
Defines the number of data bits.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
7 | 8
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
Defines the number of stop bits. (2 stop bits can only be selected 1 | 2
if 7 data bits are also selected at the same time.)
Defines the parity protocol.
Even | Odd | None
Data transmission via the RS-232 interface. (Only the handshake None | Xon-Xoff
option "Xon-Xoff" is available for serial connections on the ana
log and conductivity board in conjunction with a baud rate of
9600.)
● The settings for the baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and handshake must agree for the balance and titra
tor!
● If None is selected as balance type that means that no balance is to be connected to the titrator.
Barcode reader
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Barcode reader
When a barcode is imported, the system checks whether the imported barcode is suitable for starting the
method. If so, the analysis start dialog is opened; all known data is entered there. If not, the barcode is ignored.
If an analysis is already running with the same method ID, the sample is added to the end of the current analy
sis. An exception to this occurs if the End series barcode has previously been read. In this case, a new analy
sis is started (with the same method).
● Only one barcode reader can be defined.
Define the following parameters for a barcode reader:
PC.
Parameters
Name
Serial number
Transfer Smart
Codes to LabX
Description
Transfer barcode to LabX.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Yes | No
USB-Stick
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > USB-Stick
Commercially available USB sticks from USB Version 1.1 are supported.
You can assign a relevant name to the USB stick.
Note
PC.
Printer
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Printer
Printer/RS-232 data export
The printer types listed below as well as the RS232 interface for data export are supported by the titrator:
● USB printer with PCL protocol Version 4 and higher.
Visit this site to find a list of compatible printers: http://www.mt.com/titration-printers
● RS232 data export for the output of data via the RS interface (not supported by LabX 2014 and later ver
sions).
Stripe printers
● RS-232 (RS-P26)
● USB compact printer
61
The following data is printed using the stripe printers:
Results
All except for curves and tables of measured values
Method function Record
Overview
Results
Raw results
Resource data
Sample data
Method data
Setup
List printouts
Parameter printouts
Total printouts
Methods
List printout
Parameter printouts
Series
List printout
Parameter printouts
● The USB2 port on the mainboard is exclusively reserved for LabX.
● If an RS printer or RS data export has been specified in the setup and the corresponding settings have been
saved, PnP recognition for the sample changer and balances is deactivated on this COM port.
● The compact printer does not allow the printing of manual operations. No automatically generated printouts
are produced either for: Calculations, instructions, referenced resources, equivalence point learn titration
(LearnEQP) or changes to an analysis when in progress. The compact printer does not support all lan
guages.
For Karl Fischer determinations, manual concentration, drift and blank value analyses are printed out auto
matically.
PC.
Parameters
Printer type
Description
Selection of a printer.
USB compact printer, RS-232: These printers do not support all
languages and can only print out a limited quantity of analysis
data and results.
RS-232 data export: The data is transmitted regardless of the
selected language. Only a limited quantity of data and results is
exported.
Values
USB printer | RS-232 |
USB compact printer |
RS-232 data export
Information on the RS-232 data export
● In the method function Record, the parameter Summary must be activated (Record = outside loop) or Per
sample or Per series (Record = inside loop). The other settings in Record have no effect.
• If the method function Record is inserted outside the loop, the data from the preceding loop and the data
between the End of sample and method functions Record are output.
● For the method type Titer, it is advisable for the method function Record to be inserted outside the loop,
directly after the method function Titer. The parameter Summary should be activated.
● For the method type Calibration, it is advisable for the method function Record to be inserted outside the
loop, directly after the method function Calibration. The parameter Summary should be activated.
● For the method type GT, the method function Record should be located inside the loop, directly in front of
End of sample. Either Per sample or Per series should be selected for the parameter Summary.
If data export is activated, the following data is transmitted:
● The most important sample data and results, either per sample or per series, according to the parameter
setting in Summary of the method function Record.
● Automatic reports for drift, blank value and concentration determination in a Karl Fischer water content
determination if the global setting Print autom. KF protocols is also activated
Navigation: Home > Setup > Global settings > Analysis and resources behavior > Analysis sequence
settings
62
Depending on the selected printer type, the following parameters appear:
● USB printer
Status
Name
Serial number
Connection
Indicates whether the selected printer type is installed.
Information on the USB port to which the printer is connected.
PnP is displayed if the printer is not connected to the titrator.
Installed
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
MB1/USB1 | PnP
Status
Name
Serial number
Connection
Information on the name of the installed printer is displayed.
conductivity board.
Baud rate
Information on the baud rate for data transmission via the
RS-232 interface.
Information on the number of data bits is displayed.
Information the number of stop bits is displayed.
Information on the parity defined for the report is displayed.
Information on data transmission via the RS-232 interface.
Installed
RS-P26
Arbitrary
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
2400
● RS-232
Data bit
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
8
1
No
None
Status
Name
Serial number
Connection
Installed
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
MB1/USB1 | PnP
● RS-232 data export
Status
Connection
Baud rate
The serial interface for the RS-232 data export.
Data bit
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
Data transfer via the RS-232 interface.
Installed
MB/COM1 | MB/COM2
1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
8
1
Even | Odd | None
None | Xon-Xoff
The max. Xoff duration for transmitted data is around 30s.
PC settings
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > PC settings
Configure these settings if you have your instrument connected to the PC software LabX.
Note
● T50/T70/T90 titrators: The PC with LabX installed must always be connected to the USB2 or Ethernet port
on the mainboard.
● V20/V30/C20/C30/G20 titrators: The PC with LabX installed must always be connected to the PC (USB) or
Ethernet port on the rear panel.
● After the settings have been modified, it may be necessary to restart the instrument.
PC.
63
Parameters
Connect to LabX
at start-up
Connection type
Status
Port number
Description
If this parameter is activated, a connection to LabX will be estab
lished on startup.
Defines how the titrator is connected to the PC, either via the net
work connection or via the USB connection.
Information on the connection status from the instrument to LabX.
Defines the port for a network connection of the titrator to LabX.
Only appears for Connection type = Network.
Values
Yes | No
Network | USB
Connected | Discon
nected
1024…65535
Network settings
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Network settings
Note
PC.
Configure these settings if you have your instrument connected to a network.
Parameters
Obtain IP
address auto
matically
IP address
Subnet mask
Standard gate
way
Description
Indicates whether the IP address should be automatically
obtained over the network.
Values
Yes | No
If the IP is not to be automatically obtained, you can enter it here. 000.000.000.000 …
255.255.255.255
If you want to run the titrator on a local subnetwork, you can
000.000.000.000 …
define the subnet mask here that you want to use to link the sub 255.255.255.255
net's IP address.
This is where you can enter the address of the standard gateway 000.000.000.000 …
for communication between the various networks.
255.255.255.255
Fingerprint reader
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
You can use a fingerprint reader to authenticate users on the titrator. In order to do this, the fingerprint reader
must be activated on the titrator. The following parameters are available for this:
Note
PC.
Parameters
Activate finger
print reader
Status
Name
Connection
Description
Activates the fingerprint reader for authenticating users when log
ging onto the titrator.
Indicates whether the fingerprint reader is connected to the titra
tor.
The designation of the fingerprint reader.
Information on the USB port to which the fingerprint reader is con
nected. PnP is displayed if the fingerprint reader is not connected
to the titrator.
Values
Yes | No
Installed | Not
installed
Arbitrary
PnP | USB 1
LevelSens
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
The level sensor (LevelSens) can be used either to monitor the fill level of titration or solvent vessels or to pre
vent the overflow of waste vessels.
The level sensor is connected to the "LevelSens box", which is connected to the titrator via the CAN interface.
The titrator automatically recognizes up to two of these boxes (PnP recognition). These appear in the settings.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
1 In LevelSens, tap on a "LevelSens box".
64
2 The parameters Level, Waste or Inactive can be defined for the relevant sensor type
Activating level monitoring
● At the start of a method or a manual operation.
The level is checked for all activated and connected sensors, regardless of whether they are used in the
method.
● At the start of each sample (GT).
● After completion of a Karl Fischer analysis (KF).
● Before the start of a KF Stromboli method.
● Before replacing the solvent.
● During the course of the following manual operations: Burette (Rinse, Rinse multiple burettes, Dispense,
Manual titration), Pump, Auxiliary instrument (output 24V), Sample changer (Pump, Rinse).
If the fill level is not reached or exceeded, a message appears with a prompt either to empty or fill the vessel
(depending on the Setup setting: Waste or Level). The analysis is interrupted during this time. After the vessel
has been emptied or filled and the message has been confirmed, the analysis is resumed.
● Only two LevelSens boxes can be entered in the settings. Additional boxes do not generate an additional
entry.
● Entries in the settings can only be deleted if the corresponding LevelSens box is not installed.
● The sensor must be fitted in such a way that when the maximum fill level is reached, the analysis of a sam
ple, the entire loop of a Stromboli method or a solvent replacement can be performed.
● The fill level is only checked before a sample analysis, at the start of a Stromboli method or before a solvent
replacement.
PC.
Parameters
Name
Chip ID
Position
Sensor 1
type…Sensor 4
type
Description
Values
Information on the designation of the LevelSens box.
In the settings, the first detected box is entered as LevelSens Box
1, the second as LevelSens Box 2.
Information on the Chip-ID of the detected LevelSens box.
Information on the position of the LevelSens box connected to the PnP | PnP1 | PnP2
titrator.
Specifies the sensor type to be used.
Level | Waste | Inactive
TBox
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > TBox
Note
PC.
The following parameters are available for the METTLER TOLEDO TBox: TBox connected. This parameter speci
fies whether or not the TBox is connected to the titrator.
If the TBox is installed on the titrator, then the TTL-outputs of the titrator are available in the pump setup.
4.3.4.3.4 Titration stands
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Titration Stands
Starting from the titration stand list, you can add new titration stands or select existing ones and modify their
parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out or individual titration stands can be deleted, whereby one of
each type must be in the list.
65
Note
PC.
Configure the following titration stands that can be connected to the titrator.
● Manual stand
● Auto stand
● External stand
● Rondo/Tower A and Rondo/Tower B
● InMotion T/Tower A and InMotion T/Tower B
● Rondolino TTL
● Stromboli TTL
● KF stand
Adding a titration stand
1 In Titration Stands tap [New].
2 In Type choose the type of titration stand to be added.
Edit the parameters according to the type of titration stand.
Parameters
Type
Description
Defines the type of the titration stand.
Values
Auto stand | External
stand | Manual stand |
Rondo/Tower A |
Rondo/Tower B |
Rondolino TTL |
Stromboli TTL | InMo
tion T/1A | InMotion
T/1B | Rondo60/1A |
Rondo60/1B | KF stand
Manual stand
The manual stand is typically used for the METTLER TOLEDO Manual Titration Stands. Before each sample in
the series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the respective sample is in place will
appear. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a
function Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
Defines the name of the titration stand. Additional titration stands List of available names
of a kind will have an index number assigned.
Defines the stirrer output.
MB/Stirrer1 | MB/Stir
rer2 | AB1/Stirrer |
Internal stirrer | More
ration
Auto stand
If you use an auto stand, the popup window that reminds you to add the respective sample does not appear.
Thus an interruption-free analysis sequence can be guaranteed for multiple determinations with an automation
unit. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a func
tion Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
66
Description
Values
Stirrer output
ration
External stand
The external stand is typically used for stands not directly attached to the titrator. Before each sample in the
series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the resepective sample in place will appear.
The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a function
Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
ration
Rondolino TTL
The Rondolino sample changer can hold 9 samples to be tested in sequence. The Rondolino connects to the
TTL port on the titrator. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions
requiring a function Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Connection
Description
Values
More depending on
configuration
Information on the connection type.
MB/TTL
Stromboli TTL
The Stromboli Karl Fischer Drying Oven sample changer can hold 14 vialed oven samples and one blank vial.
The Stromboli connects to the TTL port on the titrator.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Connection
Drift
Determination
method
Date / Time
Performed by
Description
Values
ration
MB/TTL
Value of the last drift determination [µg/min].
0.0…106
Method name of the method used for the determination.
Method name
Date and time of the determination.
Name of the user performing the determination.
Date and time
User name
67
InMotion
The InMotion Autosamplers can hold multiple samples depending on the base unit (Flex, Pro or Max) and the
accompanying sample rack. The InMotion Autosampler connects to USB1 on the titrator. InMotion Autosam
plers and attached towers are PnP devices that are automatically recognized and installed upon connection to
the titrator. If a second InMotion Autosampler is to be attached, a USB expander must be used at the titrator for
the second USB connection. The USB expander ports on the back of the first InMotion Autosampler attached can
also be used for the connection. The first InMotion device attached is labelled InMotion T/1A and the second
attached to the system will be labeled InMotion T/2A in the list. If unattached and reattached after the initial
installation, the titrator will know which InMotion Autosampler is /1 and /2 according their Chip ID. An InMotion
Autosampler can also manually be added to the Titration Stand list with default parameters if needed for method
programming.
Parameters
Type
Name
Base type
Stirrer output
Description
Defines the name of the titration stand. Additional titration stands
Indicates the sample changer type.
Connection
Chip ID
CoverUp
Indicates the connection type.
Shows the ID of the identification chip of the sample changer.
Indicates whether this option is installed.
RFID inner
Indicates whether the RFID option is installed for the second row
of the rack.
RFID outer
Barcode reader
Rack
Rack size
Beaker height
Conditioning
beaker
Rinse beaker
Special beaker
1…Special
beaker 4
Only the outer rack row can be used with the barcode option.
Indicates the type of the installed rack.
Standard: Standard rack.
Waterbath: Rack including a wather bath.
Dual: Rack type with two types of beaker sizes.
PnP: No rack is detected.
Indicates the size of the installed rack.
Defines the beaker height [mm].
For COD kit = Yes the value range is different.
Defines if a specific condition beaker is used. The last beaker
position of the rack is the specific conditioning beaker position.
This parameter is stored in the rack.
Defines if a specific rinse beaker is used.
Defines if specific special beaker are used. Rinse beaker posi
tions are next to the conditioning beaker.
These parameters are stored in the rack.
Values
List of available names
Flex | Pro | Max
InMotion1/Stir
rer1…InMotion1/Stir
rer6 | InMotion2/Stir
rer6 | More depending
on configuration
PnP | MB/USB 1
Unique number
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Standard | Waterbath /
Dual / PnP
Number of positions on
the rack
65…215
Yes | No
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
When fixed beakers are defined, they cannot be used for samples and are reserved for Conditioning, Rinse
and Line rinse method functions only. The fixed beakers reserve the last available positions on the rack, in the
order stated above, with conditioning beaker being last.
68
COD kit
Aliquot beaker
Defines if the system is used with the Aliquot Kit.
For InMotion Pro with 25 mL rack only.
This parameter is stored on the InMotion.
Defines whether the extension on InMotion is installed for an
aliquot beaker. Aliquoting is not possible with all rack types. For
InMotion Pro only.
Yes | No
Yes | No
Rondo60
The Rondo autosampler can hold 12-60 samples depending on the accompanying sample rack. The Rondo is
connected to either MB1/COM or MB2/COM ports on the titrator. The Rondo60 is automatically named /1 or /2
according to the COM port is attached. The Rondo and attached Towers are PnP devices that are automatically
recognized and installed upon connection to the titrator. A Rondo can also manually be added to the Titration
Stand list with default parameters if needed for method programming.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Connection
Rack
Beaker height
Tower position
Conditioning
beaker
Rinse beaker
Special beaker
1
Special beaker
2
CoverUp
Description
Values
Rondo/1A Stirrer |
Rondo/2A Stirrer |
More depending on
configuration
PnP | MB1/COM |
MB2/COM
Indicates the size off the installed rack.
20 | 12 | 15 | 30 | 60
Beaker configuration of the installed rack.
90 | 110 | 150 | 210
Indicates the tower position configuration off Rondo.
Left | Right
Conditioning beaker setting of the installed rack.
Installed | Not
installed
Indicates the beaker setting of the installed rack.
Installed | Not
installed
Indicates the special beaker setting of the installed rack.
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Defines whether a CoverUp unit is connected to the Rondo and, if Rondo/1 TTL-Out 1 |
so, to which port. Select None if there is no CoverUp unit on your Rondo/1 TTL-Out 2 |
Rondo.
Rondo/2 TTL-Out 1 |
Only appears when Rack = 20 has been selected.
Rondo/2 TTL-Out 2 |
MB/TTL-Out 1 |
MB/TTL-Out 2 | None
KF stand
Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
ration
69
4.3.4.3.5 Auxiliary instruments
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Auxiliary instrument
Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL or 24 V output, stirrer or RS-232 con
nection and that are to be used in a method (e.g. valves, dispensers).
An auxiliary instrument is switched on for a predefined period or switched on and then switched off again via
the corresponding command. The instruments are controlled via the method function Auxiliary instrument.
Auxiliary instruments form part of a method, while peripherals are classified as input/output devices (printers,
balances, barcode readers etc.), which do not have direct access to methods.
Starting from the auxiliary instrument list, you can add new auxiliary instruments or select existing ones or
modify their parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out at a printer or selected auxiliary instruments can
be deleted.
● A maximum of 50 auxiliary instruments can be saved in the titrator.
PC.
Adding an auxiliary instrument
1 In Auxiliary instrument choose [New].
2 In Control type you must first select the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is to be controlled.
After you have selected the relevant type, you can determine the parameters.
Parameters
Name
Control type
Description
Select the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is to be con
trolled.
Output 24 V/Stirrer (0-18V output)
Parameters
Description
Output
Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use for the auxil
iary instrument.
TTL
Parameters
Output
Input
RS-232
Parameters
Connection
70
Description
Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use
for the auxiliary instrument.
Does not appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin).
The input where the auxiliary instrument should be queried.
Only appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin).
Description
conductivity board.
Baud rate
Data bit
Values
Arbitrary
Output 24 V | Out TTL
(Single pin) | Input TTL
(Single pin) | TTL
(Multipin) | Stirrer |
RS-232
Values
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Values
MB/TTL-Out 1 |
MB/TTL-Out 2 |
MB/TTL-Out 3 |
MB/TTL-Out 4 | More
ration
MB/TTL-In 1 | MB/TTLIn 2
Values
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
7 | 8
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
Even | Odd | None
9600.)
4.3.4.3.6 Homogenizer
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Homogenizer
This window lists the available homogenizers according to their control type. The list can be sorted and printed
out.
Depending on the control type, there are two different types of homogenizer.
– In Homogenizer choose the required entry.
The window to edit the parameters opens.
Homogenizer TTL
Parameters
Output
Description
Defines the output to which the device is connected.
Values
MB/TTL-Out
1…MB/TTL-Out 4 |
Rondo/1 TTL-Out
1…Rondo/2 TTL-Out
4 | (More depending on
configuration)
Description
Determines whether or not the titrator is connected to the homog
enizer.
Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use.
Values
Installed | Not
installed
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
(More depending on
configuration)
Homogenizer RS
Parameters
Status
Output
● For the homogenizer of type PT 1300D (RS interface), the panel for changing or saving the speed during
operation is blocked via the titrator (GLP conformity).
● It is not possible to change an entry while a method that uses a homogenizer is running.
● For the status Installed, balance and sample changer polling is deactivated.
● The parameters for serial connection are for information only and cannot be changed.
4.3.4.3.7 Liquid Handler
Navigation: Setup > Hardware > Liquid Handler
If a Liquid Handler is connected, the titrator detects the Liquid Handler automatically (PnP) and the identifica
tion parameters are transferred to the titrator's setup. Specify the setup parameters, for example to assign the
ports to the related connections. Port 6 is fixed assigned to the waste port. The waste port is required to dis
charge residual solutions upon liquid exchange or to remove excessive liquid volumes from the burette.
Note
PC.
– In Liquid Handler choose the detected Liquid Handler.
In this dialog you obtain the following parameters:
71
Parameters
Name
Description
Values
The first connected Liquid Handler is displayed as Liquid Handler Liquid Handler 1 | Liq
1 and the second one as Liquid Handler 2.
uid Handler 2
For T90 you can change the name only if one Liquid Handler is
available and is not connected.
Chip ID
Position
Information on the ID of the Liquid Handler's PnP chip.
Information on the position of the Liquid Handler.
Burette volume
SNR Burette
glass
Port 1…6
Connection
Information on the volume [mL] of the Liquid Handler's burette.
The serial number of the burette glass can be entered.
Indicates the position of the multiport valve.
The corresponding ports and the connected components can be
designated. The names can then be selected within the method
function Liquid Handling.
Arbitrary
1 | 2 | PnP (default val
ue)
50 mL (default)
Arbitrary
Yes | No
Arbitrary
Note
● After the removing of the Liquid Handler, the data (name, chip-ID, burette volume, SNR burette glass, con
nections and port assignments) remain at the titrator's setup.
● When a Liquid Handler is connected, the chip-ID will be overwritten.
● When more than one Liquid Handler are connected, the existing Setup entries will be assigned to the relat
ed.
Liquid Handler, according to the connection order.
● The last Liquid Handler in the list cannot be deleted.
4.3.4.4 User Settings
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings
These settings contains the options that can be made specifically for each currently logged in user.
You can configure the screen settings (for the touchscreen), the layout of the alphanumeric and numeric key
board, the use of beeps, and shortcuts for each user.
4.3.4.4.1 Shortcuts
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Shortcuts
Each user can manage the shortcuts that they have created. Individual shortcuts can be selected and deleted
and the following parameters of a shortcut can be changed:
Parameters
Description
Description
Any name for the shortcut.
Immediate start The method, series, or manual operation can be started immedi
ately. This enables you to start the analysis without any interfer
ing dialog.
Homescreen
You can select the free position for the shortcut on the Home
position
screen.
Values
Arbitrary
Yes | No
1…12
4.3.4.4.2 Screen
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Screen
Define the following parameters:
Parameters
Primary color
Brightness
Button shape
72
Description
Here various color schemes for the user interface can be select
ed.
Specifies the display brightness in [%].
Defines whether to display the buttons in the menus with square
or rounded corners.
Values
Gray | Blue | Green |
Red
50 | 60 | 70 | 80 | 90 |
100 [%]
Rounded | Square
Screen saver
Wait time
Here you can define whether the screen saver should be used.
Yes | No
Defines how long in [min] the system should wait after the user's 1…1000
last action on the terminal before activating the screen saver.
4.3.4.4.3 Beep
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Beep
Define the following parameter:
Parameters
Description
At push of a but Enables a beep when tapping on the touch screen.
ton
Values
Yes | No
4.3.4.4.4 Keyboard
Navigation: Home > Setup > User settings > Keyboards
In this dialog, you can define the layout for the alphanumeric and the numeric input fields. The following set
tings are available:
Parameters
ABC keyboard
Description
Determines the layout of the alphanumeric input field.
123 keyboard
Defines the organization of the keys for the numeric input field.
Values
English | French | Ger
man
Calculator | Phone
4.3.4.5 Values
Navigation: Home > Setup > Values
Blanks and auxiliary values can be created, edited and deleted and the list of defined blanks or auxiliary values
can be viewed and printed out. It is also possible to print out the individual values with their parameters.
Settings
Blanks
Auxiliary values
Explanation
Blank values can be used in formulas for calculations.
You can use auxiliary values in formulas.
4.3.4.5.1 Blanks
Navigation: Setup > Values > Blanks
Blanks can be used in formulas for calculations. They can either be created manually with the aid of their vari
ous parameters or generated as the result of a method. A resulting blank (or calculated mean value) can then
be assigned to a blank using the method function Blank. The blank will then appear under the assigned name
in the Blank list in Setup.
Adding a blank value
– In Blanks choose [New].
Define the following parameters to define the blank:
Parameters
Name
Unit
Value
Monitoring
usable life
Description
The units in which the blank is specified.
Here you can enter a numerical value.
monitored.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
-108…108
Yes | No
Note
● A maximum of 100 blanks can be saved in the titrator.
● Blanks cannot be deleted or modified if they are currently in use.
● When a blank is assigned with the "Blank" method function, this is updated in the setup immediately after
completion of the method function.
73
4.3.4.5.2 Auxiliary values
Navigation: Setup > Values > Auxiliary values
You can use auxiliary values in formulas. They can either be manually created and edited or can be generated
using a method. A result, a mean derived from several results or a raw result can be assigned to an auxiliary
value by means of the "Auxiliary Value" method function. The auxiliary value then appears under the assigned
name in the auxiliary values list in the Setup.
Adding an auxiliary value
– In Auxiliary values choose [New].
Define the following parameters to define the auxiliary value:
Parameters
Name
Value
Monitoring
usable life
Description
monitored.
Values
Arbitrary
-108…108
Yes | No
Note
● A maximum of 100 auxiliary values can be saved in the titrator.
● Auxiliary values cannot be deleted or modified when they are currently in use.
● When an auxiliary value is assigned with the method function Auxiliary value, this is updated in the setup
immediately after completion of the method function.
4.3.5 Operating the instrument
4.3.5.1 Switching on the instrument and logging in
Switching on the instrument
– Press the On/Off button briefly to switch the instrument on.
This executes a short test and establishes the connection to
LabX.
Logging on to the system
1 Click on [Users] if you would like to enter another user regis
tered or recognized on the system. The keyboard is dis
played.
2 Enter the username. The Login window will be displayed.
74
A list of recently logged-in users is displayed (only if your
system is configured appropriately).
1 In the Login window tap on [Users] to select a user different
from the one displayed.
2 Select a user from the list. The [Login] window is displayed
again.
The home screen displays a variety of information. The LabX icon
indicates that the instrument is in LabX mode.
The central area of the display shows shortcuts to methods,
products, sample series and manual operations. Shortcuts are
identified by a small arrow.
user may log on.
● If you choose Lock Screen, the instrument is locked and can
not be used by other users.
● Choose Offline to operate the instrument independently of
LabX.
4.3.5.3 Selecting method
Selecting method
1 On the home screen, tap [Methods]
The Methods list is displayed.
2 Select a method from the list.
The Method window opens.
75
Method window
– On the method window, tap [Start] to start the method.
The Task Editor window opens.
See also
● Editing tasks (page 76)
4.3.5.4 Editing tasks
This window is accessed in several different ways:
● When starting a method
● When starting a sample series
● When starting a titer determination
● When controlling a queued task
You can enter the following parameters in the Task Editor dialog, depending on the type of analysis to be start
ed and the resources used:
Parameters
Method Name
Sample series
name
Queue position
Workspace
Description
Values
Name of the method being used for the analysis.
Name of the sample series being used for the analysis.
Only appears if the analysis was started from a sample series.
Indiactes the position in the task queue.
The workspace in which the sample series or analysis is to be
A | B
run.
In Workspaces A and B, tasks can be performed in parallel if they
do not use the same resources. Tasks in each workspace will be
performed one after the other.
Number of stan The number of standards to be analyzed with a method or series. 1…120
dards
Number of sam Defines the number of samples to be analyzed.
1…120
ples
Start position < Defines the start position of the first sample on the sample
1...60 | 1...303 | CP |
changer. CP means current position.
CP+1 | CP+2
Rondo only offers numbers in the range of 1...60.
ID 1
The ID for the first or only sample of an analysis.
Arbitrary
Sample size
You can enter the sample size here.
0…1000 [g] | [mL]
For fixed entry types, this field only appears as an info field.
0…106 [pcs.]
Weight
Weight in [g].
0…1000
Appears only if Entry type = Weight was selected.
Volume
Volume in [mL].
0…1000
Appears only if Entry type = Volume was selected.
Pieces
The number of sample(s).
0…106
Appears only if Entry type = Pieces was selected.
Task comment
Enter a comment or remark.
Arbitrary
Treat as priority Define the task and whether this should be queued with high pri Yes | No
task
ority.
76
Continuous run
After each termination of the analysis (using series or methods)
the analysis is automatically restarted (this is done until the
process is canceled manually).
Yes | No
Note
● All the parameters that can be edited in the Task Editor dialog or the sample data dialog will overwrite the
settings defined in the method for the same parameters.
● All non-editable parameters that are displayed as an info field are only shown for orientation purposes and
list the settings from the method.
● If the sample size must be entered before the analysis but the user does not do so, the user will be required
to enter it immediately before the start of the analysis.
4.3.5.4.1 Editing samples
If the analysis you want to start is a single determination, you can enter the sample size or sample ID directly
as a parameter in the Task Editor dialog.
In general, the sample data can be entered for each individual sample. In Samples, a list of the individual
samples is displayed.
Parameters
Number
ID 1
Sample size
Description
Defines the number of the sample.
You can enter the sample size here.
For fixed entry types, this field only appears as an info field.
Weight per
The weight in [g] per pirece.
piece
Appears only if Entry type = Pieces or Fixed pieces was select
ed.
Density
You can enter the sample's density, in [g/mL], here.
Does not appear for the Entry type = Pieces and Fixed pieces.
ID 2…ID 3
The name defined here will be used as the default name for the
respective sample on the sample loop.
Only appears subject to the settings made for Number of IDs.
Comment
You can enter a brief comment about the series.
Correction factor Any correction factor that can be used in calculations.
Temperature
The temperature in [°C] during the analysis. If temperature moni
toring is activated in a titration function, the system will ignore
the sample temperature given here.
Values
1…120
Arbitrary
0…1000 [g] | [mL]
0…106 [pcs.]
0 … 1000
0…100
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
0.0001…106
-20…200
4.3.5.4.2 Adding shortcuts
When you create a shortcut by choosing AddToHome, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Description
Any name for the shortcut.
Immediate start The method, series, or manual operation can be started immedi
ately. This enables you to start the analysis without any interfer
ing dialog.
Homescreen
You can select the free position for the shortcut on the Home
position
screen.
Values
Arbitrary
Yes | No
1…12
4.3.5.5 Task list
1 On the home screen tap on [Tasks] to display the online view of the active task or the task list. Only if mul
tiple tasks are in queue.
2 If multiple tasks are pending and you tap on the current task in the Task list, you will be taken to the online
view.
- or If multiple tasks are pending and you tap on a queued task in the Task list, you will be taken to Task Man
agement.
77
Status display of Tasks
Blue
Yellow
Yellow / blue blinking
No task is lined up.
A task is running right now.
A task is waiting for confirmation
Status of tasks
Tasks can have various statuses, which you can change.
Status
Created
Explanation
This task has been created. To start or queue, tap on
[Start].
This task has been assigned to a workspace and is
waiting in the queue. This will start automatically
when it reaches the very top of the list.
This task is currently in progress.
This task has been suspended and can be resumed.
The instrument is blocked.
Waiting
Running
Suspended
4.3.5.6 Controlling tasks while a task is running
1 On the home screen, tap on [Tasks].
2 If multiple tasks are queued, select the task that is currently running. Otherwise, ignore this step.
The online view is displayed.
3 Select the desired function.
Steps
Results
Axes
Measured Values
Samples
Suspend
Explanation
Displays the results and statistics for the analyzed samples after the analysis.
You can select the units for the horizontal and vertical axes from a list.
Use this option to display a table of measured values during the analysis.
Choose this option to change sample and series data.
● Continue: Choose this option to continue the analysis.
● Stop: Choose this option to stop the suspended analysis.
● Create Sample Series: Create a sample series based on the running task.
● Skip sample: The analysis continues with the next sample. The current sam
ple is marked in the Results as Excluded.
● Skip sample scope: The analysis omits the current sample scope and contin
ues with the next one. The scope is marked in Results as Excluded.
● Task Info: Displays the task information.
4.3.5.7 Controlling tasks while a task is queued
A list of tasks is shown.
2 Select a queued task.
The Task Editor window with a selection of options will be displayed.
78
Steps
Control
Explanation
● Pause: Choose this option to pause the analysis.
● Stop: Choose this option to stop the analysis.
● Send to front: The analysis is sent to the first position in the queue.
● Send to back: The analysis is sent to the last position in the queue.
Samples
Choose this option to edit or add samples.
See also
4.3.5.8 Resetting
The Reset button on the instrument acts as an "EMERGENCY STOP" switch and ends all tasks that are currently
running. If the titrator malfunctions or there is an operating error, you can stop all current tasks by pressing the
reset button. Afterward, for each task, you can decide whether to stop or continue it.
1 Press
on the instrument.
The Instrument Reset screen appears, listing all tasks. You have the options to continue or to stop the
tasks.
2 Tap on a task in the list to get the options for a single task.
- or Tap [Continue] to continue all tasks.
- or Tap [Stop all] to stop all running tasks.
- or Tap [Back] to go to the home screen.
Releasing the reset state of the instrument
The instrument is in RESET state, which is indicated on the by the red top bar and the button Reset on the
home screen.
1 Tap [Reset] on the home screen.
The Reset Info screen appears. You have the options to continue or to stop all the tasks.
2 Tap [Continue] to continue all tasks.
- or Tap [Continue] to continue all tasks.
- or Tap [Back] to return to the home screen.
You can use manual operations to access various titrator functions that are not directly connected to the execu
tion of an analysis, but that might be useful during the sample preparation, for example.
You can call up the following manual operations from here with the relevant titrator components:
Hardware com
ponents
Stirrer
Sensor
Burette
Pump
Possible manual operations
Possible usages
Stir
Measure
Rinse
Rinse multiple burettes
Dispense
Manual titration
Pump
Dissolve a solid sample
Determine the pH or temperature of a solution
Rinse burette before changing a titrant
Rinsing several burettes simultaneously
Dispense during sample preparation
Manual titration using a color indicator
Pump auxiliary reagents in and out, fill and empty sam
ple vessels, replace the solvent (for Karl Fischer water
determination).
79
Hardware com Possible manual operations
ponents
Auxiliary instru Control
ment
Sample changer Move to position
Move titration head
Rinse
Possible usages
Activating a valve
Prepare an analysis
● With the T70 and T90 models, you can perform a maximum of six manual operations simultaneously (with
one hardware component each), if your power consumption permits.
● With the T70 and T90 you cannot start another manual operation if a manual titration is being executed.
● The T50 model does not allow parallel execution of multiple manual operations.
● Manual operations can also be executed while an analysis is running, if the hardware components that you
want to operate manually are not going to be used by the analysis and if the power consumption permits.
(T70 and T90 only)
● The resource parameters in all editable fields can be changed temporarily (only for the execution of the
manual operation in question) and can vary from the setup settings. The changes made will not be copied
over to the setup, however.
4.3.5.9.1 Stirrer
To switch a connected stirrer (Rod stirrer or magnetic stirrer) on or off for a definable time interval and at a
definable stirring speed, select the following:
Navigation: Home > Manual > Stirrer
1 Make a selection in Titration stand.
2 Select the desired stirrer in Stirrer output and enter the speed in [%].
3 Enter the stir time in [sec] or select "∞" for an infinite duration.
4 Tap [Start] to start the stirrer.
The stirrer starts. Tap [Stop] to stop the stirrer at any time (terminating the manual operation).
Parameters
Titration stand
Description
Defines which titration stand is to be used.
Stirrer output
Speed
Stir time
Defines the stirring speed in [%].
The stirring time, in [sec], during which the stirrer should be in
operation. Select "∞" for unlimited stirring time.
Values
List of available titration
stands
ration
0…100
0…104 | ∞
● Entries made here will only be applied to the manual operation and will have no effect on the instrument
settings.
4.3.5.9.2 Sensor
To take a measurement using any connected sensor, select the following:
Navigation: Home > Manual > Sensor
1 Make a selection in Sensor.
2 Select the desired stirrer and enter a speed.
3 For polarized, potentiometric and conductivity sensors, specify whether the temperature should be entered
manually or automatically.
80
4 For manual temperature acquisition, enter the temperature.
- or For automatic temperature acquisition, select a connected temperature sensor and the temperature unit to be
used.
5 Enter the duration of the measurement in [sec] or select "∞" for an infinite duration.
6 Select whether to output a record on the printer.
7 To output a record on the printer, use dt [sec] to define the time interval between measurements.
8 Tap [Start] to start the measurement.
The measurement starts. Tap [Stop] to stop the measurment at any time (terminating the manual opera
tion).
During the measurement, the system will display the online curve (measured values in the selected unit ver
sus time). Use [Measured values] to display a table of measured values instead of the curve.
Temperature sensor
You can define the following parameters for a manual operation:
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Unit
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Duration
Record
dt
Description
Select a sensor from the list. The list depends on the sensor type
selected in Type.
Values
List of available sensors
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will °C | K | °F
stands
ration
0…100
The measurement and stirring time, in [sec]. Select "∞" for
0…104 | ∞
unlimited measurement time.
If activated, the measured values will be printed out.
Yes | No
Defines the time interval in [sec] for outputting measured values 1…6000
to the printer.
Only appears if Record = Yes was selected.
settings.
Potentiometric sensors are potentiometric indicator electrode, such as glass electrodes for pH measurement,
Redox electrode for measuring the redox potential or ion-selective electrodes (ISE) for determining of ion content
in the solution. Below, the editable parameters are listed for both potentiometric sensors and photrodes used for
turbidimetric and color induced titrations:
Parameters
Sensor
Description
selected in Type.
Values
81
Sensor input
Unit
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Duration
Record
dt
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | pH | pM | A | %T
stands
ration
0…100
Defines whether to enter the temperature manually (Yes) or via a Yes | No
temperature sensor (No).
If the temperature is entered manually, you can enter it here, in
-20…200
[°C].
Only appears if Temperature manual = Yes was selected.
Here you can select the required temperature sensor.
Only appears if Temperature manual = No is selected.
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
The unit of measure for the temperature measurement.
°C | K | °F
Only appears if Temperature manual = No was selected.
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
to the printer.
● The parameters for temperature acquisition or entering the temperature, Temperature manual,
Temperature, Temperature sensor, Sensor input and Temperature unit are omitted for mV sensors and
the phototrode.
settings.
Polarized sensor
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Indication
Ipol
82
Description
selected in Type.
Values
AB1/Sensor2 | More
ration
Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of mea Voltametric | Ampero
sure: [mV] = Voltametric, [µA] = Amperometric.
metric
Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for the voltametric indica 0.0…24.0
tion.
Upol
Defines the polarization voltage [mV], for an amperometric indi
cation.
0…2000.0
Only for polarized sensors and Indication = Amperometric.
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Duration
Record
dt
stands
ration
0…100
-20…200
[°C].
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
°C | K | °F
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
to the printer.
settings.
Conductivity sensor
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Unit
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Description
selected in Type.
Values
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Defines the unit of measure to be used for the measurement.
mS
stands
ration
0…100
-20…200
[°C].
83
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Duration
Defines the time interval in [sec] for outputting measured values
to the printer.
Record
dt
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
°C | K | °F
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
1…6000
settings.
4.3.5.9.3 Burette
In this window, carry out various manual operations with the available burettes.
Rinse an available burette or rinse multiple burettes at the same time, dispense a defined quantity of titrant or
run a manual titration with a selected burette.
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette
Rinse burette
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette > Rinse
This operation lets you rinse a burette and its connecting tubes and fill it with fresh titrant, for example if you
want to remove air bubbles from the system.
1 Select the titrant you want to rinse with.
2 Select the drive on which the titrant is installed. (For PnP burettes, the system automatically selects the
appropriate drive.)
3 Enter the number of cycles you want to run.
4 Enter the discharge volume in [%] to define the percentage of the burette's total volume that you want to
discharge during each rinse passage.
5 Enter the filling rate in [%] to define the speed at which you want to refill the burette. (100% is the maxi
mum rate.)
6 Tap [Start] to start the procedure.
The procedure starts. Tap [Stop] to stop the procedure at any time.
● Make sure that the dispensing tube is directed into a vessel which is a multiple of the volume of the burette.
● For reagents with a higher viscosity or volatile reagents, we recommend reducing the filling rate to prevent
air from being drawn in and the titrant from outgassing.
You can determine the following parameters:
Parameters
Titrant
Drive
Cycles
Discharge vol
ume
Fill rate
84
Description
Select a titrant from the list of the defined titrants.
The drive on which the burette with the selected titrant is installed.
Defines the number of rinse cycles to be executed.
The volume of titrant, in [mL], to be discharged during the rins
ing process.
mum filling rate.
Values
Titrant list
1…8
1…100
10…100
30…100
Rinse multiple burettes
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette > Rinse multiple burettes
Several burettes can be rinsed at the same time using this operation. If more than four burettes are rinsed at the
same time, the corresponding drives are actuated sequentially, i.e. the first four burettes are rinsed simultane
ously first, followed by the next four burettes.
1 Select the corresponding drives to rinse the burettes with titrant.
2 Enter the number of cycles during which rinsing is to take place.
Parameters
Drive 1…Drive
8
Cycles
Description
Drives on which the burettes with titrant are installed.
Values
Yes | No
1…100
● The drives can only be seen if they are connected.
● Drives that are equipped with a PnP burette are opened again at the specific fill rate of the titrant, whereas
conventional drives are opened at 100% fill rate.
Dispense
Navigation: Home > Manual > Burette > Dispense
This manual operation lets you manually dispense a defined quantity of titrant.
1 Select the titrant you would like to dispense.
appropriate drive.)
3 Enter the volume to be dispensed in [mL].
mum rate.)
Parameters
Titrant
Drive
Volume
Fill rate
Description
Defines the volume to be dispensed, in [mL].
mum filling rate.
Values
Titrant list
1…8
0.001…100
30…100
Manual titration
Navigation: Manual > Burette > Manual titration
To perform a manually controlled titration, proceed as follows:
1 Select the titrant you would like to titrate with.
appropriate drive.)
mum rate.)
4 Select the sensors you would like to use for the measurement from the list of sensors defined in the setup.
5 Select the stirrer output for the stirrer and enter a speed.
6 Specify whether the temperature should be entered manually or automatically.
85
7 For manual temperature acquisition, enter the temperature.
- or For automatic temperature acquisition, select a connected temperature sensor and the temperature unit to be
used.
8 Select whether the results should be given in the form of consumption (of the titrant) or content (in the sam
ple).
9 Select the measurement unit and the number of decimal places for the results.
10 For results given as content, select the sample's entry type (Volume or Weight) and enter the sample quan
tity m, the density d (for entry types Volume or Weight), the molar mass M and the equivalent number z for
the substance to be tested.
11 Specify whether a record should be output to the printer and select which elements should be contained in
that record (Results, Table of measured values and Curve).
12 Tap [Start] to start the manual titration and move to the online dialog.
13 Tap [Dispense] once to add a minimum volume of titrant. If you touch and hold [Dispense], the system
will continuously add titrant.
The dispensing rate will increase as you hold down the button.
After you release the button, the system will titrate at the minimum speed again the next time you tap the
button.
14 Tap [Exit] to end the manual titration.
During the manual titration, the system will display the measured value, the titrant consumption, and a curve
(measured value versus consumption) on the screen. After you finish, a record can automatically be output to
the printer. You can also view the results, measured values and curve on the screen.
● For the results of the manual titration, the system takes as a basis the titrant consumption until the conclu
sion of the titration. The EQP is not calculated!
Parameters
Titrant
Drive
Fill rate
Sensor
Sensor input
Unit
Indication
Ipol
Upol
Description
mum filling rate.
selected in Type.
Values
Titrant list
1…8
30…100
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | pH | pM | pX |
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
K | °F | µS/cm | mS/cm |
µS | mS
metric
tion.
Defines the polarization voltage [mV], for an amperometric indi 0…2000.0
cation.
Titration stand
86
stands
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Result
Unit
Unit
Decimal places
Entry type
Sample size
Density
M
Record
Incl. result
Incl. table of
measured val
ues
Incl. curve
ration
0…100
-20…200
[°C].
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
°C | K | °F
Select whether to output the result of the manual titration as the
Consumption | Content
amount of titrant consumed or as the content in the sample.
The unit for stating the result in the form of the titrant consump
mL | mmol
tion.
Only for Result = Consumption.
The unit for stating the result as the sample content.
mol/L | mol/kg | g/L |
Only for Result = Content.
g/kg | % | ppm
Specify the required number of decimal places for the results.
1...4
The entry type for the sample size.
Weight | Volume
Only for Result = Content
The sample size, in [mL] or in [g], depending on the entry type 0.0001…100
selected.
The density of the sample substance to be determined, in [g/mL]. 0.0001…100
Defines the molar mass of the substance [g/mol].
List of concentra
tion/titer standards and
substances
Defines whether to output a record to the printer after the titration. Yes | No
Here you can specify whether the record should contain all the
Yes | No
results.
Only appears for Record = Yes.
Here you can specify whether the record should contain a table of Yes | No
measured values.
Here you can specify whether the record should contain a curve. Yes | No
the phototrode.
4.3.5.9.4 Pump
Navigation: Home > Manual > Pump
This manual operation will use a connected pump to pump in any volume of auxiliary reagent or - depending
on the connection of the tubes - to drain it from the titration vessel.
87
Proceed as follows to start a pump process:
1 Select the pump and adjust the pum rate.
2 Enter the volume in [mL] to be added.
Parameters
Action
Description
Determines the actions for the pump process.
Values
Pumps | When using
the Karl Fischer Solvent
Manager: Drain | Fill |
Replace Solvent
Auxiliary
The auxiliary reagent to be added.
List of available auxil
reagent
iary reagents
Pump
Max. pump rate Displays the defined pump rate in [mL/min] as defined in the set 0.1…1000
tings. Changing this value does not change the rate of the pump,
only the time calculated for the addition.
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Volume
The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. Select "∞" for unlimited
0…1000 | ∞
pumping.
Pump property Defines the properties for the pump used.
1-way | 1-way, two
rates | 2-way, fine rate
Rate
Allows to reduce the pump rate.
10…100 (2-way, fine
Only if the pump supports this and if the pump is connected to
rate) | 50/100 (1-way,
an InMotion.
two rates)
Direction
Defines the pump direction for a 2-way pump
Forward | Reverse
Drain time
Defines the pumping time for draining a fluid.
0...1000 | ∞
The duration of the drain operation for the tubes should be as
long as possible to ensure that the tubes are completely free of
liquids following draining.
Fill time
Defines the pumping time for filling a liquid.
0...1000 | ∞
Reset counter
If this parameter is set, all counters are reset when cell filling
Yes | No
commences (applies to current capacity per number of sam
ples). The fill date for the cell is also reset.
Stirrer
A stirrer can be switched on.
Yes | No
Only for Action = Fill or Drain.
Titration stand
The name of the titration stand.
List of titration stands
only if stirrer is activated.
Stirrer output
Specifies the stirrer output at the relevant board (only available if Internal stirrer | More
Stirrer is activated).
ration
Speed
Speed in [%].
0…100
Only if stirrer is activated.
4.3.5.9.5 Auxiliary instrument
Navigation: Home > Manual > Auxiliary instrument
Selectively control here the titrator's inputs and outputs. You can transmit outgoing signals and query incoming
signals. This lets you check whether the communication is functioning between the titrator and a connected
auxiliary instrument (lid handler, dispenser, etc.). In this way, manually triggered auxiliary instrument functions
can be used as support for a titration.
88
To activate an auxiliary instrument, proceed as follows:
1 In Control type, select the auxiliary instrument to be controlled.
2 Enter the specific communication parameters for the control type.
● For Control type = Stirrer, you may use a second stirrer simultaneously to a stirrer started by the manual
operation Stirrer. (Only for the T70 and T90)
The following parameters are available, depending on the type:
Parameters
Control type
Description
The control type of the auxiliary instrument.
For Control type = Output 24 V, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Select the auxiliary instrument to be controlled from the list.
Output
iary instrument.
Duration
The time, in [sec], the auxiliary instrument should be switched
on. Select "∞" for unlimited time.
Values
Output 24 V | Stirrer |
Out TTL (Single pin) |
Input TTL (Single pin) |
TTL (Multipin) |
RS-232
Values
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
0…104 | ∞
● An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Output 24 V can be switched on and off or operated
for a defined period of time.
For Control type = Out TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Output
iary instrument.
Values
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Mode
Determines the number and type of TTL signal issued.
Fixed time | Input con
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time trolled | Sequential
period.
Input controlled: A signal received at the control inlet controls the
control outlet. The Auxiliary Instrument function will be terminated
as soon as the signal changes at the control inlet or after a
defined maximum time has expired.
Sequential: The control output runs through a defined sequence.
Duration
0…104 | ∞
Input aux. instr. The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input List of auxiliary instru
(control input).
ment
Only appears for Mode = Input controlled.
Input
MB/TTL-In 1 | MB/TTLOnly appears for Mode = Input controlled.
In 2
Max. wait time The maximum waiting time for a signal change.
0…104 | ∞
89
Output signal
Normal: The signal is transmitted without conversion.
Inverted: The signal is transmitted in inverted form.
Normal | Inverted
Only if Mode = Input controlled.
Number of puls The number of impulses in the planned sequence.
es
Only if Mode = Sequential.
0…104
Pulse duration
0…104
Interval
The duration of a pulse, in [sec].
Only appears for Mode = Sequential.
Defines the time span, in [sec], between two impulse starts.
0…106 | 0…104
● If Mode = Input controlled was selected, the system checks the incoming input signal until the maximum
time expires or a signal is received.
For Control type = Input TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Input
Input signal
Indicates whether an rising or a falling input signal should be
detected.
Values
Rising | Falling
0…104 | ∞
● Use the control type Input TTL (Single pin) to wait for a rising or falling input signal. The manual operation
will be ended as soon as an input signal is received or the maximum waiting time is exceeded.
For Control type = Stirrer, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Name
Speed
Output
Description
iary instrument.
Duration
Values
0…100
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
0…104 | ∞
● An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Stirrer can be switched on and off or operated for a
defined period of time.
For Control type = RS-232, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Connection
conductivity board.
Values
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
ASCII characters
Output sequence Defines the output sequence to be transmitted by the titrator.
ASCII control characters are generated with sequences started by
the backslash character followed by three digits. For example:
\013 for Carriage Return
\010 for line feed.
Wait for
Defines whether the system should wait for a response sequence Yes | No
response
from the device.
Input sequence The response sequence from the external device.
Arbitrary
Only if Wait for response = Yes was selected.
90
Max. wait time
The maximum waiting time for a signal change.
0…104 | ∞
● Use the control type RS-232 to transmit any signal and (if you so specify) to wait for a response.
4.3.5.9.6 Sample changer
Navigation: Home > Manual > Sample changer
Use this manual operation to move the titration head of a connected sample changer, approach a specific posi
tion on the rack and use the rinse function on the sample changer.
The available options may vary depending on the type and configuration of sample changer.
To perform the required action for a sample changer, proceed as follows:
1 Make a selection in Sample changer.
2 Select an option in Action.
3 According to the selection, enter the additional values and options.
4 Tap [Start] to start the action.
The action starts. Tap [Stop] to stop the action at any time.
Parameters
Description
Sample changer Select the sample changer here.
Action
Defines the action to be executed on the sample changer.
Values
Rondo60/1A |
Rondo60/1B |
Rondo60/2A |
Rondo60/2B | InMotion
T/1A | InMotion T/1B |
InMotion T/2A | InMo
tion T/2B
Move to position |
Move titration head |
Rinse
Depending on the action to be executed, the following parameters will be available:
Move to position
Parameters
Description
Position
Defines the position on the rack to which the system should
move.
Direction
Specifies whether to rotate the rack forward or backward.
Titration head
The vertical position to which the titration head of the sample
position
changer should be brought.
Cond. measure: This position is 20 mm above the Sample posi
tion and is intended to immerse the conductivity sensor into the
sample but not the pH sensor, preventing electrolyte contamina
tion from the pH sensor.
Only available with InMotion.
Values
1…maximum number
of positions on the rack
Forward | Backward
Sample | Rotate |
Rinse | Cond. measure
Move titration head
Move here the sample changer's titration head to one of possible vertical positions.
Parameters
Titration head
position
Description
Values
Sample | Rotate |
91
Rinse
The sensors, stirrer, tubes, etc. on a sample changer can be rinsed, with or without draining the rinse liquid.
Parameters
Auxiliary
reagent
Pump
Max. pump rate
Description
Values
iary reagents
Displays the defined pump rate in [mL/min] as defined in the set 0.1…1000
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Rinse cycles
The number of rinse cycles to be run.
1…100
Vol. per cycle
The rinse volume in [mL] per cycle.
0…1000
Position
1…maximum number
move.
Drain
Defines whether to drain the rinse liquid.
Yes | No
Drain pump
Defines which pump is to be used for drainage.
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
4.3.5.10 Creating Methods
You create a new method by changing the parameters of a delivered METTLER method and saving it under a
new method ID or by selecting an appropriate method template from the list of proposals, modifying it, and
saving it under a new ID.
Navigation: Home > Methods
1 Tap [New] to create a new method on the basis of a template.
2 From the available templates, choose the one that is most similar to the method you wish to create.
You can now modify this method in line with your requirements by inserting or removing method func
tions or modifying its parameters.
3 In the method function Title, enter a new method ID. Afterwards, a new method will be stored under this
method ID.
4 Assign a title to your new method.
5 Select available method functions to modify their parameters in line with your requirements.
6 Tap [Insert] to add additional method functions to the template.
7 Now use the arrow-shaped button to select the required position for the new method function in the method.
(You will only be able to insert the method functions that are allowed in the corresponding location based
on the method syntax.)
8 From the list, select the method function that you want to insert.
9 Modify the individual parameters of the method function in line with the resources.
The new method function appears in the method.
10 To delete a method function, select the function in question and then tap [Delete].
The method function disappears from the method.
11 After inserting all required method functions, tap [Save].
92
The method is saved under the method ID and appears in the list of available methods.
● When establishing a new method, follow the rules specified by the instrument.
4.4 LiquiPhysics
4.4.1 Configuring the Ethernet interface
This setting defines the connection type Ethernet for connection to LabX.
1 On the instrument, select Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > Network settings to access the interface set
tings.
3 Under PC settings select the the option [Connect to LabX at start-up].
4.4.2 Configuring the USB interface
An additional device-specific USB driver must be installed on the PC to which an instrument from the
LiquiPhysics Excellence range is connected.
This setting defines the connection type USB for connection to LabX.
tings.
2 Set the parameters and save the entries.
3 Under PC settings select the option [Connect to LabX at start-up].
Type
IP address
Subnet mask
USB
Information field
Information field
Note
● Communication between the instrument and the instrument server also uses the HTTP protocol when using
a USB port. The use of a proxy server in the network can cause problems with establishing the connection.
In this case, deactivate the proxy settings on the local PC.
See also
● Installing USB drivers (page 94)
93
4.4.3 Installing USB drivers
An additional device-specific USB driver must be installed on the PC to which an instrument from the
Installing the USB driver
Ensure that the instrument is not connected to a USB interface on the PC.
1 Open the directory Drivers/LiquiPhysics USB Driver on the LabX installation DVD.
2 Double-click on "liquiphysics.exe" to start the installation, and follow the instructions on the screen.
The USB driver is installed.
Selecting the USB driver
The USB driver must be installed on the PC.
1 Connect the instrument to the PC using a USB cable. Windows opens the new hardware wizard.
2 Select the option that specifies not to search for the software via "Windows Update".
3 Select the option to install the software from a data carrier, and enter the following path.
Program Files/Mettler-Toledo/LiquiPhysics/Driver
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
The instrument can now be added after a waiting time of 30 - 60 seconds.
LabX.
played.
94
again.
products, sample series and manual operations. Shortcuts are
identified by a small arrow.
user may log on.
LabX.
4.4.4.3 Selecting method
Selecting the methods folder
– On the home screen, tap on [Methods] or [Products].
Methods or Products is displayed.
95
Selecting methods
1 Tap on [Methods] to access the method list.
2 Select a method from the list.
The Task Parameters window opens.
3 Tap [Start] to start the method.
After a method has been started, it is included in the list of
tasks.
4.4.4.4 Task list
Navigation: Home
1 On the home screen tap on [Tasks] to display the online view
of the active task or the task list. Only if multiple tasks are in
queue.
2 If multiple tasks are pending and you tap on the current task
in the Task list, you will be taken to the online view.
- or If multiple tasks are pending and you tap on a queued task in
the Task list, you will be taken to Task Management.
Status display of Tasks
Blue
Yellow
Yellow / blue blinking
No task is lined up.
A task is running right now.
A task is waiting for confirmation
Status of tasks
Tasks can have various statuses, which you can change.
Status
Created
Symbol
Explanation
This task has been created. To start or queue, tap on [Start].
Waiting
This task has been assigned to a workspace and is waiting in the queue.
This will start automatically when it reaches the very top of the list.
Running
This task is currently in progress.
Suspended
This task has been suspended and can be resumed. The instrument is
blocked.
Paused
This task has been paused and can be resumed - even on a different instru
ment, from the point at which it was last saved.
4.4.4.5 Controlling tasks while a task is running
2 If multiple tasks are queued, select the task that is currently running. Otherwise, ignore this step.
The online view is displayed.
3 Select the desired function.
Steps
Results
Axes
Measured Values
96
Explanation
Displays the results and statistics for the analyzed samples after the analysis.
You can select the units for the horizontal and vertical axes from a list.
Use this option to display a table of measured values during the analysis.
Steps
Samples
Suspend
Explanation
Choose this option to change sample and series data.
● Continue: Choose this option to continue the analysis.
● Stop: Choose this option to stop the suspended analysis.
● Skip sample: The analysis continues with the next sample. The current sam
ple is marked in the Results as Excluded.
● Skip sample scope: The analysis omits the current sample scope and contin
ues with the next one. The scope is marked in Results as Excluded.
4.4.4.6 Controlling tasks while a task is queued
A list of tasks is shown.
2 Select a queued task.
The Task Editor window with a selection of options will be displayed.
Steps
Control
Explanation
● Pause: Choose this option to pause the analysis.
● Stop: Choose this option to stop the analysis.
● Send to front: The analysis is sent to the first position in the queue.
● Send to back: The analysis is sent to the last position in the queue.
Samples
Choose this option to edit or add samples.
See also
Navigation: Home > Manual
With the help of the manual operations, you may call up various functions of the instrument that are indepen
dent of the immediate execution of an analysis but which for example, may be helpful during the preparation of
the samples.
You can perform the following manual operations with the automation units:
Action
Dry
Rinse
Pump sample
Rotate turntable
DryPal
•
FillPal
•
•
SC1
•
•
•
SC30
•
•
•
•
97
4.4.4.7.1 Drying
Parameter
Dry mode
Dry duration
Max. dry dura
tion
Description
Fixed duration:
Drying is stopped after a defined period
Auto:
Oscillation is measured. Drying is interrupted, when the oscilla
tion value becomes stable.
Drying time in [s]
Maximum dry duration:
If the oscillation value has not stabilized by the end of this peri
od, drying is terminated.
Displayed, if
"Drying" activated
"Dry mode" = "Fixed
duration"
"Dry mode" = "Auto
matic"
4.4.4.7.2 Rinse
Parameter
Solvent
Rinse duration
Description
Definition of the solvent at the connections "Rinse 1" and "Rinse
2"
Duration of the rinse; Input from infinity "∞" is possible.
Displayed, if
"Type" = "SC1" /
"SC30"
-
4.4.4.7.3 Pump sample
Parameter
Direction
Description
Cell:
Pump in direction cell
Vial:
Pumpin direction vial
Displayed, if
-
Note:
FillPal only pumps in one direction.
The automation units SC1 /SC30 can pump in both directions.
Speed
Pump speed
"SC1" / "SC30":
• "Maximum": Filling with maximum pump speed
• "Reduced": Filling with speed set at the automation unit
Automation =
FillPal/SC1/SC30
"FillPal":
• "High"
• "Medium"
• "Low"
The appropriate pump speed can be set in Home > Setup >
Hardware > Automation.
Duration
Duration of pumping input from infinity is possible.
-
4.4.4.7.4 Rotate turntable
Parameter
Go to
98
Description
Home:
Sample changer (SC30) moves to position "Home"
Relative position:
Sample changer (SC30) moves a definable number of steps
Absolute position:
Sample changer (SC30) moves to an indefinite position
Next vial:
Sample changer (SC30) moves to next vial
Displayed, if
-
Position
Absolute position, that is approached by the sample changer.
Number of steps
Number of steps, that should be traveled on the rack
"Go to" = "Absolute
position"
"Go to" = "Relative
position"
4.4.4.7.5 Managing shortcuts for manual operations
Shortcuts for manual operations enable you to start manual operations directly from the home screen of an
instrument. These shortcuts may be edited either on instruments or on the PC.
Adding shortcuts for manual operations
1 Select the desired settings for the shortcut.
2 Click on [AddToHome].
The shortcut is displayed on the home screen.
Editing shortcuts for manual operations on the instrument
1 Click on [Edit shortcuts] and choose the shortcut to be edited from the list.
2 Edit the properties of the shortcut and tap on [Save].
4.4.4.7.6 Editing shortcuts for manual operations on the PC
A shortcut created on an instrument for Manual Operation may be edited further on the PC. In addition, you
can make these applicable, for example, on other instruments.
Navigation: Resources > Instruments
1 Select [Edit Manual Operation Shortcut] in the ribbon bar and choose the desired shortcut from the list. An
Editor window is opened.
2 Edit the properties of the shortcut.
Properties
Parameter
Explanation
Shortcut
Name
Enter the name of the shortcut.
Created by
Displays the author of the shortcut.
Manual Opera Displays the type of the manual operation.
tion
Parameters
Displays the parameters of the manual operation.
Immediate start The task starts without first displaying a confirmation dialog.
Instrument Shortcut
Is visible on
Tasks may be displayed on multiple instruments and on the workbench. Specify the alloca
instru
tion.
ment/workbench
Users and Roles
Shortcut is per The shortcut is personal and is not displayed to other users.
sonal
Availability for Defines the users to whom the shortcut is displayed.
users
Availability for Defines the roles of users to whom the shortcut is displayed. There is no accumulation tak
roles
ing place between Availability for users and Availability for roles.
4.4.4.8 Displaying results
Navigation on the instrument: Home > Results
Results and result sets from LabX can be displayed on instruments. For this purpose, search folders with the
relevant settings are created in LabX.
1 On the home screen, tap on [Results]. The Sample list is displayed.
99
You can select the displayed columns and define the column widths. To do this tap on [Select
columns].
2 On the Sample list, tap on the desired sample. The dialog Sample results is displayed.
You can display the various data.
Results of samples
Results
Sample data
Measurements
Resource data
Task results
Explanation
Displays results, e.g. density.
Displays sample-specific information, e.g. creation time.
Displays information on the analysis, e.g. nD or d.
Displays the resources used, e.g. the method or adjustment set used.
Displays task-specific information including with multiple samples.
See also
● Editing instrument settings (page 305)
4.5 Thermal Values
4.5.1 Configuring the Ethernet Interface
tings.
LabX.
100
played.
again.
You will find all methods, products and sample series under
Analysis.
products and sample series. Shortcuts are identified by a small
arrow.
Elements on the Analysis screen
On the home screen, tap on [Analysis]. All of the methods, prod
ucts and sample series stored in LabX can be displayed here.
101
Selecting methods
1 On the Analysis screen, tap on [Methods]. A list is displayed
list in LabX.
Editing tasks
1 On the home screen, tap on [Task]. The system displays a
list of all tasks for this instrument.
2 Select the required action from the list.
3 Click on the task that you want to edit.
user may log on.
LabX.
4.5.2.3 Instrument adjustment
The melting point measurements taken when using reference substances form the basis for an adjustment. A
maximum of six points can be adjusted, whereby you can select from the ten most recently performed analy
ses. If, for example, you wish to perform a 3-point adjustment, three analyses that were performed using refer
ence substances must be available. If an analysis has been used for an adjustment, it is no longer available for
subsequent adjustments. None of the analyses performed before the last successful adjustment can be used
subsequently, regardless of whether or not these were ever used for an adjustment.
The following conditions must be met in order to perform a manual adjustment.
● The required quantity of reference substances must be known to the system and the specific data must be
entered as batches.
● Methods for the melting point according to "Pharmacopeia" or "Thermodynamic" are available for the rele
vant reference substances. The respective reference substance must be selected under "Reference sub
stances".
● The Thermal Values instrument must be connected and logged on to LabX.
● All methods must be performed with the corresponding reference substances, whereby the analyses must
not be interrupted.
102
Performing a manual adjustment
The points listed above must be fulfilled.
1 On the home screen tap on Adjustment. The adjustment parameters are displayed.
2 Click on [Adjustment Points] to select the desired number of adjustment points. The adjustment parameters
are displayed again.
3 Click on [Reference Substance 1] and select the desired reference substance from the list.
4 Repeat this step for all additional adjustment points.
5 Click on [Calculate].
The adjustment is performed.
See also
● Managing reference substances (page 353)
● Melting point/range (page 300)
● Test melting point/range (page 297)
When the instrument is switched on and no analysis is running, you can perform the following manual tasks:
● Set the furnace temperature
● Switch off the furnace
● Display a live video from inside the furnace
Set the furnace temperature
Navigation: Home > Manual > Set furnace temperature
The Switch on button in the lower right-hand corner shows that the temperature control is switched off.
1 Enter the required furnace temperature in the Set temperature field. The current furnace temperature is dis
played under Set temperature.
2 Click on [Switch on] to approach the set temperature.
The furnace temperature approaches the entered value. This is shown by the changing value of the cur
rent furnace temperature under Set temperature and can be followed in the diagram.
The button in the lower right-hand corner now reads Switch off, which indicates that the temperature
control is switched on.
Switch off the furnace
The button is enabled only when the furnace is switched on or if you have not defined Furnace power off as
the end behavior in the most recently performed analysis.
– Click [Furnace power off].
After you have clicked on Furnace power off the measuring cell cools down to room temperature.
View inside of furnace
You can display a video of the inside of the furnace.
– Click [Furnace inside view].
The current reflected light image is displayed in the top half of this window and the current transmitted
light image is shown in the lower half.
If the transmitted light holes are blocked, this can be detected in the lower image. In this case, the holes
must be cleaned.
The current furnace temperature is displayed on the right under Actual temperature.
103
5 Workbench
Navigation: Quick Links > Workbench - or - Analysis > Show Workbench
The "Workbench" permits you to setup individually adaptable views for instruments. The components available
are dependent on the type of the instrument used. The settings such as position and the components displayed
are saved for each user and module. Hence, you may specify different views for the various types of devices.
The default view may be restored whenever required. For this purpose, select [Restore Default View] in the rib
bon bar.
Each component may be arranged at the top, bottom, right or left. You may also dock this in order to fill up the
entire window area. By dragging one component into another, these may be grouped and arranged as tabs.
Workbench overview
Components
Shortcuts
Sample Series
Methods
Products
Tasks
Task Editor
Results
Statistics
Data Transfer
Measurements
Measured Values
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Graph
Table of measured val
ues
Result buffer
Burette
Pump
Sample Changer
Sensor
Stirrer
•
•
•
•
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 Open the workbench for the desired instrument.
2 If the workbench view is fixed, you cannot make any changes to the display. Select [Unlock View] in the
ribbon bar to revoke the lock.
3 To add components, select [Manage Views] in the ribbon bar and choose a desired component from the
list. In order to remove components, click on the [Close] symbol at the top of the component.
The new components may be arranged as desired.
4 Repeat the steps to add other components.
5 If you would like to fix the view of the workbench, select [Lock View] in the ribbon bar.
The display within the components is comparable with the display on the instrument for the same registered
user.
104
Workbench
5.1 User interactions - Dialog
The User interaction component on the workbench enables the entry of values that are necessary during the
execution of a task. The types supported on the PC are numbers, text and selections. If the workbench for a
device is displayed with an active task and an entry is necessary, this component is automatically displayed in
the foreground. This happens even if the component was previously hidden.
Entries may be made on either the workbench or on the instrument.
5.2 Shortcuts - Workbench
The Shortcuts component on the workbench displays the same list of links as that on the instrument for the
same registered user. You create a new task by executing a shortcut. In order to edit shortcuts, click on
and
choose the shortcut to be edited.
Workbench
105
Note
● If a user does not have the rights for creating tasks, he may create tasks nonetheless via the shortcuts
assigned to him.
See also
● Managing shortcuts (page 125)
5.3 Sample series - Workbench
The Sample Series component on the workbench shows the series that may be executed on the instrument.
● You can create sample series based on methods.
● You can edit existing sample series.
● You can create a task based on the selected sample series.
● You can create and start a task based on the selected sample series.
● You can create shortcuts to allow the quick creation of a task based on a sample series.
See also
● Managing sample series (page 126)
5.4 Methods - Workbench
The Methods component on the workbench shows the methods that may be executed on the instrument. You
may execute methods or generate shortcuts from them.
● You can create new methods in the method designer.
● You can edit existing methods.
● You can create a task based on the selected method.
● You can create and start a task based on the selected method.
● You can create shortcuts to allow the quick creation of a task based on a method.
106
Workbench
See also
● Managing methods (page 132)
5.5 Products - Workbench
The Products component on the workbench shows only those products that are relevant for this instrument.
● You can create a new product.
● You can edit existing products.
● You can create a task based on the selected product.
● You can create and start a task based on the selected product.
● You can create shortcuts to allow the quick creation of a task based on a product.
See also
● Managing products (page 129)
5.6 Tasks - Workbench
The Tasks component on the workbench shows the tasks for the same user logged on.
Controlling a task
A Tasks component is displayed on the workbench in which all user-defined tasks are displayed.
1 Select the desired task in the list.
2 Depending upon the current status of a task, you can modify it using the buttons using the available com
mands for the relevant status.
Workbench
107
Task state
Status
Created
Waiting
Running
Suspended
Paused
Stopped
Completed
Explanation
This task has been created.
This task has been assigned to a workspace and is waiting in the queue. The precondi
tions from this method have been fulfilled.
This task is currently in progress. The dynamic preconditions are being fulfilled by the
instrument and workspace.
This task has been suspended and can be resumed. The instrument is blocked.
This task has been paused and can be resumed, even on a different instrument, from
the point at which it was last saved.
This task has been stopped and cannot be restarted.
This task has finished successfully.
Editing queued tasks
A Tasks component is displayed on the workbench in which all user-defined tasks are displayed.
1 Double-click on the desired task in the list. An Editor window is opened.
2 Change the task by editing the samples.
See also
● Task editor - Workbench (page 108)
● Managing tasks (page 121)
5.7 Task editor - Workbench
On the Task Editor component on the workbench you may add or edit samples for the task being executed cur
rently. If active sample series are edited, the product assignment can also be edited.
● Completed samples and used parameters are displayed in grey. Completed samples are no longer editable.
● Running samples are displayed in orange.
● Parameters that are defined by products are displayed in light red and cannot be edited.
Editing active tasks
– Change the active task by editing the samples, as a result of which every change is applied immediately.
Note
● A task that has not been assigned to a role or a user is displayed to all users.
● Tasks that are not assigned to any instrument are displayed on all instruments.
● The function Products is not available for the instrument type "Titration".
108
Workbench
● For the titrator model T90, two workspaces A and B are displayed.
See also
● Auto ID generation (page 124)
5.8 Results - Workbench
The Results component on the workbench shows the results for the task being executed currently.
1 Select a result in the list view.
2 To display detailed results in an editor window, click on
3 To edit the comment of a result, click on
.
.
Note
5.9 Statistics - Workbench
The Statistics component on the workbench shows the same data as the Results component but in a diagram
format. The samples may be displayed either in the order of the samples or measurements.
1 In Result selection select the result to be shown in the graph pane.
2 In the graph pane, select or clear options and select curve displays.
Note
See also
● Zooming options (page 25)
Workbench
109
5.10 Data transfer - Workbench
The Transfer Data component on the workbench enables the transfer of data from an active task to another
open application on a client PC. Note that the method used must contain a Transfer Data method function.
This function enables you to transfer data to a different application opened on a client PC. While methods with
this method function are executed, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled.
● A target application must be open on the system on which the LabX client is running. This is typically a
spreadsheet application.
● The window for the target application must not be minimized.
● Open a Transfer Data component on the workbench.
● Activate the function and choose the target application.
See also
● Transfer data (page 149)
5.11 Measurements - Workbench
Displays a table of measured values during an analysis.
5.12 Measured values - Workbench
The Measured Values component on the workbench shows the same data as the Measurements component
but in a diagram format. The samples may be displayed either in the order of the samples or measurements.
Enter the search criteria in the Filter field so that the results are filtered by name. By default, all results are dis
played.
5.13 Graph - Workbench
Displays the raw data sent by the instrument as a chart. Depending upon the current status of a task, you can
modify it using the buttons using the available commands for the relevant status. You can select or clear
options and select curve displays.
For Karl Fischer methods you find buttons such as Concentration determination or Drift determination.
Note
110
Workbench
See also
5.14 Table of measured values - Workbench
Displays a table of measured values during an analysis.
Note
5.15 Result buffer - Workbench
The results of a method can be stored in the result buffer of the titrator and then reused. Results are stored in the
buffer using the method function Calculation and the parameter Send to buffer. Results stored in the result
buffer may be accessed both from inside and outside a loop.
These results are assigned a unique method ID, allowing them to be reused for other calculations. They can be
accessed using the method of your choice, for example via Rx = Ry[method ID].
If, while an analysis is running, a method is waiting for a result with a corresponding method ID, the analysis
process is interrupted until the relevant result is generated and present in the result buffer.
Note
● An analysis which is in this waiting state can only be ended using Reset instrument or Stop. It is not pos
sible to proceed without a result.
● Once the titrator has been restarted the buffer is empty. (Recalculation is only possible using older, internal
ly stored analysis data.
● Implicit sample indexing ensures that the calculations for sample x only accesses results for sample x.
5.16 Pump - Workbench
This manual operation will use a connected pump to pump in any volume of auxiliary reagent or - depending
on the connection of the tubes - to drain it from the titration vessel.
1 Define all parameters for the manual operation.
2 Click
to start the procedure.
The procedure starts. Click
Parameters
Action
to stop the procedure at any time.
Description
Determines the actions for the pump process.
Values
Pumps | When using
the Karl Fischer Solvent
Manager: Drain | Fill |
Replace Solvent
Auxiliary
reagent
iary reagents
Pump
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Volume
The volume to be dispensed, in [mL]. Select "∞" for unlimited
0…1000 | ∞
pumping.
Workbench
111
Pump property
Defines the properties for the pump used.
Rate
an InMotion.
Defines the pumping time for draining a fluid.
The duration of the drain operation for the tubes should be as
long as possible to ensure that the tubes are completely free of
liquids following draining.
Defines the pumping time for filling a liquid.
If this parameter is set, all counters are reset when cell filling
commences (applies to current capacity per number of sam
ples). The fill date for the cell is also reset.
A stirrer can be switched on.
Only for Action = Fill or Drain.
The name of the titration stand.
only if stirrer is activated.
Specifies the stirrer output at the relevant board (only available if
Stirrer is activated).
Direction
Drain time
Fill time
Reset counter
Stirrer
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Speed in [%].
Only if stirrer is activated.
1-way | 1-way, two
10…100 (2-way, fine
rate) | 50/100 (1-way,
two rates)
Forward | Reverse
0...1000 | ∞
0...1000 | ∞
Yes | No
Yes | No
ration
0…100
5.17 Sensor - Workbench
To take a measurement using any connected sensor.
2 Click
5.17.1 Temperature sensor
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Unit
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Duration
Record
112
Workbench
Description
selected in Type.
Values
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will °C | K | °F
stands
ration
0…100
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
dt
Defines the time interval in [sec] for outputting measured values
to the printer.
1…6000
settings.
5.17.2 Potentiometric Sensor
Potentiometric sensors are potentiometric indicator electrode, such as glass electrodes for pH measurement,
Redox electrode for measuring the redox potential or ion-selective electrodes (ISE) for determining of ion content
in the solution. Below, the editable parameters are listed for both potentiometric sensors and photrodes used for
turbidimetric and color induced titrations:
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Unit
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Duration
Record
dt
Description
selected in Type.
Values
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
The unit of measure to be used for the measurement; the unit will mV | pH | pM | A | %T
stands
ration
0…100
-20…200
[°C].
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
°C | K | °F
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
to the printer.
Workbench
113
the phototrode.
settings.
5.17.3 Polarized sensor
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Indication
Ipol
Upol
Description
selected in Type.
Values
AB1/Sensor2 | More
ration
metric
tion.
cation.
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Duration
Record
dt
stands
ration
0…100
-20…200
[°C].
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
°C | K | °F
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
to the printer.
settings.
5.17.4 Conductivity sensor
114
Workbench
Parameters
Sensor
Sensor input
Unit
Titration stand
Stirrer output
Speed
Temperature
manual
Temperature
Temperature
sensor
Sensor input
Temperature
unit
Duration
Record
dt
Description
selected in Type.
Values
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Defines the unit of measure to be used for the measurement.
mS
stands
ration
0…100
-20…200
[°C].
AB1/PT1000 | More
ration
°C | K | °F
0…104 | ∞
Yes | No
to the printer.
settings.
5.18 Stirrer - Workbench
To switch a connected stirrer (Rod stirrer or magnetic stirrer) on or off for a definable time interval and at a
definable stirring speed.
2 Click
Parameters
Titration stand
Description
Stirrer output
Speed
Values
stands
ration
0…100
Workbench
115
Stir time
The stirring time, in [sec], during which the stirrer should be in
operation. Select "∞" for unlimited stirring time.
0…104 | ∞
settings.
5.19 Sample changer - Workbench
Use this manual operation to move the titration head of a connected sample changer, approach a specific posi
tion on the rack and use the rinse function on the sample changer.
2 Click
Parameters
Description
Sample changer Select the sample changer here.
Action
Defines the action to be executed on the sample changer.
Values
Rondo60/1A |
Rondo60/1B |
Rondo60/2A |
Rondo60/2B | InMotion
T/1A | InMotion T/1B |
InMotion T/2A | InMo
tion T/2B
Move to position |
Move titration head |
Rinse
Depending on the action to be executed, the following parameters will be available:
Move to position
Parameters
Description
Position
move.
Direction
Specifies whether to rotate the rack forward or backward.
Titration head
position
Values
1…maximum number
Forward | Backward
Sample | Rotate |
Move titration head
Move here the sample changer's titration head to one of possible vertical positions.
Parameters
Titration head
position
Description
Values
Sample | Rotate |
Rinse
The sensors, stirrer, tubes, etc... on a sample changer can be rinsed, with or without draining the rinse liquid.
Parameters
Auxiliary
reagent
Pump
116
Workbench
Description
Values
iary reagents
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Rinse cycles
1…100
Vol. per cycle
0…1000
Position
1…maximum number
move.
Drain
Defines whether to drain the rinse liquid.
Yes | No
Drain pump
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
5.20 Auxiliary instruments - Workbench
Selectively control here the titrator's inputs and outputs. You can transmit outgoing signals and query incoming
signals. This lets you check whether the communication is functioning between the titrator and a connected
auxiliary instrument (lid handler, dispenser, etc.). In this way, manually triggered auxiliary instrument functions
can be used as support for a titration.
2 Click
Parameters
Control type
Description
For Control type = Output 24 V, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Output
iary instrument.
Duration
on.
Infinite duration Select this option for an unlimited time.
Values
TTL (Multipin) |
RS-232
Values
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
0…104
Yes | No
● An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Output 24 V can be switched on and off or operated
for a defined period of time.
Workbench
117
For Control type = Out TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Output
iary instrument.
Values
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Mode
Determines the number and type of TTL signal issued.
Fixed time | Input con
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time trolled | Sequential
period.
control outlet. The Auxiliary Instrument function will be terminated
as soon as the signal changes at the control inlet or after a
defined maximum time has expired.
Duration
0…104
on.
Yes | No
Input aux. instr. The name of the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input List of auxiliary instru
(control input).
ment
Input
MB/TTL-In 1 | MB/TTLOnly appears for Mode = Input controlled.
In 2
0…104 | ∞
Output signal
Normal | Inverted
es
0…104
Pulse duration
0…104
Interval
The duration of a pulse, in [sec].
Only appears for Mode = Sequential.
0…106 | 0…104
● If Mode = Input controlled was selected, the system checks the incoming input signal until the maximum
time expires or a signal is received.
For Control type = Input TTL (Single pin), the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Input
Input signal
detected.
Values
Rising | Falling
0…104 | ∞
● Use the control type Input TTL (Single pin) to wait for a rising or falling input signal. The manual operation
will be ended as soon as an input signal is received or the maximum waiting time is exceeded.
For Control type = Stirrer, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Name
Speed
118
Workbench
Description
Values
0…100
Output
iary instrument.
Duration
on.
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
0…104
Yes | No
● An auxiliary instrument controlled by the control type Stirrer can be switched on and off or operated for a
defined period of time.
For Control type = RS-232, the following parameters are available:
Parameters
Description
Name
Connection
conductivity board.
Values
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
ASCII characters
Output sequence Defines the output sequence to be transmitted by the titrator.
ASCII control characters are generated with sequences started by
the backslash character followed by three digits. For example:
\010 for line feed.
Wait for
Defines whether the system should wait for a response sequence Yes | No
response
from the device.
Input sequence The response sequence from the external device.
Arbitrary
Max. wait time
The maximum waiting time for a signal change.
0…104 | ∞
● Use the control type RS-232 to transmit any signal and (if you so specify) to wait for a response.
5.21 Burette - Workbench
In this window, carry out various manual operations with the available burettes. Rinse an available burette or
rinse multiple burettes at the same time, dispense a defined quantity of titrant with a selected burette.
2 Click
Rinse burette
Parameters
Titrant
Drive
Cycles
Discharge vol
ume
Fill rate
Description
The volume of titrant, in [mL], to be discharged during the rins
ing process.
mum filling rate.
Values
Titrant list
1…8
1…100
10…100
30…100
Rinsing multiple burettes
Several burettes can be rinsed at the same time using this operation. If more than four burettes are rinsed at the
same time, the corresponding drives are actuated sequentially, i.e. the first four burettes are rinsed simultane
ously first, followed by the next four burettes.
Workbench
119
Parameters
Drive 1…Drive
8
Cycles
Description
Drives on which the burettes with titrant are installed.
Values
Yes | No
1…100
● The drives can only be seen if they are connected.
● Drives that are equipped with a PnP burette are opened again at the specific fill rate of the titrant, whereas
conventional drives are opened at 100% fill rate.
Dispense
This manual operation lets you manually dispense a defined quantity of titrant.
Parameters
Titrant
Drive
Volume
Fill rate
Description
Defines the volume to be dispensed, in [mL].
mum filling rate.
Values
Titrant list
1…8
0.001…100
30…100
5.22 Start Auto SmartCodes - Dialog
The Start Auto SmartCodes dialog box of the workbench enables the entry of values that are necessary to start
a task, using SmartCodes in connection with RFID reader or barcode scanner.
Note
● For the T90 titrator, two buttons are available for the two workspaces.
– Click [Start Auto SmartCodes] to start the procedure.
The dialog box to enter the parameters for starting the automation appears.
Parameters
Description
Sample Changer Select a sample changer for the automation.
Workspace
Start position
Reader type
Park position
Information of the used workspace.
Defines the start position of the first sample on the sample
changer. CP means current position.
Here, you can select the of reader to be used, barcode or RFID.
Defines the position the sample changer will approach after the
analysis is completed. Immersing the sensor into a solution pre
vents dehydration of the sensor membrane.
Values
List of available sample
changers
A|B
CP | CP+1 | CP+2 |
1...303
Barcode | RFID
List of available beakers
or vials
5.23 Task resources - Dialog
When starting a task, a message will appear if any of the needed resources have already been allocated or are
missing. All resources are listed, whereby already allocated or missing resources are marked. The task can be
restarted after correcting actions.
120
Workbench
6 Analysis
The Analysis workspace contains the following objects.
All table views can be customized, for example by changing the displayed columns and adjusting the column
width.
Object
Tasks
Methods
Sample Series
Series Sequences
Products
Messages
Explanation
Here you organize all tasks in the system.
Here you organize all methods in the system.
Here you organize all sample series in the system.
Here you organize all series sequences in the system.
Here you define which methods or analysis techniques you want to use for analyzing a
sample.
Messages generated by the system are displayed here.
See also
● Customizing table views (page 22)
6.1 Managing tasks
Tasks are assigned to instruments and inserted into the wait queues of the selected instruments. Tasks contain
information about methods, samples and the instrument. The list of tasks may be viewed both on the instru
ment and on the PC. Tasks may be started from this list. Tasks can also be executed in a time-controlled sys
tem.
You can define your own filters, which will then be displayed in addition to the series of predefined filters. Creat
ing your own search folders makes it easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data. You can assign mul
tiple criteria to a particular search folder and thereby create combinations that satisfy multiple criteria, e.g. all
tasks that have been carried out on a specific instrument by a given user in the last 24 hours.
The attribute in the column Origin is task specific. It presents the source from which a task was created. As ori
gin the following sources could come into consideration: Method, Product, Sample Series and Series
Sequence.
Navigation: Analysis > Tasks
New Search Folder
1 In the ribbon bar Folders > Editing, select [New Search Folder]. An Editor window is opened.
2 Give the search folder a meaningful name. Assign fields to the criteria, choose the corresponding operators
and arguments, and save your settings.
Edit Search Folder
1 Select the search folder that you want to edit.
2 In the ribbon bar Folders > Editing, select [Edit Search Folder]. An Editor window is opened.
3 Assign fields to the criteria, choose the corresponding operators and arguments, and save your settings.
See also
● Managing schedules (page 374)
● Tasks - Workbench (page 107)
6.1.1 Adding tasks
Navigation: Analysis > Methods or Sample Series or Series Sequence or Products
1 Select the required item (Method or Sample Series or Series Sequence or Product) in the table view.
Analysis
121
2 Select [New Task] in the ribbon bar and choose the desired instrument from the list. The task will be added
in the queue of the instrument.
- or Select [New Task] in the ribbon bar and choose No Instrument from the list. The task will be added in the
queue.
- or Select [Start New Task] in the ribbon bar and choose the desired instrument from the list. The task will start
immediately.
3 Edit the task properties or the samples to be analyzed.
Note
● A queued task can be started either on the instrument or on the PC.
● When using the option Start New Task and not all the required task parameters have been entered, you will
be prompted to enter these values.
See also
● Assigning tasks (page 123)
6.1.2 Editing tasks
Tasks that do not have the Stopped or Completed status can be edited. If a task has the Running status it can
be edited in the workbench.
An entry prompt for missing task parameters is displayed while a task is active. This happens if samples with
out default values in the task parameters were added to an active task.
In order to be able to modify a task, it must be assigned to the user logged in.
1 Select the required task in the table view.
2 Select [Open Task] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Edit the task properties or the samples to be analyzed.
Global Parameters
Parameter
ID
Name
Task name
Task comment
Treat as priority
task
Explanation
This indicates the ID of the method used, sample series and product.
This indicates the name of the method used, sample series and product.
Enter the name of the task.
Enter a comment or remark. This may also be changed if the task has the Completed
status.
Define the task and whether this should be queued with high priority.
Sample Scope
Parameter
Explanation
In this area, individual samples are added and the sample-specific data is defined. These are task parameters
from method functions which lie within the sample scope. Here, you may also specify task parameters from
method functions that do not lie within a sample range.
Sample ID
Here you can define the sample IDs. These can also be copied from the parameters of
the method.
Product
Only the products that are referenced to the selected method are displayed here. When
you select a product, the task parameters are copied automatically.
122
Analysis
Parameter
Task Parameters
Explanation
If a product is selected for a sample, the task parameters are entered automatically. If
these parameters have been set to Defined in the products, these can no longer be
modified. Values that cannot be modified are displayed in gray.
If no product is selected, default values from the method are used, although these can
be edited at any time.
Note
● When using the option Start New Task and not all the required task parameters have been entered, you will
be prompted to enter these values.
See also
6.1.3 Controlling tasks
Tasks can have various statuses. Depending on the current status, you can modify it using the commands that
are available for the status concerned.
In order to be able to modify a task, it must be assigned to the user logged in.
2 In the ribbon bar, select the desired command in the Control group.
Task state
Status
Created
Waiting
Running
Suspended
Paused
Stopped
Completed
Explanation
This task has been created.
This task has been assigned to a workspace and is waiting in the queue. The precondi
tions from this method have been fulfilled.
This task is currently in progress. The dynamic preconditions are being fulfilled by the
instrument and workspace.
This task has been suspended and can be resumed. The instrument is blocked.
This task has been paused and can be resumed, even on a different instrument, from
the point at which it was last saved.
This task has been stopped and cannot be restarted.
This task has finished successfully.
See also
6.1.4 Assigning tasks
Tasks are assigned to users, roles or instruments. You can edit the assignment depending on the current sta
tus.
Tasks that do not have the Running, Stopped or Completed status can be edited.
2 Select [Edit Task Assignments] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
Analysis
123
3 Edit the assignments.
Edit Task
Parameter
Users
Roles
Instruments
Explanation
In addition to users, you can also assign roles. The assignment is performed cumula
tively between users and roles.
One task can be assigned to multiple instruments.
Note
6.1.5 Auto ID generation
Entering sample IDs is simplified by an intelligent support tool. Follow the example below.
In addition to a free text, the sample ID can contain any number of placeholders #, 0 (zero), and @. The char
acter # represents a number, 0 (zero) represents a number without preceding zeros. The character @ repre
sents a letter. Space characters or _ must be used to separate a free text from placeholders.
The character sequence is structured so that it always begins from the right. If numbers are used on the left and
letters are used on the right, sequencing begins using the letters in ascending order first. When Z is reached, the
number is increased by a value of one, and the letters begin at A again.
Example of Auto ID generation
The sample series must be prepared by selecting a method and adding more than 10 samples.
1 For the first sample, enter the starting value ID_A## for the sample ID, and press Enter to confirm your
input. A dot is displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the input field.
2 If you move the mouse pointer over this dot, the cursor becomes cross-hairs. Click on the cross-hairs and
drag it downwards over several columns.
The value is counted up to ID_A9, then the value changes to ID_B0.
Input
Parameter
Starting value
Input
ID_A##
Generated values
Generated values
First
Second
Third
…
One hundred
Values
ID_A00
ID_A01
ID_A02
ID_B00
If ID_A99 is reached in this example, the counting continues with the value ID_B00.
124
Analysis
6.2 Managing shortcuts
Shortcuts enable you to start tasks directly from the Shortcuts list on the PC or from an instrument. Shortcuts are
applicable to methods, sample series, products and manual operations. Shortcuts are assigned to users,
groups or instruments.
● If a user does not have the rights for creating tasks, he may create tasks nonetheless via the shortcuts
assigned to him.
See also
● Shortcuts - Workbench (page 105)
6.2.1 Adding shortcuts
Navigation: Analysis > Methods or Sample Series or Products
1 Select the desired element in the table view.
2 Select [New Shortcut] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Configure the settings in the Properties tab according to your requirements.
4 Enter the data for the samples in the Samples tab and save the information.
See also
● Editing shortcuts (page 125)
6.2.2 Editing shortcuts
Navigation: Analysis > Methods or Sample Series or Products
All shortcuts created in the system are listed here and, depending on the rights of the user logged in, can be
edited. Private shortcuts are not displayed to other users.
1 Select [Edit Shortcut] in the ribbon bar and select the desired shortcut from the list. An Editor window is
opened.
2 Configure the properties of the shortcut in the Properties tab according to your requirements.
3 Enter the data for the samples in the Samples tab and save the information.
Properties
Parameter
Shortcut
Name
Methods or
Sample Series or
Products
Created by
Treat as priority task
Immediate start
Instrument Shortcut
Is visible on instru
ment/workbench
Users and Roles
Shortcut is personal
Availability for users
Availability for roles
PC Shortcut
Is visible on PC
Explanation
Enter the name of the shortcut.
This defines the method, sample series and the product.
Displays the author of the shortcut.
Define whether the task should be queued with high priority.
The task starts without first displaying a confirmation dialog.
Shortcuts may be displayed on multiple instruments and on the workbench. Spec
ify the allocation.
The shortcut is personal and is not displayed to other users.
Defines the users to whom the shortcut is displayed.
Defines the roles of users to whom the shortcut is displayed. There is no accumu
lation taking place between Availability for users and Availability for roles.
Specifies whether the shortcut is displayed on the PC. If the shortcut is displayed
on the PC, an instrument must be specified on which the corresponding task gets
executed.
Analysis
125
Parameter
Explanation
Instrument executing PC Defines the instrument on which the task is executed when the shortcut is started
shortcut
by the PC.
Sample Scope
Parameter
Explanation
Sample ID
the method.
Product
Task Parameters
Note
Product is displayed only if one sample series is the starting point for the shortcut and there are products that
are defined for the method currently selected.
See also
6.3 Managing sample series
With the help of sample series, you can combine several individual samples to form a single series. All sam
ples in the series are analyzed one by one in the specified order. A sample series can be used repeatedly, if
necessary by entering new sample-specific values.
Sample series are normally created based on methods, which include at least one Sample Scope method
function. Only then is it possible to define values specific to each sample using Task Parameters. Alternatively,
these values may also be taken over from Products.
In the sample series, all task parameters entered must be defined if these are to be used in assigned methods.
Note
● When you start a task based on a sample series, all task parameter default values defined in the method
are "overwritten" with values from the sample series.
● Whenever a method is modified, it may be necessary to adapt the sample series to the method.
● It is also possible for a sample series to be created without having any method associated with it. However,
it would not be possible to define task parameter values for these sample series.
● If a parameter is not defined, the sample series cannot be started.
126
Analysis
Associations of methods/products/series
See Using task parameters (page 167) for an expanded illustrative example.
Methods
In methods, it is possible to define task parameters that will act as placeholders for values
yet to be defined. The values can be entered either when a task, a product or a sample series
is created.
Products
Products are used to define the values of task parameters as appropriate to the properties of
a product.
Sample Series In sample series, specific values are defined for the task parameters or are referenced from
products.
See also
● Using task parameters (page 167)
● Sample series - Workbench (page 106)
6.3.1 Add sample series
Navigation: Analysis > Sample Series
1 Select [New Sample Series] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Define the properties for the sample series and select the method to be used.
3 If global parameters are defined in the method, these can be entered under Global Parameters.
4 Under Sample Scope, you can now add the individual samples and define their parameters.
You can create a task directly from a sample series. To do this, click on [New Task] or [Start New Task] in
the ribbon bar.
Analysis
127
See also
● Editing sample series (page 128)
6.3.2 Editing sample series
Navigation: Analysis > Sample Series
1 Select the required sample series in the table view.
2 Select [Open Sample Series] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Define the properties for the sample series and select the method to be used.
4 If global parameters are defined in the method, these can be entered under Global Parameters.
5 Under Sample Scope, you can now add the individual samples and define their parameters.
Properties
Parameter
Explanation
General Properties
This area is used to manage the basic properties of the sample series.
Name
Name of the sample series.
Comments
Here you can enter a comment.
Method
Select the method to be used for the sample series.
Continuous run
When enabled, the same task will be started automatically when the running task
is completed. Other waiting tasks will remain in the queue.
Global Parameters
This area displays the global parameters of a method. Global parameters are task parameters from method
functions that lie outside of the sample scope.
Parameter names and values are displayed. If default values have been defined, these are applied but can
also be overwritten.
Sample Scope
Parameter
Explanation
Sample ID
the method.
Product
Task Parameters
See also
● Sample scope (page 158)
6.4 Managing series sequences
This function is available for the titrator models T50 and T70.
With the help of Series Sequences, you can combine several sample series to form a single series. All sam
ples in the series are analyzed one by one in the specified order. A sample series can be used repeatedly, if
necessary by entering new sample-specific values.
128
Analysis
6.4.1 Add series sequence
Navigation: Analysis > Series Sequences
1 Select [New Series Sequence] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Define the properties for the series sequence and select the sample series to be used.
6.4.2 Editing series sequence
1 Select the required series sequence in the table view.
2 Select [Open Series Sequence] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Define the properties for the series sequence and select the sample series to be used.
Properties
Parameter
Explanation
General Properties
This area is used to manage the basic properties of the sample series.
Name
Name of the sample series.
Series Sequence ID
Here you can define an ID.
Comments
Here you can enter a comment.
User defined
Enter text here according to the defined label.
Sample Series
This area displays the used sample series. Add or remove sample series and change to order.
6.5 Managing products
Products are helpful for specifying parameter values for samples with similar properties. This means that a
product is used to define the values of task parameters as appropriate to the properties of the product. LabX can
manage a maximum of 2,000 products.
For a defined sample series, it is possible to specify whether one or more samples in the series should take val
ues from a selected product. At the time of sample series creation, a column is displayed to make it possible to
select a particular product.
Products are created and managed in the Product Editor. Products set forth the values to be defined for one or
more associated methods. The definition of task parameters by means of a product is optional.
Products are normally created based on methods, which include at least one Sample Scope method function.
Only then is it possible to define values specific to each product using task parameters.
Note
● When you start a task based on a product, all task parameter default values defined in the method are
"overwritten" with values from the product.
● Whenever a method is modified, it may be necessary to adapt the sample series to the method.
● It is also possible for a product to be created without having any method associated with it. However, it
would not be possible to define task parameter values for this product.
● This function is not available for the instrument type "Titration".
Analysis
129
See Using task parameters (page 167) for an expanded illustrative example.
Methods
is created.
Products
a product.
products.
See also
● Managing sample series (page 126)
● Products - Workbench (page 107)
6.5.1 Adding products
Products are always linked to one or more methods, and multiple products can be linked to one and the same
method.
Navigation: Analysis > Products
1 Select [New Product] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Define the properties in Properties and Method according to your requirements.
130
Analysis
See also
● Editing products (page 131)
6.5.2 Editing products
Products are always linked to one or more methods, and multiple products can be linked to one and the same
method.
Navigation: Analysis > Products
1 Select the required product in the table view.
2 Select [Open Product] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Define the settings in Properties according to your requirements.
4 In Method click on [Add / Edit] and choose one or more of the displayed methods to assign these to the
product.
5 For the selected method, the editable task parameters of the method are listed. Enter the appropriate product
parameters.
Properties
Parameter
Explanation
Name and Properties
Internal ID
The ID used by LabX.
Product ID
Define an ID for the product.
Name
Specify the name for the product.
User defined
Specify additional information. You can adapt the label of the field.
Additional Information
Description
Any description of the product.
Comment
Any comment or remark on the product.
Document Management
Release State
Indicates the status of the product.
Method
Parameter
Explanation
Attached Methods You can use the Add / Edit button to add or remove methods.
Product Parameters For the selected method, the editable task parameters of the method are listed. The
standard values for the method are proposed by default. If Defined is selected for a par
ticular value, this defined value can no longer be modified when a task is started.
Analysis
131
6.6 Managing methods
In order to conduct an analysis using an instrument, you need a method. A method represents the program for
conducting the analysis. It consists of a series of method functions that are processed in sequence by the
instrument. A method function usually comprises several substeps, which consist of parameters with change
able values. For improved manageability, you can create several folders and subfolders for methods.
A number of method templates have already been saved in LabX. These methods were developed by METTLER
TOLEDO for specific uses and can be used immediately for analyses accordingly. You can modify the method
templates according to your own specifications and save them as user methods. When creating methods,
depending on the device type, you can refer to method templates which specify the structure of the method for
specific purposes, and whose parameters already contain the most suitable default values.
Methods can be exported or imported. This enables you to send methods to another location, for example by email or using a data storage medium. Methods can also be printed out. These commands are available in the
Miscellaneous group in the ribbon bar.
See also
● Methods - Workbench (page 106)
6.6.1 Creating methods
A number of method templates have already been saved in LabX. These methods were developed by METTLER
TOLEDO for specific uses and can be used immediately for analyses accordingly. You can modify the method
templates according to your own specifications and save them as user methods. When creating methods,
depending on the device type, you can refer to method templates which specify the structure of the method for
specific purposes, and whose parameters already contain the most suitable default values.
Enter a search text
1 Select [New Method] in the ribbon bar and choose a desired configuration from the list.
The window with a selection of templates is displayed.
2 From the available templates, choose the one that is most similar to the method you wish to create.
3 Click [Open] to edit the method according to requirements.
- or Click [Save] to save the template to the list of methods.
Parameter
Explanation
Available Method Templates
Search text...
If you enter a search string, only those objects are displayed whose name con
tains the search string.
Category/Name
Find the method templates sorted by category and name.
ID
Additional Identification of the method templates.
Type
Information on the type of application.
Compatibility
Specifies to which instruments the method is compatible.
Description
A brief description of the specific possibilities and features of the method.
Application Notes
If available, application notes are accessible in this area. Double-click to open the corresponding file in Adobe
Reader.
6.6.2 Editing methods
Methods are so-called "versioned objects". A new version is created every time you save the object. The history
can be displayed at any time, and older versions can be restored.
The settings such as position and the components displayed are saved for each user. Hence, you can define
their preferred view.
The default view may be restored whenever desired. To do this, select [Restore Default View] in the ribbon
132
Analysis
bar.
Each component may be arranged at the top, bottom, right or left. A component may also be arranged as
required in such a manner that it fills up the entire free space between the adjacent components. For this pur
pose, for example, the middle field of the docking targets is selected. By dragging one component into another,
these are grouped and arranged as tabs.
A component may also be arranged as required in such a manner that it fills up the entire free space between
the adjacent components. To do this, the middle field of the docking targets is selected (compare point 5 in the
following figure)
1 If the Method Editor view is fixed, you cannot make any changes to the display. Select [Unlock View] in the
ribbon bar to revoke the lock.
2 To add components, select [Manage Views] in the ribbon bar and choose a desired component from the
list.
The new components may be arranged as desired.
3 Repeat the steps to add other components. In order to remove components, click on the [Close] at the top
of the component or select it in the [Manage Views] ribbon bar again.
4 If you would like to fix the view of the Method Editor, select [Lock View] in the ribbon bar.
1
Designation
Ribbon bar
2
Library
3
Quick search
4
Graphical Editor
5
6
Docking targets
Return Values
Explanation
This tab contains a list of all available method functions. You can use
drag&drop to move method functions from the library to the graphical editor.
If you enter a search string, only those objects are displayed whose name
contains the search string.
A method normally consists of a sequence of several method functions. The
method functions used are represented graphically in the graphical editor.
The docking targets are displayed if a movable component is moved.
This tab displays the returned values for the currently selected method func
tion. The raw data output by the instrument are also listed here. This list is
required for creating formulae. This component is moved in the example.
Analysis
133
7
Designation
Parameters
8
Quick search
9
Method
Explanation
This tab displays parameters for the currently selected method function. The
fields can be edited and a wide range of options is available for entering the
required parameters.
If you enter a search string, only those objects are displayed whose name
contains the search string.
Each method must be assigned a method ID of your choice. Select a unique
and meaningful name for methods that simplify identification for you. Here,
you may also select the export settings for the automatic export of results.
In the Method labels section there are additional freely selectable fields in
which you may enter additional information.
Note
● Method names must not start with a number, and must not contain any blank or special characters.
● Depending on the settings selected, the method must undergo a signature and release process.
See also
● Editing export templates (page 370)
● Versioned objects (page 20)
● Label settings (page 30)
6.6.3 Inserting method functions
The method functions can be grouped either alphabetically or by category. In addition, it is possible to limit the
number of method functions displayed by clicking on “Show most important”. A quick way to find method func
tions is to enter text into the search field. Only those method functions that match this text will be displayed.
A method must be opened in the Method Editor.
1 Click on a method function in the library and hold down the mouse button to drag this into the graphical
editor.
134
Analysis
A green plus sign is displayed to indicate the positions in which the selected method function can be
inserted.
2 Move the method function to the required plus sign and release the mouse button.
The method function is displayed at the desired position.
To switch quickly to the parameters, double-click on a method function in the graphical editor.
6.6.4 Editing parameters
Parameters of a method can be selected or implemented depending on the application. Parameters are general
ly validated when you save and when you switch to a different method function. If a mandatory field is not
completed or the value in a field is outside limits, this is indicated by a red exclamation mark. Clicking on an
exclamation mark displays the associated information.
To edit the parameters of a method function, these must be selected in the graphical editor. A selected
method function is displayed in the graphical editor in green.
1 Click on the required method function in the graphical editor.
2 Choose the settings on the Parameters tab and enter the required information in the fields. Save the data.
Note
● Where the data of a particular method function are referenced in a different method function, this is done by
means of the “Name”. Please take this into account if you intend to change or edit a name.
● Double-clicking on a method function in the graphical editor automatically displays the corresponding para
meters.
6.6.5 Importing and exporting methods
Methods can be exported or imported. This enables you to send methods to another location, for example, by
e-mail or using a data storage medium. The suffix .lmt is used for LabX methods.
Importing methods
1 Select [Import Method] in the ribbon bar.
2 Enter the path to the file and click on [OK].
3 The method is displayed in the Method Editor and can be edited according to requirements.
The import process is not complete until the method has been saved.
Analysis
135
Exporting methods
1 Select the required method in the table view and click on [Export Method] in the ribbon bar.
The method is saved in the file system.
Note
● Methods from the former software "LabX titration" with the file extension .cop can be imported by this ver
sion of LabX. As the method function Record is different in this version of LabX, select a suitable report tem
plate from the list.
136
Analysis
6.7 Method functions general
Note
● This function is not available for the instrument type "Titration".
6.7.1 User interaction
6.7.1.1 Beep
When you select this function, the instrument emits a beep.
Method function: Beep
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Behavior
Parameters
Duration
Duration unit
Description
Values
Title of the method function for output in reports. The input of Uni
code characters is supported.
Name of the method function that is displayed in a method.
Where the data of a particular method function are referenced in
a different method function, this is done by means of this name.
Special characters and space characters are not permitted.
A free description of the method function, which is displayed in
the properties. This description supports transparency in complex
methods.
Description
Defines the length of the beep.
Unit in which the beep duration is specified.
-
-
Values
0.0 ... 30 s
Seconds | Miliseconds
6.7.1.2 Sample IDs
This function will direct the system to display or request the sample IDs. By default, this method function is pro
vided in Sample Scope, but others can be provided within the same cycle. In the parameters of Sample
Scope, you define the parts that form the sample's unique identifier, which will then be used to identify a partic
ular sample. In the top-level Sample IDs method function, only parts belonging to the unique combination can
be entered. In the method function within a sample cycle, additional IDs can be requested and displayed. The
unique parts can only be displayed here.
Method function: Sample IDs
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Sample IDs
Parameters
Description
Edit sample ID Determines whether the sample IDs are requested.
Show sample ID Determines whether the sample IDs are displayed, e.g. in a sec
ond cycle.
-
-
Values
Yes | No
Yes | No
Analysis
137
Barcode reader configuration
Parameters
Description
Values
Close after
If this checkbox is activated, the data entry dialog is automatical Yes | No
scanning
ly closed following a successful scan procedure.
Return values
A list of return values is provided in the relevant chapter for each method function.
See also
● Return values (page 143)
6.7.1.3 Message
If this function is enabled, a notification appears on the instrument display.
Method function: Message
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Message appearance
Parameters
Description
Show "OK" but If this checkbox is selected, the OK key will be displayed on the
ton
instrument.
Show "Cancel" The Cancel button allows the user to cancel the current task or
button
the "Sample scope".
User buttons
A maximum of two user keys can be created. For this function
you can enter text of your choice. Longer entries of more than 12
characters are abbreviated.
-
-
Values
Yes | No
Yes | No
Any
If a Decision branch method function is foreseen subsequently in the sequence, the key result of this method
function can be queried. A decision can then be made on this basis.
Background Col Defines the background color of the message display. If "Default"
or
is selected, the default background color of the instrument is
used.
Text Color
Defines the color of the message display. If Default is selected,
the default background color of the instrument is used.
White | Black | Green |
Red | Blue | Yellow |
Standard
Standard
Message content
Parameters
Description
Values
Caption
Here you can enter a short text to be displayed as the title bar.
Any
Message
Here you can enter a multiline text which is displayed as a notifi Any
cation.
Data binding enables values from previous method functions to be used in text fields. The same syntax applies
as for formulas, but this must be contained in curly brackets. In addition to calculations or simple data bind
ings, texts can also be entered. The following control characters are supported: <tab>, <cr> and <lf>.
Data binding
Display
138
Analysis
Mean value: {mean(Weight1.Net)} g
Mean value: 5.342 g
Icon
Defines which symbol is displayed with the notification.
- | Info | Warning |
Question | Error
Return values
See also
● Messages (page 169)
6.7.1.4 Method information
You can use this function to show method information on the instrument display. In addition to the method ID
and name, this also includes, for example, the release status.
Method function: Method Information
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
6.7.1.5 Number
This function defines a numerical value. It also supports the option for the user to enter a value on the instru
ment display. This value can then be used, for example, as a variable or a constant.
Method function: Number
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Number entry
Parameters
Lower limit
Upper limit
Default value
Request value
Displayed unit
Decimal places
Description
Values
methods.
Description
This value defines the minimum value that can be entered. If no
value is entered, there is no lower limit.
This value defines the maximum value that can be entered. If no
value is entered, there is no upper limit.
Specifies the preset value.
-
-
Values
- | Any numerical value
- | Any numerical value
Any numerical value
that must be between
the limits specified.
If this checkbox is selected, the value is entered on the instrument Yes | No
or in LabX. A default value can be preset.
Specifies the unit that is displayed on the input dialog.
Any
Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point.
0 … 14
Analysis
139
Message content
If a message content is to be defined, this will be displayed at the start of the method function.
Parameters
Caption
Message
Icon
Description
Here you can enter a multiline text which is displayed as a notifi
cation. If the message is empty, the entry screen will be dis
played immediately.
Values
Any
Any
Question | Error
Error message content
An error message is displayed if the value exceeds or falls below the set limits.
Parameters
Caption
Message
Icon
Description
played immediately.
Values
Any
Any
Question | Error
If no message is entered, LabX displays a default text informing you that the specified limits were not main
tained.
Error message appearance
Parameters
Description
Background Col Determines the color of the background for the notification. If
or
Default is selected, the default background color of the instru
ment is used.
Text Color
Determines the color of the text for the notification. If Default is
selected, the default background color of the instrument is used.
Values
Standard
Standard
Parameters
Description
Values
Close after
scanning
Message appearance
Parameters
Description
Allow canceling If this checkbox is selected, it is possible to cancel this function.
A dialog is displayed offering a selection of options.
or
ment is used.
Text Color
Export
Parameters
Include results
in exports
Description
If this checkbox is selected, the results are exported. (Only if in
Method Properties > Export Template is selected.)
Return values
See also
140
Analysis
Values
Yes | No
Standard
Standard
Values
Yes | No
6.7.1.6 Selection
You can use this function to display a selection in the form of a list on the instrument.
Method function: Selection
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Selection
Parameters
Description
Values
Selectable items Define the elements that are displayed as a list on the instrument. Any
For this function you can enter text of your choice. Longer entries
of more than 12 characters are abbreviated. To add items, click
on New.
Using data binding, values from previous method functions can also be included, e.g. {Weight1.Net}. Later in
the sequence, a Decision branch method function may be provided since the list entry selected is requested, on
the basis by which a decision may be taken.
The sequence of the elements may be changed as desired while creating or editing the method.
Message content
Parameters
Caption
Message
Icon
Description
played immediately.
Message appearance
Parameters
Description
or
ment is used.
Text Color
Export
Parameters
Include results
in exports
Description
Values
Any
Any
Question | Error
Values
Yes | No
Standard
Standard
Values
Yes | No
Return values
Analysis
141
See also
● Decision branch (page 157)
6.7.1.7 Text
This function enables you to enter a text of your choice on the instrument.
Method function: Text
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Text entry
Parameters
Minimum text
length
Maximum text
length
Default text
Request text
Description
Values
methods.
Description
Minimum permitted length of the text. If this value is set to "0",
the user is not required to enter a text.
Maximum permitted length of the text. Without any specification,
200 characters are permitted.
Specifies the text that is used as a default in the input dialog.
If this checkbox is selected, the text is entered on the instrument
or in LabX. A default value can be preset.
-
-
Values
0 ... 200 characters
1 ... 200 characters
0 … 200 characters
Yes | No
Message content
Parameters
Caption
Message
Icon
Description
played immediately.
Values
Any
Any
Question | Error
Error message content
An error message is displayed if the value exceeds or falls below the set limits. This function is not available for
all instrument types.
Parameters
Caption
Message
Icon
Description
cation.
Values
Any
Any
Question | Error
If no message is entered, LabX displays a default text informing you that the specified limits were not main
tained.
Error message appearance
Parameters
Description
or
ment is used.
142
Analysis
Values
Standard
Text Color
Standard
Parameters
Description
Values
Close after
scanning
Message appearance
Parameters
Description
or
ment is used.
Text Color
Export
Parameters
Include results
in exports
Description
Values
Yes | No
Standard
Standard
Values
Yes | No
Return values
See also
6.7.1.8 Return values
Return values are listed in the relevant tab in the method functions. Depending on the instrument and method
function, different values are available for displaying results or for calculating results using the data binding
functions.
Parameter
Text
Button
Number
Unit
Creation time
Explanation
Request for the text entered on the instrument.
Request for the key that was pressed on the instrument.
Request for the number entered on the instrument.
The selected unit in the Number method function.
The time at which the return values were created.
Value range
-
6.7.2 Miscellaneous
6.7.2.1 Block instrument
You can use this function to block an instrument. Methods can only be performed on blocked instruments if
Can run on blocked instruments is selected in the method properties.
This method function is typically arranged inside a method function Decision branch. A method function
Unblock instrument can then be arranged inside another method function Decision branch.
Users who have been assigned the appropriate rights can also unblock instruments manually.
1 Select the required instrument in the table view.
2 Select [Unblock instrument] in the ribbon bar.
The instrument will no longer be blocked.
Method function: Block instrument
Analysis
143
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Blocking information
Parameters
Description
Blocking reason Reason for which an instrument was locked. This is displayed
both on the instrument and in the list of instruments. The reason
is also entered in the audit trail.
-
-
Values
Any
See also
● Unblock instrument (page 155)
6.7.2.2 Sample changer position
This function changes the position of the sample changer.
Method function: Sample changer position
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Sample Changer Position Settings
Parameters
Description
Change
Specifies the manner in which the device moves to a position.
Home refers to position 1.
Position
If you select Relative, the position is increased by the specified
number of steps relative to the current position. If you select
Absolute, the device moves to the entered position.
-
-
Values
Relative | Absolute |
Home | +1 | Detect
next sample | Current
position
Number
6.7.2.3 Peripheral communication
This function enables communication with a peripheral device. Commands can be sent and answers can be
received.
Peripheral devices are added in LabX and can be permanently assigned to instruments. Peripheral devices can
also be connected directly to a balance, in which case these are configured at the balance rather than in LabX.
Only one single peripheral device can be operated on a balance.
Method function: Peripheral communication
144
Analysis
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Instruction
Parameters
Instruction
Instruction
description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Description
Values
Here you can enter a short instruction that appears as the first
- | Any
line on the terminal before the method function is processed. If no
entry is made, this step is skipped with no user interaction.
Here you can enter a brief comment that appears as the second Any
line on the terminal before the method function is processed.
Peripheral Device
Parameters
Description
Target peripher Defines the peripheral device to be used.
al
Peripheral device 1-4: Refers to the peripheral devices assigned
to the instrument.
Instrument: Refers to the peripheral devices connected directly to
the balances.
A peripheral device may also be selected directly.
Command
Specifies the command that is sent to the peripheral device. If this
field is left empty, a response from the instrument is waited for
without a command being sent beforehand. Data binding
enables values from previous method functions to be used.
Control characters are written in pointed brackets. ASCII code can
also be used for control characters. The number 12 in the exam
ple is interpreted as "ff".
Example: "start<12>request<cr><lf>"
Values
Peripheral Device 1-4
| Instrument | Added
peripheral devices
Any
Control character table
Control character
<bs>
<tab>
<lf>
<cr>
<ff>
<esc>
<del>
ASCII
8
9
10
13
12
27
127
Expected Response
The same control characters are used for the response as for the commands.
Parameters
Wait for
response
Response pat
tern
Use length
Description
Defines whether the response from the peripheral device is evalu
ated.
Defines the pattern by which the received response is referenced
in the return values. A response with no value is also possible.
[N1] references number 1. [T1] references text 1. Characters
must be positioned between placeholders (of the same type).
Example: "[N1]_[T1]end"
Use this option when placeholders are used for termination or no
response pattern is being used.
Values
Yes | No
Any
Yes | No
Analysis
145
Response length Specifies the number of characters in the response.
1 …100000
Wait timeout [s] Specifies the maximum time after which the process is canceled. 1 …1000000
Return values
See also
● Default assignments (page 319)
● Adding peripheral devices (page 39)
6.7.2.4 Recreate task
This method function generates a copy of the current task, with the same properties and task parameters, if par
ticular conditions are fulfilled.
1. Depending on the user's setting:
All results generated so far in this task are checked, to see whether one of them has the status Not OK.
Only the last task created before this method function is checked, to see whether it has the status Not OK.
2. The task has not yet been recreated.
3. The task is not running in automation mode in combination with a sample changer.
4. The task contains a maximum of one sample.
If all these conditions are fulfilled at the same time, a copy of the current task is created.
Method function: Recreate task
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Settings
Parameters
Mode
Description
Values
methods.
Description
Defines which method functions are checked.
-
-
Values
Check previous
method functions |
Check latest method
function
Return values
See also
6.7.2.5 Label printer
This function is used to send a printout to a label printer. Printing takes place on the default label printer of the
instrument used for the method.
Method function: Label printer
146
Analysis
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Contents to Print
Parameters
Description
Contents
Determine which elements are to be printed. You can combine
different types of data, control characters, text, and data via data
binding, depending on the printer used.
-
-
Values
Any
Which control characters are used depends on the printer model. For more information, refer to the printer
instructions.
Data binding
Display
Mean value: 5.342 g
See also
6.7.2.6 Pause task
This function is used to pause a task that is currently running. A task can be continued at any time on the
instrument or on the PC.
Use outside a sample scope
If a paused task is resumed, this starts from the beginning of the task. If this method function is used outside a
sample scope, all data are discarded.
Use within a sample scope
If a paused task is resumed, this starts from the beginning of the current sample scope.
Depending on the status in the parameter Stop sample cycle, the data are either stored or they are not.
If Stop sample cycle is deactivated, the data from the current sample will be stored, thereby completing the
sample cycle for this sample. The next time the task is executed, the sample will be assigned to the next sam
ple cycle.
Data storage
During method execution, there are intervals at which the collected data is stored. As a general rule, data is
stored at the end of each method execution. This behavior can only be influenced through the use of a sample
scope or sample cycle. All of the data collected is also stored when entering a sample scope at the end of each
sample cycle.
Method function: Pause Task
General
Parameters
Title
Description
Values
-
Analysis
147
Name
Description
Behavior
Parameters
Reason
Stop sample
cycle
methods.
Description
Specifies the reason why a task was interrupted. The reason is
displayed both on the instrument and in the list of tasks.
All data in the current sample cycle is discarded. If this option is
deactivated, the data from the current sample cycle are saved.
Only visible when inserted in a sample cycle.
-
-
Values
Any
Yes | No
6.7.2.7 Task
This function is used to change certain properties of a task that is currently running.
Use outside a sample scope
If this method function is used outside a sample scope, the changes are applied while entering a Sample
Scope method function or at the end of the method.
Use within a sample scope
If this method function is used within a sample scope, the changes are always applied the next time that data
is saved.
Data storage
sample cycle.
Method function: Task
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Task
Parameters
Rename task
New name
Description
Values
methods.
Description
This enables the option to modify the name of the task.
Enter the name of the task. Using data binding, for example, the
sample ID may be taken over in the name.
This is displayed only if Rename task is enabled.
Change priority This enables the option to modify the priority of the task.
High priority
When activated, the task changes the priority. If the Change pri
ority option is selected and the High priority option is not select
ed, the priority is set to the normal priority.
This is displayed only if Change priority is enabled.
Reassign to
This enables the option that assigns the task to the user respon
responsible user sible. The assignments to other users or roles are revoked.
148
Analysis
Values
Yes | No
Any
Yes | No
Yes | No
Yes | No
-
-
See also
6.7.2.8 Transfer data
This function enables you to transfer data to a different open application on a client PC. While methods with this
method function are executed, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled.
● A target application must be open on the system on which the LabX client is running. This is usually a
spreadsheet application.
● The window for the target application must not be minimized.
● A workbench with the Transfer Data component for the relevant instrument must be open in the LabX client.
● Activate the function and choose the target application.
Method function: Transfer Data
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Contents
Parameters
Data sequence
Description
Values
methods.
Description
Defines which data is sent to the target application. You can
assign an action to each element added, similar to a keyboard
input.
The sequence of the elements can be changed as required when
creating or editing the method.
-
-
Values
1 ...3600 | -1.0x106 ...
1.0x106
Data binding
Display
Mean value: 5.342 g
See also
● Data transfer - Workbench (page 110)
6.7.2.9 Strip printer
This function is used to start a printout on a tape printer. Printing is performed on the tape printer that is con
nected to the instrument in use.
Method function: Strip printer
General
Parameters
Title
Description
Values
-
Analysis
149
Name
Description
methods.
-
-
Contents to Print
Parameters
Description
Values
Contents
Determine which individual elements are to be printed. The data Any
are added row by row. You can combine different types of data,
control characters, text, and data via data binding, depending on
the printer used.
Please note, that tabs are supported by the syntax, but will not be
correctly printed on the strip printer.
Example of data binding
Data binding
Display
Mean value: 5.342 g
See also
6.7.2.10 Result
When this function is selected, a result is calculated. In addition, you can also enter a formula of your choice
with raw results, tables, or other calculated results. Results can be displayed in the online view.
Results are always recalculated during the method execution if the basic data changes. The changes to the
recalculated results is always visible at the time of saving (end of the method or end of the sample cycle) in the
online view. The value of the index operator [i] and the use of constants, e.g. [1] is considered as a constant
and does not change in case of recalculation. This response may be suppressed.
Examples
mean(Weight1.Net)
mean(Weight1[s].
Net)
mean(Weight1[i].
Net)
mean(Weight[1].
Net)
Is always recalculated if a new measurement has been carried out.
Is always recalculated if a new measurement has been carried out for the same sam
ple.
Results that have already been calculated remain constant even if a new measurement
has been made.
Remains constant always even if new measurements have been made.
Method function: Result
General
Parameters
Title
150
Analysis
Description
Values
-
Name
Description
Result
Parameters
Main result
methods.
Description
Indicates that the result is a main result and provides additional
options. Moreover, results are displayed in the Data workspace
and the Online view only if they are marked as the main result.
Main results may be applied only if individual results have been
calculated.
-
-
Values
Yes | No
● These can be signed.
● Days can be assigned.
● A comment or remark can be entered.
● Tolerance values can be specified.
● The result can be displayed on the device.
Show result
This specifies whether the result and notifications are displayed
on the device. (Only if Main result = Yes is selected.)
Enable Basic
This specifies whether basic statistic data, such as mean value
Statistics
and standard deviation is displayed in the results.
Comment mode This defines the manner in which the user must or can enter a
comment or remark. (Only if Main result = Yes is selected.)
Export
Parameters
Include results
in exports
Calculation
Parameters
Formula
Unit
Decimal places
Suppress recal
culation
Tolerances
Parameters
Check result
limits Level 1
Yes | No
Yes | No
None | Optional |
Mandatory | Implicit
Description
Values
Yes | No
Description
Specifies the formula for calculating the result.
Specifies the unit used for the result.
Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point for the
result.
Suppresses the recalculation of the results.
Values
Any
Any
0 … 28
Description
Defines whether the tolerances for T1+ and T1- should be
checked.
Values
Yes | No
Yes | No
The result limits for levels 2 and 3 can be defined in the same way as the for level 1.
Type
Specifies the type of information for the tolerance. If "%" is select
ed, the tolerance is calculated as a percentage deviation from the
nominal value. If "Relative" is selected, the tolerance is calculated
from the addition/subtraction of the specified value from the nom
inal value.
Nominal value
Defining the desired nominal value, which is used as the refer
ence value for the tolerances.
Nominal value
Defines the background color of the text when displaying the
background col results, if no tolerance has been exceeded.
or
Absolute offset from
nominal value | Offset
as % of nominal value
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Standard
Analysis
151
Nominal value
text color
Nominal value
icon
Nominal value
text
Tolerances Tx
T1+
Defines the color of the text when displaying the results, if no tol White | Black | Green |
erance has been exceeded.
Standard
Defines the symbol when displaying the results, if no tolerance
has been exceeded.
Question | Error
Defines the notification text when displaying the results, if no tol Any
erance has been exceeded.
0 ... 1.0x106 |
0.0 ... 100
Standard
Defines the color of the text when displaying the results, if the tol White | Black | Green |
erance Tx+ has been exceeded.
Standard
Defines the symbol when displaying the results, if the tolerance
Tx+ has been exceeded.
Question | Error
Defines the notification text when displaying the results, if the tol Any
erance Tx+ has been exceeded.
Defining the relative lower tolerances in the unit specified or [%] 0 ... 1.0x106 |
relative to the nominal value.
0.0 ... 100
Defines the color of the background when displaying the results, White | Black | Green |
if the tolerance Tx- has been undershot.
Standard
Defines the color of the text when displaying the results, if the tol White | Black | Green |
erance Tx- has been undershot.
Standard
Defines the symbol when displaying the results, if the tolerance
Tx- has been undershot.
Question | Error
Defines the notification text when displaying the results, if the tol Any
erance Tx- has been undershot.
Defining the relative upper tolerances in the unit specified or [%]
relative to the nominal value.
T1+ background Defines the color of the background when displaying the results,
color
if the tolerance Tx+ has been exceeded.
T1+ text color
T1+ icon
T1+ text
T1T1- background
color
T1- text color
T1- icon
T1- text
Tagging
Parameters
Tagging mode
Description
This defines the manner in which the user can assign tags.
Values
Implicit | Explicit
Explicit: The tags can be assigned at the time of calculating the
results.
Implicit: Tags are assigned automatically.
Tags
This defines the labels that are assigned automatically to the
result when the labeling mode is set to "Implicit". The preset
labels cannot be changed at the time of executing the method
functions.
Return values
See also
● Formulas (page 166)
● Managing results (page 305)
6.7.2.11 Report
When this function is selected, a report is printed or a PDF is generated.
Method function: Report
152
Analysis
Selection
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Behavior
Parameters
Printer
Report Template
Use intermedi
ate data
Description
Values
methods.
Description
Defines which printer is to be used for printing the log.
Defines which report template is to be used for the report.
When activated, intermediate data for the report generation is
used at this point. If this option is not activated, data from the
next storage point will be used.
-
-
Values
Selection
List of available reports
Yes | No
Data storage
sample cycle.
PDF Settings
Parameters
Generate a PDF
File
Path
File name
Overwrite the
existing file
Title
Author
Subject
Keywords
Description
Defines whether a PDF file should be generated.
Values
Yes | No
Path to PDF files.
Defines the file name of the PDF file. The name can also be for
mulated via data binding.
Defines whether an existing PDF file should be overwritten.
-
Defines the title in the properties of the PDF file.
Defines the author in the properties of the PDF file.
Defines the subject in the properties of the PDF file.
Defines the keywords in the properties of the PDF file.
-
Yes | No
6.7.2.12 Delay
When this function is selected, the execution of the task is delayed. A countdown can be displayed during this
time.
Method function: Delay
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Analysis
153
Behavior
Parameters
Display count
down
Delay time
Delay unit
Description
Indicates whether a countdown is to be shown on the instrument
during the delay time.
Determines the length of the delay.
Specifies the unit used for the delay.
Message content
Parameters
Description
Message
Here you can enter a multiline text that is displayed as informa
tion during the countdown. (Only if Display countdown = Yes is
selected.)
Values
Yes | No
1 s ... 24 h
Hours | Minutes | Sec
onds | Miliseconds
Values
Any
6.7.2.13 Audit trail
If this function is selected, an entry is made in the audit trail.
Method Function: Audit Trail
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Contents
Parameters
Information
Description
Values
methods.
Description
Text that is written in the audit trail.
-
-
Values
Any
Data binding
Display
Mean value: 5.342 g
See also
6.7.2.14 Notify
This function allows notifications to be displayed to the corresponding users in LabX or sent to them via e-mail.
sages.
Method function: Notify
General
Parameters
Title
Name
154
Analysis
Description
Values
-
Description
Message content
Parameters
E-Mail recipi
ents
Notify responsi
ble user
Roles to notify
High importance
Subject
Message
methods.
-
Description
Defines the e-mail address for direct sending.
Values
The notification is sent to the current responsible user.
Yes | No
The notification is sent to the members with the selected roles.
Defines the importance of the notification.
Specifies the subject of the e-mail.
Here you can enter a multiline text, which is displayed as a notifi
cation.
Yes | No
Yes | No
Any
Any
-
See also
6.7.2.15 Unblock instrument
If this function is selected, the instrument will no longer be blocked. If you want to execute this method function
on a locked instrument, select Can run on blocked instruments in the method properties.
Users who have been assigned the appropriate rights can also unblock instruments manually.
The instrument will no longer be blocked.
Method function: Unblock instrument
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
See also
● Block instrument (page 143)
functions.
Parameters
Tx+
Nominal value
Explanation
Positive Tolerance Value x.
Target value that is used for comparison with the calculated
result.
Value range
-
Analysis
155
Parameters
TxResult
Unit
Status
Tolerance range
Value range
Number / Vector
Not OK | OK | Uncertain
T3+, T2+, T1+, Nomi
nal, T1-, T2-, T3-,
Undefined
Max. tolerance
Specifies the tolerance range in which the result falls. In the case T3+, T2+, T1+, Nomi
range
of a list, this specifies the maximum tolerance range of the list
nal, T1-, T2-, T3-,
values.
Undefined
Received answer The received string of the peripheral device.
Timeout occurred Did a timeout occur in conjunction with a peripheral device?
Yes | No
Answer Success Syntax verification of the response of a received string.
Not OK | OK
fully Parsed
Text 1 - 10
Texts read from responses [T1 > Text 1]
Number 1 - 10
Numbers read from responses [T1 > Number 1]
Creation Time
The time at which the return values were created. Also the time
that is visible on the results display.
Creation Time
-
156
Analysis
Explanation
Negative tolerance value x.
The calculated result
The unit entered for the result.
Specifies the status of the result.
Specifies the tolerance range in which the result falls.
6.7.3 Structural
6.7.3.1 Decision branch
This method function cannot be inserted as an independent element, but is always a component of the "Decide"
(page 158) method function.
Multiple decision branches can be inserted into the one method function. All decision branches are checked for
a true condition from left to right. The first one to return a true condition is executed and all others are ignored.
Where more than one decision branch exists, the one on the far right can be defined with no condition. This
branch will then always be executed if none of the previous branches fulfilled a true condition.
Syntax examples
These examples refer to a "Message" (page 138) method function. The request for the OK button is predefined
in the variables.
● {Message1.ButtonResult}=="Name of button"
● {Message1.ButtonResult}==ButtonOk
Method function: Decision branch
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Behavior
Parameters
Description
Execution condi Specifies the condition using operators and data binding.
tion
-
-
Values
Any
See also
● Conditions (page 169)
6.7.3.2 Sample cycle
This method function cannot be added as an independent element, but is always a component of the Sample
Scope method function. By using “drag and drop”, you can create multiple sample cycles to the left or right of
the existing sample cycles.
Method function: Sample Cycle
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Analysis
157
Return values
See also
● Sample scope (page 158)
6.7.3.3 Decide
This method function contains one or more "Decision branch" (page 157) method functions. Each decision tree
can be defined with a condition. You can also add any method function of your choice in a decision tree.
"Decide" method functions are executed from left to right. The application executes the first "decision tree" for
which the specified condition is fulfilled. If further conditions follow whose conditions are also fulfilled, these are
ignored. A "decision tree" without a condition can be placed on the far right. This is executed in all cases where
no conditions had previously been met.
Method function: Decide
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
See also
● Message (page 138)
6.7.3.4 Sample scope
This method function forms the prerequisite for processing multiple samples with at least one sample cycle.
You can create multiple sample cycles to the left or right of an existing sample cycle. During execution, the
sample cycles for each individual sample are processed in the same order from left to right respectively.
What is decisive for identification of the sample is the combination of all parts of the sample ID that were
defined as Part of unique ID. After each sample cycle, the next sample must be defined by entry of all IDs.
Here, the behavior of the system differs depending on how the task was created.
Method without task parameters / product that specifies all task parameters
The unique parts of the sample ID are requested automatically, at the latest before the new sample cycle is
started. The entry of a new combination of unique IDs creates a new sample, otherwise an existing sample
will be selected. With a Sample IDs method function, the user has the option of defining sample IDs manually
at the time of the request.
Sample series / method with task parameters
LabX processes the samples defined by the series in the order specified. You can add other samples by edit
ing a task. See Managing tasks (page 121).
If the number of samples has been limited (see below) or a task with predefined samples has been created, the
sample scope is completed automatically when all samples have undergone all cycles. If no samples have
been specified, the sample scope may be completed with the help of Sample Control > End Sample Scope.
This option is always available within the sample scope. If a task is interrupted during execution of a sample
scope (paused by a user or as a result of an error), the execution always starts from the beginning of the sam
ple scope on resumption of the task. All samples acquired and fully completed sample cycles will be retained.
However, the data from the sample cycle in progress at the time will be discarded.
158
Analysis
Simple example
The order of the sample cycles during method execution is as follows.
Application case A
Application case B
Application case C
A new, unknown sample ID is entered. This executes the first sample cycle with this
sample.
A known sample ID is entered, which executes the next sample cycle for this sample
A known sample ID is entered and all sample cycles have already been executed for
this sample. A message is displayed.
More complex example
An example with 3 sample cycles 1, 2, 3 and samples A, B, C, which are not entered in ascending order.
Sample ID
A
A
B
C
B
A
A
C
Sample Scope
1
2
1
1
2
3
All sample cycles completed. A message is displayed.
2
The IDs or "Keys" are queried in the higher-level Sample IDs method function in the sample scope. These IDs
are required for the decision as to which sample cycle the system should proceed. Additional IDs can be
queried if a Sample IDs method function is placed within a sample cycle.
Method function: Sample Scope
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Sample Changer
Parameters
Description
Use sample
Enables the settings for the sample changer.
changer position
Position
Specifies the position of the sample changer that is approached
when the function is executed. You can select a relative position
or an absolute position.
Behavior on
empty position
Defines what should happen when the sample changer detects
an empty position.
-
-
Values
Yes | No
Not defined | Detect
next sample | Current
position | Home | 1 |
+1 Offset | 2
Error | End Sample
Scope
Limit the number of samples
Limit the num Enables the settings for limiting the number of samples. If this
Yes | No
ber of samples option is not enabled, the sample cycle is terminated manually.
Number of Sam Defines the maximum number of samples. Once this number has 1…2000
ples
been reached, no further samples can be added. If the sample
scope contains only one sample cycle, the sample scope will be
completed.
Request value
If this option is selected, the user is prompted to enter the value
Yes | No
when the task starts.
Analysis
159
Sample ID Configuration
Number of sam Defines the number of sample IDs to be shown in the method
ple IDs
editor and other related dialogs, i.e. task editor and workbench.
Sample ID
Label
Default value
Determines the label or title bar when the ID is entered on the
instrument.
If Auto ID generation is not enabled.
Specifies the default value, which is predefined as the ID in the
input dialog.
1…6
Any
Any
If Auto ID generation is enabled.
It specifies the starting value. For each placeholder in Auto ID
generation a corresponding value must exist in the same order.
Part of unique
ID
Mandatory
Auto ID genera
tion
Auto ID format
Determines whether this ID is used as a key.
Yes | No
Determines whether an input is mandatory.
Yes | No
Activates the automatic generation of an ID. It is ensured that a
Yes | No
value has been entered at the end of the last sample cycle for
each sample.
Specifies the template, which in addition to a free text may also
Any
contain an arbitrary quantity of placeholders #, 0 (zero), and @.
The character # represents a number, 0 (zero) represents a num
ber without preceding zeros. The character @ represents a letter.
Space characters or _ can be used to separate a free text from
placeholders.
Example of Auto ID generation
Input
Parameter
Auto ID format
Default value (Auto ID start value)
Input
ID_@##
C10
Generated values
Generated values
First
Second
Third
Values
ID_C10
ID_C11
ID_C12
In this example, if C99 is reached, the counting continues with D00.
The character sequence is structured so that it always begins from the right. If numbers are used on the left and
letters are used on the right, counting begins using the letters in ascending order first. When Z is reached, the
number is increased by a value of one, and the letters begin at A again.
When the maximum value in the character sequence is reached (Z99 in the example above), no further sam
ples can be created. This still applies even if the value in Limit the number of samples would permit more
samples. If the sample scope contains more than one sample cycle, the system now explicitly asks for the
sample ID for the next sample to be processed and starts at the next respective sample cycle. If the sample
scope contains one sample cycle, however, the sample scope will be completed.
See also
● Managing tasks (page 121)
6.7.3.5 Do while
The method function "Do while" enables you to enter any method function of your choice within the function.
The method functions contained within this function are executed repeatedly until the condition is no longer ful
filled. "Do while" offers a return value that provides information on the current number of loops. The return value
can be used in all conditions or formulae. The return value is addressed using <Name of method
function>.LoopIndex.
160
Analysis
Method function: Do while
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Behavior
Parameters
Description
Repeat condition Specifies the condition using operators and data binding.
-
-
Values
Any
See also
● Conditions (page 169)
functions.
Parameter
Cycle index
Creation time
Explanation
Returns the sample cycle and index.
Value range
-
6.8 Use of fx, data binding, formulas
Data binding, formulas and conditions enable you to link together the data collected in a method in a flexible
manner. Data binding is relevant within formulas and conditions.
6.8.1 Examples of data binding
The term data binding refers to the referencing of return values of arbitrary method functions. Data binding
enables values from previous method functions to be used in text fields. The same syntax applies as for formu
las, but this must be contained in curly brackets.
This example is based on a balance method that contains the following method functions.
Method function
Zero
Tare
Info lines
Weight
Result
Message
Function
This function sets a new zero point.
The balance is tared according to the set
parameters.
This function is used to display several
lines of text on the balance display.
A weighing process is performed in accor
dance with the settings.
When this function is selected, a result is
calculated.
If this function is enabled, a notification
appears on the instrument display.
Data binding
Displays the tare value.
Calculate the relationship between
the sample weight and the tare
weight as a percentage.
Display the calculated result.
Next -> (page 162)
Analysis
161
6.8.1.1 Info lines
The aim is to display the tare value from the "Tare" method function on the balance using the "Info lines"
method function.
1 Double-click on the "Info lines" method function in the graphical editor. The parameters are displayed on the
right-hand side.
2 Under "Information", click on New to add a text line and enter "Tare".
3 In the second text column, click on . The editor for data binding is opened.
1 Click on the "Tare" method function in the graphical editor. The "return values" are displayed on the righthand side.
2 Under "Tare", click on
. The tare value is referenced in the "Source" field.
3 In the editor, click on OK.
The tare value has been integrated in the "Info lines" method function.
Next -> (page 162)
6.8.1.2 Result
The aim is to calculate a result that provides the relationship between the sample weight and the tare weight as
a percentage.
162
Analysis
1 Double-click on the "Result" method function in the graphical editor. The parameters are displayed on the
right-hand side.
2 Under "Formula", click on
. The editor for data binding is opened.
1 Click on the "Weight" method function in the graphical editor. The "return values" are displayed on the righthand side.
2 Under "Net", click on
sion.
. The net value is referenced in the "Source" field. Enter the operator "/" for a divi
3 Under "Tare", click on . The net value is referenced in the "Source" field. Enter the operator "*" for a multi
plication, followed by the number 100.
Analysis
163
The formula output is integrated in the "Result" method function.
Next -> (page 164)
6.8.1.3 Message
The aim is to display the calculated result on the balance using the "Message" method function.
1 Double-click on the "Message" method function in the graphical editor. The parameters are displayed on the
right-hand side.
2 Under "Title bar", enter the following text: Result in percent.
3 Under "Notification", click on
. The editor for data binding is opened.
1 Enter the following text in the "Source" field: The sample weight in percent is x% of the tare weight.
2 Click on the "Result" method function in the graphical editor. The "return values" are displayed on the righthand side.
164
Analysis
3 Place the insertion mark at the position in the "Source" field at which the referenced value is to be inserted
and under "Result", click on . The result is referenced in the "Source" field.
The result is integrated into the "Message" method function.
6.8.2 Applying the data binding
The editor integrated in the method editor provides support for entering formulas, transferring data from the data
binding, and defining task parameters.
The editor can be opened from any location in which the
button is found next to the parameters. Return val
ues, on the other hand, display the
button for referencing data in the opened editor. The editor offers a differ
ent scope of functions depending on the type of parameter.
When creating a task via a method that defines task parameters, all parameters must be entered to permit the
task to be created.
Editor for data binding
The term data binding refers to the referencing of return values of arbitrary method functions. Data binding
enables values from previous method functions to be used in text fields. The same syntax applies as for formu
las, but this must be contained in curly brackets.
1 Click on next to a relevant parameter. The Edi
tor is opened.
2 In the graphical editor, click on the required
method function to display the corresponding
return values in the right-hand window.
3 Select the required value and click on .
● Ensure the insertion mark is in the correct position
in the "Source" field.
● You can select predefined variables from the drop-
down list and click on Add Variable to accept
them.
For more information, see "Examples of data binding" (page 161).
See also
● Global variables (page 395)
6.8.2.1 Data binding
The term data binding refers to the referencing of return values of arbitrary method functions. The notation of the
data binding is described in the following.
Example
Item
Name
Method function
name
Description
The name of the method function within the method. The follow
ing characters are not permitted.
: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"
Analysis
165
Method function
indexer
[i] The last result of the specified method function.
[s] The result of the current sample.
[1] A specific result. Values >=0 and <= 2147483647 are
permitted.
The returned result value of a method function.
Result value
Result value indexer [0] A specific result. Values >=0 and <= 2147483647 are
permitted.
6.8.3 Using formulas
task to be created.
To perform the following steps, a method or a method template must be open in the method editor, which
preferably also contains a "Result" method function. Only this method function contains a field for formulas.
Formulas can be used to offset method function results against each other. Operators and functions are avail
able for this offsetting.
For more information, see "Formulas" (page 166).
1 Click on next to a relevant parameter. The Editor is opened.
2 In the graphical editor, click on the required method function to display the corresponding return values in
the right-hand window.
3 Select the required value and click on .
● Ensure the insertion mark is in the correct position in the "Source" field.
● Operators, functions, variables, time and date formats and value tables are available for calculations. These
are found on the tab pages.
● For use of a colorimeter in conjunction with LiquiPhysics instruments
For more information, see "Examples of data binding" (page 161).
6.8.3.1 Formulas
Formulas can be used to offset the results of method functions against each other. Operators and functions are
available for this offsetting.
Example
Item
Name
Method function
name
Description
: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"
166
Analysis
Method function
indexer
Result value
permitted.
Numeric value
Arbitrary numeric values.
>=-999999999999999999.999999999999999999 and
<=999999999999999999.999999999999999999
Function
Generally, all types of data binding or numeric values are permit
ted, depending on the function used. The arguments are separat
ed by ";" . There are several functions with a different number of
arguments.
Return values from other method functions are thus entered in brackets. Depending on the operators used, mul
tiple results or one single result are output. When using simple operators such as + or - , one result per mea
surement is often output, and for statistical calculations such as the standard deviation, for example, multiple
measurements generate a single result.
● For a list of all operators, see "Applicable operators" (page 394).
● For a list of all functions, see "Applicable functions" (page 394).
● For a list of all time and date functions, see "Time and date functions" (page 402).
Example with the calculation of the mean value and standard deviation
The method weighs various samples, after which the mean value and the standard deviation are calculated and
displayed automatically. In this example, no [i] or [s] indices are needed because all results have to be calcu
lated.
See also
● Managing value tables (page 354)
6.8.4 Using task parameters
Task parameters refer to the parameters that can be defined in a method although their values are not yet deter
mined.
The values can be entered either when a task, a product or a sample series is created. Nevertheless, task para
meters enable default values and restrictions to be specified based on the type of data. If the value is “Text”, the
default value, minimum length and maximum length can be entered.
These parameters are defined as overwritable "task parameters" in the method, although default values can
also be entered. The real values used by a running task can be carried over from the default values of methods,
from products, from sample series or they can be queried by users after tasks have been created.
Analysis
167
task to be created.
1 Click on opened.
for a relevant parameter. The Editor is
2 Select "Task parameters" and enter the required
values in the fields.
Parameters
Default value
Min. value / Max.
value
Decimal places
Explanation
Specifies the value that is entered as a default value within products or sample series.
Specify the limits of the value range that can be selected for the parameter in products or
sample series.
Specifies the number of digits with which the value can be defined in products or sample
series. If this value is left as 0, only whole integers can be defined in the product and sam
ple series.
168
Analysis
Methods
is created.
Products
a product.
products.
6.8.5 Messages
Messages allow you to include method function results in a text. To enable this, data binding expressions are
added to the text.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Name
Method function
name
Description
: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"
Result value
Format string
The format string can be used to specify date and time output for
mats.
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue hh:mm:ss} => 16:12.32
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue dd.MM.yyyy} => 20:11.2009
For more information, see "User-defined time and date functions
(page 402)" and "Default date and time formats" (page 401).
When using formulas, these must be aligned in curly brackets.
6.8.6 Conditions
Conditions provide the option to link different method function results together. The result of a link is either
"True" or "False", which allows different procedures to be executed within a method.
Example
The following operators are available for conditions.
Item
Name
Method function
name
Description
: +*ç%&/()=?`'´^~ -!][<>\°§€.,:;{}"
Method function
indexer
Result value
permitted.
Analysis
169
Numeric value
Arbitrary numeric values.
>=-999999999999999999.999999999999999999 and
<=999999999999999999.999999999999999999
Function
Format string
Generally, all types of data binding or numeric values are permit
ted, depending on the function used. The arguments are separat
ed by ";" . There are several functions with a different number of
arguments.
The format string can be used to specify date and time output for
mats.
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue hh:mm:ss} => 16:12.32
{methodFunctionA.ResultValue dd.MM.yyyy} => 20:11.2009
For more information, see "User-defined time and date functions
(page 402)" and "Default date and time formats" (page 401).
Comparison opera
tor
Boolean operator
== Equals
!= Not Equal To
>
Greater Than
<
Less Than
>= Greater Than or Equal To
<= Less Than or Equal To
The boolean operators "and" and "or" are supported.
Operators can be used with both numerical values and strings. Numerical values can be specified in any for
mat, for example, 1.32345322 or even simply 1. It is possible to integrate values using a data binding, for
example, {method function.return value}. The result of a method function is stored each time the method func
tion is processed. As a result of data binding, several return values (list) can be produced if using Do while
and Sample Cycle. To extract one individual value from the return values, the string must be structured as fol
lows {Method function[i].Return value}. This string can be applied within Do while.
See also
● Global variables (page 395)
170
Analysis
6.9 Method functions balances
6.9.1 Performance
6.9.1.1 Adjustment - external weight
The balance is adjusted according to the set parameters with the use of external weights.
Method function: Adjustment - External Weights
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
External Weights
Parameters
Description
External weights All available external weights are listed under "Available". These
can be added and then appear in the right-hand column under
"Selected". In addition, the "Total weight" [g] is also displayed,
which is particularly useful if using multiple weights.
-
-
Values
0.0…1.0x106
Also see "Managing Weights" (page 324).
Alternative
Weights
All available external weights are listed under "Available". These 0.0…1.0x106
"Selected". You can only select weights that are not already used
under "External Weights". In addition, the "Total weight" [g] is
also displayed, which is particularly useful when using multiple
weights.
The alternative weights are used if one or more of the weights
selected in "External Weights" is/are marked as "not available" at
the time the method is executed.
Also see "Managing Weights (page 324)".
Messages
Parameters
Description
Show result mes If this checkbox is selected, the result is displayed once the
sage
adjustment is completed.
Values
Activate
Return Values
A list of return values is provided in the relevant chapter for each method function. For more information, see
"Return values" (page 176).
See also
6.9.1.2 Eccentricity test
A corner load test is performed on the balance in accordance with the set parameters, using external weights.
Method function: eccentricity test
Analysis
171
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
External weights
Parameters
Description
-
-
Values
0.0…1.0x106
Alternative
Weights
weights.
Tolerances
Parameters
T1
T1 label
t2
T2 Label
Description
This tolerance value [mg] defines the maximum deviation from
the set value. This is the lower tolerance value, which must
always be specified.
Defines the text on the terminal which is preset as a label for the
T1 value. If no text is entered, T1 is displayed.
the set value. This is the upper tolerance value. This value does
not have to be specified if only one tolerance value is required
and the requirement criterion is set to T1.
Tolerance violations
Parameters
Description
Acceptance crite Defines which tolerance value is used as a criterion for success
ria
fully performing the test.
T1 exceeded Specifies the notification that is displayed on the terminal if "T1"
Message
is exceeded. (Only if "Display result message" = "Yes" is select
ed.
Message
is exceeded. (Only if "Display result message" = "Yes" is selected
and a T2 tolerance value has been entered.)
Messages
Parameters
Display result
message
172
Analysis
Description
If this checkbox is selected, the results and notifications are dis
played after the test has been completed.
Values
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
Values
T1 | T2
Any
Any
Values
Activate
Return Values
A list of return values is provided in the relevant chapter for each method function. Also see "Return values"
(page 176).
6.9.1.3 Repeatability test
The repeatability of the balance is tested according to the set parameters with the use of external weights.
Method function: Repeatability test
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Test Settings
Parameters
Repeat factor
Tare weight is
used
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Description
Values
Specifies the number of weight measurements that are to be per 3 ... 30
formed for this test.
If this checkbox is selected, this indicates that a tare weight is
Activate
used. The terminal displays an appropriate prompt when the tare
is to be placed on the balance.
External Weights
Parameters
Description
Values
0.0…1.0x106
Alternative
Weights
weights.
Tolerances
Parameters
T1
T1 label
t2
T2 Label
Description
Values
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
Analysis
173
Tolerance Violations
Parameters
Description
ria
Message
ed.
Message
Messages
Parameters
Display result
message
Description
Values
T1 | T2
Any
Any
Values
Activate
Return values
6.9.1.4 Test - external weight
A sensitivity test is performed on the balance in accordance with the set parameters, using external weights.
Method function: Test - external weights
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
External Weights
Parameters
Description
-
-
Values
0.0…1.0x106
Alternative
Weights
weights.
Tolerances
Parameters
T1
174
Analysis
Description
Values
0 ... 1.0x106
T1 label
t2
T2 Label
Tolerance violations
Parameters
Description
ria
Message
ed.
Message
Messages
Parameters
Display result
message
Description
Any
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
Values
T1 | T2
Any
Any
Values
Activate
Return values
6.9.1.5 Test - internal weight
The balance is tested in accordance with the set parameters with the use of the internal weight.
Method function: Test - internal weight
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Tolerances
Parameters
T1
T1 label
t2
T2 Label
Description
Values
methods.
Description
-
-
Values
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
0 ... 1.0x106
Any
Analysis
175
Parameters
Description
ria
Message
ed.
Message
Messages
Parameters
Display result
message
Description
Values
T1 | T2
Any
Any
Values
Activate
Return values
6.9.1.6 Adjustment - internal weight
The balance is adjusted with the use of the internal weight.
Method function: Adjustment - internal weight
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Messages
Parameters
Description
Show result mes If this checkbox is selected, the result is displayed once the
sage
adjustment is completed.
-
-
Values
Activate
functions.
Parameters
Deviation [%]
Tare
Tare unit
External weight
nominal value
176
Analysis
Explanation
Deviation between the specified and the determined value in %.
Tare weight sent by the balance.
This value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
The unit of the tare weight sent by the balance.
The nominal weight sent by the balance.
Value range
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
baht | ct | custom | GN |
g | kg | msg | µg | mg |
mom | ng | oz | ozt |
dwt | lb | tlh | tls | tlt |
tola | t
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Parameters
External weight
nominal value
unit
Explanation
The unit of the nominal weight sent by the balance.
Result
Adjustment: The end result of the function.
Result
Test: The end result of the function.
Status
Test completed
successfully?
Specifies the status of the result.
Language-independent result of the test method function, which
can be used as a decision-making criterion in the "Decide"
method function.
Deviation between the specified and the determined value.
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
This value is calculated from the difference between the previous
ly calculated mass value (calculated weight) and the convention
al mass value of the external weight used.
This value is transferred by the balance and also converted into a
different weight unit.
The unit of the deviation.
tola | t
Language-independent result of the test method function, which False | True
can be used as a decision-making criterion in the "Decide"
method function.
In the repeatability test, standard deviation of the differences
between the measured weight value with and without the test
weight.
The unit of the repeatability.
tola | t
In the repeatability test, a list value with the weight values that
were measured without the test weight.
In the repeatability test, a list value with the weight values that
correspond to the measured weight value.
This list with the weight values that were measured with the test
weight is calculated from the weight values transferred from the
balance. The starting point for the calculation is the difference
between the measured weight and the nominal weight of the
external weight used. This difference and the conventional mass
value of the external weight used are then used to calculate the
weight value measured by the balance. This value is calculated
for every repetition and then compiled into a list.
Deviation
Deviation unit
Adjustment com
pleted success
fully?
Actual repeatabil
ity
Actual repeatabil
ity unit
Unloaded weight
reading list [g]
Calculated
weight list [g]
Value range
tola | t
Completed successfully
| Stopped
Passed | Failed | Can
celed
False | True
Analysis
177
Parameters
Difference List
[g]
Explanation
Value range
In the repeatability test, a list value of the differences between the weight values measured with the test weight and the weight val
ues measured without the test weight.
This list of differences between the weight values measured with
the test weight and the weight values measured without the test
weight is calculated from the vectors described above. The differ
ence between the relevant corresponding values in the "Calculat
ed weight list" and the "Unloaded weight reading list" is calculat
ed and recorded in the difference list.
Weight measure In the eccentricity test, the weight sent by the balance in the mea 0.0>… 1.0x106
ment central
surement of the central position.
position (corner This value is transferred from the balance without calculation.
load)
Unit of weight
In the eccentricity test, the unit of the weight sent by the balance baht | ct | custom | GN |
measurement
during measurement of the central position.
central position
(corner load)
tola | t
Weight measure In the eccentricity test, the weight sent by the balance in the mea 0.0>… 1.0x106
ment position xy surement of position xy.
(corner load)
These values are transferred from the balance without calcula
tion.
Unit of deviation, In the eccentricity test, the unit of the weight sent by the balance baht | ct | custom | GN |
position xy
in the measurement of position xy.
(eccentric load)
tola | t
Deviation posi
In the eccentricity test, the deviation between the weight value
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
tion xy (corner
measured in the center of the weighing pan and the weight value
load)
measured at position xy.
This is the difference between the central position and positions
xy. These values are transferred by the balance and also convert
ed into milligrams.
Unit of deviation, In the eccentricity test, the unit of the deviation between the
position xy
weight value measured in the center of the weighing pan and the g | kg | msg | µg | mg |
(eccentric load) weight value measured at position xy.
tola | t
Max. deviation
In the eccentricity test, the position on the weighing pan at which weight position
the deviation between the weight value measured in the center of
the weighing pan and the weight value measured at the other
positions. Upper Left Corner, Upper Right Corner, Lower Left Cor
ner, Lower Right Corner, Undefined.
Maximum devia In the eccentricity test, the maximum deviation between the
tion
weight value measured in the center of the weighing pan and the
weight value measured in the other positions.
Maximum devia In the eccentricity test, the unit of the maximum deviation
tion unit
between the weight value measured in the center of the weighing g | kg | msg | µg | mg |
pan and the weight value measured in the other positions.
tola | t
Calculated
This value corresponds to the weight value measured by the bal 0.0>… 1.0x106
weight
ance. It is calculated from the weight value transferred from the
balance. The starting point for the calculation is the difference
between the measured weight and the nominal weight of the
external weight used. This difference and the conventional mass
value of the external weight used are then used to calculate the
weight value measured by the balance.
178
Analysis
Parameters
Calculated
weight unit
Explanation
Unit of the calculated weight.
Creation Time
Value range
tola | t
-
6.9.2 Instrument
6.9.2.1 Info lines
This function is used to display several lines of text on the balance display.
Method function: Info lines
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Info Fields
Parameters
Information
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Description
Values
You can show several lines of text on the balance display, each Any
split over three columns. Ideally, texts should be kept as short as
possible. Under "Data binding", you have the option to include or
calculate "Return values".
6.9.2.2 Draft shield
This function automatically opens or closes the doors of the glass draft shield.
Method function: Draft shield
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Balance Doors
The doors on the balance differ according to the model.
Parameters
Position
Doorway outer
draft shield
Doorway inner
draft shield
Description
This specifies whether the doors are to be opened or closed.
Specifies how far the external doors are to open [%].
(Only if "Position = Open" is selected.)
Specifies how far the internal doors are to open [%].
(Only if "Position = Open" is selected.)
Values
Open | Closed
25 | 50 | 75 | 100
25 | 50 | 75 | 100
Analysis
179
Rotating door
Defines the direction in which the draft shield is rotated.
Door left | Door right
● "Door left" - Draft shield turns to the left and the weighing
room is accessed from the right.
● "Door right" - Draft shield turns to the right and the weighing
room is accessed from the left.
(Only if "Position" = "Open" is selected. Only applies for
microbalances with rotating doors.)
6.9.2.3 Performance verification
This function checks whether the tests, inspections and adjustment data on the balance are still valid. If individ
ual parameters are not completed, these are not checked.
Method function: Performance verification
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Balance Service
Parameters
Verify service
date expiration
Verify MinWeigh
test date expira
tion
Description
Values
methods.
Description
Specifies if you need to check whether or not the date has been
exceeded.
Specifies if you need to check whether or not the date has been
exceeded.
Last Successful Balance Adjustment
Parameters
Description
Internal weight - Maximum time in [h] since the last successful adjustment of the
not longer than
balance using the internal adjusting weight.
[h]
External weight - Maximum time in [h] since the last successful adjustment of the
not longer than
balance using external weights.
[h]
Last Successful Balance Test
Parameters
Description
Internal weight - Maximum time in [h] since the last successful test of the balance
not longer than
using the internal adjusting weight.
[h]
External weight - Maximum time in [h] since the last successful test of the balance
not longer than
using external weights.
[h]
Repeatability test Minimum time in [w] since the last successful repeatability test
- not longer than of the balance.
[w]
Corner load test - Maximum time in [w] since the last successful corner load test of
not longer than
the balance.
[w]
180
Analysis
Values
Activate
Activate
Values
1 ... 1000
1 ... 1000
Values
1 ... 1000
1 ... 1000
1 ... 1000
1 ... 1000
-
-
6.9.2.4 Validation and settings
This function validates the selected balance and determines the settings for the balance. If individual parame
ters are not completed, these are not checked.
Method function: Validation and settings
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Balance Prerequisites
Parameters
Description
Balance read
Defines the readability in [g] of the balance.
ability
Weighing Capac
ity
legal for trade
balance
Minimum poweron duration
Balance Display
Parameters
Balance display
readability
Balance display
unit
MinWeigh
Parameters
Activate
MinWeigh
MinWeigh Stan
dards
Defines the required reading capacity in [g] of the balance and
must correspond to the specifications of the balance used.
Defines whether a "legal for trade" balance is to be used.
-
-
Values
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1.0
1 ... 1.0x106
Yes | No
Defines the minimum time [h] that the balance must be switched 1 ... 24
on for before measurements can be made.
Description
Determines the readability [d] of the balance display.
1: Shows the maximum resolution
1/2: Shows the final digit in increments of 2
1/10: 10x smaller resolution
Defines the unit used in the balance display.
Values
1 | 1/2 | 1/5 | 1/10 |
1/100 | 1/1000
g | kg | t | mg | µg | ct |
lb | oz | ozt
Description
Values
If this checkbox is selected, MinWeigh is activated for the mea
Activate
surements. If MinWeigh is activated, you must enter a MinWeigh
standard.
A MinWeigh standard must be selected from the list which is to
Selection
be used. (Only if "Activate MinWeigh" is selected.)
See also "Editing MinWeigh standards (page 34)"
Analysis
181
Weighing Parameters
Parameters
Description
Weighing Mode Determine the filter settings of the balance.
● Universal: For all common weighing procedures.
● Dosing: For dosing weighing objects in liquid or powder
Values
Universal | Dosing |
Sensor Mode | Check
weighing
form.
● Sensor Mode: Returns a signal which is filtered more or less
strongly depending on the settings for the ambient conditions.
● Checkweighing: The balance only reacts to relatively signifi
cant changes in weight and the weighing result is very stable.
This parameter can only be changed if "Activate MinWeigh" =
"No". If "Activate MinWeigh" = "Yes", the MinWeigh default for the
balance is used.
Value Release
You use this setting to determine how quickly the balance con
siders the measured value to be stable and releases it.
● Very fast: Recommended if you require fast results and
Very Fast | Fast | Reli
able and Fast | Reliable
| Very Reliable
repeatability has a lower priority.
● Very reliable: This setting leads to a very high repeatability of
measurement results, but prolongs the stabilization time.
This parameter can only be changed if "Activate MinWeigh" =
"No". If "Activate MinWeigh" = "Yes", the MinWeigh default for the
balance is used.
AutoZero
Environment
With this setting you can determine whether automatic zeroing of Activate
the balance is enabled. The automatic zero point correction func
tion "AutoZero" performs ongoing correction of any deviations
from zero which may occur, for example, as a result of small
amounts of dirt on the weighing pan.
This menu option is not available for certified balances.
This setting can be used to match your balance to the ambient
Stable | Standard |
conditions.
Unstable | Very stable |
● Standard: Setting for an average working environment subject Very unstable
to moderate variations in the ambient conditions.
● Unstable: Setting for a working environment where the condi
tions are continuously changing.
● Stable: Setting for a working environment which is practically
free from drafts and vibrations.
Levelcontrol
Parameters
Description
Values
Monitor levelcon Defines whether you want the integrated level sensor to check the Yes | No
trol
horizontal alignment of the balance.
Antistatic Kit
This function only supports the integrated AntiStatic Kits.
Parameters
Description
Values
After door opened Determines whether ionization is performed when the draft shield Active | Inactive
is open.
Active after door Determines for how long in [s] ionization is performed after the
1…1000
closed
draft shield has been closed.
Draft Shield
Parameters
Open/close door
182
Analysis
Description
Determines whether the draft shield is operated automatically or
manually.
Values
Automatic | Manual
6.9.3 Measurement
6.9.3.1 Interval weight
Interval weighing is performed according to the settings. Several weighing procedures are performed at pre
scribed chronological intervals. You can also define the start and stop criteria.
Method function: Interval weight
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Interval
Parameters
Time between
measurements
[s]
Description
Specifies the time interval at which the individual measurements
are performed.
Values
0.05 ...1000
Start Measurement Acquisition
There are two ways in which to start the measuring procedure. Once the conditions for automatic weight detec
tion are fulfilled, the weighing process is started. If automatic weight detection is not enabled, the weighing
process initiates as soon as the method function is active.
Parameters
Delay time
Description
Time in [s] until measured value acquisition is started after a
defined weight or a difference has been reached. If “Automatic
Weight Detection” is activated, this is the delay time.
Message
cation.
Enable automat If the checkbox is selected, the system uses automatic weight
ic weight detec detection at this point.
tion
Trigger mode
Defines the trigger for automatic weight detection once a defined
weight or difference is reached.
Limit [g]
Time out
Specifies a defined weight limit in [g] that is used for automatic
weight detection.
Maximum time in [s] after which the weighing process is termi
nated if automatic weight detection is not triggered.
Values
0 ...1000
Any
Yes | No
Above or equal | Below
or equal | Any transi
tion | Positive transi
tion | Negative transi
tion | Negative delta |
Any delta | Positive
delta
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
1 ...3600
Analysis
183
Stop Measurement Acquisition
There are two ways in which to end the measuring procedure: “Automatic weight detection” or a fixed quantity
of measurements to be carried out. The weighing process is ended once the conditions for automatic weight
detection are fulfilled. If automatic weight detection is enabled, the number of measurements must also be
specified. Whichever criterion is fulfilled first ends the weighing process.
Parameters
Enable automat
ic weight detec
tion
Trigger mode
Description
If the checkbox is selected, the system uses automatic weight
detection at this point.
Values
Yes | No
delta
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Limit [g]
weight detection.
Number of mea Specifies the number of measurements to be performed. If Auto
surements
matic Weight Detection is enabled, possibly even fewer mea
surements are carried out.
1 ... 10000
SmartTrac
The "SmartTrac" is a graphical representation of the remaining range, which displays the current occupied
range and remaining available weighing range at any one time.
Parameters
SmartTrac type
Description
Here you can define the type of representation of the SmartTrac.
Values
None | Circle | Bar
Series | Beaker
Return values
See also
● Automatic weight detection (page 190)
6.9.3.2 Weight
A weighing process is performed in accordance with the settings.
Method function: Weight
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
184
Analysis
-
-
Comment
Here you can enter a brief comment that appears as the second
Any
Measurement Acquisition
Define the conditions under which a weight value is accepted. Stable means that a value is accepted as soon
as the display reaches a steady state. Immediate means that a value is accepted immediately. Dynamic:
Dynamic weighing enables you to perform efficient, convenient, and precise weighing of unstable weighing
objects (e.g. animals). You can adjust the settings according to the weighing object, thus optimizing the speed
at which results are returned.
Parameters
Description
Acquisition of
Defines the conditions under which the weight value is recorded.
Measured Val
ues
Data acquisition Defines which mode is used for measured value acquisition.
(Only if Acquisition of Measured Values = Dynamic is select
ed.)
Dynamic behav Specifies which filter settings are used to release the weighing
ior
result in the balance.
(Only if Data acquisition = Dynamic behavior selected.)
Timeout [s]
Specifies the maximum time in [s] after which the weighing
process is terminated if no stable value has been found.
ed.)
Dynamic time
Time in [s] after which the weight value is transferred.
interval [s]
ed.)
Values
Stable | Immediate |
Dynamic
Dynamic behavior |
Time interval
Stable | Standard |
Unstable
1 ...3600
1 ... 99
SmartTrac
Parameters
Description
Enable tolerance If this checkbox is selected, the tolerance values of the SmartTrac
are enabled.
SmartTrac type Here you can define the type of representation of the SmartTrac.
Depending on the setting selected, the SmartTrac can or cannot
be changed on the balance during the measurement.
Type
Defines how the SmartTrac is displayed.
Values
Yes | No
None | Circle | Bar
Series | Beaker
g
0.0 ... 1.0x106
Tolerance unit
Specifies the unit used for the tolerance.
Upper tolerance This upper value defines the level of precision for the weighing
procedure. Instead of a percentage value, it is also possible to
enter an absolute tolerance in [g].
Nominal value
Specifies a defined weight in [g] that is used for the zero point of -1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
the SmartTrac. This may differ from the set value of the weighing
object.
Lower tolerance This lower value defines the level of precision for the weighing
0.0 ... 1.0x106
procedure. Instead of a percentage value, it is also possible to
enter an absolute tolerance in [g].
Automatic Weight Detection
You use these parameters to define the conditions under which the balance automatically detects placement of
the weighing object, which saves you from having to press a button to confirm. Once these conditions are met,
the weighing process is started. If the selected settings for "measured value acquisition" are then fulfilled, the
weighed value is recorded. Note that the net weight values are used for weight detection.
Alternatively, you can also press OK. The weighed value is still recorded even if the criteria for weight detection
are not fulfilled.
Analysis
185
Parameters
Enable automat
ic weight detec
tion
Trigger mode
Description
If the checkbox is selected, the system uses automatic weight
detection at this point.
Values
Yes | No
Limit [g]
weight detection.
Here you can enter a short text to be displayed during the delay
time.
delta
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Delay time
Message
Tolerances
Parameters
Type
Tolerance unit
Nominal value
Tx+
Tx-
Description
Specifies the type of tolerance value, either as an absolute differ
ence from the nominal value or as a relative difference from the
nominal value.
Unit for tolerance values. (Only if Type = Absolute offset from
nominal value is selected.)
Defines the desired nominal weight [g]. This is also used as a
reference for the tolerances.
Determines the relative upper tolerances in [g] or [%] for weigh
ing in to a nominal weight.
Determines the relative lower tolerances in [g] or [%] for weigh
ing in to a nominal weight.
Parameters
Description
Upper limit
This value defines the maximum weight that can be placed on
the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value.
Lower limit
This value defines the minimum weight that must be placed on
the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value.
Action on viola Defines the action taken if the set tolerances are exceeded. If a
tion
measurement is not accepted, the method function remains
active until the tolerances are met. By choosing "Request for
Action", you can define notifications that are displayed on the ter
minal.
Upper limit
Provides information about the terminal on which the message is
exceeded - Mes displayed when the limit is violated.
sage
Lower limit
exceeded - Mes displayed when the limit is undershot.
sage
MinWeigh
Parameters
Action on viola
tion
186
Analysis
0 ...1000
Any
Values
g
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0.0 ... 1.0x106
0.0 ... 1.0x106
Values
T3+ | T2+ | T1+ | Nom
inal | T1- | T2- | T3T3+ | T2+ | T1+ | Nom
inal | T1- | T2- | T3Accept | Do not accept
| Prompt for action
Any
Any
Description
Values
Defines the action taken if the MinWeigh defaults are exceeded. If Accept | Do not accept
a measurement is not accepted, the method function remains
active until the tolerances are met.
(Only applies if a method function "Inspection and settings" is a
part of the method and "Enable MinWeigh" is selected.)
Balance Keys
Parameters
Enable "Zero"
key
Enable "Tare"
key
Description
Values
If this checkbox is selected, this key can be used on the balance. Yes | No
If this checkbox is selected, this key can be used on the balance. Yes | No
Return values
See also
6.9.3.3 Tare
The balance is tared according to the set parameters.
Method function: Tare
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Acquisition of
Defines under which conditions the weight value is transferred.
Measured Val
ues
Stable | Immediate
SmartTrac
Parameters
SmartTrac type
Description
Values
None | Circle | Bar
Series | Beaker
are not fulfilled.
Analysis
187
Parameters
Trigger mode
Description
Limit [g]
weight detection.
time.
Delay time
Message
Tolerances
Parameters
Upper limit
Description
This value defines the maximum weight in [g] that can be placed
on the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed value.
Lower limit
This value defines the minimum weight in [g] that must be
placed on the balance in order to be recorded as a weighed val
ue.
Action on viola Defines the action taken if the set tolerances are exceeded. If a
tion
measurement is not accepted, the method function remains
active until the tolerances are met. By choosing "Request for
Action", you can define notifications that are displayed on the ter
minal.
Upper limit
exceeded - Mes displayed when the limit is violated.
sage
Lower limit
exceeded - Mes displayed when the limit is undershot.
sage
Values
delta
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0 ...1000
Any
Values
0x106 ... 1.0x106
0x106 ... 1.0x106
Accept | Do not accept
| Prompt for action
Any
Any
Return values
See also
6.9.3.4 Zero
This function is used to set a new zero point and all weight values (including the tare weight) are measured in
relation to this zero point.
Method function: Zero
General
Parameters
Title
Name
188
Analysis
Description
Values
-
Description
methods.
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Parameters
Description
Acquisition of
Defines under which conditions the weight value is transferred.
Measured Val
ues
Values
Stable | Immediate
SmartTrac
SmartTrac type
None | Circle | Bar
Series | Beaker
are not fulfilled.
Parameters
Trigger mode
Description
Limit [g]
weight detection.
time.
Delay time
Message
Values
delta
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0 ...1000
Any
Return values
See also
6.9.3.5 Pretare
A fixed tare value is entered in the software or on the balance.
Method function: Pretare
Analysis
189
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Pretare
Parameters
Request value
Pretare value
Pretare unit
Description
If this checkbox is selected, the value for the pretare is entered on
the balance.
Specifies the default value for the weight that is used for the tare.
If "Request value" is activated, the default value and the balance
can be overwritten.
Specifies the unit used for the pretare.
Values
Yes | No
0x106 ... 1.0x106
g | kg | t | mg | µg | ct |
lb | oz | ozt
Return values
See also
6.9.3.6 Automatic weight detection
Using the parameters under Auto weight detection, you can define the conditions under which the balance
automatically detects the placement of the weighing object. Once these conditions are met, the weighing
process is started. If the selected settings for Acquisition of Measured Valuesare then fulfilled, the weighed val
ue is recorded. The following list provides an explanation of the options available for the trigger mode.
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the set limits are
exceeded. The weight value must either be initially below the set limit, or
must drop below this limit at least once while the method function is active.
Weight
Positive transition
Time
190
Analysis
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the set limits are under
shot. The weight value must either be initially above the set limit, or must
exceed this limit at least once while the method function is active.
Weight
Negative transition
Time
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the value falls below or
exceeds the set limit. The weight value may initially be above or below the
set limit.
Weight
Any transition
Time
Above or equal
Weight
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the value reaches or
exceeds the set limit.
Time
The measured value acquisition initiates as soon as the value reaches or
falls below the set limit.
Weight
Below or equal
Time
The measured value acquisition initiates if the set deviation from the initial
value is exceeded while the method function is active.
Weight
Positive delta
Time
The measured value acquisition initiates if the value falls below the set devi
ation from the initial value while the method function is active.
Weight
Negative delta
Time
Analysis
191
The measured value acquisition initiates if the value falls below or exceeds
the set deviation from the initial value while the method function is active.
Weight
Any delta
Time
functions.
Parameters
T1+ - T3+
Nominal
T1- - T3Upper limit text
Lower limit text
Tare
Tare decimal
places
Tare readability
192
Analysis
Explanation
Absolute tolerance value calculated from the input values of the
Weight method function.
The input value from the Weight method function.
Absolute tolerance value calculated from the input values of the
Weight method function.
Outputs the text specifying the range in which the upper tolerance
lies.
Value range
-
The balance readability.
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02
| 0.2 | 2 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05
| 0.5 | 5
tola | t | undefined
Date/Time
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0…8
-
T3+ | T2+ | T1+ | Nom
inal value | T1- | T2- |
T3Outputs the text specifying the range in which the lower tolerance T3+ | T2+ | T1+ | Nom
lies.
inal value | T1- | T2- |
T3Tare weight sent by the balance.
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Specifies the number of decimal places for the weight value.
0…8
Tare unit
The unit of the tare weight sent by the balance.
Tare time
Net
Net decimal
places
The time and date at which the value was sent.
The net weight sent by the balance.
Parameters
Net readability
Explanation
Net unit
The unit of the net weight sent by the balance.
Net time
Gross
Gross decimal
places
Gross readabili
ty
The gross weight sent by the balance.
Gross unit
The unit of the gross weight sent by the balance.
Gross time
Pretare value
Pretare unit
The pretare value entered.
The selected unit for the pretare.
Display read
ability
Determines the readability [d] of the balance display.
1: Shows the maximum resolution
Specifies the status of the measurement.
State
Creation time
Value range
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1 | 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02
| 0.2 | 2 | 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05
| 0.5 | 5
Date/Time
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0…8
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1 | 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02
| 0.2 | 2 | 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05
| 0.5 | 5
Date/Time
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
µg | mg | g | kg | ct | lb |
oz | ozt
1 | 1/2 | 1/5 | 1/10 |
1/100 | 1/1000
-
Analysis
193
6.10 Method functions Quantos
6.10.1 Instrument
6.10.1.1 Front door
This method function defines the state of the front doors, opened or closed.
Method function: Front door
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Operation
Parameters
Operation
Description
Values
This specifies whether the front doors are to be opened or closed. Open | Close
6.10.1.2 Validation and settings
This method function validates the Quantos requirements and defines the settings for the automatic sample
changer.
Method function: Validation and settings
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Prerequisites
Parameters
Description
Sample Changer Activates the automatic sample changer.
The automatic sample changer accepts up to 30 vials and can
dose up to 30 samples automatically.
194
Analysis
Values
Yes | No
-
-
Sample Changer Settings
Parameters
Description
Vial diameter
Specifies the diameter of the sample vial on the sample changer
[mm]
in mm.
Values
10 … 28
6.10.1.3 Read / write dosing head
This method function reads information from and writes information to the RFID chip of the connected dosing
head. Each dosing head has an RFID memory chip (RFID = Radio Frequency IDentification), which can
exchange data with the instrument. You can remove the dosing head and insert it into another Quantos and the
data is then available there immediately.
The counter for the remaining number of dosing operations is based on the maximum service life of the dosing
head.
If the container of the old dosing head still contains a considerable quantity of substance, you can unscrew the
container from the old head and attach it to the new one. To do this, copy the user data and the counter value
for the residual quantity from the old head to the new one. If the residual quantity for the next dosing operation
is no longer adequate, an appropriate warning message appears. You can remove the container from the head
and refill it.
Method function: Read / Write Dosing Head
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Dosing Head Information to Write
Parameters
Description
Available
Select the desired attributes that need to be incorporated in the
attributes
RFID information:
Substance
Specifies the name of the substance.
Lot ID
Defines the batch identification.
Filling date
Specifies the date when the substance was filled.
Expiry date
Specifies the expiry date of the substance.
Retest date
Specifies the date for the verification of the substance.
Initial quantity
Specifies the initial quantity of the substance in mg in the dosing
head.
Defines the lettering of the user-defined fields for free use.
Defines the values of the user-defined fields.
Specifies the maximum number of dosing operations with this
dosing head.
Label 1 … 4
Value 1 … 4
Dose limit
Values
List of available attribut
es
1 … 20 characters
1 … 15 characters
1.1.2000 …
31.12.2064
1.1.2000 …
31.12.2064
1.1.2000 …
31.12.2064
0 … 1'000'000
1 … 10
1 … 15
1 … 999
Analysis
195
Return values
See also
6.10.2 Analysis components
6.10.2.1 Dispense
These method functions permit dosing of solid or liquid substances with the appropriate parameter settings.
Method function: Dispense
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Substance
Parameters
Substance type
Dosing Unit
Parameters
Use SafePos
Tapper enabled
Tap before dos
ing
Tap before dos
ing intensity
Tap before dos
ing duration [s]
Max. dispense
duration [s]
Dosing pressure
[bar]
196
Analysis
Description
Specifies whether the substance used is solid or liquid.
Values
Solid | Liquid
Description
SafePos is activated here.
The "SafePos" option moves the dosing head after each dosing
operation to a safe position and prevents it from coming into
contact with the vial.
The tapping motor is activated here.
The tapper improves the material flow if it is inadequate.
The function Tap before dosing is activated here.
It automatically activates a tapping cycle prior to each dosing
operation. Tapping prior to dosing prevents large quantities of
powder from falling down during the dosing process and possi
bly lead to overdosing.
Defines the intensity of the tapper prior to dosing.
Values
Yes | No
Defines the duration of tapping prior to dosing in seconds.
1 … 30
Defines the cancelation criterion of the dosing time in seconds.
1 … 3600
Yes | No
Yes | No
10 … 100
Defines the pressure for the liquid dosing operation in bar. Only if 0.1 … 2.0
Substance type = Solid is selected.
Parameters
Description
Measurement
Defines the conditions under which the weight value is recorded.
Acquisition
Information field of the corresponding balance setting.
Target Range
Parameters
Target [mg]
Minimum [mg]
Description
Defines the target filling quantity for the dosing operation in mg.
Defines the minimum target filling quantity for the dosing opera
tion in mg. Only if Substance type = Liquid is selected.
Values
Stable | Immediate |
Dynamic
Values
0.1 … 1'000'000
<= Target and 0.1 …
1,000,000
SmartTrac
The "SmartTrac" is a graphical representation of the remaining range, which displays the currently occupied
range and remaining available weighing range at any time.
Parameters
SmartTrac type
Description
Depending on the setting selected, the SmartTrac can or cannot
be changed on the balance during the measurement.
Values
None | Circle | Bar
Series | Beaker
Return values
See also
6.10.2.2 Lock head
This method function defines the combined activity for locking and unlocking the head and the head verifica
tion.
Method function: Lock head
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
-
-
Instruction Lines
Parameters
Description
Values
Instruction
- | Any
Comment
Head Verification
Parameters
Available
attributes
Head ID
Substance
Lot ID
Remaining
quantity
Description
Select the desired attributes that need to be incorporated when
checking the dosing head.
Defines the identification number of the head to be verified.
Defines the substance name to be checked.
Defines the batch identification to be checked.
Defines the residual quantity to be checked in mg, which must be
available as a minimum for one dosing operation.
Values
List of available attribut
es
12 characters
1 … 20 characters
1 … 15 characters
0 … 1'000'000
Analysis
197
Remaining dos
es
Label 1 … 4
Value 1 … 4
Check expiry
date
Check retest
date
Defines the remaining number of dosing operations to be
checked, which can be made with this dosing head.
Defines the lettering of the user-defined fields to be checked.
Defines the values of the user-defined fields to be checked.
Activates the checking of the expiry date.
0 … 999
Activates the checking of the verification date.
Yes | No
Head Lock
Parameters
Description
Release head at Unlocks the head when the method is canceled.
exit
1 … 10
1 … 15
Yes | No
Values
Yes | No
6.10.3 Return values
functions.
Dispense
Parameter
Dispensing time
[s]
Substance
Lot ID
Sample changer
position
Initial quantity
Initial quantity
unit
Remaining
quantity
Remaining
quantity unit
MinWeigh state
Explanation
Time needed for the dosing operation in seconds
Value range
Name of the substance on the RFID chip
Batch ID on the RFID chip
Current position on the sample changer
1 … 20
1 … 15
1 … 30
Filling quantity of the dosing head in mg
Weight unit of the filling quantity of the dosing head
0 … 1'000'000
mg
Inclinometer
state
Undefined: The state of the inclinometer cannot be determined.
Leveled: The inclinometer has been leveled.
Not leveled: The inclinometer has not been leveled.
Not available: The device does not have an inclinometer.
Malfunction: The inclinometer is defective.
Target weight of the dosing in mg
Minimum target weight of the dosing in mg
Target [mg]
Minimum [mg]
Tare
Tare decimal
places
Tare readability
198
Analysis
Residual quantity of the substance in the dosing head in mg
Weight unit of the residual quantity in the dosing head
mg
MinWeigh violation
Violated | Not
violated | Undefined
Undefined | Leveled |
Not leveled | Not avail
able | Malfunction
Tare weight sent by the balance.
Specifies the number of decimal places for the tare value.
Readability of the tare weight
0.1 … 1'000'000
<= Target, 0.1 …
1,000,000
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0…8
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1 | 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02
| 0.2 | 2 | 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05
| 0.5 | 5
Parameter
Tare unit
Tare time
Explanation
Unit of the tare weight sent by the balance.
Date and time when the tare value was sent
Net [WeightVal
ue]
Net decimal
places
Net readability
Net weight sent by the balance.
Value range
mg
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2099
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
Specifies the number of decimal places for the net weight value.
0…8
Readability of the net weight
Net unit
Net time
Unit of the net weight sent by the balance.
Date and time when the value was sent
Gross
Gross decimal
places
Gross readabili
ty
Gross weight sent by the balance
Specifies the number of decimal places for the gross weight val
ue.
Readability of the gross weight
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1 | 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02
| 0.2 | 2 | 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05
| 0.5 | 5
mg
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2099
-1.0x106 ... 1.0x106
0…8
Gross unit
Gross time
Unit of the gross weight sent by the balance
Date and time when the value was sent
Display read
ability
State
Creation time
Display readability
Specifies the status of the measurement.
Creation time of these return values
0.0000001 |
0.000001 | 0.00001 |
0.0001 | 0.001 | 0.01
| 0.1 | 1 | 0.0000002 |
0.000002 | 0.00002 |
0.0002 | 0.002 | 0.02
| 0.2 | 2 | 0.0000005 |
0.000005 | 0.00005 |
0.0005 | 0.005 | 0.05
| 0.5 | 5
mg
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2099
Date & Time in the
defined format
Read / Write Dosing Head
Parameter
Head ID
Substance
Lot ID
Filling date
Explanation
Unique identification of the dosing head for traceability
Name of the substance on the RFID chip
Batch ID on the RFID chip
Date of filling the substance in the dosing head
Expiry date
Expiration date of the substance in the dosing head
Retest date
Date for verification of the substance in the dosing head
Initial quantity
Remaining
quantity
Filling quantity of the dosing head in mg
Residual quantity in the dosing head in mg
Value range
1 … 20
1 … 15
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
Analysis
199
Parameter
Remaining dos
es
Label
Value
Head production
date
Head type
Dose limit
Explanation
Number of dosing operations that may still be carried out with
this dosing head (Limit - Counter)
Lettering of the user-defined fields 1 … 4
Value of the user-defined fields 1 … 4
Production date of the dosing head
Hard dose limit
Hardware limit for the number of dosing operations (service life)
for this dosing head
Creation time of these return values
Creation time
200
Analysis
Type of dosing head
Maximum number of dosing operations with this dosing head
Value range
0 … 999
1 … 10
1 … 15
01.01.2000 …
31.12.2064
Solid | Liquid
<= Hard dose limit,
1 … 999
1 … 999
Date and time in the
defined format
6.11 Method functions titration
6.11.1 Overview of method functions
6.11.1.1 Method functions T50 / T70 / T90
Overview of method functions:GT
Functions
Title
Sample
Sample (Titer)
Sample (Calibration)
Titration stand
Line rinse
Liquid Handling
Mix time
Rinse
Conditioning
Pumps
Liquid Handling
Park
Stir
Dispense (normal)
Sync
Measure (normal)
Measure (MVT)
Titration (EQP)
Titration (EP)
Titration (2-phase)
Titration (EQP)
Stating
Calculation
End of sample
Titer
Calibration
Explanation
Title and characteristics of the method.
Start of a sample loop.
Start of a loop for titer determination
Start of a loop for sensor calibration.
Selects titration stand.
Rinse the lines of an InMotion sample
changer.
Performs aspirating or dispensing func
tions.
Duration of the mixing process This value
is gained from experience. It can be
entered specifically for each sample.
Rinsing function for a sensor or stirrer.
Conditioning function for sample changer.
Pumps a defined volume of a liquid.
Automated dosing of aqueous or nonaqueous liquids (the method function Liq
uid Handling is described in the Operating
Instructions of the "Liquid Handler".
Park function for sample changer.
Activates a stirrer.
Dispenses a defined quantity of titrant.
Synchronization codes are used for syn
chronizing methods running simultaneous
ly in both workspaces A and B for a T90.
Takes over monitoring a measured value
from a sensor.
Creates a table of measured values from
the measured values of a sensor over a
certain period of time.
Conducts an equivalence-point titration.
Conducts an end-point titration.
Conducts a two-phase titration
Conducts an equivalent-point titration.
A sample solution can be maintained at a
constant pH value using the stating func
tion.
Controlled dispensing with potential or
temperature monitoring.
Converts the analysis results.
Concludes a sample loop.
Assigns the result of a titer sample loop to
a titer.
Assigns the result of a calibration loop to a
sensor.
Inside loop
No
Start of loop
Outside loop
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
End of loop
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Analysis
201
Functions
Auxiliary value
Blank
Instruction
Drain
Record
Explanation
Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to an
auxiliary value and updates the value
stored in Setup.
Assigns a result or an arbitrary value to a
blank and updates the value stored in Set
up.
Activates external auxiliary instruments.
Halts the analysis and displays instruc
tions on the screen for the user.
Drains a volume from the sample vessel..
Defines the record data to be output to the
printer.
Overview of method functions: KF Vol
Functions
Explanation
Title
Sample (KF)
Titration stand KF stand
Select a titration stand (KF stand,
Stromboli)
Mix time
Homogenizer
Controls a homogenizer and defines the
speed (only for RS homogenizer) and
duration of its usage (not for method types
Stromboli or ext. extraction).
Titration (KF Vol)
Conducts a Karl Fischer titration.
All auxiliary values
stored in Setup.
Instruction
Record
printer.
Drift determination
Determines the drift for Karl Fischer titra
tions (only for method type Stromboli).
Blank
blank and updates the value saved in the
setup (only for method type "Stromboli").
Calculation
End of sample
Standby
Returns the titrator to standby mode on
completion of the Stromboli series, so that
new series can be started quickly.
Note
The following sequence must be observed within the Karl Fischer loop:
1. Sample
2. Titration stand
3. Drift determination (only for Stromboli)*
4. Homogenizer*
5. Mix time
6. Titration
7. Calculation*
8. Record*
202
Analysis
Inside loop
Yes
Outside loop
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Inside loop
No
Start of loop
Yes
Outside loop
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
End of loop
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
9. End of sample
10. Standby*(only for Stromboli)
Functions marked with * are optional.
Possible number of method functions: GT
The number of method functions that can be used within a method is limited and depends on the type of titra
tor:
Method function
Title
Sample
Sample (Titer)
Titration stand
T50
1
1
T70
1
3
T90
1
6
1
6 (max. 2 /loop)
Rinse
Conditioning
Pumps
Park
Stir
Dispense (normal)
Measure (normal)
Measure (MVT)
Titration (EQP)
Titration (EP)
Titration (Learn EQP)
Stating
Titration (2-phase)
Calculation
End of sample
Titer
Calibration
Auxiliary value
Blank
Instruction
Drain
Record
1
10
2
1
2
3
2
2
10
10
20
6
10
10
20
8
24
(6 loops x 4 "Titration
stand"; 1 loop max 4
"Titration stand")
10
10
40
12
20
10
20
10
6
1
1
40
3
3
40
6
6
4
1
10
3
1
2
30
10
30
10
10
10
30
10
60
10
10
10
Further method functions are available for the Karl Fischer (KF) method types. The following table shows the
method functions for T70/T90 for the KF method types only (KF Vol, Stromboli and external extraction). The
maximum number of functions per method is listed.
Possible number of method functions: KF Vol and Stromboli
Method function
Max. Number per Method for
All KF Method Types Except
Stromboli
Title
1
Sample (KF)
1
Titration stand (KF)
1
Titration (KF Vol)
1
Calculation
40
End of sample
1
Max. Number for Stromboli
Methods
1
14
14
14
40
14
Analysis
203
Method function
Auxiliary value
Blank
Instruction
Record
Drift determination
Mix time
Homogenizer
Standby (Stromboli)
Stromboli
30
10
10
1
2
-
Methods
30
10
10
14
14
15
1
6.11.1.2 Method functions G20
The number of method functions that can be used within a method is limited. The maximum number of method
functions is 12.
Functions
Title
Explanation
Title and characteristics of the
method.
Sample
Sample (Titer) Start of a loop for titer determination.
Sample (Cali Start of a loop for sensor calibration.
bration)
Titration stand Selects titration stand.
Pumps
Pumps a defined volume of a liquid.
Stir
Activates a stirrer.
Dispense
Dispenses a defined quantity of
(normal)
titrant.
Measure (nor Takes over monitoring a measured
mal)
value from a sensor.
Titration
Conducts an equivalence-point titra
(EQP)
tion.
Titration (EP) Conducts an end-point titration.
Titration
Conducts an equivalent-point-detec
(LearnEQP)
tion titration.
Calculation
End of sample Concludes a sample loop.
Titer
Assigns the result of a titer sample
loop to a titer.
Calibration
Assigns the result of a calibration
loop to a sensor.
Blank
Assigns a result or an arbitrary value
to a blank and updates the value
stored in Setup.
Auxiliary
Activates external auxiliary instru
instrument
ments.
Instruction
Halts the analysis and displays
instructions on the screen for the
user.
Drain
Drains a volume from the sample
vessel.
Record
Defines the record data to be output
to the printer.
204
Analysis
Possible No. of MFs Within loop
1
No
Outside loop
Yes
total 1
Start of loop
1
2
2
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
total 2
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
End of loop
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
Yes
3
1
total 1
6.11.1.3 Method functions V20 / V30
Overview of method functions: KF Vol
Functions
Explanation
Title
Sample (KF)
Titration stand KF stand
Select a titration stand (KF stand,
Stromboli)
Mix time
Homogenizer
Controls a homogenizer and defines the
speed (only for RS homogenizer) and
duration of its usage (not for method types
Stromboli or ext. extraction).
Titration (KF Vol)
Conducts a Karl Fischer titration.
All auxiliary values
stored in Setup.
Instruction
Record
printer.
Drift determination
Determines the drift for Karl Fischer titra
tions (only for method type Stromboli).
Blank
blank and updates the value saved in the
setup (only for method type "Stromboli").
Calculation
End of sample
Standby
Returns the titrator to standby mode on
completion of the Stromboli series, so that
new series can be started quickly.
Inside loop
No
Start of loop
Yes
Outside loop
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
End of loop
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Note
1. Sample
2. Titration stand
4. Homogenizer*
5. Mix time
6. Titration
7. Calculation*
8. Record*
9. End of sample
Possible number of method functions: KF Vol and Stromboli
Method function
Stromboli
Title
1
Sample (KF)
1
Titration stand (KF)
1
Methods
1
14
14
Analysis
205
Method function
Stromboli
1
40
1
30
10
10
1
2
-
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
End of sample
Auxiliary value
Blank
Instruction
Record
Drift determination
Mix time
Homogenizer
Standby (Stromboli)
Methods
14
40
14
30
10
10
14
14
15
1
6.11.1.4 Method functions C20 / C30
Functions
Title
Sample (KF)
Titration stand
Mix time
Titration (KF Coul)
Auxiliary value
Instruction
Record
Drift determination
Blank
Calculation
End of sample
Standby
206
Analysis
Explanation
Title and characteristics of
the method.
Select a titration stand (KF
stand or Stromboli TTL)
Duration of the mixing
process This value is
gained from experience. It
can be entered specifically
for each sample.
Conducts a coulometric
Karl Fischer titration.
Assigns a result or an
arbitrary value to an auxil
iary value and updates
the value stored in Setup.
Halts the analysis and
displays instructions on
the screen for the user.
Defines the record data to
be output to the printer.
Determines the drift for
Karl Fischer titrations
(only for method type
"Stromboli").
Assigns a result or an
arbitrary value to a blank
and updates the value
saved in the setup (only
for method type
"Stromboli").
Converts the analysis
results.
Returns the titrator to
standby mode on comple
tion of the "Stromboli"
series, so that new series
can be started quickly.
Within loop
No
Outside loop
Yes
Start of loop
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
End of loop
No
Yes
Yes
1. Sample
2. Titration stand
4. Mix time
5. Titration
6. Calculation*
7. Record*
8. End of sample
6.11.1.5 Types and possible number of loops
Nested loops (scopes) are not permitted. Loops can only be inserted into or deleted from a method as a whole.
The number of loops allowed in a method differs depending on the method type and device type:
Method type
GT
Titer
Calib.
KF Vol
Ext. Extraction KF
Vol
Stromboli KF Vol
Permissible loop
types
Sample loop
Titer loop
Calibration loop
Titer loop
Calibration loop
KF loop
KF loop
KF loop
Maximum number of loops per method
T50
1
T70
6
T90
6
1
1
1
-
6
6
1
1
6
6
1
1
-
14
14
6.11.2.1 Auxiliary instruments
This method function activates external auxiliary instruments and enables the titrator to be controlled by such
auxiliary instruments. The parameters described in the following can be defined for all control types. These are
followed by parameters that can be defined explicitly for the listed control types.
Navigation: Auxiliary instrument
Parameters
Control type
Description
Name
Condition
Logical condition that determines whether or not a method func
tion is executed based on a result (true or false).
Values
TTL (Multipin) |
RS-232
Yes | No
A method function can be executed using a specified calculation
formula (see the parameter Formula).
Formula
Here you can enter a formula whose result (true or false) will
determine the execution of the method function.
Mathematical calcula
tion
The method function is only executed if the result is "True", and
only for Condition = Yes.
Analysis
207
See also
● Evaluate and calculate (page 255)
6.11.2.1.1 Control type: Output 24 V
Parameters
Mode
Time
Description
Values
Defines the mode for controlling the control output.
On | Off | Fixed time
Fixed time: The control output is switched on for the defined time
interval.
On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off. After a sample
series the control outlet is automatically switched off.
A time span in [sec] can be defined here for which the control
0…106
outlet should be switched on.
Only if Mode = Fixed time.
6.11.2.1.2 Control type: Stirrer
Parameters
Mode
Time
Description
Values
Defines the mode for controlling the control output.
On | Off | Fixed time
interval.
On | Off: The control outlet is switched on or off. After a sample
series the control outlet is automatically switched off.
0…106
Speed
0…100
6.11.2.1.3 Control type: Out TTL (Single pin)
Parameters
Mode
Time
Description
Defines the mode for controlling the control output. For TTL sig
nals, the number and type of the output signals is determined.
period.
On | Off: The control output is switched on or off.
control outlet. The Auxiliary instrument function is terminated as
soon as the signal changes at the control input or after a defined
maximum time has expired.
Values
On | Off | Fixed time |
Input controlled |
Sequential
0…106
Input
Select the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input (con
trol input).
Output signal
Normal | Inverted
Max. time
The maximum waiting time for a signal change, in [sec].
0…106
After it expires, the method is continued even if no signal change
was detected.
Only for signal inputs.
es
208
Analysis
0…104
Pulse duration
The duration of a pulse in [sec] (time switched on + time switch 0…106
ed off).
Interval
0…106 | 0…104
6.11.2.1.4 Control type: Input TTL (Single pin)
Parameters
Input signal
Max. time
Description
Values
Rising | Falling
detected.
0…106
was detected.
6.11.2.1.5 Control type: TTL (multipin)
Parameters
Input/Output
Pin
Mode
Time
Description
Defines the communication direction.
Select a pin and define the type of control.
Output: 1, 2, 3, 4
Input: 1, 2,
Defines the mode for controlling the control output. For TTL sig
nals, the number and type of the output signals is determined.
period.
On | Off: The control output is switched on or off.
control outlet. The Auxiliary instrument function is terminated as
soon as the signal changes at the control input or after a defined
maximum time has expired.
Values
Output | Input
1…4
On | Off | Fixed time |
Input controlled |
Sequential
0…106
Input
Select the auxiliary instrument to serve as the signal input (con
trol input).
Output signal
Normal | Inverted
Max. time
0…106
was detected.
es
Pulse duration
0…104
The duration of a pulse in [sec] (time switched on + time switch 0…106
ed off).
Interval
0…106 | 0…104
Analysis
209
Pin
Input signal
Select a pin and define the type of control.
Output: 1, 2, 3, 4
Input: 1, 2,
detected.
1…4
Rising | Falling
6.11.2.1.6 Control type: RS-232
Parameters
Description
Send output
Defines whether an output sequence should be sent.
sequence
Output sequence The control sequence for the signal receiver - can also contain a
formula or result enclosed in characters % or control characters
in format \xxx where xxx is the decimal number of the ASCII con
trol character.
\010 for line feed.
Only if Send output sequence= Yes.
Wait for
Defines whether the system should wait for a response sequence
response
from the device.
Max. time
The maximum waiting time for an input sequence in [sec]. After
it expires, the method will be continued even if no input sequence
was detected.
Values
Yes | No
ASCII character
Yes | No
0…106 | ∞
Only if Wait for input sequence = Yes.
Input sequence
The response sequence from the external device.
Arbitrary
Input sequence
with result
Start sequence
Total length
Number of
results
Defines whether the input sequence of the external device con
tains results which have to be imported.
Start sequence of the incoming sequence from the external
device. This is the reference position for the following results. The
start sequence can also contain control characters in format \xxx
where xxx is the decimal number of the control character.
Length from the beginning of the start sequence up to end of the
last result.
The number of results from the sequence of the external device.
Yes | No
1…20
1…1000
1...10
Note
Results are saved in the variable "AuxInst x". (x: The index of the result).
Start position 1
... Start position
10
Max. length 1 ...
Max. length 10
Condition
Start position (beginning) of the result 1…10 counted from the
1…1000
beginning of the start sequence. Leading space characters before
the result will be ignored.
Maximum length of the result 1…10 beginning at the start posi 1...1000
tion of the result.
Logical condition that determines whether or not a method func Yes | No
Formula
tion
Note
For more information about ASCII control characters, refer to: http://www.asciitable.com/
210
Analysis
See also
6.11.2.2 Auxiliary value
This method function assigns a result or arbitrary value to an auxiliary value.
Parameters
Name
Formula H=
Description
Here you can enter a formula that will be used to convert the
result of the sample loop to the auxiliary value. You can also
enter a number or an auxiliary value.
Limits
Determines whether limits should be taken into account for
acquisition of a value. If the value is outside these limits, the val
ue is not transferred to Setup.
Determines whether the method should be interrupted if a value
lies outside the defined limits (only appears if the "Limits" para
meter has been activated).
A message (which must be acknowledged) appears advising
that the process has been interrupted during the time that the
message is displayed.
Appears only if "limits" = "yes" was selected.
Interruption out
side limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Condition
Values
Arbitrary
Formula (see "Evalua
tion and calculation
(page 255)") | Auxiliary
Value | Number
Yes | No
Yes | No
-108 … 108
-108 … 108
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.3 Blank
This method function assigns a result or arbitrary value to a blank value, including the unit.
Parameters
Name
Value B=
Description
Here you can enter a formula that will be used to convert the
sample loop result to the blank. You can also enter a number or
an auxiliary value.
Unit
Limits
Yes | No
-108 … 108
-108 … 108
Interruption out
side limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Values
Arbitrary
Formula (see "Evalua
tion and Calculation
(page 255)") | Auxiliary
Value | Number
Arbitrary
Yes | No
Analysis
211
Condition
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.4 Calculation
For converting the titration results.
Parameters
Result type
Result
Result unit
Formula
Constant
M
Decimal places
Result limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Interruption out
side limits
212
Analysis
Description
If the result type "Automatic" is selected, a predefined result from
the proposal list is used. The parameters "Result", "Unit", "Formu
la", and "Constant" are adjusted automatically in accordance
with the entry type selected in the method function sample (KF)
and cannot be changed.
If "User defined" is selected, all parameters can be edited. You
can also select a predefined result type from the results proposal
list.
After selecting a result from the dropdown list, the system will
automatically set the "Result unit", "Formula" and "Constant"
parameters. But you will be able to make any changes to them
that you would like without having the system adjust the other
parameters. You can also enter any number.
The unit of the result. (Is not automatically adjusted after changes
to "Formula" or "Constant".) You can also use "Proposal" to
select from a predefined suggestion list.
The formula for calculating the result. You can use "Results pro
posals" to select from a predefined suggestion list.
Definition of the C constant which can be used in the calculation.
The constant can itself be a formula. You can also use
"Proposal" to select from a predefined suggestion list.
Defines the molar mass of the substance [g/mol].
The number of decimal places for the result.
Defines whether limits should be observed for the result. If this
function is activated, there will be a message in the record if the
result falls outside the defined limits.
Defines the lower result limit.
Appears only if "result limits" = "yes" was selected.
Defines the upper result limit.
Appears only if "result limit" = "yes" was selected.
Values
Automatic | User defined
Results list | Arbitrary
Device list | Arbitrary
Formula list | Arbitrary
Constants list | Arbitrary
List of concentra
tion/titer standards and
substances
0…6
Yes | No
-108 … 108
-108…108
Yes | No
Record statistics
Specifies whether statistics should also be issued with the results
in the report along with the result.
The statistics are not printed, if in the method function "Protocol"
the parameter "Results" = "No" is selected.
Extra statistical
You can use this parameter to switch on extra statistical func
functions
tions. For example, this will allow you to define a maximum val
ue for the relative standard deviation which, if violated, will cause
individual results to be listed in the record. The settings for this
parameter will only be taken into consideration if the "Calcula
tion" method function is used within a sample loop.
Max. srel
If the relative standard deviation for the calculated result is above
the "Max. srel", the system will output a corresponding message
in the record. Appears only if "Extra statistical functions" = "Yes"
was selected (and if available "Multiple determination" = "Yes").
Send to buffer
Permits the results that are generated outside and inside a loop
to be saved in the buffer. The memory only contains the results of
a single method.
The buffer can be accessed using a variety of methods (both
inside and outside a loop).
The content of the buffer is visible to the user and can be deleted
or printed out. Once the titrator has been restarted the buffer is
empty.
Multiple determi This function helps you do statistical evaluations of sample
nation
groups.
The sample groups are defined with the "Number of samples"
parameter.
Appears only if "additional statistic functionalities" = "yes" was
selected.
Number of sam Defines the sample groups for a multiple determination. For
ples
example, a value of 3 means that the system will run a statistical
evaluation on three consecutive samples.
Appears only if "Extra statistical functions" and "Multiple determi
nation" = "Yes" were selected.
Max. srel
If the relative standard deviation for the calculated result is above
the "Max. srel", the system will output a corresponding message
in the record. Appears only if "Extra statistical functions" = "Yes"
was selected (and if available "Multiple determination" = "Yes").
Interruption
Specifies whether an analysis series should be terminated as
above max. srel soon as the relative standard deviation of a sample group within
a multiple determination is above the "Max. srel".
Record
If "yes" is selected for "Record", the multiple determination func
tion will create a record listing the groups after a double determi
nation whose relative standard deviation lies above a "Max. srel"
number defined in the method.
Write to RFID
None: Calculation result are not written to the RFID tag on the
beaker.
Density: The calculation result is written to the data field Density
of the RFID tag on the beaker.
Correction factor: The calculation result is written to the data
field Correction factor of the RFID tag on the beaker.
Only appears for Titration stand = InMotion.
Yes | No
Yes | No
0…100
Yes | No
Yes | No
2…9
0…100
Yes | No
Yes | No
None | Density | Cor
rection factor
Analysis
213
Condition
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.5 Conditioning
Use this method function to prepare a sensor for the next analysis. This method function becomes active when
a sample changer is selected.
Parameters
Titration stand
Interval
Position
Cond. beaker
spacing
Time
Speed
Lid handling
Condition
Description
Activates a sample changer defined in the setup. Appears only if
the method function Conditioning is used outside of a sample
loop.
Defines the conditioning interval, i.e., after how many samples
conditioning will be performed.
Appears only when inside a loop.
Defines the position of the conditioning beaker. Variable position
uses the defined interval to define the position(s). Variable posi
tion can only be selected if Titration stand = InMotion selected
and method function is used within a loop.
Defines where the conditioning beakers are positioned on the
rack for variable conditioning beaker positions: value = number
of sample beakers between two conditioning beakers.
Note that the beaker series must start with a conditioning beaker.
The start position in the series or in analysis start must be set to
the first conditioning beaker. E.g. Cond. beaker spacing = 3
defines following beaker series: C S S S C S S S C etc. where C is
a conditioning beaker and S is a sample beaker.
Defines the conditioning period in [sec].
Defines whether before titration the lid of a sample should be
removed with an attached CoverUp™ unit.
Appears only for Type = InMotion.
Values
1...60 (Rondo) |
1…303 (InMotion)
Variable position |
Special beaker 1…4 |
Conditioning beaker
1…303
1…104
0…100
Yes | No
Yes | No
Formula
See also
214
Analysis
tion
6.11.2.6 Dispense (controlled)
Controlled dispensing is used for monitored dosing. Controlled dispensing continually monitors the potential or
the temperature of the sample solution and records if the predefined criteria have been exceeded.
The relevant parameters can be determined for the following subfunctions:
Subfunction: Titrant
Parameters
Description
Titrant
Continuous
Continuous addition requires a second burette and a second
addition
drive with the same titrant. If the first burette empties and is
refilled, the second burette will continue dispensing seamlessly.
(not with T50)
Titrant 2
The second titrant to be used for the continuous addition. (Only if
"continuous addition" is selected.) (not with T50)
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Type
The type of sensor to be used to perform the measurement. (Info
field if the method function is used within a calibration loop.)
Sensor
Unit
Values
Titrant list
Yes | No
Titrant list in Setup
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
totrode | Polarized |
Temperature | Conduc
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Subfunction: Temperature acquisition
Parameters
Description
Temperature
Defines whether to record the temperature, with the aid of a tem
acquisition
perature sensor, during the execution of the analysis function.
Temperature
Defines which temperature sensor to use for the temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Only for Temperature acquisition = Yes.
Unit
Defines the temperature unit to be used.
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
°C | K | °F
Values
0…100
Subfunction: Dispensing
Volume
The volume to be dispensed, in [mL].
Dosing rate
t(max)
0.001 … 1000 | Auxil
iary value | Formula
The dosing speed, in [mL/min]. If the number is above the maxi 0.001…60
mum value possible, the system will dispense at the maximum
rate. You can also select a burette type-dependent maximum
number.
Defines a time period, in [min], after which dispensing will be
0.1…106
terminated, even if the volume has not yet been reached.
Subfunction: Monitoring
Parameters
Description
Monitoring
Defines whether to monitor the sensor signal or temperature dur
ing the main stating process.
Signal
If you want to run monitoring, this is where you specify whether
to monitor the sensor signal or the temperature. (For "monitor" =
"yes" only.)
Values
Yes | No
Sensor signal | Temper
ature
Analysis
215
Lower limit
Upper limit
Action
Defines the lower limit of the range within which the signal or
temperature will be allowed to vary. If the signal or temperature
violate this range, that will trigger the defined "Action". The unit of
measure will depend on the sensor used.
Defines the upper limit of the range within which the signal or
Defines an action for violations of the upper or lower monitoring Automatic | Manual |
parameters.
Terminate
• "Terminate": Stating will be terminated.
• "Manual:" The stating will be interrupted and a message will
appear on the display. The user can terminate or continue the
stating process.
• "Automatic": Stating will be interrupted and continued when the
monitoring parameters have returned to within the limits.
Subfunction: Saving measured values
Parameters
Description
Values
Interval
Defines the interval, in [sec], at which the date should be saved. 0.1…106
Subfunction: Condition
Parameters
Description
Condition
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.7 Line Rinse
The Line Rinse function, for InMotion sample changer, starts at the Rinse Position (or when using higher
beakers at a higher position) and moves down at a variable speed (Descent rate). Operating the pump at a
flow rate (always 100%) faster than the descent speed, air bubbles are introduced with the reagent in the
beaker for mechanical cleaning of the tube. Use Line rinse at very high descent rate to replace solvents in Con
ditioning beakers with the desired interval for Refill = Yes.
Parameters
Titration stand
Interval
Position
Drain pump
Pump property
216
Analysis
Description
This parameter is only visible outside the loop. Inside the loop
the titration stand of the previous method function Titration stand
is used.
Defines the rinsing interval, i.e., after how many samples rinsing
will be performed.
Defines the position on the autosampler where the rinse proce
dure should be executed. For Position = Current sample, rinsing
is only possible within the loop.
Values
List of available InMo
tion titration stands
1...303
Current position |
Rinse beaker | Special
beaker 1…Special
beaker 4 | Condition
ing beaker | Current
sample
1-way | 1-way, two
Direction
Descent rate
Defines the the pump direction to be used.
Only if Pump property = 2-way, fine rate is selected.
Defines the speed at which the lift of the autosampler is lowered.
This parameter affects the ratio of intake air and liquid. The suc
tion of air improves the cleaning effect.
Forward | Reverse
Very low | Low | Medi
um | High | Very high |
Proposed rates by pump types
Beaker/Tube
25 mL
80 mL
100 mL
180 mL
250 mL
SP280/SPR200
High
Medium
Low
Very low
Very low
Descent rate
SD660
Very high
High
Medium
Low
Low
Refill
Auxiliary
reagent
Volume
Defines whether the beaker will be refilled with the auxiliary
reagent after rinsing.
Specifies the auxiliary reagent to be added.
Only if Refill = Yes is selected.
Defines the volume in [mL] of reagent to be pumped or filled.
Yes | No
iary reagents
0…1000
6.11.2.8 Dispense (normal)
You can use this method function to dispense a precisely defined quantity of titrant.
The smallest increment (dV(min)) is 1/20000 of the burette volume, i.e. for the following burettes:
1 mL burette: dV(min) = 0.05 µL
20 mL burette: dV(min) = 1 µL
Parameters
Titrant
Volume
Description
Volume in [mL].
Dosing rate
Defines the dosing rate (not including the filling time), in
[mL/min]. You can also select a burette type-dependent maxi
mum number.
Condition
Values
Titrant list
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
0.01…60
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.9 Drain
You use this method function to drain a specific volume from a sample vessel using a pump.
Parameters
Drain pump
Drain volume
Description
The volume to be drained, in [mL].
Values
0…1000 | Auxiliary
value | Formula
Analysis
217
Pump property
Rate
an InMotion.
Direction
Condition
1-way | 1-way, two
10…100 (2-way, fine
rate) | 50/100 (1-way,
two rates)
Forward | Reverse
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.10 Drift determination
You can use the "Drift determination" method function to record the drift after a specific wait time for Karl Fischer
titration. This method function can be inserted both within the loop (per sample) and outside the loop (per
series).
Note
The method function "Drift determination" applies only for methods of the type "Stromboli".
Parameters
Wait time
Duration
Interval
Description
Here you can enter the time in [s] until the drift is to be recorded.
You can enter the length of time in [min] for which the drift deter
mination should last.
Defines the drift determination interval, i.e., after how many sam
ples the drift determination will be performed. Appears only if the
method function is used within a loop.
Values
0…1000
0 … 10
0 … 10
6.11.2.11 Homogenizer
There are two different homogenizer types: RS and TTL. The TTL Homogenizer can only be switched on for a
defined period of time. For the RS Homogenizer, the speed can also be set in the method.
The method function "Homogenizer" applies only for Karl Fischer titrations when not using the Stromboli oven
sample changer, and does not apply for the method type "External extraction".
You can define the following parameters: First select the relevant homogenizer:
Parameters
Name
Description
Select the type of homogenizer.
Values
Homogenizer RS |
Homogenizer TTL
For the TTL homogenizer, you can also determine the stir time:
Duration
Duration in [s].
1...104
For the RS homogenizer, you can also determine the speed:
Speed
Duration
Here you can enter the homogenizer speed in [%].
Duration in [s].
25 … 100
1...104
6.11.2.12 Instruction
Interrupts the analysis and outputs an instruction to the user on the screen. Either the user has to confirm the
instructions or they will disappear automatically after a certain period.
218
Analysis
Parameters
Instruction
Continue after
Time interval
Print
Condition
Description
The text of the instructions to be output to the display.
This text can also contain a formula or auxiliary values, enclosed
in percent symbols.
Example: "Add %VEQ*m/z% g".
Confirmation: The analysis will continue as soon as the user
confirms the instructions.
Time interval: The analysis is continued after the defined time
period has elapsed.
The time period, in [sec], during which the analysis is terminated
and the instructions are displayed on the screen.
Only appears if Continue after = Time interval is selected.
If selected, the instructions will be output to a connected printer.
Values
Arbitrary, including
enclosed formula (con
trol characters: %)
Confirmation | Time
interval
0…106
Yes | No
Yes | No
Formula
tion
Message content
Parameters
E-Mail recipi
ents
Notify responsi
ble user
Roles to notify
High importance
Subject
Message
Description
Defines the e-mail address for direct sending.
Values
The notification is sent to the current responsible user.
Yes | No
The notification is sent to the members with the selected roles.
Defines the importance of the notification.
Specifies the subject of the e-mail.
Here you can enter a multiline text, which is displayed as a notifi
cation.
Yes | No
Yes | No
Any
Any
-
See also
6.11.2.13 Liquid Handling
The method function Liquid Handling allows you to perform the following tasks:
● Prepare: This task shall be performed in order to rinse the respective port of the multi port valve of the Liq
uid Handler, if the port, i.e. the liquid is changed. This procedure avoids carry-over.
● Aspirate or Dispense of solutions.
Liquid Handling can be applied inside or outside of a sample loop.
At the end of the Liquid Handler's operation instruction, a method is shown that can be used for the system test
of the Liquid Handler.
If Liquid Handling is applied in combination with a sample changer, you can decide whether you want to use
the fix or flexible start position:
● If you select the parameter Fix, after each sample loop the titration head moves always to the specified start
position.
● For Flexible, the titration head's position is incremented with +1 for each loop run.
Note: This option is only available if the method function Liquid Handling is placed inside the sample loop.
In the following the Liquid Handling parameters are described. There are parameters which are only available
for the related task Action; others are available for all tasks:
Analysis
219
Parameters available for all tasks
Parameters
Description
Liquid Handler You can select the Liquid Handler detected by the titrator.
Action
The type of Liquid Handling.
Connection
You can select the ports specified in the settings.
Port
Titration stand
Information on the current connected port for the selected action.
Type
Values
Liquid Handler 1 |
Liquid Handler 2
Prepare | Aspirate |
Dispense
List field (the values are
defined in the settings.
stands
Fix | Flexible
Defines the kind of the sample changer's start position.
Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion.
Position
Defines the kind of the sample changer's start position.
Conditioning beaker |
Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion and Type Rinse beaker | Special
= Fix.
beaker 1…Special
beaker 4 | Position
number
Position number You can enter a number of the sample changer's start position.
1...303 | H (auxiliary
Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion, Type = value)
Fix and Position = Position number.
Start position
Defines the first start position of the sample changer. The start
1...60 |1...303 | H
<name of the
position for each sample loop is incremented with +1.
Titration stand> Only available for Titration stand = Rondo or InMotion, Type =
Flexible.
Note: The flexible type of the start position is not available for the
Liquid Handling method function applied outside of a loop.
Rondo only offers numbers in the range of 1...60.
Condition
Formula
tion
Specific Parameters for Prepare
Parameters
Description
Aspiration rate The relative aspiration rate in [%]
Discharge rate
Rinse port
No. of rinse
cycles 1…2
Volume per
cycle 1…2
220
Analysis
The relative dispensing rate in [%]
The implementation of a two-stage purification process of the
specified connections with solution.
If No is selected, the multiport valve changes to Waste (port 6)
and the burette cylinder is emptied.
Determines the number of rinse cycles, which will be performed.
In general, there are two rinse cycles, one with a large volume
and the other one with low volume.
Only available if Rinse port = Yes.
Specifies the rinse volume in [mL] per rinse cycle.
Only available if Rinse port = Yes.
Values
1…100
80% =>
120 mL/min
1…80
Yes | No
1…5
0.010…50
Specific Parameters for Aspirate
Parameters
Description
Aspiration rate The relative aspiration rate in [%]
Aspiration vol
ume
Spindle back
lash compensa
tion
Wait time
Air gap before
aspiration
Aspiration rate
Volume
Air gap after
aspiration
Aspiration rate
Volume
The aspiration volume in [mL].
Specifies spindle backlash compensation in order to compensate
spindle tolerances during the operation period of aspirating and
pipetting solutions. Also to eliminate air bubbles trapped during
aspiration in tubes or in the burette.
Only available for Action = Aspirate.
With this parameter a waiting period in [s] can be defined after
the aspiration that enables complete aspiration of viscous liq
uids.
Avoids the mixing of the sample solution with the transfer solu
tion in the tube.
Only available for Action = Aspirate and for Titration stand =
Rondo or InMotion.
The relative aspiration rate in [%]
Values
1…100
80% =>
120 mL/min
0.01…50
Yes | No
0…300
Yes | No
1…100
80% =>
120 mL/min
Specifies the volume in [mL] of the related air gap.
0.010 ... 1 | H (auxil
Only available for Action = Aspirate and for Air gap before aspi iary value) | F (formula)
ration = Yes.
Avoids sample loss due to droplet formation.
Yes | No
Only available for Action = Aspirate and for Air gap before aspi
ration = Yes.
The relative aspiration rate in [%]
1…100
80% =>
120 mL/min
Specifies the volume in [mL] of the related air gap.
0.010 ... 1 | H (auxil
Only available for Action = Aspirate and for Air gap before aspi iary value) | F (formula)
ration = Yes.
Specific Parameters for Dispense
Parameters
Description
Discharge rate The relative dispensing rate in [%]
Discharge vol
The dispensing volume in [mL].
ume
Refill
This parameter is used if volumes are required which exceeds the
maximum burette volume (50 mL). If activated, you can specify
the Connection and the Aspiration rate for the automatic refilling
of the burette.
For multiple aspiration, be aware that volume shall be a multiple
of 25 µL.
Values
1…80
0.01…500
Yes | No
Note
● Both, Aspiration rate and Discharge rate depend on the viscosity of the solution. Low rate values are
required for highly viscous liquids and high rate values for liquids with a low viscosity (for more information
about the viscosity of some liquids at room temperature refer to:
• http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/Hbase/tables/viscosity.html
• 5,000 centipoise is the maximum value. Aspiration of high viscous samples require a waiting time after
the aspiration step is completed.
Analysis
221
See also
6.11.2.14 Measure (normal)
For the controlled acquisition of a measured value from a sensor. If a temperature sensor is selected for the
measurement, the subfunction "Temperature acquisition" is omitted.
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Type
Sensor
Unit
Indication
Ipol
Upol
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
metric
tion.
cation.
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Subfunction: Acquisition of measured values
Parameters
Description
Acquisition
Defines how the measured value is acquired.
Equilibrium-controlled: The measured value is acquired as soon
as it stabilizes.
- Fix: The measured value is acquired after a defined waiting
period.
- Set value: The measured value is acquired as soon as it has
exceeded, or fallen short of, a specific set value. (The Set Value
option is not available if the method function is used within a
Sample (Calib) loop.)
222
Analysis
°C | K | °F
Values
0…100
Values
Equilibrium Controlled |
Fixed | Set Value
Parameters for sensor types: mV, pH, ISE, Phototrode, Polarized, Conductivity
Parameters
Description
dE
Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in
the measured value over the time period dt is less than dE, the
measured value will be acquired. This occurs within the defined
time interval of t(min) to t(max).
dE is specified in the unchanged unit of the sensor per second:
- mV for the mV sensor type, pH, ISE, phototrode and polarized
voltametric
- µA for polarized amperometric
- mS | µS for conductivity sensor (only for "Acquisition " = "Equi
librium controlled".)
dt
Defines the time component, in [sec] for dE/dt. (For "acquisition"
= "equilibrium-controlled" only.)
t(min)
Earliest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in
[sec]. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)
t(max)
Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec].
(For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)
Time
Waiting time, in [sec], before acquisition of a measured value
when "acquisition" = "Fixed".
Mode
Mode for the measured value acquisition of the "set value".
E > set value acquires the measured value as soon as the set
value has been exceeded.
E < set value acquires the measured value as soon as the mea
sured value falls below the set value. Not available within a cali
bration loop.
Only for Acquisition = Set value.
Set value
Set value in the sensor unit. Measured values will be acquired
after they exceed or fall below this value, depending on the mode
setting. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available with
in a calibration loop.
t(max)
Latest time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For
"acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available within a calibra
tion loop.
Mean value
The system finds a mean value for the saved measured value,
using a maximum of 10 measured values.
No. of measured When you want to calculate a mean value, you can define the
values
number of measured values used to find that mean value here.
dt
Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the measured value acqui
sition of the measured values to be averaged. (Appears only if
"mean value" = "yes" is selected.)
Parameters for sensor types: Temperature
Parameters
Description
dT
Defines the measured value interval. As soon as the change in
the measured value during the time period dt is less than dT, the
measured value will be acquired. This occurs within the defined
time interval of t(min) to t(max).
This value is specified in the unchanged unit of the sensor, per
second:
°C | K | °F (Only for "Acquisition" = "Equilibrium controlled".)
dt
Defines the time component, in [sec] for dT/dt. (For "acquisition"
= "equilibrium-controlled" only.)
t(min)
[sec]. (For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)
t(max)
Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec].
(For "acquisition" = "equilibrium-controlled" only.)
Time
Waiting time, in [sec], before acquisition of a measured value
when "acquisition" = "Fixed".
Values
0.02…15
1…150
1…150
1…105
1…105
E > set value | E < set
value
(See "Value Ranges of
Sensor Measuring Units
and Control Band")
1…105
Yes | No
1…10
1…60
Values
0.1 … 10 Unit: °C | K |
°F
1…150
1…150
1…105
1…105
Analysis
223
Mode
Mode for the measured value acquisition of the "set value".
T > set value acquires the measured value as soon as the set
value has been exceeded.
T < set value value acquires the measured value as soon as the
measured value falls below the set value. Not available within a
calibration loop.
Only for Acquisition = Set value.
Set value
Set value in the sensor unit. Measured values will be acquired
after they exceed or fall below this value, depending on the mode
setting. (For "acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available with
in a calibration loop.
Lower limit
Defines the lower limit for the temperature acquisition.
Only appears if Mode = T within range.
Upper limit
Defines the upper limit for the temperature acquisition.
Only appears if Mode = T within range.
t(max)
Latest time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. (For
"acquisition" = "set value" only.) Not available within a calibra
tion loop.
Mean value
The system finds a mean value for the saved measured value,
using a maximum of 10 measured values.
No. of measured When you want to calculate a mean value, you can define the
values
number of measured values used to find that mean value here.
dt
Defines the time interval, in [sec], for the measured value acqui
sition of the measured values to be averaged. (Appears only if
"mean value" = "yes" is selected.)
Parameters
Description
Condition
T > set value | T < set
value | T within range
(See "Value Ranges of
Sensor Measuring Units
and Control Band")
-20.0…200.0
-20.0…200.0
1…105
Yes | No
1…10
1…60
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.15 Measure (MVT)
This method function enables the continuous acquisition of measured values for a sensor (maximum of 1000
measured values within a defined time interval).. If a temperature sensor is selected for the measurement, the
subfunction "Temperature acquisition" is omitted.
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Type
Sensor
Unit
224
Analysis
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Indication
Ipol
Upol
Defines how to do the indication. Depending on the unit of mea
Ipol is the polarization current, in [µA], for the voltametric indica
tion.
cation.
Voltametric | Ampero
metric
0.0…24.0
0…2000.0
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
°C | K | °F
Values
0…100
Subfunction: Saving measured values
Parameters
Description
Values
Interval
t(max)
Defines the time, in [min], during which the measured values
1…106
should be collected.
Parameters
Description
Condition
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.16 Park
Activates the park function for a sample changer. So that for instance the sensor can be deposited into a select
ed sample vessel at the end of a sample series.
Parameters
Titration stand
Description
Position
Defines the position in which to park the titration head.
For Current position, the head is parked in the last active posi
tion (for example: Sample).
For Current position + 1, the head is parked in the beaker after
the last active position.
Values
stands
Conditioning beaker |
Rinse beaker | Special
beaker 1…Special
beaker 4 | Current
position | Current posi
tion + 1
Analysis
225
Condition
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.17 Pump
You can use this method function to drain a reagent into a sample vessel.
Parameters
Auxiliary
reagent
Volume
Description
Pump property
Rate
an InMotion.
Direction
Condition
Volume in [mL].
Values
iary reagents
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
1-way | 1-way, two
10…100 (2-way, fine
rate) | 50/100 (1-way,
two rates)
Forward | Reverse
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.18 Record
When this function is selected, a report is generated.
Parameters
Description
Report Template Defines which report template is to be used for the report.
Condition
Values
List of available reports
Yes | No
Formula
226
Analysis
tion
See also
6.11.2.19 Rinse
You can use this method function to rinse a sensor. You can define the following parameters:
Parameters
Titration stand
Description
Selects a titration stand defined in the setup. Appears only if the
method function Rinse is used outside of a sample loop.
Auxiliary
reagent
Rinse cycles
Vol. per cycle
Position
Drain
Drain pump
Condition
Defines the position on the sample changer where the rinse pro
cedure should be executed. The rinsing beaker can only be
selected for a connected Rondo. Rinsing in the Current sample
position is only possible within the loop.
Defines whether the contents of the rinse vessel should be
drained before starting the rinse procedure. This is always auto
matically set to "Yes" if the Position has been set to Rinse
beaker or if more than one rinse cycle is executed.
Values
Select the titration
stands from the list
specified in Setup.
iary reagents
1…100
0…1000
Current position |
Rinse beaker | Current
sample
Yes | No
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.20 Sync
This function is only supported by the titrator model T90.
Five synchronization codes are used for synchronizing methods running simultaneously in both workspaces A
and B. Each of the codes is accessible for any running method using this method function. Methods can be
designed so that one method syncs another and vice versa.
When the parameter Action is set to Wait within a method function Sync, the method will be waiting at this
point. The method will be continued as soon as the parameter Action set to Send from a second running
method is reached for the same number selected in Code.
Always begin an analysis by starting the method that first contains a parameter Action = Send. This fixes the
status of the codes and enables the correct order of the sequence.
If using a series sequence containing two series, order the series with method containing the Action = Send
first in the sequence series.
Parameters
Action
Code
Description
Defines if a code is to be sent or received.
Individually identifies the code to be sent or received.
Values
Send | Wait
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5
Analysis
227
6.11.2.21 Standby
The "Standby" method function can only be inserted into Stromboli methods following the "End of sample"
method function. This method function determines whether the method is terminated at the end of the series, or
if the method remains active and then enters standby mode for the first loop. (This method function is only
available for Karl Fischer titrations with the "Stromboli" titration stand.)
6.11.2.22 Stating
Stating is used to maintain a sample solution at a particular set potential.
The relevant parameters can be determined for the following subfunctions:
Parameters
Description
Titrant
Continuous
Continuous addition requires a second burette and a second
addition
drive with the same titrant. If the first burette empties and is
refilled, the second burette will continue dispensing seamlessly.
(not with T50)
Titrant 2
The second titrant to be used for the continuous addition. (Only if
"continuous addition" is selected.) (not with T50)
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Type
Sensor
Unit
Values
Titrant list
Yes | No
Titrant list in Setup
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Subfunction: Pretitration
Parameters
Description
Pretitration
Pretitration specifies whether a pretitration should be performed.
Pretitration takes place until the target potential defined in the
subfunction "control" is reached.
Control band
This number defines the width of the control band. Outside the
control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispens
ing rate. The smaller the control band, the faster the titrator will
react to a deviation from the potential of the defined end point.
When the measurement curve reaches the control band, the titra
tor will slow down the titrant addition to approach the end point
in a cautious manner. The unit will depend on the sensor used.
228
Analysis
°C | K | °F
Values
0…100
Values
Yes | No
Depends on the sen
sor | Auxiliary value
Sub function: Predispense
Parameters
Description
Mode
Specifies the type of addition:
Volume: predispenses a specific volume.
Potential: system predispenses a substance until a certain
potential is reached.
Factor: A multiple of the sample size is predispensed.
None: does not predispense.
Volume
The volume to be predispensed in [mL].
Potential
Values
Volume | Potential |
Factor | None
Only for Mode = Volume.
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
The potential at which predispensing is stopped.
Depends on the sensor
Only for Mode = Potential.
Factor
The system calculates the predispensing volume by multiplying
the factor by the sample size.
0…105 | Auxiliary val
ue | Formula
For Mode = Factor only.
Wait time
Defines a waiting time, in [sec].
After predispensing or, if Mode = None, before the start of titra
tion.
Subfunction: Control
Parameters
Description
Set potential
Defines the target potential at which the sample solution should
be kept as constantly as possible. The unit of measure will
depend on the sensor used.
Control band
control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispens
Tendency
Defines the direction in which the sensor signal should be shifted
by the titrant addition.
Dosing rate
The maximum dosing rate in [mL/min].
(max)
Dosing rate
The minimum dosing rate in [µL/min].
(min)
Subfunction: Monitoring
Parameters
Description
Monitoring
Defines whether to monitor the sensor signal or temperature dur
ing the main stating process.
Signal
If you want to run monitoring, this is where you specify whether
to monitor the sensor signal or the temperature. (For "monitor" =
"yes" only.)
Lower limit
Defines the lower limit of the range within which the signal or
Upper limit
Defines the upper limit of the range within which the signal or
0…32000
Values
-
Depends on the sen
sor | Auxiliary value
Positive | Negative
0.001…60
1…104
Values
Yes | No
Sensor signal | Temper
ature
-
-
Analysis
229
Action
Defines an action for violations of the upper or lower monitoring Automatic | Manual |
parameters.
Terminate
• "Terminate": Stating will be terminated.
• "Manual:" The stating will be interrupted and a message will
appear on the display. The user can terminate or continue the
stating process.
• "Automatic": Stating will be interrupted and continued when the
monitoring parameters have returned to within the limits.
Subfunction: Termination
At Vmax
The volume, in [mL], after the dispensing of which the stating
will be terminated.
From t(min)
Specifies whether to define a time for the earliest possible termi
nation of the stating.
t(min)
The earliest time, in [min], at which termination can take place, if
the maximum volume has not yet been reached. (Only if "from
t(min)" = "yes" is selected.)
At t(max)
Specifies whether to define a time at which the stating will be ter
minated if it has not ended already.
t(max)
The time, in [min], at which the stating will be terminated if it has
not ended already.
(Only if "At "t(max)" = "Yes" is selected.)
After stating
Specifies whether to define a time period after which the stating
duration
will be terminated after reaching the end point for the first time.
Stating duration The time period, in [min], after which the stating will be terminat
ed after reaching the first end point. If defined, "t(min)" will be
taken into consideration.
(Only if "After stating duration" = "Yes" is selected.)
At minimum rate Defines whether to take a minimum rate into consideration which
will terminate the stating if violated.
dV
The volume increment, in [mL/dt], for calculating the minimum
rate.
(Only if "at minimum rate" = "yes" is selected.)
dt
The time increment, in [min], for calculating the minimum rate.
(Only if "at minimal rate" = "yes" is selected.)
0.01…1000
Yes | No
0.1…106
Yes | No
0.1…106
Yes | No
0.1…106
Yes | No
0.0001…10
1…106
Subfunction: Measured value storage
Parameters
Description
Values
Interval
Start condition
Defines the starting condition for saving the data:
• After pretitration: The system will start saving the data after
the pretitration.
• After predispensing: The system will start saving the data after
the predispensing.
Parameters
Description
Condition
Values
Yes | No
Formula
230
Analysis
tion
See also
● Value ranges from sensor measuring units and control band (page 333)
6.11.2.23 Stir
Activates or deactivates (speed ="0") the stirrer of the current titration stand.
Parameters
Speed
Duration
Condition
Description
The stirring time, in [sec]. (Can also be defined by an auxiliary
value or a formula.)
After the stirring time has elapsed, the titrator will continue to the
next method function without switching off the stirrer. The method
functions End of sample and Titration stand switch off the stirrer.
The stirrer output is defined by the prior method function Titration
stand.
Values
0…100
ue/Formula
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.24 Titration (EP)
Carries out an endpoint titration. Define the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Method function: Titration (EP)
Titrant
Parameters
Titrant
Sensor
Parameters
Type
Sensor
Unit
Indication
Ipol
Frequency
Description
Values
Titrant list
Description
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
metric
tion.
Polarization frequency in [Hz]. The standard frequency is 4 Hz; 4 | 2 | 1 | 0.5
other values should only be used for special applications.
Only for Type = Polarized, and Unit = mV.
Analysis
231
Upol
cation.
0…2000.0
Temperature acquisition
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
°C | K | °F
Stir
Parameters
Speed
Description
Values
0…100
Description
Values
Factor | None
Predispense
Parameters
Mode
Volume
Potential
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
Factor
ue | Formula
Wait time
Control
Parameters
End point type
Tendency
tion.
0…32000
Description
Absolute: Titration is ended when the absolute measured value is
reached.
Relative: The system will take into consideration the difference
between the desired end point and the measured value at the
start of the titration.
Defines the direction of change for the measured value during the
titrant addition. If the starting potential, end point and tendency
are inconsistent at the start of the analysis, the system will termi
nate the analysis immediately.
Values
Absolute | Relative
Positive | Negative |
None
For End point type = Absolute only.
End point value
232
Analysis
The defined titration end point. The unit will depend on the sensor Depends on the sen
used.
sor | Formula | Auxil
iary value
Control band
Dosing rate
(max)
Dosing rate
(min)
Termination
Parameters
At EP
Termination
delay
Depends on the sen
control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispens sor | Auxiliary value
0.001…60
1…104
Description
Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching the end
point.
If No is selected, after reaching the end point the system will con
tinue acquiring measured values without adding titrant until the
maximum time period is reached.
The termination delay which defines the time period, in [sec],
between reaching the end point and terminating the titration. If
during the termination delay the measured value drops below the
end point, the system will add further increments and restart the
termination delay.
Values
Yes | No
ue
Only if At EP = Yes is selected.)
At Vmax
Max. time
Defines the maximum volume, in [mL], at which the titration
must be terminated if it has not been terminated already.
Defines the maximum time of the titration, in [sec].
Accompanying Stating
Parameters
Description
0.1…1000 | Auxiliary
value | Formula
0…108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
Values
For T70/T90 only.
The "Stating" method function is used as a subfunction here to titration that is accompanied by stating. The
settings correspond to those for the method function "Stating" and can therefore be found in the description of
the method function "Stating".
Titration accompanied by stating allows a sample solution to be maintained at a specific electrode potential
during EQP, EP or two-phase titration. This is a stating that runs parallel to the actual titration and differs from
the "Stating" method function as follows:
• The accompanying stating begins and ends with the "Main" method function (titration) and therefore does
not include the subfunction "Termination."
• The accompanying stating does not include the settings "Stirring," and "Saving Measured Values."
• The subfunctions "Predispensing" and "Pretitration" are conducted prior to the main method function.
• As soon as the subfunctions "Predispensing" and "Pretitration" have been concluded, the main method
function begins, in which the stating continues to run parallel for the duration of the titration.
• Temperature acquisition is specified in the main method function.
Condition
Parameters
Condition
Description
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
Analysis
233
See also
● Stating (page 228)
6.11.2.25 Titration (EP Coul)
The Karl Fischer titration is performed using the "Titration (EP Coul)" method function. Especially, this function
is used to determine the Bromine Index (BI).
"Titration (EP Coul)" contains subfunctions which each have their own parameters.
You can determine the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Subfunction: Sensor
For coulometric titrations, only polarized sensors are used.
Parameters
Sensor
Ipol
Description
Values
Select a sensor from the list. The list depends on the sensor type List of available sensors
selected in Type.
tion.
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Values
0…100
The titrant generation is controlled by the generator current. Defined current increments can be defined userspecifically or automatically. You can also set the titration end point (recommended value:100 mV). You can
determine the rate of titrant generation - whether it is generated normally or slowly (cautiously).The "Cautious"
mode is used to avoid overtitration for smaller sample volumes.
Parameters
End point
Rate
Control band
Generator cur
rent
Current
Description
End point in [mV] of the Karl Fischer titration and the standby
titration.
Cautious or normal current regulation.
The value in [mV] defines the width of the control band. Outside
the control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dis
pensing rate. The control band allows the dynamic behavior of
the controller to be influenced. Reducing the control band causes
a more aggressive control behavior, while increasing the control
band gives a gentler control behavior. When the measurement
curve reaches the control band, the titrator slows down the addi
tion of titrant to approach the end point cautiously.
You can select whether the pulse strength is regulated automati
cally or whether the user enters a required fixed pulse strength.
The current can be selected with fixed generator currents.
Parameters
Description
Type
Termination of titration following defined drift and if the value falls
below the end-point value (EP).
Drift stop relative: Actual drift stop value = online drift + drift
Drift stop absolute: Actual drift stop value = drift
Delay time: Termination after a delay time below the EP.
Drift
The drift value in [µg/min] for the termination criterion drift stop
relative or drift stop absolute.
Delay time
Time in [s] from the time the end point is first reached until the
termination of the titration.
Min. time
Titration is not to be terminated before this time in [s] is reached
(exception: the maximum volume has been reached).
234
Analysis
Values
-2000 … 2000
Cautious | Normal
0.1...2000
Automatic | Fix
400 | 300 | 200 | 100
Values
Drift stop relative |
Drift stop absolute |
Delay time
1.0 ... 106
0...6000
0...108 | Auxiliary value
Max. time
Maximum duration of the titration (without post-consumption
measurement).
0...108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
6.11.2.26 Titration (KF Vol)
Carries out a Karl Fischer titration. You can determine the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Parameters
Description
Titrant
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Sensor
selected in Type.
Values
Titrant list
Values
For Karl Fischer titrations, only polarized sensors can be selected.
Ipol
tion.
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Subfunction: Predispense
Parameters
Description
Mode
Volume
Wait time
tion.
Values
0…100
Values
Volume | None
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
0…32000
The maximum dosing rates are dependent on the size of the burette. The user is able to edit the entire value
range. When Start is pressed, the system then checks whether the entered values are actually possible with the
current burette size.
Burette size [ml]
1
5
10
20
Parameters
End point
Control band
Dosing rate
(max)
Dosing rate
(min)
Maximum dosing
rate [mL/min]
3
15
30
60
Description
titration.
Values
-2000 … 2000
1…104
0.1...2000
0.001…60
Analysis
235
Start
Cautious or normal start of a Karl Fischer titration.
Parameters
Description
Type
Drift
Delay time
Min. time
Max. time
measurement).
At Vmax
Titration is terminated at the latest when the maximum volume is
reached (without post-consumption measurement), even if the
minimum time has not yet elapsed.
Cautious | Normal
Values
Delay time
1.0 ... 106
0...6000
0...108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
Yes | No
Note
The titration is terminated when the maximum time, the maximum volume and the drift stop are reached.
6.11.2.27 Titration (KF Coul)
The Karl Fischer titration is performed using the "Titration (KF Coul)" method function. This function contains
subfunctions which each have their own parameters.
Subfunction: Sensor
For coulometric KF titrations, only polarized sensors are used.
Parameters
Sensor
Ipol
Description
Values
selected in Type.
tion.
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Values
0…100
The titrant generation is controlled by the generator current.Defined current increments can be defined userspecifically or automatically. You can also set the titration end point (recommended value:100 mV). You can
determine the rate of titrant generation - whether it is generated normally or slowly (cautiously).The "Cautious"
mode is used to avoid overtitration for smaller sample volumes.
Parameters
End point
Rate
Control band
236
Analysis
Description
titration.
Cautious or normal current regulation.
Values
-2000 … 2000
Cautious | Normal
0.1...2000
Generator cur
rent
Current
You can select whether the pulse strength is regulated automati
cally or whether the user enters a required fixed pulse strength.
The current can be selected with fixed generator currents.
Parameters
Description
Type
Drift
Delay time
Min. time
Max. time
measurement).
Automatic | Fix
400 | 300 | 200 | 100
Values
Delay time
1.0 ... 106
0...6000
0...108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
6.11.2.28 Titration (Learn EQP)
Learn titration (EQP) is used to determine the best parameters for carrying out an EQP titration. As soon as the
settings have been successfully recorded, the titration detection in the method is converted to a normal EQP
titration with the recorded settings.
Parameters
Description
Titrant
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Type
Sensor
Unit
Indication
Ipol
Upol
Values
Titrant list
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
metric
tion.
cation.
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
°C | K | °F
Analysis
237
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Parameters
Description
Condition
Values
0…100
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.29 Titration (2-phase)
This method function performs an end-point titration. You can determine the relevant parameters for the follow
ing subfunctions:
Parameters
Description
Titrant
Subfunction: Sensor
Parameters
Description
Type
Sensor
Unit
Indication
Ipol
Upol
Values
Titrant list
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
metric
tion.
cation.
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
238
Analysis
°C | K | °F
Subfunction: Stir
Parameters
Description
Speed
Subfunction: Predispense
Parameters
Description
Mode
Volume
Potential
Values
0…100
Values
Factor | None
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
Factor
ue | Formula
Wait time
tion.
Parameters
Description
End point type
Absolute: Titration is ended when the absolute measured value is
reached.
Relative: The system will take into consideration the difference
between the desired end point and the measured value at the
start of the titration.
Tendency
Defines the direction of change for the measured value during the
titrant addition. If the starting potential, end point and tendency
are inconsistent at the start of the analysis, the system will termi
nate the analysis immediately.
0…32000
Values
Absolute | Relative
None
For End point type = Absolute only.
End point value
Control band
Dosing rate
(max)
Dosing rate
(min)
The defined titration end point. The unit will depend on the sensor Depends on the sen
used.
sor | Formula | Auxil
iary value
Depends on the sen
control band, the system will titrate with the maximum dispens sor | Auxiliary value
0.001…60
1…104
Parameters
Description
Values
At EP
Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching the end
Yes | No
point.
If No is selected, after reaching the end point the system will con
tinue acquiring measured values without adding titrant until the
maximum time period is reached.
Analysis
239
Termination
delay
The termination delay which defines the time period, in [sec],
between reaching the end point and terminating the titration. If
ue
during the termination delay the measured value drops below the
end point, the system will add further increments and restart the
termination delay.
Only if At EP = Yes is selected.)
At Vmax
Max. time
The titration will be terminated no later than at this dispensed
maximum volume, in [mL].
Defines the maximum time of the titration, in [sec].
0…108
0…108 | ∞ | Auxiliary
value
Subfunction: Accompanying Stating
For T70/T90 only.
Parameters
Description
Condition
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.30 Titration (EQP)
Carries out an equivalence-point titration. You can define the relevant parameters for the following subfunctions:
Method function: Titration (EQP)
Titrant
Parameters
Titrant
Sensor
Parameters
Type
240
Analysis
Description
Values
Titrant list
Description
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Sensor
Unit
Indication
Ipol
Frequency
selected in Type.
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
metric
tion.
Polarization frequency in [Hz]. The standard frequency is 4 Hz; 4 | 2 | 1 | 0.5
other values should only be used for special applications.
Only for Type = Polarized, and Unit = mV.
Upol
cation.
0…2000.0
Temperature acquisition
Parameters
Description
Temperature
acquisition
Temperature
sensor
acquisition.
Values
Yes | No
Sensor list
Unit
°C | K | °F
Stir
Parameters
Speed
Description
Values
0…100
Description
Values
Factor | None
Predispense
Parameters
Mode
Volume
Potential
0.0001…1000 | Auxil
Factor
ue | Formula
Wait time
tion.
0…32000
Analysis
241
Control
Parameters
Control
Mode
Description
Here you can select from among three predefined control modes,
or you can select User to define all the parameters as freely
editable.
If you change from Normal, Fast, Cautious to User, the system
will copy over the predefined parameter settings and they will
then be freely editable.
Select an application depending on the sensor type. The selected
application will then provide its own specific parameter set.
Values
Normal | Fast | Cau
tious | User
Application list
Not available for Control = User.
Show parame
ters
Here you can select whether to display the preset parameters of Yes | No
the control modes Normal, Fast or Cautious as non-editable info
fields.
Not for Control = User.
Titrant addition
Defines whether to always dispense the same volume defined by Dynamic | Incremental
dV (Incremental) or to adjust the volume to be titrated per step
as the titration progresses (Dynamic).
Only for Control = User.
dE(set value)
Defines the potential difference targeted per titrant addition.
Only for Control = User and Titrant addition = Dynamic.
dT(set value)
Defines the temperature difference in the unit of the temperature
sensor that is targeted for a temperature sensor per titrant addi
tion.
[mV/µA] 0.1…100
[mS/µS] 0.01…100
0.1…100
For Control = User and Titrant addition = Dynamic only.
dV(min)
Defines the minimum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL].
0.0001…1
dV(max)
Defines the maximum amount for a titrant addition, in [mL].
0.0001…10
dV
Defines the volume increment, in [mL], for the incremental titrant 0.0001…10
addition.
For Control = User and Titrant addition = Incremental only.
Meas. val.
acquisition
Type of measuring value acquisition:
Equilibrium controlled
Equilibrium controlled: The system acquires the measured value | Fixed time
and makes the next titrant addition as soon as a stable mea
sured value is established.
Fixed time: The measured values acquisition and the titrant
addition occur according to fixed time intervals.
Only for Control = User.
dE
As soon as the change in the measured value during the time
period dt is less than dE, the measured value will be acquired.
Acquisition takes place no earlier than after t(min) and no later
than after t(max). Then the next titrant addition is conducted.
[mV/µA] 0.1 … 15
[mS/µS] 0.01 … 15
For Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Equilibrium
controlled only.
dT
As soon as the change in the measured value during the time
period dt is less than dT, the measured value will be acquired.
Acquisition takes place no earlier than after t(min) and no later
than after t(max). Then the next titrant addition is conducted.
controlled for a temperature sensor only.
242
Analysis
0.1…15
dt
Defines the time interval, in [sec], for calculating dE/dt (or dT/dt
for a temperature sensor).
0.1…15
controlled only.
t(min)
[sec].
0.5…150
Only for Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Equilibri
um controlled.
t(max)
Latest possible time for the measured value acquisition, in [sec]. 1…105
Only for Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Equilibri
um controlled.
dt
Defines the time interval, in [sec], for Fixed time.
0.5…6000
For Control = User and Meas. val. acquisition = Fixed time
only.
Evaluation and Recognition
Parameters
Description
Procedure
Defines which evaluation procedure to use.
Threshold
* UoM:
Values
Standard |
Asymmetric |
Minimum | Maximum |
Segmented
Defines the threshold (absolute amount) that must be exceeded Standard,
for the recognition of an EQP.
Asymmetric and Seg
Procedure = Minimum and Maximum: This threshold value
mented: 0 … 106
refers to the original curve [UoM]
Minimum and Maxi
Procedure = Standard and Asymmetric: It refers to the 1st deriv mum: Depends on the
ative of the original curve [UoM*/mL].
sensor
Procedure = Segmented: It refers to the 2nd derivative of the
original curve [UoM/mL].
Unit of Measurement
Tendency
Defines the tendency for which the EQP is to be detected.
For Procedure = Standard, Asymmetric and Segmented.
Ranges
Lower limit 1-3
None
You can define up to three recognition ranges. Outside these
1 | 2 | 3 | 0
ranges, the system will recognize neither EQP's nor EQP candi
dates.
Depending on what is defined here, upper and lower limits are
defined for each recognition range and also whether additional
EQP criteria are to be used for each recognition range.
Defines the lower limit for the recognition range. The unit of mea Depends on the sensor
sure will depend on the sensor used.
Does not appear if Ranges = 0.
Upper limit 1-3
Defines the upper limit for the recognition range. The unit of mea Depends on the sensor
Does not appear if Ranges = 0.
Analysis
243
Add. EQP crite
ria
Last jumps
Defines whether to take additional EQP criteria into consideration.
The available selection will depend on the evaluation procedure
chosen. They can be defined individually for each recognition
range or for the overall recognition range (Ranges = 0).
Last EQP: The system only considers the quantity of EQPs
defined.
Steepest jump: The system only considers the number of steep
est jumps defined.
Lowest value: The system only considers the number of lowest
values defined.
Highest value: The system only considers the number of highest
values defined.
The quantity of last jumps to be taken into consideration.
Last EQP | Steepest
jump | Lowest value |
Highest value | No
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Last EQP.
Steepest jumps
The quantity of steepest jumps to be taken into consideration.
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Steepest jump.
Lowest values
The quantity of lowest values to be taken into consideration.
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Lowest value.
Highest values
The quantity of highest values to be taken into consideration.
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Highest value.
Buffer capacity
Termination
Parameters
At Vmax
At potential
Potential
Determination of buffer capacity with VEQ/2. Only possible for
sensor unit "pH" and volume-based sample entry (Sample >
Entry type = Volume or Fixed volume).
Yes | No
Description
Defines the maximum volume, in [mL], at which the titration
must be terminated if it has not been terminated already.
Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined
potential (with the correct tendency!).
The potential at which to terminate the titration. The unit of mea
Values
0.1…1000 | Auxiliary
value | Formula
Yes | No
Termination ten Defines for which tendency the titration should be terminated.
dency
Only for At potential = Yes.
-100...100 | Auxiliary
value | Formula
(Depends on the sen
sor)
None
At slope
Yes | No
Only for At potential = Yes.
Slope
Defines whether to terminate the titration after reaching a defined
slope. This absolute value must be exceeded by one measured
value and then be greater than two measured values to result in
termination.
The slope, in [unit of measure/mL], at which to terminate the
titration.
0...105 | Auxiliary val
ue | Formula
Only for At slope = Yes.
After number of Specifies whether the titration should be terminated after the
Yes | No
recognized EQPs recognition of a specific quantity of EQP candidates. The EQP
candidates must fulfill the following conditions:
- It lies within the recognition range defined in Ranges.
- It is above the threshold defined in Threshold
- It show the correct tendency as defined in Tendency. If no addi
tional EQP criteria should be considered, then EQP candidate =
EQP applies.
Number of EQPs Defines the quantity of EQP candidates after the recognition of
which the system should terminate the titration.
ue | Formula
Only for After number of recognized EQPs = Yes.
244
Analysis
Combined ter
No: Termination as soon as the first of the selected criteria from
mination criteria the (Potential | Slope | After number of recognized EQPs)
group has been fulfilled.
Yes: Termination as soon as all the selected criteria have been
fulfilled. Termination of the titration in any case if the maximum
volume is reached.
Parameters
Description
Yes | No
Values
For T70/T90 only.
Condition
Parameters
Condition
Description
Values
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.2.31 Titration stand
You can use the following parameters to specify the relevant titration stand.
Parameters
Type
Description
Defines the type of titration stand to be used.
Values
Rondo/Tower A |
Rondo/Tower B |
Rondolino TTL |
tion T/Tower A | InMo
tion T/Tower B |
Rondo60/1A |
Note
● KF stand applies only for Karl Fischer (KF) methods and the titration stand Stromboli TTL applies only for
KF Stromboli methods.
Analysis
245
Titration stand
Titration head
position
Cond. measure: Immerses the conductivity sensor into the sam
ple but not the pH sensor, preventing electrolyte contamination
from the pH sensor.
Defines whether before titration the lid of a sample should be
removed with an attached CoverUp™ unit.
Appears only for Type = Rondo or InMotion.
Temperature setting in [°C] for the "Stromboli" oven sample
changer.
Only for Titration stand = Stromboli TTL.
Online (not for Stromboli): For calculations, the drift determined
in the online procedure is used.
Determination: The drift saved in the titration stand setup for the
KF titration stand selected in the method is used.
Fix value: The drift value determined in the method.
Request: The drift value is requested before each sample or
Stromboli series.
Value of the drift in [µg/min].
The maximum drift for which a sample determination can still be
started.
Lid handling
Oven tempera
ture
Source for drift
Drift
Max. start drift
stands
Sample | Cond. mea
sure
Yes | No
50...300
Online | Determination
| Fix value | Request
0...1000
0...1000
6.11.3 Sample
6.11.3.1 Sample (Calib)
Start of a loop for sensor calibration. Contains all of the necessary data regarding the sensor and the calibration
standard.
Parameters
Sensor type
Sensor
Description
Specifies the type of sensor that is calibrated
Values
pH | ISE | Conductivity |
Temperature
selected in Type.
Action
Performing a calibration or a pH-sensor test.
Calibration | Sensor test
Unit
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Automatic buffer Defines whether the titrator should automatically identify the
Yes | No
recognition
buffers via the pH buffer list. Only possible for pH sensors.
pH buffer list
Defines the pH buffer list to be used for the calibration of a pH
Select from the pH
sensor.
buffer lists (Auto pH
buffer lists) defined in
Setup.
List of standards Defines the standards list to be used for the calibration of an ISE Select from the stan
or conductivity sensor.
dards lists defined in
Setup.
Calibration
Here you can define whether the calibration of a pH or ISE sensor Linear | Segmented
should be done in a linear or segmented manner.
Number of
The number of buffers to be used for the calibration of a pH sen 1…9
buffers
sor.
Number of stan The number of standards to be used for the calibration of an ISE 1…9
dards
sensor.
Buffer 1-9
For the calibration of a pH sensor, up to nine buffers can be
Select from the buffer
selected from the pH buffer list.
list.
246
Analysis
Standards 1-9
Standard
Temperature
For the calibration of an ISE sensor, up to nine standards can be
selected from the standards list.
Select the name of the standard from the standards list.
The temperature during the calibration in [°C] if temperature
acquisition has not been selected in the "Measurement (normal)"
method function. Does not appear for temperature sensors.
Select from the stan
dards list.
dards defined in the set
up.
-20°C…200°C
6.11.3.2 Sample (KF)
The method function Sample (KF) for Karl Fischer titration is subdivided into the subfunctions Sample, Con
centration, and Blank values (only for external extraction). You can define the following parameters:
Subfunction: Sample
Parameters
Description
Number of IDs
Defines the number of sample IDs to be defined.
ID 1…ID 3
Only appears subject to the settings made in Number of IDs.
Entry type
Defines whether the sample should be added with a defined
mass, defined volume or defined number of pieces. The sample
data query will then adjust according to the unit of measurement.
Fixed volume or Fixed pieces: The sampling weight, sample
volume or number of pieces will be entered as the parameter in
this method function and will not be prompted when conducting
the method.
Lower limit
Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of data. The unit will
depend on the setting for the Entry type parameter.
Only appears if for Entry type no "Fixed" values are selected.
Upper limit
Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of data. The unit will
Weight
Weight in [g].
Appears only if Entry type = Fixed weight was selected.
Value
Volume in [mL].
Only appears if for Entry type "Fixed" values are selected.
Pieces
Appears only if Entry type = Fixed pieces was selected.
Weight per
piece
ed.
Density
The density of a liquid sample substance, in [g/mL].
Appears only if Entry type = Weight, Volume, Fixed weight or
Fixed volume was selected.
Solvent weight Quantity of solvent in [g] in which the sample was extracted or
dissolved.
Only for method type = Ext. Extraction.
Wt. extracted
Total weight of sample in [g] which was extracted or dissolved in
sample
the solvent.
Only for method type = Ext. Extraction.
Temperature
Values
1…3
Arbitrary
Weight | Fixed weight |
Volume | Fixed
volume | Pieces | Fixed
pieces
[g]: 0 … 1000
[mL]: 0 … 104
[pcs.]: 0…106
[g]: 0 … 103
[mL]: 0 … 103
[pcs.]: 0 … 106
0…1000
0...104
0…106
0 … 1000
0.0001…100
0...1000
0...1000
0.0001…106
-20…200
Analysis
247
Autostart
Analysis start
Drift stability
dt
Entry
If activated, KF titration starts following a significant signal
increase within 30 seconds after the start of the analysis (not for
Stromboli methods).
If deactivated, the sample addition must be confirmed before
titration can begin.
If Automatic is selected, the analysis begins without any user
confirmation if the value falls below the maximum start drift and
the defined stability criterion Drift stability/dt and the set temper
ature are reached.
If the standby is executed by the method function Standby (only
for Stromboli), the automatic start is not performed (affects the
2nd, 3rd....series).
If the analysis is started manually, the Stromboli series must be
started explicitly in the Standby dialog.
Maximum permitted drift difference in [µg/min].
Only for "Stromboli" method type and if Analysis start = Auto
matic is selected.
dt in [sec] is the time taken to determine the drift stability. The
time recording can begin before the set temperature is reached
and before the value falls below the maximum start drift.
Only for "Stromboli" method type and if Analysis start = Auto
matic is selected.
Determines the input time for the sample size.
Before: The sample size must be entered before the titration.
Arbitrary: The sample size will have to be entered at any time
during the titration (no later than when it is used during the cal
culations). Only appears if for Entry type no "Fixed" values are
selected.
After addition: You are prompted to enter the sample data once
the sample has been added. The sample size - even during the
method execution - can be entered later on (however, no later
than when required for use in formulas).
Yes | No
Automatic | Manual
0...1000
1…1000
Arbitrary | After addi
tion
Subfunction: Concentration
To correctly determine the water content of a sample, the concentration of the titrant should be determined using
Karl Fischer water standards. The concentration determination is performed using control and termination para
meters.
Any predispensing defined in the method is not performed. A defined blank value is also not taken into account
in the calculation. Following a concentration determination, the system always switches to standby mode to
enable double and multiple determinations.
The concentration determination can be started manually. You can start the concentration determination of the
KF titrant from Standby of any Karl Fischer (KF) method. You can determine the following parameters:
Parameters
Standard
Entry type
Lower limit
Upper limit
248
Analysis
Description
Values
up.
mass, defined volume or defined number of pieces. The sample Volume | Fixed
data query will then adjust according to the unit of measurement. volume | Pieces | Fixed
pieces
the method.
Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of data. The unit will [g]: 0 … 1000
[mL]: 0 … 104
[pcs.]: 0…106
Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of data. The unit will [g]: 0 … 103
[mL]: 0 … 103
[pcs.]: 0 … 106
Weight
Value
Pieces
Mix time
Autostart
Entry
Lower limit
Upper limit
Weight in [g].
Volume in [mL].
The duration of stirring in [s] with the defined "Stir" speed.
Stromboli methods).
selected.
Defines the lower limit of the concentration limit.
Defines the upper limit of the concentration limit.
0…1000
0...104
0…106
0…104
Yes | No
tion
0.1…100
0.1…100
Note
● Outside of these limits, the actual concentration is not entered in the settings.
Subfunction: Blank
The method function Blank assigns a determined water content to the solvent. The blank can be a fixed value,
can be taken from the settings, or can be requested by the system. The method function Blank is only available
for the method type Ext. Extraction.
Parameters
Description
Values
Source for blank Setup: After the blank value is determined, the value and the unit Setup | Fix value [%] |
of the blank are transferred to the settings.
Fix value [ppm] |
Request [%] | Request
Fix: The value defined in the method is used.
[ppm]
Request: The blank value in the relevant unit is requested before
each sample.
The specified blank value is labeled with "B" in the method func
tion Calculation.
Value
Blank
The blank value assigned to the solvent to be determined.
0...106
Value from the settings
You can select a blank value defined in the settings.
Unit
Entry type
Defines the unit in which the blank value is calculated and used % | ppm
in a calculation. The unit for calculation with a blank value must
be the same as the unit set here.
Applies for the Setup option only.
mass or defined volume. The sample data query will then adjust Volume | Fixed volume
according to the unit of measurement.
For Fixed weight or Fixed volume, the sample mass and the
sample volume are entered as parameters in the method function
and not requested in the sequence of the method.
Analysis
249
Lower limit
Upper limit
Weight
Volume
Density
Mix time
Autostart
Entry
Limits
Upper limit
Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of sample data in
[mL] or [g]. The unit will depend on the setting for Entry type
parameter.
Applies only for Entry type = Weight and Volume.
Defines the upper limit for the variable entry of sample data in
[ml] or [g]. The unit will depend on the setting for the Entry type
parameter.
Weight in [g].
Volume in [mL].
Appears only if Entry type = Fixed volume was selected.
The density of the liquid sample in [g/mL] for Entry type = Vol
ume or Fixed volume.
The duration of stirring in [s] with the defined "Stir" speed.
Stromboli methods).
selected.
Defines the upper blank limit. Appears only if "limits" = "yes" was
selected. Outside these limits, the blank value is not entered in
the setup.
0...1000
0...1000
0…1000
0…1000
0…1000
0…104
Yes | No
tion
Yes | No
0...106
6.11.3.3 Sample
The "Sample" and "End of sample" method functions define the beginning and the end of a sample loop. All of
the method functions contained in a loop are conducted for each sample in a series. The method functions are
conducted in accordance with "End of Sample" only after processing the last sample.
Parameters
Number of IDs
ID 1
ID 2…ID 3
Entry type
Lower limit
250
Analysis
Description
Defines the number of sample IDs to be defined.
Only appears subject to the settings made for Number of IDs.
mass, defined volume or defined number of pieces. The sample
data query will then adjust according to the unit of measurement.
the method.
Defines the lower limit for the variable entry data. The unit will
depend on the setting for Entry type parameter.
Only appears if none fixed values are selected in Entry type.
Values
1…3
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Volume | Fixed
pieces
[g]: 0 … 1000
[mL]: 0 … 1000
[pcs.]: 0 … 106
Upper limit
Weight
Weight in [g].
Volume
Volume in [mL].
Pieces
Weight per
piece
ed.
Density
The density of a liquid sample substance, in [g/mL].
Appears only if Entry type = Weight, Volume, Fixed weight or
Fixed volume was selected.
Temperature
Entry
Determines the entry time for the sample size.
culations).
Sample data
None: no sample data reader is used.
reader
RFID: sample ID1,2, sample size, density and factor are read
from the RFID tag on the beaker.
MT 2D barcode: sample ID1 and sample size are read from the
barcode (this is a MT specific barcode layout).
ID 1 barcode: the barcode string is used as sample ID1.
[g]: 0 … 1000
[mL]: 0 … 1000
[St.]: 0 … 106
0…1000
0…1000
0…106
0 … 1000
0.0001…100
0.0001…106
-20…200
Before | Arbitrary
RFID, MT 2D barcode ,
ID 1 barcode | None
6.11.3.4 Sample (Titer)
Start of a loop for titer determination Contains all of the necessary data regarding the titrant and the standard to
be used.
Parameters
Titrant
Standard
Entry type
Description
Defines whether the quantity (weight or volume) of a liquid or
solid standard should be entered when the analysis is started or
whether a Fixed weight or a Fixed volume should be defined in
the method function.
Lower limit
Defines the lower limit for the variable entry of sample data in
[mL] or [g]. The unit will depend on the setting for Entry type
parameter.
Upper limit
Weight
Weight in [g].
Volume
Volume in [mL].
Values
Titrant list
up.
Volume | Fixed
pieces
0...1000
[g]: 0 … 1000
[mL]: 0 … 1000
[St.]: 0 … 106
0…1000
0…1000
0.0001…106
Analysis
251
Temperature
Entry
Sample data
reader
Determines the entry time for the sample size.
culations).
None: no sample data reader is used.
RFID: sample ID1,2, sample size, density and factor are read
from the RFID tag on the beaker.
MT 2D barcode: sample ID1 and sample size are read from the
barcode (this is a MT specific barcode layout).
ID 1 barcode: the barcode string is used as sample ID1.
-20…200
Before | Arbitrary
RFID, MT 2D barcode ,
ID 1 barcode | None
6.11.4 Titer
6.11.4.1 Titer
The "Titer" method function is only available outside a loop. This method function assigns the result of a sam
ple loop to a titer and updates the value stored in Setup.
Parameters
TITER=
Limits
Interruption out
side limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Condition
Description
Specifies for how many results the titer should be determined.
(For i=1, i does not have to be defined.)
Defines the lower limit of a value. Appears only if the "limits" =
"yes" setting was selected.
Defines the upper limit of the concentration limit.
Values
Mean[Ri], i=1…30
Yes | No
Yes | No
0…100
0.1…100
Yes | No
Formula
tion
See also
6.11.5 Subfunctions
6.11.5.1 Hidden sub functions
The following hidden functions exist for Karl Fischer methods: Pretitration and standby.
Following the start of a Karl Fischer method, a pretitration is performed. The titrator then switches to Standby
mode. The system switches automatically between Standby and Pretitration. The switch criterion is the drift val
252
Analysis
ue.
If the pretitration lasts longer than 30 minutes, a system message is displayed informing you that the pretitra
tion cannot be ended because the drift value is too high. You can end the pretitration, and then cancel the
method or series or restart the pretitration.
6.11.5.2 Calibration
This method function assigns the result of a calibration loop to a sensor and updates the sensor setup. Calibra
tion is only performed outside a loop.
Parameters
Limits
Interruption out
side limits
Description
Values
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
In cases of segmented calibration for pH and ISE sensors, the limits will be defined and observed for each seg
ment.
Depending on the sensor type (pH, ISE, conductivity), if the "Limits" checkbox is activated, the following para
meters can be determined (100% represents -59.16 mV/pH (sensor type: pH) or to -59.16 mV/[unit]) /Ion
charge (sensor type: ISE). The unit corresponds to the unit specified in the previous method function, "Sample
(Calib)". (For temperature sensors, only the two info fields for the minimum and maximum zero point are dis
played.)
For pH and ISE sensors:
Parameters
Min. slope 1-8
Max. slope 1-8
Min. zero point
1-8
Max. zero point
1-8
Description
The lower limit for the slope, in [%]. (100% refers to -59.16
mV/pH.)
The upper limit for the slope, in [%].
The lower limit for the zero point.
Values
10…200
The upper limit for the zero point.
-100…100
10…200
-100…100
For conductivity sensors:
Min. cell con
stant
Max. cell con
stant
Condition
Defines the lower limit for the cell constant of a conductivity sen 0…100
sor, in [1/cm].
Defines the upper limit for the cell constant of a conductivity sen 0…100
sor, in [1/cm].
Formula
tion
See also
Analysis
253
6.11.5.3 Mix Time
You can use the "Mix time" method function to define the stir time in [s] for Karl Fischer titration. This value is
obtained from experience and can be entered individually for each sample.
The stir speed, however, is entered in the method function "Titration" using the "Stir" parameter. This applies for
the whole method.
Parameters
Duration
254
Analysis
Description
Duration in [s].
Values
1...104
6.11.6 Evaluate and calculate
6.11.6.1 Indexing of method functions
The method functions Titration (EP, EQP, 2-phase, LearnEQP), Stating, Measure (normal), Measure (MVT),
Dispense, and Dispense (controlled) provide their own raw results within a method.
These raw results are saved by the titrator in the order in which the generating method functions are processed
within the method. To ensure that any time these method functions are used more than once the raw results
can still be given a unique assignment to their individual method functions, they are divided into four groups:
● Group 1 (all titrations): Method function Titration (EP, EQP, two-phase, Lern EQP)
● Group 2 (Stating): Method function Stating (normal)
● Group 3 (all measurements): Method functions Measure (normal) and Measure (MVT)
● Group 4 (all dispenses): Method function Dispense (normal) and Dispense (controlled)
If method functions from a group are used multiple times within a method, they are given indexes (beyond the
loop limits). This group index allows unique referencing of the raw results during calculations.
If the structure of a method is changed, the group indices are automatically updated, guaranteeing the serial
numbering at all times.
● Make sure your calculations take this into consideration!
Calculations can be used independently of the method functions that generated the results. For the results, we
suggest using the IDs R1...Rn, following the sequence of the calculations in the method.
Example
Method function
Title
Sample
Group index
Titration stand
Stir
Titration (EQP)
Titration (EP)
Dispense
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
Calculation
Calculation
Result
1
2
1
3
R1
R2
R3
End of sample
Sample
Titration stand
Dispense
Stating
Titration (EP)
Titration (EQP)
Calculation
2
1
4
5
R4
End of sample
Calculation
R5
For KF titrations (multiple loops are permitted for the Stromboli method type)
Method function
Group index
Result
Title
Sample (KF)
Titration stand (Stromboli)
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
1
Calculation
Calculation
R1
R2
Analysis
255
Method function
Group index
Result
Calculation
R3
End of sample
Sample (KF)
Titration stand
Mix time
Titration (KF Vol)
Calculation
3
End of sample
Calculation
R4
R5
The group index "1" can be omitted because when a group index is missing, the system automatically assigns
the group index "1".
6.11.6.2 Formulas
Calculation formulas can be used in the "Calculate" and "Condition" method functions. Some parameters within
method functions can also be defined in the form of formulas.
Formulas within the "Calculation" method function
One typical example for a formula within the "Calculation" method function would be the expression R=VEQ in
the "Formula" parameter. In this case, the consumed volume of titrant up to the point at which the end point is
reached is assigned to R. All the symbols can be used for analysis data in relations like this. The analysis data
to be used must be generated by the method before the "Calculate" method function.
Formulas for entering values for parameters
Formulas can also be used to specify the values for some parameters. For example, you can enter the stirring
time in a "Stir" method function in the form of a formula. The result of the formula will then be copied over as a
nondimensional value in the unit of the parameter in question.
Conditions
A condition is a formula whose result comes in the form of "true" or "false". Conditions can be used in various
method functions in the "Condition" parameter or subfunction. Depending on the condition's result, the method
function in question will be executed (condition true) or not executed (condition false).
● Auxiliary values and blanks defined in the setup can generally be used in formulas in the same manner as
symbols. The general form for an auxiliary value is: H[Name] (as defined in the setup).
● Likewise, results from other "Calculation" method functions can be referenced in the "Calculation" method
function. (E.g. R3=R2+R1)
(What is important in this case is to make sure that the results used must already be in existence at the
time they are to be used!)
6.11.6.2.1 Using analysis data in formulas
All analysis data that can be accessed via a symbol can be used in calculation formulas (see "Naming Con
ventions for Using Analysis Data in Calculations (page 260)").
All analysis data must be generated in the method before the point at which they will be used in a calculation
formula. For some analysis data, this could be as checked early as during the validation in the processing of a
method. For others, whether or not the data are available at the time in question may not be decided until the
execution of the method. If the analysis data is not available at the time of the calculation, the result of the cal
culation formula will be "NaN" ("Not a number").
The formula must be assigned to a result (Rx) in the "Formula" parameter in the "Calculate" method function.
Analysis data for which symbols have been defined can be used in the most general cases in the following for
mat (the separators ’_’ are only used for clarification purposes here; they are not used in the formulas):
256
Analysis
Basic symbol plus symbol extension_group ID_symbol index_unit(x,y)_[group index]
Shortcuts
● Instead of using VEQ and QEQ, you can also use the corresponding short forms (V and Q) in the formulas.
● If you leave out the symbol index of a symbol, Symbol Index 1 will be used.
Example: VEQ stands for VEQ1
● If you leave out the group index of a symbol, Group Index 1 will be used.
Example: VEQ1 stands for VEQ1[1]
All three rules can also be combined, for example:
Q stands for QEQ1[1]
Assignments in the form X(condition)
Using the "Calculate" method function within a loop makes it possible to make assignments containing a con
dition.
Conditional assignments of this type can be made using the symbols QEQ, VEQ and EEQ and indexed using
the group index.
Use of the logical operators AND and OR is not permitted within conditional assignments. Likewise, you cannot
use the mathematical operators (+, -, * and /) within the parenthetical expression.
Basic symbol and
symbol extension
GroupID
Symbol index
Explanation
Taken together, they serve as an
identifier for the analysis data.
Defines the group of method func
tions (Ti, Me, Di, or St) to which the
method function used to create the
analysis data belongs.
Specifies precisely which analysis
data are meant if one method func
tion generates analysis data multiple
times using the same symbol.
Examples
VEQ identifies the equivalence/end point of a
titration.
SLOPESt designates the slope of a sensor used
by a stating method function.
VEQ2 designates the consumed volume at the
2nd equivalence point of an EQP titration.
c2 references the nominal concentration of the
2nd titrant
If multiple titrants are used in one
TITER2 references the titer of the second titrant
method function, so the titer and
used.
nominal concentration will be used
multiple times per generating method
function. In this case, the index can
be used to define the titrant data to
be used in a calculation.
Unit(x) / Unit(x,y)
Unit(x) specifies which time ("t"),
VE(7) designates the titrant volume required to
potential ("E") or conversion ("CON") reach a pH of 7 (for the pH unit).
the analysis data should reference.
CVt(1.5) designates the mean stating use per
Unit(x,y) specifies the time interval
minute in the time interval between one and five
the analysis data should reference.
minutes.
Group index
Specifies which method function
within a method function group gen
erates the analysis data.
ESTSt[3] is the designation of the start potential
of the 3rd method function from the method
function group "Stating".
Shortcuts
General examples for the use of a formula in the "Calculate" method function:
R1=VStt(1.5)[2]
This example provides the volume (basic symbol = V) consumed during stating until the time of 1.5 (1 minute,
30 seconds) (unit(x) = time t(x)) as a result for the second method function (group index = 2) from the Stat
ing group (group ID = St).
R2=SLOPEMeE(7)
This example provides the slope (basic symbol = SLOPE) of the sensor used at pH 7 (unit(x) = potential E(x))
as a result for the first method function (group index = 1, can be omitted) from the Measure group (group ID =
Me).
Analysis
257
6.11.6.2.2 Sample formulas
Method type GT
Content of a sample or sample solution
(standard formula).
Titer determined with the standard sub
stance or standard solution.
Content per sample.
Result in the form of substance quantity
consumption.
Result in the form of volume consumption.
Result in the form of volume consumption
per weight or per volume.
Back titration
R = QEQ*C/m
QEQ = VEQ*c*TITER
R = m/(VEQ*c*C)
R = QEQ*C
R = QEQ
R = VEQ
R = VEQ/m
R = (QENDDi-QEQ)*C/m
QENDDi: Dispensed substance quantity of
the "Dispense" method function.
QEQ: Substance quantity used until the end
point or equivalence point of a "Titration"
method function.
Solvent blank (B[Name]) referenced in the
result calculation.
Matrix blank referenced in the calculation
[mmol/g].
Initial potential of the second "Titration"
method function.
The ion concentration in [mmol/L], mea
sured as pX or pM with an ion-selective
electrode.
Karl Fischer Titration Vol Method Type
Consumption
Mean consumption
Titration duration
Total water content
Content
R = (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m
Ext. Extraction Method Type
External dissolution (B in the correspond
ing unit)
Stromboli KFVol Method Type
Consumption
Mean consumption
Titration duration
Total water content
Stromboli blank value
Content blank value compensated (B in the
corresponding unit)
R = (QEQ-B[Name])*C/m
R = (QEQ/m-B[Name])*C
R = EST[2]
R = pw(-E)*1000
R = VEQ
R = VEQ*1000/TIME
R = TIME
R = CW
R = (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C
R = (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m
R = C*[(msol+mext)/mext]-B*msol/mext
R = VEQ
R = VEQ*1000/TIME
R = TIME
R = CW
R = (VEQ*CONC-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C
R = (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank
Stromboli]/1000-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C/m
R = (VEQ*CONC-B[Blank Stromboli]/1000-TIME*DRIFT/1000)*C
6.11.6.2.3 Constants within a Content Calculation
The tables below provide an overview of how to select the constant C in content determinations, depending on
the unit of the desired results and the data entered.
258
Analysis
Desired indication of the result:
content per gram of the sample
Content per milliliter of the
sample
Content per item of the sample
Input of the sample in [g]: R =
QEQ*C/m
Input of the sample in [mL]: R =
QEQ*C/(m*d)
Input of the sample in [St.]: R =
QEQ*C/(m*wp)
Constant
C = 1/z
C = M/z
C=1
C = 1000/z
C = 1000
C = M*1000/z
C=M
C = M*1000
C = M/(10*z)
C = 56.1
Input of the sample in [St.]: R =
Input of the sample in [mL]: R = QEQ*C/m
QEQ*C/m
Input of the sample in [g]: R =
QEQ*C/(m/d)
Unit
[mmol/g],
[mol/kg]
[mg/g], [g/kg]
[meq/g],
[eq/kg]
[mmol/kg],
[µmol/g]
[meq/kg],
[µeq/g]
[ppm],
[mg/kg], [µg/g]
--[%] (w/w)
Constant
C = 1/z
[mgKOH/g]
(TAN, TBN)
C = 56.1
C = M/z
C=1
C = 1000/z
C = 1000
C = M*1000/z
C=M
C = M*1000
C = M/(10*z)
Unit
[mmol/mL],
[mol/L]
[mg/mL], [g/L]
[meq/mL],
[eq/L]
[mmol/L],
[µmol/mL]
[meq/L],
[µeq/mL]
[mg/L],
[µg/mL]
--[g/100mL],
[%] (w/v)
--
Constant
C = 1/z
Unit
[mmol/pc.]
C = M/z
C=1
[mg/pc.]
[meq/pc.]
C = 1000/z
[µmol/pc.]
C = 1000
[µeq/pc.]
C = M*1000/z
[µg/pc.]
C=M
C = M*1000
C = M/(10*z)
----
C = 56.1
--
Calculation formulas for the titer determination
Standard type: fixed (input type = weight)
R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = M/(10*p*z)
Standard type: liquid (entry type = volume)
R = m/(VEQ*c*C) C = 1/(cst*z)
Standard type: liquid (input type = weight)
R = m/(VEQ*c*C)
C = d/(cst*z)
The data shown above applies similarly for more complex content determinations as well:
Back titration content: R = (QENDDi-Q)*C/m
Content with blank: R = (QEQ-B[Name])*C/m
Stating content: R = QENDSt*C/m
6.11.6.2.4 Mathematical functions and operators
The following mathematical functions and operators can be used in formulas:
Functions
Logarithm to the base 10
Logarithm to the base e
Exponential to base 10
Exponential to base e
Square
Square root
lg(x)
Ln(x)
pw(x) or
scientific notation
ex(x)
sq(x)
sr(x)
Comparison operators
equal to
larger than
larger than or equal to
=
>
>=
smaller than
smaller than or equal to
x in the range of
not equal to
<
<=
... < x < ...
<>
Analysis
259
Mathematical operators
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Logical operators
and
or
+
*
/
AND
OR
Logical operators are only permitted within the formulas of "Condition" subfunctions (or parameters).
6.11.6.3 Naming Conventions for Using Analysis Data in Calculations
In calculations ("Calculate" method function), you can access analysis data (raw results, results, resource
data, and sample data) using symbols or generate this data. These symbols consist of basic symbols and var
ious types of symbol extensions. The basic symbols define the type of data (volume, substance quantity) and
the corresponding unit. The symbol extensions can specify the data more precisely and include an abbreviation
for the group of method functions which the data is to reference. The following applies:
Ti is the group ID of the method functions: Titration (EP, EQP, 2-phase, LernEQP, KF)
St is the group ID of the method function: Stating (normal)
Me is the group ID of the method functions: Measure (normal) and Measure (MVT)
Di is the group ID of the method functions Dispense (normal) and Dispense (controlled)
● Note that the entry of symbols in formulas is case-sensitive.
● The group ID is only used to differentiate the symbols when it becomes necessary. The group ID "Ti" for
titrations is always omitted.
For titrations of type EP, EQP, 2-phase, LernEQP:
Basic sym Unit
Possible symbol additions Symbol
bol
V
[mL]
EQ
--VEQ (=V)
EX
END
VEX
--
VEND
St
VENDSt
VPTSt
Di
--
--
E(x)
VE(x)
--
--
t(x)
Vt(x)
Di
260
Analysis
VENDDi
VDit(x)
Meaning
Titrant consumption up to the
end point or equivalence point of
a titration method function. (For
multiple equivalence points, the
consumption is calculated from
the previous equivalence point.)
The excess of titrant added after
reaching the end point or equiva
lence point of a titration method
function.
Titrant volume used up to the
end of a titration method func
tion.
The total titrant volume used dur
ing a stating method function,
including the pretitration.
Volume of titrant used for the
pretitration.
The total titrant volume used dur
ing a dispense method function.
The titrant volume used until the
potential x is reached during a
titration method function.
time x is reached during a titra
tion method function.
time x is reached during a dis
pense method function.
Basic sym
bol
Q
Unit
Meaning
[mmol]
EQ
Substance quantity used up to
the end point or equivalence
point of a titration method func
tion.
Excess substance quantity titrat
ed in after reaching the end point
or equivalence point of a titration
method function.
The total substance quantity
used up to the end of a titration
method function.
used during a stating method
function.
Substance quantity of titrant used
for the pretitration.
used during a dispense method
function.
The substance quantity used
until the potential x is reached
during a titration method func
tion.
until the time x is reached during
a titration method function.
a stating method function.
a dispense method function.
The time of a titration method
function.
The time of a stating method
function.
The time of a dispense method
function.
The time of a measurement
method function.
The time of an analysis of a
sample from the start of the loop
to the usage of the symbol in the
method function "Calculate"
(cannot be used for conditions.)
Specifies the time for a stating
method function until the conver
sion of x% of the titrant used for
stating. (Relative to 100% reac
tion conversion at the end of a
stating method function.)
--
--
EX
END
QEQ (=Q)
QEX
--
QEND
St
QENDSt
QPTSt
Di
QENDDi
--
--
E(x)
QE(x)
--
--
t(x)
Qt(x)
QStt(x)
Di
t
[min]
--
USE
--
--
QDit(x)
--
t
St
tSt
Di
tDi
Me
tMe
--
tUSE
CON
(x)
tCON(x)
Analysis
261
Basic sym
bol
E
Unit
Meaning
Depends on
the sensor
EQ
The potential at the end point or
equivalence point of a titration
method function.
The potential at VEQ/2 of a titra
tion method function. (Not possi
ble for titration (EP)!)
The measured potential of a
method function "Measure (nor
mal)".
Specifies the buffer capacity with
half of the titrant volume used up
to the equivalence point for a GT
titration method function. (Not
possible for titration (EP)!)
The measured potential at the
start of a titration method func
tion.
start of a stating method func
tion.
start of a "Dispense (controlled)"
method function.
start of a "Measure (normal)" or
"Measure (MWT)" method func
tion.
The measured potential after the
waiting period for predispensing
during a titration method func
tion.
The measured potential after the
waiting period for predispensing
during a stating method func
tion.
The measured potential after
pretitration (before the waiting
period) during a stating method
function.
The measured temperature in a
method function "Measure (nor
mal)" (direct measurement with
temperature sensor or concomi
tant temperature acquisition).
The temperature of the sample,
standard or buffer solutions as
specified in the method functions
"Sample", "Sample (titer)", or
"Sample (calibrate)".
Defines the mean consumption
(volume) after pretitration per
minute between the time points x
and y during a stating method
function.
(No tempera
ture sensor)
--
--
EEQ
HNV
EHNV
--
E
BETAHNV
[mmol/L*pH]
--
--
--
BETAHNV
EST
Depends on
-the sensor (No
temperature
sensor)
--
--
EST
EPD
Depends on
-the sensor (No
temperature
sensor)
St
ESTSt
Di
ESTDi
Me
ESTMe
--
--
St
EPT
Depends on
the sensor
--
T
[°C], [K], [°F] --
St
EPD
EPDSt
--
EPTSt
T
Ts
CV
262
Analysis
[mL/min]
--
--
t(x,y) CVt(x,y)
Basic sym
bol
CQ
Unit
Meaning
[mmol/min]
--
CON
[%]
CORR
--
TITER
--
Defines the mean consumption
(substance quantity) per minute
between the time points x and y
during a stating method func
tion.
Specifies the reaction conversion
at the time x in percent. (Relative
to 100% reaction conversion at
the end of a stating method func
tion.)
CVt(x,y) and CQt(x,y) are deter
mined using the linear regres
sion of the measured values
between x and y. CORR is the
coefficient of correlation of this
linear regression (volume versus
time) and provides a standard
for its quality.
The titer value for a titrant used
in a titration method function.
in a stating method function.
in a dispense method function.
Specifies the nominal concentra
tion of a titrant used for a titra
tion of a titrant used for a stating
method function.
tion of a titrant used for a dis
pense method function.
Specifies the cell constant of a
conductivity sensor used for a
Specifies the cell constant of a
conductivity sensor used for
measurement method functions.
c
CELLC
[mol/L]
[1/cm]
--
t(x,y) CQt(x,y)
--
t(x)
--
--
t(x,y) CORRt(x,y)
--
--
--
--
--
CONt(x)
TITER
St
TITERSt
Di
TITERDi
--
--
c
St
cSt
Di
cDi
--
Me
--
CELLC
CELLCMe
Analysis
263
Basic sym
bol
SLOPE
Unit
Depends on
the sensor
--
--
--
St
Di
Me
Cal
--
--
St
Di
Me
Mean
--
St
Di
Me
264
Analysis
E(x)
SLOPE
Meaning
Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE
sensor or a Phototrode for a
SLOPESt
Specifies the slope of a pH sen
sor for a stating method func
tion.
SLOPEDi
Specifies the slope of a pH sen
sor for a "Dispense (controlled)"
method function .
SLOPEMe
sensor or a Phototrode for a
measurement method function.
SLOPECalx
Reports the slope for the seg
ment x after a Calibration.
SLOPEE(x)
sensor or a Phototrode at a
potential of x for a titration
method function.
SLOPEStE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH sen
sor at a potential of x for a stat
ing method function.
SLOPEDiE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH sen
sor at a potential of x for a "Dis
pense (controlled)" method func
tion .
SLOPEMeE(x) Specifies the slope of a pH or ISE
sensor or a Phototrode at a
potential of x for a measurement
method function.
SLOPEMean
Specifies the mean slope of a pH
or ISE sensor or a Phototrode for
SLOPEMeanSt Specifies the mean slope of a pH
sensor for a stating method func
tion.
SLOPEMeanDi Specifies the mean slope of a pH
sensor for a "Dispense (con
trolled)" method function .
SLOPEMean Specifies the mean slope of a pH
Me
or ISE sensor or a Phototrode for
a measurement method function.
Basic sym
bol
ZERO
Unit
Depends on
the sensor
--
--
--
Meaning
M
[g/mol]
--
--
--
z
--
--
--
--
B
[µg]
--
--
--
Specifies the zero point of a pH,
ISE or temperature sensor or a
Phototrode for a titration method
function.
ZEROSt
Specifies the zero point of a pH
sensor for a stating method func
tion.
ZERODi
sensor for a "Dispense (con
trolled)" method function .
ZEROMe
Phototrode for a measurement
method function.
ZEROCalx
Reports the zero point for the
segment x after a Calibration.
ZEROE(x)
Phototrode at a potential of x for
ZEROStE(x)
sensor at a potential of x for a
stating method function.
ZERODiE(x)
sensor at a potential of x for a
"Dispense (controlled)" method
function .
ZEROMeE(x) Specifies the zero point of a pH,
Phototrode at a potential of x for
a measurement method function.
ZEROMean
Specifies the mean zero point of
a pH or ISE sensor for a titration
method function.
ZEROMeanSt Specifies the mean zero point of
a pH sensor for a stating method
function.
ZEROMeanDi Specifies the mean zero point of
a pH sensor for a "Dispense
(controlled)" method function .
ZEROMeanMe Specifies the mean zero point of
a pH or ISE sensor for a mea
surement method function.
M
The molecular weight of a sub
stance. (As defined in the setup.)
z
The equivalent number of a sub
stance. (As defined in the setup.)
B[Name]
A blank.
---
---
---
H[Name]
m
St
Di
Me
Cal
--
--
E(x)
St
Di
Me
Mean
--
--
St
Di
Me
ZERO
[mmol]
H
m
-[mL]
An auxiliary value.
The sample size.
[g]
[pcs]
Analysis
265
Basic sym
bol
d
Unit
Meaning
[g/mL]
--
--
--
d
wp
[g/pcs]
--
--
--
wp
f
--
--
--
--
f
p
[%]
--
--
--
p
cSt
[mol/L]
--
--
--
cSt
Rx
C
Arbitrary
--
---
---
---
Rx
C
Mean
s
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Rx
Rx
---
---
Mean[Rx]
s[Rx]
srel
[%]
Rx
--
--
srel[Rx]
n
--
-TOT
--
--
n
nTOT
The density of a sample or a
standard.
The weight per item (can be
changed under "Sample").
A correction factor (as defined in
the "Sample" method function).
The purity of a solid titer stan
dard.
The concentration of a liquid titer
standard.
A result x.
A constant that uniquely belongs
to the result Rx. It cannot be
used in this form for the calcula
tions of other results.
The mean value of a result Rx.
The standard deviation of a
result Rx
The relative standard deviation of
the result Rx.
The sample number.
Total number of samples in the
loop.
The number of equivalent points
for the Titration (EQP, Lern EQP
or two-phase) method function.
Result of the method function
"Auxiliary instrument" from the
sequence of the external auxil
iary instrument.
Uses the value in the Result
Buffer list for the corresponding
sample for Result x from the
method with ID yy.
EQ
AuxInst
--
neq
--
--
--
AuxInst
Rx[yy]
Rx[yy]
All the symbols listed in the above table can be used in calculations within a loop.
The following symbols can be used in calculations outside loops:
M
z
C
Titer
CELLC
SLOPEE(x)
ZEROMean
Mean[Rx]
SLOPECalx
ZEROCalx
VENDDi, QENDDi and tDi
(within a method function Dispense outside a loop)
B[Name]
SLOPE
ZEROE(x)
s[Rx]
H[Name]
ZERO
SLOPEMean
srel[Rx]
Results (symbol "R") that are generated outside loops can also be used in calculations outside loops.
For titrations of type KF Vol
266
Analysis
Basic symbol
Unit
Symbol
Meaning
[mL]
Possible
symbol
additions
EQ
V
VEQ (=V)
[mL]
--
VPOST
Titrant consumed up to the end point of the
Volume of titrant for post-consumption
measurement.
VPOST
TIME
[min:s]
--
t
E
[min:s]
[mV]
-EQ
EST
[mV]
--
DRIFT
[µg(H2O)/min]
--
DRIFTV
[µL/min]
--
CW
[µg]
--
CWPOST
[µg]
--
CWPOSTMean [µg/min]
--
CONC
B
[mg/mL]
Arbitrary for KF
stand, e.g. [%]
and [ppm],
[µg] for Stromboli
arbitrary
[mL]
[g]
[pcs]
[g]
---
Duration of a sample analysis from the
end of Standby until the end of the method
function Titration (KF Vol)
t
Duration of a sample analysis.
EEQ
Potential at the end point of the titration
method function.
EST
Measured potential at the start of the titra
DRIFT
Consumption (mass) per minute for the
titration method function (water quantity
per time unit that penetrates the titration
stand).
DRIFTV
Volume of titrant consumption per minute
for the drift determination.
CW
Volume of water titrated up to EP (without
drift or blank value correction).
CWPOST
Titrated volume of water during a post-con
sumption measurement (without drift or
blank value correction).
CWPOSTMean Determined quantity of titrated water per
unit of time during the post-consumption
measurement (without drift or blank value
correction).
CONC
Represents the actual titrant concentration.
B[Name]
A blank.
---
H[Name]
m
Auxiliary value.
The sample size.
sol
msol
[g]
EXT
mext
d
wp
[g/mL]
[g/pcs]
---
d
wp
f
--
--
f
CONT
[mg/g]
--
CONT
Solvent weight for titrations of type KF Ext.
Extr. (External extraction).
Extracted sample quantity for titrations of
type KF Ext. Extr.
The density of a sample or a standard.
The weight per item (can be changed
under "Sample").
A correction factor (as defined in the "Sam
ple" method function).
The concentration of a liquid KF standard.
H
m
TIME
[mg/mL]
[mg/pc]
[%]
[ppm]
Rx
C
Arbitrary
--
---
Rx
C
Mean
s
srel
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
[%]
Rx
Rx
Rx
Mean[Rx]
s[Rx]
srel[Rx]
n
--
--
n
A result x.
A constant that uniquely belongs to the
result Rx. It cannot be used in this form for
the calculations of other results.
The mean value of a result Rx.
The standard deviation of a result Rx
The relative standard deviation of the result
Rx.
The sample number.
Analysis
267
6.11.6.4 Explanatory examples
6.11.6.4.1 Titration method function
E [mV]
EPD
EPD
EST
b
a
V [mL]
Predispensing
The following shows the various type of predispensing that can be used during a titration method:
a: Reference to a defined volume (or to the product of a factor and the sample size)
b: Reference to a defined potential
EST
EPD
Provides the potential at the start of the titration.
Provides the potential after dispensing and the waiting time.
E [mV]
nEQ = 3
3
EEQ3
EHNV3
EEQ2
2
EHNV2
EEQ1
1
EHNV1
VEQ1
QEQ1
VEQ2
QEQ2
VEQ3
QEQ3
VEX
QEX
V [mL]
Q [mmol]
VEND
QEND
Sample EQP titration containing three equivalence points
The following shows the three (nEQ = 3) recognized equivalence points (1, 2 and 3).
VEQ1, VEQ2 and VEQ3
QEQ1, QEQ2 and QEQ3
EEQ1, EEQ2 and EEQ3
EHNV1, EHNV2 and EHNV3
VEX and QEX
VEND and QEND
268
Analysis
Provide the calculated volume used until each EQP.
Provide the calculated substance quantity used until each EQP.
Provide the potential at each EQP.
Provide the "half neutralization point" for each EQP.
Provide the excess volume titrated and the excess substance
quantity titrated.
Provide the volume used by the end of the method and the sub
stance quantity of the titrant.
E [mV]
+200
x1
+100
0
-100
x2
-200
VE(x1)/QE(x1)
V [mL]
Q [mmol]
VE(x2)/QE(x2)
Example of an EQP titration with the evaluation of defined potentials (x1 and x2)
The following shows the evaluation of a titration curve with regard to the titrant consumption at certain poten
tials (x1 and x2).
VE(x1) and VE(x2)
QE(x1) and QE(x2)
Provide the titrant volume consumption at Potentials x1 and x2.
Provide the substance quantity of the titrant consumed at Poten
tials x1 and x2.
E [mV]
5
4 (EQP)
3
2 (EQP)
1
V [mL]
Theoretical example for the evaluation of a titration curve with five points of inflection
Explanation:
This titration curve shows five points of inflection (1 – 5).
Inflection points 1, 2 and 4 are recognized as EQP candidates, since only these points lie within the 2 recogni
tion ranges while also fulfilling the "Tendency" and "Threshold" parameters.
The specified "Additional EQP criteria" then determine whether the EQP candidates are actually recognized as
EQP. These additional EQP criteria can be defined for every recognition range.
In the example shown above, the following were specified as additional EQP criteria:
Recognition Range 1: "Last EQP"
Recognition Range 2: "No"
Of the two EQP candidates found in Recognition Range 1, the system only identifies the second one as an EQP
due to the "Final jump" criterion. The first one remains merely an EQP candidate.
Analysis
269
The termination criterion defined was that the titration should be terminated after the recognition of three EQP
candidates ("Termination after EQP" = "3"). In the above example the titration is terminated on identification of
the 4th turning point (3rd EQP candidate).
6.11.6.4.2 Stating method function
V [mL] / Q [mmol]
VENDSt / QENDSt
VStt(t2) / QStt(t2)
VStt(t1) / QStt(t1)
VPTSt / QPTSt
t [s]
0
t1
t2
Stating example including evaluation at specified points in time (t1, t2) where 0 is the start of the Stat titration following the
pretitration.
VENDSt, QENDSt
VStt(t1) and VStt(t2)
QStt(t1) and QStt(t2)
VPTSt
QPTSt
Provide the entire volume consumed and the entire substance quantity con
sumed
Provide the titrant volume consumed at Times t1 and t2
Provide the substance quantity consumed at Times t1 and t2
Volume used for pretitration: {mL}
Substance quantity of titrant used for pretitration: {mmol}
V [mL] / Q [mmol]
tSt
VENDSt / QENDSt
VStt(t2) / QStt(t2)
VStt(tCON(100))
QStt(tCON(100))
VStt(t1) / QStt(t1)
0
t [s]
0 t1
t2
Stating example including pretitration (gray area) and evaluation at specified points in time (t1, t2)
VENDSt, QENDSt
VStt(t1) and QStt(t1)
VStt(t2) and QStt(t2)
VStt(tCON(100))/QStt(tCON
(100))
270
Analysis
Provide the entire volume used and the entire substance quantity used at the
end of stating (including the pretitration)
Provide the titrant volume consumption and the substance quantity con
sumption at Time t1 (not including pretitration)
sumption at Time t2 (not including pretitration) )
sumption at the end of stating (not including pretitration)
∆V/ ∆t [mL/s]
CVt(t1,t2)
CQt(t1,t2)
t [s]
t1
t2
Stating example including evaluation of the mean titrant consumption
The following is a stating example including the evaluation of the mean consumption between Times t1 and t2.
CVt(t1,t2) and CQt(t1,t2) are determined using linear regression over the measured values between Times t1
and t2. CORRt(t1,t2) specifies the coefficient of correlation of this linear regression.
CVt(t1,t2)
CQt(t1,t2)
Provides the mean titrant consumption between t1 and t2 in the form of volume per
time.
Provides the mean titrant consumption between t1 and t2 in the form of substance
quantity per time.
Analysis
271
6.12 Method functions LiquiPhysics
6.12.1 Common
6.12.1.1 Adjustment
The measuring cells can be adjusted using the "Adjustment" method function. The deviation from the last
adjustment is checked. If the maximum deviation is exceeded, you can decide at the end of the adjustment
whether the data are transferred.
Method function: Adjustment
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Configuration
Parameter
Cell mode
Cell 1 - 2
Automation
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Displayed, if
Defines the cell(s)
The corresponding cell unit can be determined (depending on the Cell mode determined
cell mode selected).
Determines the automation unit to be used by the method.
Note: If sample addition and rinsing are performed using "FillPal"
and drying is performed with "DryPal", "FillPal+DryPal" must be
selected.
Settings
Parameter
Description
Temperature unit Specifies the temperature unit for the measurements. Either Cel
sius or Fahrenheit can be selected.
Performance Verification
Parameter
Description
Show error mes If this setting is activated, a message is displayed if the prerequi
sage
sites or preconditions for the instrument are not met.
Preconditions
Displays the preconditions (last test, adjustment or service) for
the instrument.
Method behavior If the preconditions are not met, you can determine whether the
if preconditions method is either paused or continued and selected.
not satisfied
Verify test set
You can determine whether a test set is to be verified.
Displayed, if
-
Displayed, if
"Preconditions" activat
ed
ed
Last successful You can define the maximum time allowed to pass since the last "Preconditions" and
test - less than
successful test.
"Verify test set" activat
[h]
ed
Verify adjustment You can determine whether an adjustment set is to be reviewed. "Preconditions" activat
set
ed
adjustment - less successful adjustment.
"Verify adjustment set"
than [h]
activated
Verify service
You can determine whether the service date is to be reviewed.
date
ed
272
Analysis
Minimum no. of
days until next
service
You can determine the number of days until the next service.
"Preconditions" and
"Verify service date" are
activated
Return values
See also
6.12.1.2 Clean
You can use the "Clean" method function to perform cleaning of measuring cells.
Method function: Clean
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Configuration
Parameter
Cell mode
Cell 1 - 2
Automation
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Displayed, if
Defines the cell(s)
selected.
Settings
Parameter
Description
Parameter
Description
sage
Preconditions
the instrument.
not satisfied
Verify test set
Displayed, if
-
Displayed, if
ed
ed
test - less than
successful test.
[h]
ed
set
ed
Analysis
273
Last successful
adjustment - less
than [h]
Verify service
date
Minimum no. of
days until next
service
You can define the maximum time allowed to pass since the last "Preconditions" and
successful adjustment.
activated
ed
"Preconditions" and
activated
Return Values
6.12.1.3 Import adjustment data
You can use this method function to import the adjustment data of the last adjustment in the instrument "Stand
alone" mode. This must be an adjustment with air and water at 20°C.
Method function: Import adjustment data
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Return Values
6.12.1.4 Measurement
You can use the "Measurement" method function to perform an analysis. You can determine the following para
meters:
Method function: Measurement
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Configuration
Parameter
Cell mode
Cell 1 - 2
Automation
274
Analysis
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Displayed, if
Defines the cell(s)
selected.
External instru
ments
Color settings
Parameter
Color settings
(Minolta only)
Illuminant
Observer
Display of external instruments (pH, conductivity, color) with
which the method is to be measured.
Description
Activates "Illuminant" so that the illuminant type can be defined
and "Observer" so that the angle can be entered.
The following illuminants can be selected:
A, C, D65, D50, ID65, ID50, F2 to F12
Viewing angle:
2°C or 10°C; default 2°C
Settings
Parameter
Description
Parameter
Description
sage
Preconditions
the instrument.
not satisfied
Verify test set
-
Displayed, if
"Color settings" (Minol
ta only)" activated
"Color settings" (Minol
ta only)" activated
Displayed, if
-
Displayed, if
ed
ed
test - less than
successful test.
[h]
ed
set
ed
adjustment - less successful adjustment.
than [h]
activated
Verify service
date
ed
Minimum no. of You can determine the number of days until the next service.
"Preconditions" and
days until next
service
activated
Return Values
6.12.1.5 Atmospheric Pressure
You can use this method function to define the atmospheric pressure. You can determine the following parame
ters.
Method function: Atmospheric pressure
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Displayed, if
Analysis
275
Description
Pressure
Parameter
Atmospheric
pressure
methods.
Description
Input of atmospheric pressure that is used for calculating the
nominal value of the air density. The atmospheric pressure is
required for an adjustment or a test with air or a cell test. If the
AtmoSens is connected, the reading will be displayed here.
-
Displayed, if
-
6.12.1.6 Test
The "Test" method function is used to verify the measuring cells. You can determine the following parameters:
Method function: Test
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Configuration
Parameter
Cell mode
Cell 1 - 2
Automation
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Displayed, if
Defines the cell(s)
selected.
Settings
Parameter
Description
Parameter
Description
sage
Preconditions
the instrument.
not satisfied
Verify test set
Displayed, if
-
Displayed, if
ed
ed
test - less than
successful test.
[h]
ed
set
ed
276
Analysis
Last successful
adjustment - less
than [h]
Verify service
date
Minimum no. of
days until next
service
You can define the maximum time allowed to pass since the last "Preconditions" and
successful adjustment.
activated
ed
"Preconditions" and
activated
Return Values
See also
6.12.2 User interaction
6.12.2.1 Standard data
This method function is used to request the standard data. The data is requested when a method function is in
progress, and can be entered manually or via the barcode reader. You can perform flexible assignment via data
binding using the "Sample parameters" subfunction.
Method function: Standard data
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Standard Data
Parameter
Standard name
Lot number
Certification date
Expiry date stan
dard
Request Standard
Data
Allow cancelling
Density
Parameter
d nominal
15 °C / 20 °C /
25 °C
Uncertainty
d 15 °C / d 20 °
C / d 25 °C
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Description of the standards
Lot number / batch number of the standard
Certification date of the standard
Expiry date of the standard
Displayed, if
Standard not air
Standard not air
Standard non-air
Determines whether the standard data is requested.
Standard non-air
Determines whether the function can be interrupted. A dialog
opens together with different options for selection.
Description
Nominal density value of the standard at 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C
Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal val
ue) at 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C.
-
Displayed, if
-
-
Analysis
277
Refractometry
Parameter
nD nominal
15 °C / 20 °C /
25 °C
Uncertainty
nD 15 °C / nD 2
0 °C / nD 25 °C
Description
Nominal refractive index value of the standard at
15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C
Limits of error of the standard (with reference to the nominal val
ue) at 15 °C / 20 °C / 25 °C.
Barcode Reader Configuration
Parameter
Description
Close after scan Determines whether the input dialog is automatically closed fol
ning
lowing a successful scan procedure.
Displayed, if
-
-
Displayed, if
-
Return values
The return values correspond to all relevant details for standards that can be referenced via data binding in the
"Sample parameters" subfunction.
6.12.3.1 Calculate on instrument
This method subfunction can only be inserted in the "Measurement" method function. This method function can
be used to define a result. In addition, you can also enter a formula of your choice with raw results, tables, or
other calculated results. These results can be displayed in the online screen of the instrument.
Results receive an index Rx, by which they can be referenced in formulas of other method functions. The calcu
lation number (Rx) is increased (from R1 to R20) when the "Calculation" method function is inserted, indepen
dently of the sequence of the method functions.
The syntax provided by the instrument applies for the calculations. The formula editor in this method function
differs from the general editor in that only specific formulas and tables that can be used for this instrument are
listed. Also see "LiquiPhysics formula syntax and tables (page 403)".
Method subfunction: Calculate on instrument
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Calculation On Instrument
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of the result generated in the calculation
Unit
Unit of result
Formula
Formula input for the calculation.
Displayed, if
-
All specific value tables and all value tables created in LabX are available for the calculations in accordance
with the selected cell mode.
Decimal places
Coefficients
Defines the number of decimal places in the calculated result.
Specifies the coefficients that can be used in the formula.
Note: For powers to the base 10 the "e"-convention may be used
(e.g. 1.2e-4 --> 0.00012).
Variable x / Vari Use of variables in the formula
"Coefficients" activated
able y
A/B/C/D
The coefficients that can be used in the formula
278
Analysis
Result limits
Lower limit
Upper limit
Interrupt if limits
exceeded
Result
Parameter
Main result
Defines whether limits should be observed for the result.
Defines the lower result limit.
Defines the upper result limit.
Defines that the measurement will be interrupted if the result is
outside the limits. It then receives the status "Error". If this para
meter is not activated, the measurement continues even if the
limit value is exceeded.
“Result limits” activated
Description
Displayed, if
Indicates that the result is the main result. If the relevant setting is selected for the “Search folder”, these results are displayed in list
view.
Also see Displaying additional results (page 304).
Export
Parameter
Include results
in exports
Description
Displayed, if
Yes | No
Return values
See also
● Displaying additional results (page 304)
6.12.3.2 Cell Test
This function is always a component of a method block and cannot be inserted as an independent element.
The cell test is used for testing the cell in respect of dryness and cleanness.
Method subfunction: Cell test
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Cell 1 Cell Test Settings
If a second cell is present, this area appears twice.
Parameter
Tolerance
Description
Displayed, if
Maximum permissible deviation of the measured air density from
the theoretical value
Other Cell Test Settings
Parameter
Description
Displayed, if
Max. test dura
Maximum duration of the cell test in [s]. If the measured value
tion
has not stabilized by this time, the cell test will be interrupted and
counts as having been failed.
Interrupt if failed If activated, the measurement receives the status "Error" if the cell
test is failed. The task list is interrupted. If the parameter has not
been activated, the measurement proceeds as normal, even if the
cell test has been failed.
Analysis
279
Condition
Parameter
Condition
Formula
Description
Displayed, if
Logical condition for defining whether or not a method function is
executed based on a result (true or false).
Here you can define a logical condition. The method function is Condition activated
either executed or not, depending on a result (true or false). The
condition is in the format of a formula. An empty condition is
interpreted as true.
Also see "Conditions and formulas (page 403)".
Return values
6.12.3.3 Clean
Cleaning of the measuring cell using the automation unit specified in the method block.
Method subfunction: Clean
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Drain Settings
Parameter
Drain
Drain Direction
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Draining the measuring cell
Defines the valve setting for draining:
Waste: A waste bottle is drained.
Vial: It is drained into a vial.
Displayed, if
"Automation" =
"SC1/SC30"
"Automation" = "FillPal"
(only for drain direction:
Waste)
"Drain" activated
Drain Mode
Drain duration
Fixed duration:
Draining is stopped after a defined time.
Auto:
The drain duration depends on the sample feed (total duration
equals the time for which the pump was in operation during fill
ing).
Draining time in [s]
Drain ratio
Duration of draining (in percentage of filling duration)
Rinse Cycle 1 Settings
Parameter
Description
Rinse Cycle
Activation of the cleaning cycle
Solvent name
The name of the solvent is entered here. In order for a method to
be executed correctly, the name must be identical to the name
entered in the instrument setup.
280
Analysis
"Drain" activated
"Drain mode" = "Fixed
duration"
"Drain mode" = "Auto
matic"
Displayed, if
Rinse cycle 1 activated
Rinse Mode
Rinse duration
Rinse rate
Air ratio
"Fixed duration":
Rinsing is stopped after a defined rinse duration.
Automatic:
The rinse duration depends on the sample feed (Total duration is
the time for which the pump was in operation for filling).
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
"Rinse cycle 1" activat
ed
Rinse time in [s]
"Rinse mode" = "Fixed
duration"
Duration of rinsing as percentage of filling duration
"Rinse mode" = "Auto
matic"
To increase the efficiency of rinsing, air is mixed with the solvent. "Automation" = "SC1" /
A higher air ratio causes a more turbulent flow, meaning more
"SC30"
intensive cleaning and lower consumption of fluid.
"Rinse cycle" activated
Rinse Cycle 2 Settings
Parameter
Description
Displayed, if
Rinse cycle 2
Activation of 2nd rinsing cycle; for the description of the parame Rinse cycle 1 activated
ter, see parameter "Rinse cycle 1".
Rinse Settings
Parameter
Air ratio
Dry Settings
Parameter
Dry
Dry mode
Dry duration
Max. dry dura
tion
Condition
Parameter
Condition
Formula
Description
To increase the efficiency of rinsing, air is mixed with the solvent.
A higher air ratio causes a more turbulent flow, meaning more
intensive cleaning and lower consumption of fluid.
Displayed, if
"Automation" = "SC1" /
"SC30"
Description
Activation of drying
Fixed duration:
Drying is stopped after a defined period
Auto:
Oscillation is measured. Drying is interrupted, when the oscilla
tion value becomes stable.
Drying time in [s]
Displayed, if
"Drying" activated
Maximum dry duration:
If the oscillation value has not stabilized by the end of this peri
od, drying is terminated.
"Rinse cycle" activated
"Dry mode" = "Fixed
duration"
"Dry mode" = "Auto
matic"
Description
Displayed, if
Return values
6.12.3.4 Instruction
You can determine the output of a message to be displayed during the analysis process. The analysis is inter
rupted while the message is displayed.
Method subfunction: Instruction
Analysis
281
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Instruction Settings
Parameter
Description
Displayed, if
Instruction
cation. The input %x% can also be used to reference results or
raw results, e.g. %R1%.
Continue after
Confirmation:
The analysis is continued as soon as the message has been
confirmed.
Time interval:
The analysis is continued at the latest after the defined time peri
od has elapsed.
Time interval
Maximum time interval for the display of the instruction (early
"Continue after" = "Time
confirmation continues the analysis)
interval"
Condition
Parameter
Condition
Formula
Description
Displayed, if
Return values
6.12.3.5 Temperature compensation
Temperature compensation allows you to measure a sample at a temperature and then to output the measured
value at another temperature. This temperature compensation is used in the following cases:
● The measured value must for example be stated at 15 °C, however the sample is too viscous at this tem
perature. Therefore these samples must be measured at correspondingly higher temperatures so that they
can be pumped to the measuring cell and remain fluid there.
● For accelerated measurements. If the sample is delivered at 35 °C for example and the measured value is
required at 15 °C, the sample can be measured at 35 °C and the measured value can be compensated to
15 °C.
● If the required reference temperature is outside the range of the measuring instrument (e.g. 120 °C), the
sample can be measured at 75 °C and the result compensated to 120 °C.
In order to use temperature compensation, the temperature dependency of the sample must be known (e.g.
density at various temperatures) or in the case of petrochemical products, their temperature dependencies in
accordance with ASTM-D 1250 are already stored in the device. The following tables are used (for crude oils,
refined products and lubricants):
282
Analysis
● 53A, 53B and 53D for 15 °C
● 5A, 5B and 5D for 60 °F
● 59A, 59B and 59D, for 20 °C
The aforementioned ASTM or API tables take as input values the readings taken from a hydrometer, which do
not however make allowance for the coefficient of expansion of the glass hydrometer. Therefore the measured
density cannot be directly used as the input value for these tables.
The measured values are converted to the desired temperature. The output value (TC) of this method function
can be used in the method function "Calculation".
Method subfunction: temperature compensation
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Temperature Compensation Settings
Parameter
Description
Compensation
API: Temperature compensation with API tables
type
Formula: Temperature compensation by entering any desired for
mula
API table
Selection of the relevant API table: Crude oil, refined products,
lubricants
Compensation
Compensation type = API
temp.
You can choose from between three reference temperatures
(15 °C, 60 °F, 20 °C). The temperature is entered as the input
value in the algorithm for calculating the API compensation.
Compensation type = Formula
The defined value is for information purposes only and is not
included in the calculation.
Output
Selection of the unit in which the temperature compensated value
is to be output.
Formula
Input of a formula for temperature compensation.
Displayed, if
-
"Compensation type" =
"API"
-
"API"
"Formula"
All specific value tables and all value tables created in LabX are available for the calculations in accordance
with the selected cell mode.
Coefficients
A/B/C/D
Specifies the coefficients that can be used in the formula.
Note: For powers to the base 10 the "e"-convention may be used
(e.g. 1.2e-4 --> 0.00012).
The coefficients that can be used in the formula
Return values
6.12.3.6 Wait
The "Wait" method function can be used to interrupt a method.
Method subfunction: Wait
Analysis
283
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Wait Settings
Parameter
Wait time
Condition
Parameter
Condition
Formula
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Description
Wait time before execution of next method function
Displayed, if
-
Description
Displayed, if
Return values
6.12.4 Subfunctions
6.12.4.1 Set sample parameters (Adjustment)
This subfunction is a fixed component of a method block and is not available as an independent element.
Adjustment of the measuring cells using the automation unit specified in the method block.
Subfunction: Set sample parameters
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Sample Parameters
Parameter
Description
Viscosity correc Activation of the viscosity correction
tion
Viscosity
≤2000 (info field)
284
Analysis
Displayed, if
"Viscosity correction"
activated
Adjustment Settings
Parameter
Description
Adjustment mode Controls the selection of the adjustment sets and the standard
specific data. The selection is filtered according to the modes of
the available sets in the Method > Setup > adjustment
sets. The following adjustment modes are available:
- Air&Water (recommended setting)
- Air&Standard
- Water&Standard
- Standards
Displayed, if
-
Cell 1 Adjustment Settings
Parameter
Cell
Adjustment set
Adj. temperature
Description
Displays the cell type used. (Info field).
The adjustment set defines the standards and the temperature at
which the adjustment is performed. With Air&Water the instru
ment accesses its internally saved nominal value tables, with
Standard the nominal value must be entered by the user.
The selection of the sets is filtered via the adjustment mode.
The adjustment set must be entered for each cell.
The adjustment temperature is displayed (info field).
Displayed, if
-
-
Standard
The method parameters are distinguished by the standard and cell used.
Parameter
Standard name
Lot number
Certification date
Expiry date Std
Set nominal val
ue
nD nominal
d nominal
Uncertainty
Description
At the time of activation, it is possible to enter the values for “nD
nominal” or “d nominal”. Otherwise, the default values will be
loaded.
Nominal refractive index value of standard
Nominal density of standard
Limits of error of standard – belongs to the nominal value
Displayed, if
Standard not air
Standard not air
Standard not air
Default is water
Cell = R
Cell = D
Standard not air
6.12.4.2 Set sample parameters (Test)
Testing of the measuring cells using the automation unit specified in the method block.
General
Parameter
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Analysis
285
Sample Parameters
Parameter
Description
Viscosity
≤2000:
For samples with viscosity less than 2000 mPa*s
>2000:
For samples with viscosity greater than 2000 mPa*s
Set value:
With this selection, a known viscosity can be entered
Viscosity
≤2000 (info field)
Test Settings
Parameter
Test mode
Displayed, if
activated
activated
Description
Displayed, if
Controls the selection of the test sets and the standard specific
data. The selection is filtered according to the modes of the avail
able sets in the Home > Setup > Test sets. The following
test modes are available:
- Air (internal nominal value table)
- Water (internal nominal value table)
- Standard
- Brix standard
Cell 1 Test Settings
Parameter
Cell
Test set
Test temperature
Description
The test set defines the standards and the temperature at which
the test is performed. The selection of the sets is filtered via the
test mode.
The test set must be entered for each cell.
The test temperature is displayed (info field).
Displayed, if
-
-
Standard
The method parameters are distinguished by the standard and cell used.
Parameter
Standard name
Lot number
Certification date
Expiry date Std
Set nominal val
ue
nD nominal
d nominal
Uncertainty
Description
At the time of activation, it is possible to enter the values for “nD
nominal” or “d nominal”. Otherwise, the default values will be
loaded.
Nominal refractive index value of standard
Nominal density of standard
Limits of error of standard – belongs to the nominal value
Displayed, if
Standard not air
Standard not air
Standard not air
Default is water
Cell = R
Cell = D
Standard not air
6.12.4.3 Set sample parameters (Measurement)
General
Parameter
Title
Name
286
Analysis
Description
Displayed, if
Description
methods.
Sample Parameters
Parameter
Description
Viscosity correc Activation of the viscosity correction
tion
Viscosity
≤2000:
For samples with viscosity less than 2000 mPa*s
>2000:
For samples with viscosity greater than 2000 mPa*s
Set value:
With this selection, a known viscosity can be entered
Viscosity Value
Viscosity of the sample
-
Displayed, if
Cell mode = D or DD
activated
"Viscosity" = "Set value"
-
6.12.4.4 Measure (Adjustment)
The "Adjustment" method type contains the "Measure" subfunction with the following parameters:
Subfunction: Measure
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Measured Value Acquisition
Parameter
Description
Wait time R
The refraction index measurement begins after this time has
elapsed. This wait time ensures that the prism is completely wet
ted with liquid. In the case of multiple measurements, each mea
surement is started after this wait time has elapsed.
End point
Auto:
The measurement is ended if the defined stability criteria have
been achieved.
(For the method types "Adjustment" and "Test" the "End point" =
"Automatic" (info field))
Max. meas.
Maximum duration of measurement. If the measured value has
duration
not stabilized by this time, the measurement will be canceled
with the status "Error". (depending on the stability criteria of the
parameter "Meas. reliability").
Meas. reliability Setting of stability criteria for meas. value acquisition.
- Maximum: Highest reliability of measured
- High
- Medium
- Minimum: Fastest measurement
Displayed, if
-
-
"End point" = "Automat
ic"
ic"
Error Detection
You record the following measuring errors with the bubble check or a multiple measurement:
Analysis
287
● air bubbles in the measuring cell (Bubble Check)
● Solvent residues in the measuring cell
● Solid particles in the sample
With the Bubble Check variations in the measuring signal are analyzed.
With Multiple measurement, n measurements are performed. Between measurements, the sample is subject
to continual movement. The standard deviation of the n measurements is added, and checked to see whether it
is smaller than the maximum standard deviation (Max. SD) defined in the method.
Parameter
Bubble Check
Description
When this is activated, the system checks whether any bubbles
are present in the cell.
Displayed, if
-
6.12.4.5 Measure (Measurement)
The "Measurement" method type contains the "Measure" subfunction with the following parameters:
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Cell 1 Measurement Configuration
Parameter
Cell
Measurement
temperature
Temperature unit
Adjustment set
Adj. temperature
Adjustment tem
perature unit
Description
Input of meas. temperature; the temperature can be defined per
cell.
Specifies the temperature unit for the measurements. (Info field).
Defines which adjustment set is used.
Shows the temperature unit defined for the adjustment set. (Info
field).
Parameter
Description
Wait time COL
The colorimetric measurement begins after this time has elapsed.
In the case of multiple measurements, only the first measurement
is started after this wait time has elapsed. All other measure
ments begin with no wait time.
Wait time R
288
Analysis
Displayed, if
-
Displayed, if
External instrument =
Colorimeter ("Configu
ration" method function:
"Color" activated)
-
End point
Meas. duration
Max. meas.
duration
Meas. reliability
Fixed duration:
The measurement is stopped after a certain time. This function is
used to shorten the measurement time if high precision is not
required. The measurement is stopped on achievement of the
maximum measurement reliability at the latest.
Automatic:
been achieved.
Duration of measurement in [s]
"End point" = "Fixed
duration"
ic"
Setting of stability criteria for meas. value acquisition.
ic"
- High
- Medium
Error Detection
Parameter
Multiple mea
surement
No. of measure
ments
Refill ratio
Description
On activation several measurements are performed on the same
sample
Input of number of measurements
Displayed, if
"Multiple measurement"
activated
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
Measurement for further movement of the sample between two
measurements. The refill ratio is calculated using the duration of
the sample addition. For example: The addition duration is 10 s
and the refill ratio is 50%, i.e. pumping continues for 5 seconds. "Repeat if failed" acti
vated
activated
Repeat if failed
If this is activated, the measurement is repeated if a bubble check
has failed or if "Max. SD" or "Max. Deviation" are exceeded.
Note: If "Multiple measurement" is activated, all measurements
are repeated.
Bubble Check
Defines the number of measured points used for determining the
mean value.
Note: If multiple measurement is activated, only the measured
values from the last measurement repetition are used.
No. of meas.
points
"Bubble Check" activat
ed, or
activated, or
External instrument
defined (pH meter, con
ductivity meter, col
orimeter)
pH or conductivity
meter defined in method
Analysis
289
Error detection Cell 1 and Colorimeter
Parameter
Cell
Description
Displayed, if
-
For a DE measuring cell
Max. SD
Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the measure "Multiple measurement"
ments for density, refractive index or color. When the deviation is activated
exceeded the measurement is interrupted with the status "Error".
The maximum standard deviation must be entered in the function
of the measuring cell type. The default value in the method is
provided for a D40 cell. This should be adjusted for a D45 or
D50 cell, e.g. 0.00002.
For an RE measuring cell
Max. SD
Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the measure Multiple measurement
ments for density, refractive index or color. When the deviation is activated
exceeded the measurement is interrupted with the status "Error".
The maximum standard deviation must be entered in the function
of the measuring cell type. The default value in the method is
provided for an R40 cell. This should be adjusted for an R50
cell, e.g. 0.00002.
Error detection external conductivity meter or external pH meter
Parameter
Description
No. of meas.
Defines the number of measured points used for determining the
points
mean value.
Note: If multiple measurement is activated, only the measured
values from the last measurement repetition are used.
Max. deviation
The max. permissible absolute deviation of the measured values
for the pH or conductivity meter. If this value is exceeded, the
measurement is interrupted with an "Error".
Displayed, if
pH or conductivity
pH or conductivity
6.12.4.6 Measure (Test)
The "Test" method type contains the "Measure" subfunction with the following parameters:
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Cell 1 Measurement Configuration
Parameter
Cell
Test temperature
290
Analysis
Description
The test temperature is displayed (info field).
Displayed, if
-
Adjustment Settings Cell 1
Parameter
Adjustment set
Adj. temperature
Description
Defines which adjustment set is used.
Displayed, if
-
Parameter
Description
Displayed, if
Wait time R
End point
Auto:
been achieved.
(For the method types "Adjustment" and "Test" the "End point" =
"Automatic" (info field))
Meas. duration
Duration of measurement in [s]
"End point" = "Fixed
duration"
Max. meas.
duration
ic"
Meas. reliability Setting of stability criteria for meas. value acquisition.
ic"
- High
- Medium
Error Detection
Parameter
Bubble Check
Description
Displayed, if
-
6.12.4.7 Adjustment
The "Adjustment" subfunction is used to store the adjustment data in the setup for the corresponding cell(s).
Here you can also perform an adjustment analysis that should be used to verify the accuracy of the determined
adjustment data. In this process, the system checks the deviation from the last adjustment. If the maximum
deviation is exceeded, you can decide at the end of the adjustment whether the data is transferred.
Subfunction: Adjustment
General
Parameter
Title
Description
Displayed, if
Analysis
291
Name
Description
methods.
-
-
Adjustment Settings
Parameter
Adjustment
analysis
Description
Evaluation of the adjustment
Displayed, if
-
Cell 1 Adjustment Settings
Parameter
Cell
Description
Standard
Displays the name of the standard.
Max. deviation d Input of the maximum permissible deviation.
/ nD
Displayed, if
"Adjustment analysis"
activated
activated
activated
6.12.4.8 Test
The "Test" method type contains the "Test" subfunction with the following parameters:
Subfunction: Test
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Cell 1 Test Settings
Parameter
Cell
Tolerance d/nD
Description
Allowed tolerance for the test
Displayed, if
-
6.12.4.9 Fill
Sample addition using the automation unit specified in the superordinate method block.
Subfunction: Fill
General
Parameter
Title
292
Analysis
Description
Displayed, if
Name
Description
methods.
Sample Parameters
Parameter
Description
Prompt for sam When activated a confirmation appears on completion of the
ple
method function "Fill", stating that the task is interrupted until
confirmed.
Speed
"SC1" / "SC30":
• "Maximum": Sample feed with maximum pump speed
• "Reduced": Sample feed with speed set at the automation unit
• "Automatic": The pump speed changes according to the defined
time period from "Reduced" to "Maximum".
-
-
Displayed, if
-
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
"FillPal":
• "High"
• "Medium"
• "Low"
Max. speed after The pump switches over to the maximum speed after this time
[s]
"Automation" = "SC1" /
"SC30"
"Speed" = "Automatic"
Filling mode
Fill time
Defines the way in which the sample feed is to be stopped.
"Fixed duration": The sample feed is stopped after a certain time.
"Automatic": The measuring signal is used to detect when the
sample fluid has reached the measuring cell.
Filling time in [s]
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
"Filling mode" = "Fixed
duration"
Fill ratio
Defines the percentage by which the cell is "overfilled". For exam
ple: After 10 s pumping, the sample is recognized in the cell, the
fill ratio is 150%, i.e. the pump switches off after 15s (feed dura
tion + feed duration x ("fill rate" -100) / 100).
Sample detection Selection of cell at which the sample detection is performed.
at
"Automation" = "FillPal"
/ "SC1" / "SC30"
"Filling mode" = "Auto
matic"
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
matic";
2-cell method
Max. fill duration Sample feed is stopped at the latest after this time, if no new
sample is detected in the cell.
The task is continued to completion, however the method func
tions "Fill" and "Measure" are skipped.
"Automation" =
"FillPal" / "SC1" /
"SC30"
matic"
6.12.4.10 Online display
Defines the display positions of up to four results from the "Calculate on Instrument" (page 278) method func
tions.
Analysis
293
Subfunction: Online display
General
Parameter
Title
Name
Description
Description
Displayed, if
methods.
Online Display
Parameter
Description
Displayed results The number of results on the online screen can be selected.
Top / bottom
Place at which the calculated results can be displayed on the
screen.
Top left / Top
Place at which the calculated results can be displayed on the
right / Bottom left screen.
/ Bottom right
294
Analysis
Displayed, if
"Displayed results" =
"2"
"Displayed results" =
"4"
Common raw data
Tset
Tcell
SD
MaxSD
p
f
R1…R20
TC1…TC5
RLim[1] ... RLim[x]
TIME
DRY
TE
ADJAN
t
T1
t2
Set temperature
Actual temperature at the time of measured value acquisition
Standard deviation for multiple measurements.
Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of measurements if
multiple measurements are taken.
Atmospheric pressure
Correction factor
Results from "Calculation" method function
Results from "Temperature compensation" method function
The result describes whether the limit is within [1] or outside [0] of the
calculations.
Duration from the start of the method to the time of calculation of
"TIME".
Result of the "Clean" method function for "Drying mode" = "Automatic"
(0: "not passed", 1: "passed").
Result of the test of the method of type "Test" (0: "not passed", 1:
"passed").
Result of the test of the method of type "Test" (0: "not passed", 1:
"passed")
Measurement duration (Method type "Measurement" or "Test").
Measurement duration standard 1 (method type "Adjustment").
Measurement duration standard 2 (method type "Adjustment").
Density measuring cell
OSC
d
dRaw
dA
SG
SGA
SG4
SG4A
SG4
SG60A
F
CT
DevCT
Brix measured
Brix deviation
Measured density
Measured density deviation
Standard deviation cell test
Oscillation: Actual measurement signal
Density
• During the measurement, the extrapolated density is displayed as
soon as it is received.
• If viscosity correction is activated, the viscosity-corrected density is
transferred at the end of the measurement.
Uncorrected density. Differences to d:
• During the measurement, the non-extrapolated density is displayed.
• At the end of the measurement, the viscosity-corrected density is not
transferred, even if viscosity correction is activated.
Apparent density
Specific weight: Density of the sample divided by the density of water
at the measurement temperature.
Apparent specific weight
Specific weight 4 oC: Density of the sample divided by the density of
water at 4 oC.
Apparent specific weight 4 oC
Specific weight 60 oF: Density of the sample divided by the density of
water at 60 oF
Apparent specific weight 60 oF
Adjustment factor
Result of the "Cell test" method function (0: "not passed", 1:
"passed").
Deviation of the cell test from the nominal value.
The measurement Brix value.
Deviation of the measured Brix value.
Measured density
Deviation of the measured density value.
Standard deviation in the cell test.
Analysis
295
Refractive index - module
nD
Refractive index
External Instruments
pH
DevpH
MaxDevpH
TpH
COND
DevCOND
MaxDevCOND
TCOND
SDCOL
MaxSDCOL
296
Analysis
pH value
Maximum deviation in the pH measurement.
The maximum permitted absolute deviation of measured values for pH.
Temperature pH
Conductivity
Maximum deviation in the conductivity measurement.
The maximum permitted absolute deviation of measured values for
conductivity.
Temperature conductivity
Standard deviation of the measured values for color in the case of mul
tiple measurements.
Maximum permitted absolute standard deviation of the measured val
ues for color, if multiple measurements are taken.
6.13 Method functions Thermal Values
6.13.1 Performance verification
This function validates the adjustments and tests of the selected instrument.
Method function: Performance Verification
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Last Successful Adjustment
Parameters
Description
Verify last adjust Defines whether a check should be performed to ascertain
ment
whether the last instrument adjustment was successful.
Verify adjustment Defines whether the adjustment data should be verified.
data
Adjustment - less Specifies the minimum time in days since the last instrument
than [d]
adjustment.
(Only if "Verify adjustment data" = "Activate" is selected.)
Last adjustment If you have selected "LabX", the last adjustment must have been
origin
performed from LabX. If you have selected "Instrument", the last
adjustment must have been performed on the instrument without
using LabX. If you have selected "Not specified", the origin of the
last adjustment is irrelevant.
(Only if "Verify adjustment data" = "Activate" is selected.)
Last Successful Test
Parameters
Description
Verify last test
Defines whether a check should be performed to ascertain
whether the last instrument test was successful.
Verify test data
Defines whether the test data should be verified.
Test - less than Specifies the minimum time in days since the last instrument test.
[d]
(Only if "Verify test data" = "Activate" is selected.)
-
-
Values
Activate
Activate
1…1000
LabX | Instrument | Not
specified
Values
Activate
Activate
1…1000
Return Values
6.13.2 Test melting point/range
This method function can be used to perform a test with the use of a reference substance. Tests are entered in
the history of the instrument and can be verified with the method function Performance Verification.
Method function: Test melting point/range
General
Parameters
Title
Description
Values
-
Analysis
297
Name
Description
methods.
Temperature Program
Parameters
Description
Temperature unit Defines which temperature unit should be used for the analysis.
Start temperature Temperature at which the temperature program starts. The start
temperature should be above the ambient temperature.
Wait time
Rest period before the temperature ramp starts. The capillaries
are already set. In the first 10 seconds of the wait time, an inten
sity of 0% is set. Neither measurement data nor video data are
recorded during this time.
Heating rate
Speed at which the measuring cell is heated during the tempera
ture ramp.
End temperature End temperature at the end of the temperature ramp.
t(iso)
Duration of the isothermal segment following the temperature
ramp.
Analysis
Parameters
Operation mode
Set manually
Temperature val
ues
Heating rate
warning
Initial threshold A
Melting point cri
terion
Threshold B
Endpoint C auto
matic slope
298
Analysis
Description
Defines whether the melting point or the melting range is evaluat
ed. The melting point is defined by one temperature value; the
melting range is defined by two.
Option to manually determine the temperature of the melting point
or that of the start and end of melting during the analysis. If you
have selected this option, a "Set" button appears for each capil
lary during the analysis. By pressing these buttons, the relevant
temperature is recorded.
If you have selected "Pharmacopeia", the temperature values are
taken directly from the temperature sensor in accordance with the
pharmacopeia standard. If you have selected "Thermodynamic",
the temperature values are determined in such a way that the
thermal inertia present in the measuring cell is taken into consid
eration. The "Thermodynamic" setting cannot be used in the
"Melting range" operation mode.
Defines the action taken if a deviating heating rate is selected for
adjustment. (Only if “Temperature values” = “Pharmacopeia” is
selected.)
Intensity value assumed as the start of the melting range. The
value is entered as a percentage of the maximum intensity. In the
majority of cases, 1.2 % is defined as the starting point of the
melting range.
There are two ways to determine the melting point: using a
threshold for the intensity itself, or using a value for the slope of
the intensity curve at endpoint C. You can enter the value in the
"Threshold" field or the "Endpoint C" field. (Only if “Operation
mode” = “Melting point” is selected.)
Intensity value at which the melting point is defined. The value is
entered as a percentage of the maximum intensity. (Only if "Melt
ing point criterion" = "Threshold B" is selected.)
If an automatic evaluation of endpoint C is performed, the entire
intensity curve is evaluated. Various criteria are applied which are
based on the slope of the intensity curve. (Only if "Melting point
criterion" = "Endpoint C" is selected.)
-
-
Values
°C | °F | K
10 to 400 °C
10 ... 1000 s
0.1 to 20 °C
10 to 400 °C
0 to 1000 s
Values
Melting point | Melting
range
Activate
Pharmacopeia | Ther
modynamic
Ignore and resume |
Action entry request |
Interrupt task
0 ... 25 %
Threshold B | Endpoint
C
1.0 to 99.0 %
Activate
Endpoint C slope Slope of the intensity curve at endpoint C at which the melting
point is defined. (Only if "Endpoint C automatic slope" = "Acti
vate" is not selected.)
Show results
Defines whether the results should be shown on the displayof the
after analysis
instrument after the analysis.
Allow excluding Allows capillaries to be excluded after the analysis is complete.
(Only if "Show results after analysis" = "Activate" is selected.)
Store videos
Defines whether the videos are stored in LabX. A video occupies
a maximum of around 30 MB in the LabX database. The sizes
are dependent upon the measurement duration.
Available Capillaries
Parameters
Description
Capillary 1 avail Defines the recognition of capillaries for which results are dis
ability
played. By selecting "Automatic recognition", capillaries are
detected optically using transmitted light.
0.02 ... 2.5 %/s
Activate
Activate
Activate
Values
Automatic recognition |
Yes | No
This behavior also applies to all other capillaries.
Termination Behavior
Parameters
Description
Stop at event
If you have selected this option, the analysis is stopped as soon
as the melting point is detected in all capillaries. The measuring
cell then behaves as defined in the "End behavior" field.
End behavior
Defines the behavior of the measuring cell at the end of an analy
sis. The measuring cell can either retain the end temperature of
the analysis or return to the start temperature or the furnace can
be switched off.
The behavior should be selected in such a way that the introduc
tion of the next sample is taken into consideration. This will allow
you to avoid long periods of cooling or heating.
Confirm end of
The analysis dialog remains and the results are displayed inside
analysis
it until you click on OK.
Values
Activate
End temperature | Start
temperature | Furnace
power off | Remove
temperature
Activate
Reference Substance
Parameters
Description
Values
Substance
Specifies the "reference substance" to be used for the analysis. To Selection
this end, select a reference substance from the list.
You can define reference substances in Resources.
Result Validation
Capillaries within
limits
Number of capil
laries
Defines whether the minimum number of capillaries that must lie
within the limits is checked.
Defines the minimum number of capillaries that must lie within
the limits. The number cannot be greater than the number of
available capillaries. (Only if "Capillaries within limits" = "Yes" is
selected.)
Limit excluded
Defines whether the maximum number of capillaries that can be
capillaries
excluded is checked.
Number of capil Specifies the maximum number of capillaries that can be exclud
laries
ed. (Only if "Limit excluded capillaries" = "Yes" is selected.)
Activate
1 ... 6
Activate
1 ... 3
Return Values
A list of return values is provided in the relevant chapter for each method function. See also "Return values"
(page 302).
See also
● Performance verification (page 297)
● Managing reference substances (page 353)
Analysis
299
6.13.3 Melting point/range
This method function can be used to perform an analysis to determine the melting point or melting range. If you
select a "reference substance", the data from an analysis performed using this method can be used for adjust
ment purposes.
Method function: Melting point/range
General
Parameters
Title
Name
Description
Description
Values
methods.
Temperature Program
Parameters
Description
Temperature unit Defines which temperature unit should be used for the analysis.
Start temperature Temperature at which the temperature program starts. The start
temperature should be above the ambient temperature.
Wait time
Rest period before the temperature ramp starts. The capillaries
are already set. In the first 10 seconds of the wait time, an inten
sity of 0% is set. Neither measurement data nor video data are
recorded during this time.
Screening
This option is used for the rapid analysis of an unknown sub
stance. If it is selected, a heating rate that deviates from the
adjustment is permitted without warning. In addition, the "Overall
result status" is set to "Uncertain".
Heating rate
Speed at which the measuring cell is heated during the tempera
ture ramp.
End temperature End temperature at the end of the temperature ramp.
t(iso)
Duration of the isothermal segment following the temperature
ramp.
Analysis
Parameters
Operation mode
Description
Defines whether the melting point or the melting range is evaluat
ed. The melting point is defined by one temperature value; the
melting range is defined by two.
Set manually
Option to manually determine the temperature of the melting point
or that of the start and end of melting during the analysis. If you
have selected this option, a "Set" button appears for each capil
lary during the analysis. By pressing these buttons, the relevant
temperature is recorded.
Temperature val If you have selected "Pharmacopeia", the temperature values are
ues
taken directly from the temperature sensor in accordance with the
pharmacopeia standard. If you have selected "Thermodynamic",
the temperature values are determined in such a way that the
thermal inertia present in the measuring cell is taken into consid
eration. The "Thermodynamic" setting cannot be used in the
"Melting range" operation mode.
Heating rate
Defines the action taken if a deviating heating rate is selected for
warning
adjustment. (Only if "Screening" = "Activate" is not selected and
"Temperature values" = "Pharmacopeia" is selected.)
300
Analysis
-
-
Values
°C | °F | K
10 to 400 °C
10 ... 1000 s
Activate
0.1 to 20 °C
10 to 400 °C
0 to 1000 s
Values
Melting point | Melting
range
Activate
Pharmacopeia | Ther
modynamic
Ignore and resume |
Action entry request |
Interrupt task
Initial threshold A Intensity value assumed as the start of the melting range. The
value is entered as a percentage of the maximum intensity. In the
majority of cases, 1.2 % is defined as the starting point of the
melting range.
Melting point cri There are two ways to determine the melting point: using a
terion
threshold for the intensity itself, or using a value for the slope of
the intensity curve at endpoint C. You can enter the value in the
"Threshold" field or the "Endpoint C" field. (Only if "Set manually "
= "Activate" is not selected.)
Threshold B
Intensity value at which the melting point is defined. The value is
entered as a percentage of the maximum intensity. (Only if "Melt
ing point criterion" = "Threshold B" is selected.)
Endpoint C auto If an automatic evaluation of endpoint C is performed, the entire
matic slope
intensity curve is evaluated. Various criteria are applied which are
based on the slope of the intensity curve. (Only if "Set manually "
= "Activate" is not selected and "End point criterion" = "Endpoint
C" is selected)
Endpoint C slope Slope of the intensity curve at endpoint C at which the melting
point is defined. (Only if "Endpoint C automatic slope" = "Acti
vate" is not selected.)
Show results
Defines whether the results should be shown on the displayof the
after analysis
instrument after the analysis.
Allow excluding Allows capillaries to be excluded after the analysis is complete.
(Only if "Show results after analysis" = "Activate" is selected.)
Store videos
Defines whether the videos are stored in LabX. A video occupies
a maximum of around 30 MB in the LabX database. The sizes
are dependent upon the measurement duration.
Available Capillaries
Parameters
Description
Capillary 1 avail Defines the recognition of capillaries for which results are dis
ability
played. By selecting "Automatic recognition", capillaries are
detected optically using transmitted light.
0 ... 25 %
Threshold B | Endpoint
C
1.0 to 99.0 %
Activate
0.02 ... 2.5 %/s
Activate
Activate
Activate
Values
Automatic recognition |
Yes | No
This behavior also applies to all other capillaries.
Termination Behavior
Parameters
Description
Stop at event
If you have selected this option, the analysis is stopped as soon
as the melting point is detected in all capillaries. The measuring
cell then behaves as defined in the "End behavior" field.
End behavior
Defines the behavior of the measuring cell at the end of an analy
sis. The measuring cell can either retain the end temperature of
the analysis or return to the start temperature or the furnace can
be switched off.
The behavior should be selected in such a way that the introduc
tion of the next sample is taken into consideration. This will allow
you to avoid long periods of cooling or heating.
Confirm end of
The analysis dialog remains and the results are displayed inside
analysis
it until you click on OK.
Values
Activate
End temperature | Start
temperature | Furnace
power off | Remove
temperature
Activate
Reference Substance
Parameters
Description
Values
Substance
If you select a "reference substance", the data from an analysis
Selection
performed using this method can be used for adjustment purpos
es. To this end, select a reference substance from the list. Only
reference substances which match the selected evaluation para
meters are displayed.
You can define reference substances under: Analysis > Resources > Reference substances.
Analysis
301
Return Values
See also
functions.
Parameter
General
State
Explanation
Value range
Specifies the status of the result. Uncertain is output in the follow Not OK | OK | Uncertain
ing cases:
● The heating rate differs from the rate used for the adjustment.
● A precondition was not fulfilled.
● An analysis was interrupted or stopped.
Test status
Conformity Capillaries
Conformity Exclusion
Conformity
check
Analysis state
Result
Temperature
unit
A mean
A std. deviation
B mean
B std. deviation
C mean
C std. deviation
Delta T mean
Creation time
Capillaries
All capillaries,
measured A
All capillaries,
measured B
All capillaries,
measured C
Capillary 1
result … 6
Capillary 1 com
ment … 6
302
Analysis
Specifies whether the limits defined in the reference substances
have been maintained.
Passed | Failed
Specifies whether an analysis was interrupted or stopped.
OK | Interrupted |
Stopped | Interrupted
and Stopped
OK | Failed | Overwrite
Result of the performance verification. Overwrite is output if the
analysis is resumed despite the status "Failed".
Specifies the temperature unit used
°C | °F | K
Mean value A of the capillaries that are not excluded.
Standard deviation A of the capillaries that are not excluded.
Mean value B of the capillaries that are not excluded.
Standard deviation B of the capillaries that are not excluded.
Mean value C of the capillaries that are not excluded.
Standard deviation C of the capillaries that are not excluded.
The value calculated from:
Cmean - Amean
Temperature value
Temperature value
Temperature value
Temperature value
List value of all A values measured from non-empty capillaries.
Temperature value
List value of all B values measured from non-empty capillaries.
Temperature value
List value of all C values measured from non-empty capillaries.
Temperature value
Specifies the status of individual capillaries.
Included | Excluded |
Empty
Text
Displays the comments relating to the capillaries.
-
Parameter
Capillary 1
measured A
… 6
Capillary 1
measured B
… 6
Capillary 1
measured C
… 6
Explanation
The A value measured with the capillary.
Value range
Temperature value
The B value measured with the capillary.
Temperature value
The C value measured with the capillary.
Temperature value
Analysis
303
7 Data
If you click on Data in the navigation pane, a list of the results and reports saved is displayed. Filters can be
applied to the respective lists. Some of these filters are predefined, e.g. “Last 3 days”. In addition, you can
define your own filters, which will then be displayed next to the series of predefined filters, or you can modify
the predefined filters. Double-clicking on a result or result set opens the Results Editor.
Data storage
sample cycle.
width.
Navigation: Data
Object
Results
Result Sets
Reports
Explanation
If a Sample Scope method function was used in a method, an entry is displayed
for each sample processed.
You will find one entry for each task processed. Click on Result Sets to open the
display of the individual results.
If a Reports method function was used in a method, the corresponding entries will
be displayed for each task processed.
Reports can also be created at a later time. Reports that contain the system con
figuration or audit trail, for example, are also displayed here.
See also
7.1 Editing search folder
Navigation: Data > Results - or - Data > Result Set
ing your own search folders makes it is easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data. You can assign
multiple criteria to a particular search folder and thereby create combinations that satisfy multiple criteria, e.g.
all results that have been carried out on a specific instrument by user xy in the last 24 hours.
New Search Folder
Edit Search Folder
Note
If only a single result from a result set containing multiple results matches the selected search criteria, the com
plete result set will be displayed.
7.1.1 Displaying additional results
Navigation: Data > Results
In the Results folder, it is possible to display additional columns with the results for each sample. The corre
sponding columns containing the units for the results are also displayed automatically.
A maximum of 6 result columns and their units can be selected. By default, the columns are added at the end.
You can then change the order and save the settings to the respective search folder.
304
Data
Results which were calculated using the method function Result should already be available. If no results
are available yet, you can enter the names that should appear in the methods.
1 Highlight the desired search folder and select [Edit Result Columns] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is
opened.
2 For referencing, the names entered as the title in the method function Result are used. To this end, select the
required results from the drop-down list. All result titles found by the defined filter are proposed.
The additional columns are displayed in the table view for the selected search folder.
Note
● Alternatively, you can call up these settings via Edit Search Folder in the ribbon bar. Then select the Result
Title tab.
● For LiquiPhysics instruments, results from the method function Calculate on Instrument can also be dis
played.
7.1.2 Editing instrument settings
This function is not supported by all instruments.
Results and result sets from LabX can be displayed on instruments in the usual way. For this purpose, search
folders with the relevant settings are created in LabX. On the Instrument Settings tab, select the columns to be
displayed.
1 Select the appropriate search folder or create a new search folder.
2 Select [Edit Search Folder] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 On the Filter Criteria tab, define your search criteria.
4 On the Instrument Settings tab, define how the results should be displayed.
The results are displayed on the selected instrument family.
The results displayed can be limited, for example, to an instrument and instrument family. To do this, assign in
Filter Criteria the option Instrument and select Operator = Is Current.
Instrument Settings tab
Parameters
Show on instrument
Instrument family
Number of rows
Available Columns
Assigned Columns
Explanation
Specifies that the filtered results should be displayed on instruments.
Specifies the instrument family on which these settings should be used.
Specifies the maximum number of results to be displayed in these search
folders on the instruments. A maximum of 200 rows per search folder can
be displayed.
List of all available items for the columns.
List of all assigned items for the columns. A maximum of 4 columns can be
displayed.
Note
● Existing search folders can also be edited on instruments. In addition, the column widths can be adjusted
accordingly. The settings are also applied to the PC.
● Search folders on instrument families are displayed only if the instruments of these families are listed in the
resources of the system. Automatically, predefined search folders with the name of the instrument family are
also created.
7.2 Managing results
In the Results Editor, the data generated during the execution of a task on an instrument is displayed.
Data
305
The attribute in the column Origin is a task specific. It presents the source from which a task was created. As
origin the following sources could come into consideration: Method, Product, Sample Series and Series
Sequence.
In Determination type, LabX will allocate a type per result for every result associated with a sample and
depending on the scope(s) configuration in the method.
1 Select the result that you wish to open in the table view.
2 Select [Open Result] or [Open Result Set] in the ribbon bar. The results editor opens.
Note
● The button Undo Saved Changes on the ribbon bar reverses any saved changes to their original values.
● Editing is only possible as long as result sets are not signed. You can revoke the signing if required.
● Select more then one result to obtain statistics over several samples or series. Results will open in read-only
mode.
● For the titrator model T90: Logical conditions (Condition) that determines whether or not a method function
is executed are ignored when recalculating any results.
Results tabs
Available tabs
Results
Result Details
Raw Data
Measured Values
Statistics
Signatures
Task data
Resource data
Method Data
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available ribbon bar functions
Available functions
Edit Result Comment
Delete Videos
Exclude / Include Sample
Outlier Test
Recalculate Results
Edit Sample Data
Reevaluate
•
•
•
•
•
•
See also
7.2.1 Editing sample data
Navigation: Results Editor > Edit Sample Data
This function lets you subsequently recalculate existing results from one sample. On the basis of this new cal
culation, specific sample data can be subsequently changed.
For example, the sample size or the correction factor can be adjusted, if these values were erroneously entered
incorrectly in the method or in the method start.
A recalculation can be performed for:
306
Data
● Samples or determinations within a sample or titer loop, and for all concentration or blank determinations.
● An individual GT sample (of the type sample or titer) or a Karl Fischer (KF) determination (sample, blank or
concentration).
Note
● Running KF tasks can only be recalculated from the instrument screen.
● New raw data cannot be generated, therefore changes can only be made to existing data.
● If you change data in the function Edit Sample Data, all the calculations that depend on that data (both
directly and indirectly), inside and outside loops, are rerun and marked accordingly.
For Karl Fischer titrations, these calculations refer only to the current determination type. The original raw
results are not deleted.
The following sample data can be subsequently changed
For titrations of type GT
Changeable parameters
Sample size
Standard size
Density
Correction factor
Standard density
Individual sample of type
Sample
Titer
Yes**
-
-
Yes**
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
For titrations of type KF
Changeable parameters
Sample size
Standard size
Density
Correction factor
Standard density
* Only for Entry
** Only for Entry
Individual determination of type
Sample
Titer
Concentration
Yes**
Yes**
-
-
-
Yes**
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
Yes
type = Fix
type = Variable
See also
7.2.2 Recalculating results
Navigation: Results Editor > Recalculate Results
This function lets you subsequently recalculate existing results by modifying used formulas or adding new
results using different formulas.
Specify whether the calculation should be run inside or outside a loop (scope). For calculations within a
loop, the result will be added for all the samples (of the same loop) of a series.
1 Select an existing result.
- or Click [+] to add a subsequent result calculation to your analysis results.
2 Enter the parameters in accordance with the method function Calculation.
3 Click [OK] to calculate the additional result and add it to your analysis results.
If you are missing raw data or raw results for the calculation and cannot calculate the result for that reason,
the result "NaN" (Not a number) will be added.
Data
307
Note
● Only resource data of resources that were used in the original measurement can be used.
See also
● Calculation (page 212)
● Result (page 150)
7.2.3 Reevaluating
Navigation: Results Editor > Reevaluate
This function is only available if a method function Titration (EQP) or Titration (2-phase) is included in the
method. This function lets you make subsequent adjustments to the Recognition and evaluation criteria for an
equivalence point and thus run a new evaluation of the measurement data. If a single sample is selected, you
can insert a new EQP on the displayed titration curve.
1 Select the sample scope and, if the method contains multiple titration functions, select the one whose recog
nition criteria you want to adjust.
2 If desired, uncheck Apply to all samples and select the specific sample.
3 Click [Edit] to open the reevaluation window.
4 In Evaluation and Recognition Parameters, apply changes to the available parameters and click [Reeval
uate].
The reevaluation is only run for the selected sample (or samples) and the selected method function. All cal
culations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside loops, will be rerun and the results obtained will be
marked.
Evaluation and Recognition
Parameters
Description
Procedure
Defines which evaluation procedure to use.
Threshold
* UoM:
Values
Standard |
Asymmetric |
Minimum | Maximum |
Segmented
Defines the threshold (absolute amount) that must be exceeded Standard,
for the recognition of an EQP.
Asymmetric and Seg
Procedure = Minimum and Maximum: This threshold value
mented: 0 … 106
refers to the original curve [UoM]
Minimum and Maxi
Procedure = Standard and Asymmetric: It refers to the 1st deriv mum: Depends on the
ative of the original curve [UoM*/mL].
sensor
Procedure = Segmented: It refers to the 2nd derivative of the
original curve [UoM/mL].
Unit of Measurement
Tendency
Defines the tendency for which the EQP is to be detected.
For Procedure = Standard, Asymmetric and Segmented.
308
Data
None
Ranges
Add. EQP crite
ria
Last jumps
You can define up to three recognition ranges. Outside these
ranges, the system will recognize neither EQP's nor EQP candi
dates.
Depending on what is defined here, upper and lower limits are
defined for each recognition range and also whether additional
EQP criteria are to be used for each recognition range.
Defines whether to take additional EQP criteria into consideration.
The available selection will depend on the evaluation procedure
chosen. They can be defined individually for each recognition
range or for the overall recognition range (Ranges = 0).
Last EQP: The system only considers the quantity of EQPs
defined.
Steepest jump: The system only considers the number of steep
est jumps defined.
Lowest value: The system only considers the number of lowest
values defined.
Highest value: The system only considers the number of highest
values defined.
The quantity of last jumps to be taken into consideration.
1 | 2 | 3 | 0
Last EQP | Steepest
jump | Lowest value |
Highest value | No
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Last EQP.
Steepest jumps
The quantity of steepest jumps to be taken into consideration.
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Steepest jump.
Lowest values
The quantity of lowest values to be taken into consideration.
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Lowest value.
Highest values
The quantity of highest values to be taken into consideration.
1…9
Only for Add. EQP criteria = Highest value.
Adding an EQP
If a single sample is selected, you can insert a new EQP at any point desired on the curve.
1 Using the ribbon commands, zoom the particular region of the curve and displaying the derivative with E-V
curves, before carrying out the procedure.
2 In the ribbon bar, select [Add EQP].
3 Using the pointer, select the desired position to which the EQP is to be inserted.
4 Once the position is optimized, click to freeze it.
The EQP is inserted in the graphics window and the accompanying data is shown in Raw Data.
5 Click [OK] to save the changes and close the dialog box.
All calculations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside loops, will be rerun and the results obtained
will be marked.
Editing EQPs
If a single sample is selected, you can edit EQPs.
1 Select te EQP to be edited on the curve or in the list Raw Data.
2 In the ribbon bar, select [Remove EQP] to remove the EQP.
- or In the ribbon bar, select [Valid / Invalid] to toggle the validity of the EQPs.
3 Click [OK] to save the changes and close the dialog box.
All calculations affected directly or indirectly, inside or outside loops, will be rerun and the results obtained
will be marked.
7.2.4 Results
Navigation: Results Editor > Results
Data
309
There is one line per sample displayed with the corresponding results and the sample specific parameters.
Main result1) must be activated.
Results are the results of the calculation of raw results within the following listed method functions. Result1),
Calculate on Instrument2) or Calculate3). The results of an analysis can be influenced by the user.
1)
2)
3)
For Balance / Quantos / Thermal Values / LiquiPhysics
For LiquiPhysics
For Titration
width.
Note
● Since vectors cannot be of type Main result, they are not displayed.
● Multiple results (e.g. generated in a do while loop are shown as (multiple)) in this view, without values.
See also
● Do while (page 160)
7.2.5 Result details
Navigation: Results Editor > Result Details
In this view, there is one line displayed per sample and result. Result comments are predefined or are entered
on the instrument by the user, but can be edited. Select the result that you want to edit and click [Edit Result
Comment].
Results are the results of the calculation of raw results within the following listed method functions. Result1),
Calculate on Instrument2) or Calculate3). The results of an analysis can be influenced by the user.
1)
2)
3)
For Balance / Quantos / Thermal Values / LiquiPhysics
For LiquiPhysics
For Titration
width.
Note
● Since vectors cannot be of type Main result, they are not displayed.
See also
7.2.5.1 Editing results comments
Navigation: Results Editor > Result Details
Result comments are predefined or are entered on the instrument by the user, but can be edited.
1 Select the result that you want to edit and click [Edit Result Comment].
2 Edit the text according to your requirements and click [OK].
7.2.6 Raw data
Navigation: Results Editor > Raw Data
Raw data are grouped by scopes, samples and method functions. They are automatically generated and stored
during the analyses. Raw data are always created for each analysis and cannot be influenced by the user.
310
Data
See also
7.2.7 Measured values
Navigation: Results Editor > Measured Values
The content of this view is dependent on the origin of the data. Depending of the module different presentations
are offered.
7.2.7.1 Balance
Measurements Chart
Displays the raw data sent by the instrument as a chart, including such from method function Interval weight.
The Orient by sample option causes multiple samples to be displayed side by side. If this option is not select
ed, multiple measurements for a particular sample, for example, will be displayed as a curve.
See also
7.2.7.2 Quantos
Measurements Chart
Displays the raw data sent by the instrument as a chart, including such from method function Interval weight.
The Orient by sample option causes multiple samples to be displayed side by side. If this option is not select
ed, multiple measurements for a particular sample, for example, will be displayed as a curve.
See also
7.2.7.3 Titration
Table of measured values
The values in the table are created by some method functions during an analysis.
Titration Curve
You can select or clear options and select different curve displays for titration and calibration curves. Depending
on the method, select a sample and method function if more than one is available.
See also
7.2.7.4 Thermal Values
This window is divided into two sections: the upper section with the graphic elements and the lower section
with the table display.
Data
311
In addition to the standard buttons, the video window features the option to play a video at various speeds. You
can also grasp the slider using the mouse pointer and move it along the timeline. The timeline in the intensity
diagram moves synchronously to the video playback. In the graphics window, it is possible to display or hide
the intensity curves of individual capillaries.
To export or save a video pair (Transmitted/Reflected) to a storage medium, click on [Export]. To delete video
data of the selected result click [Delete Videos] in the ribbon bar.
In addition to a parallel display of the capillary data, it is also possible to display information that is relevant to
the evaluation in the table display.
7.2.8 Task data
Navigation: Results Editor > Task data
Displays the global and sample parameters which were used at the time of execution. It always contains the
original data of the task execution even if parameters for recalculation were changed. (The changed values are
shown in Raw Data and Results).
In Task comment, you may enter any information required.
7.2.9 Statistics
Navigation: Results Editor > Statistics
Statistics data such as mean value and standard deviation is displayed, if the parameter Enable Basic Statis
tics is activated in the in method function Result. The Statistics window allows you to recalculate the result of
statistics. Statistics for titrators are always shown.
In the graph pane, you can select or clear options and select curve displays.
Outlier Test
If the results of individual samples in a measurement series deviate greatly from the calculated mean value, it
may make sense to question the significance of these (few) results and treat them as "outliers".
Outliers will have the following effects on the overall result of an analysis:
312
Data
● The mean value is significantly shifted higher or lower.
● The standard deviation is increased.
● The distribution of the individual values around the mean value is distorted and no longer follows a normal
distribution.
The procedure used by LabX is the Grubbs outlier test. For this procedure, the measured value [x*] that has the
greatest deviation from the calculated mean value is analyzed. This number is used in the following equation,
together with the mean value [x] and the standard deviation [s]:
x* - x
s
PG =
The test variable [PG] is then compared with the corresponding value in the Grubbs table G (N, 90%), which
in turn depends on the number of measured values N.
You can run an outlier test if you have the results from more than three samples.
1 Select [Outlier Test] in the ribbon bar to perform an outlier test.
Any outlier candidates found will be listed.
2 Click [OK] to exclude the outliers from statistics or click [Cancel] to not exclude these.
After confirmation, the entire samples are excluded and the statistics is recalculated without the identified
and excluded outliers.
Note
● The system will not delete the results of the samples excluded in this way but merely mark them as exclud
ed. They will no longer be included in the statistics.
● When excluding a sample, all results are reverted back to the last saved values. Results which were added
by recalculation and have not been saved yet, will get ### as a value if excluded. This indicates, that no
value has been saved up to now.
● Samples that have been excluded can be returned to the statistics at any time by selecting them and click
ing [Exclude / Include Sample] in the ribbon.
Excluding samples from the statistics
In Result selection all the results available for the entire series are listed.
– Click [Exclude / Include Sample] in the ribbon bar to exclude or include selected samples from the statisti
cal evaluation (Grubbs' test).
After a sample is excluded, all affected calculations (inside and outside of scopes or loops) are performed
again.
Modify data limits
Select the limits or tolerances for recalculating the statistics.
1 In Data Limits, select Factor of standard deviation or Absolute value(s) option to enter values either as
factors of the standard deviation or as absolute values and enter te desired values.
2 Click [Apply] to recalculate the statistics.
The calculation will be rerun and the results obtained will be marked.
See also
● Result (page 150)
● Grubbs table G (N, 90%) (page 409)
7.2.10 Resource data
Navigation: Results Editor > Resource data
Data
313
Data for all resources as used during the execution of an analysis (for example, titrant, auxiliary instrument).
Always contains the original data of the task execution even if parameters for recalculation were changed.
See also
7.2.11 Method data
Navigation: Results Editor > Method Data
Displays the version of the method as used at the time of execution.
314
Data
8 Resources
The Resources workspace contains the following objects.
width.
Object
Instruments
Resources
Value Tables
Description
Here you organize the instruments that are connected to the system.
Here you manage all device-specific resources such as weights and standards.
Here you manage tables for converting results.
See also
8.1 Managing instruments
Instruments are connected to an instrument server either by USB, by RS-232 ports or by a network (TCP/IP). An
instrument server is a LabX software component responsible for communication with instruments. With the
LabX Server Edition it is possible to install multiple instrument servers.
PCs may be equipped with one, two or possibly even no USB or RS-232 ports. Depending on the number of
peripheral devices you want to connect, you must install one or more interface cards. For further information,
contact the IT support group in your company, a computer specialist, or your local METTLER TOLEDO Technical
Specialist. The order numbers for the corresponding connection cables can be found in the operating instruc
tions of the instruments concerned. Before you can define instruments in LabX, you must have the correspond
ing rights; make sure that you are logged on as a user with the necessary rights.
Instrument management is done in Resources > Instruments. For improved manageability, you can create
additional folders within the Instruments folder.
8.1.1 Editing availability
On instruments that have the status Not available, information to this effect is displayed and no tasks can be
executed.
The availability of instruments may be revoked for the following reasons:
● Change of software version.
● Change of firmware version.
● Addition/removal of a measuring cell.
The availability of instruments can be changed manually. Users who have activated messages will receive a
message if the availability of an instrument has been revoked automatically.
2 Select [Make Unavailable] in the ribbon bar. To revoke availability, you must enter a reason.
- or Select [Make Available] in the ribbon bar.
The availability has been changed.
See also
8.1.2 Revoking lock
Instruments are blocked, for example, when the service date arrives. On instruments that have the status
Blocked, information to this effect is displayed and only those methods can be executed that have the marker
Can run on blocked instruments in the method properties.
The blocked status can also be changed by means of the method functions Block instrument or Unblock
instrument.
Resources
315
Users who have activated messages will receive a message. The block on instruments can be revoked manual
ly.
The block is revoked.
See also
● Block instrument (page 143)
● Managing instrument settings (page 318)
8.1.3 Adding instruments
Regardless which interface is used, the necessary drivers must be installed on the system in order for commu
nication with instruments to be possible. When you add a new instrument, the software searches for a suitable
driver. If no suitable driver is found, you will be prompted to install one.
Peripheral devices are added in the same way, but depending on the system, no connection check is per
formed.
Interface settings
Instruments
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
Thermal Values
For configuring the interfaces see:
Configuring the Ethernet Interface (page 36)
Configuring the serial interface (page 36)
Configuring the interfaces (page 39)
Configuring LabX connection (page 44)
Configuring the network settings (page 43)
Configuring the Ethernet interface (page 93)
Configuring the USB interface (page 93)
Configuring the Ethernet interface (page 93)
See also
● Managing drivers (page 324)
8.1.3.1 Establishing a serial connection
Serial connection
The following information must be observed before you can establish a connection between instruments and
LabX.
Connect the instrument to a serial port, e.g. COM1, of a PC with an installed instrument server component.
Carry out the necessary steps on the instrument to configure the serial port. Document the listed settings or
select the recommended default parameters (see table).
The instrument must be "Online", so that LabX can establish a connection.
1 Select [New Instrument] in the ribbon bar. The assistant is displayed, which guides you step-by-step
through the required settings.
2 Select the type of instrument.
3 Select the Serial connection link type. Then click on [Next].
4 Select the PC (instrument server) to which the instrument is connected. Then click on [Next].
316
Resources
5 Select the type of instrument connection and enter your chosen connection parameters for the instrument.
Then click on [Next].
6 LabX tests the connection automatically. Then click on [Next].
If the instrument is not detected, please check the cable connection, the connection parameters of the
instrument and whether the instrument server component is installed on the PC.
7 Choose unique and informative names for instruments so that you can easily identify a particular instrument
when several are connected. You can define up to six additional fields for text. Then click on [Finish].
The newly added instrument is displayed in the list.
Default parameters
Baud rate
Bit/Parity
Handshake
End of line
Character set
9600
8 / none
Xon/Xoff
<CR><LF>
Ansi/Win
Note
● In the case of a distributed LabX installation, the "Instrument server" component must be installed at least
once as this is required for communication.
See also
8.1.3.2 Establishing a network connection
Network connection
Please observe the following points before you can establish a connection between instruments and LabX.
Connect the instrument to the network or to the network connection of the PC.
Carry out the necessary steps on the instrument to configure the Ethernet port. Note down the settings.
3 Select the link type Ethernet connection. Then click on [Next].
4 Select the server or PC (instrument server) through which communication should take place. Then click on
[Next].
5 Enter your chosen connection settings for the instrument. Then click on [Next].
Note
● With certain instruments, for Define Connection Settings an input field Callback port" is displayed. This
port defines the communication between the instrument and the instrument server and must be unique. If
you enter the value 0 here, LabX automatically searches for a free port. Each instrument uses a separate
port number for each instrument server.
● If the instrument is connected directly to the network port on the PC, you may need a crossover cable,
depending on the PC.
Resources
317
● LiquiPhysics Excellence Instruments always use port 8014, which cannot be configured on the instrument.
See also
8.1.3.3 Establishing a USB connection
USB connection
The following information must be observed before you can establish a connection between instruments and
LabX.
An additional device-specific USB driver must first be installed on the PC to which an instrument from the
Connect the instrument to a USB port on a PC that has an installed instrument server component.
Carry out the necessary steps on the instrument to configure the USB port.
3 Select the USB connection link type. Then click on [Next].
4 Select the server or PC (instrument server) through which communication should take place. Then click on
[Next].
Note
See also
8.1.4 Managing instrument settings
The options available vary according to the type of instrument, which means that different tabs are displayed in
the Properties window. It is possible to modify the connection settings. After the modification, an attempt is
made to establish a connection using the new connection parameters. The Properties tab contains a series of
freely selectable, additional fields in which you can, for example, specify the location of instruments.
Options in Instrument Tools
318
Available options
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
Connection
Instrument Server
Properties
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Resources
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
Available options
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default Assignments
Drivers
Maintenance
FACT
Hardware
Adjustment and Test
Chemicals
Values
Global settings
•
•
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
•
•
•
Editing instrument settings
1 Select the instrument that you wish to edit.
2 Select [Open Instrument] in the ribbon bar. The relevant dialog box appears.
Select the tab that you would like to edit.
Displaying instrument settings
1 Select the instrument that you wish to display.
2 In the reading pane, select any of the tabs.
The information is displayed.
See also
8.1.4.1 Connection
This tab displays the connection options for the instrument. These include:
● Connection type of the instrument
● Connection settings
8.1.4.2 Instrument server
This tab displays the PC (instrument server) via which the communication to the instrument takes place.
8.1.4.3 Properties
The top part of the window displays general information about the connected instrument; it is possible to modify
the instrument name and the freely selectable, additional fields. The bottom part of the window displays para
meters based on the measurement technology or instrument type concerned.
8.1.4.4 Default assignments
In LabX, a distinction is made between two types of printer. For example, a report can be opened on any client
and printed out on a local printer. If a method contains a print report instruction, the report will be printed out on
the printer assigned to the instrument on which the method is executed. For each instrument, it is possible to
set up one printer for normal printouts and one for printing labels. Label printers must support the ZPL or EPL
printer languages.
A standard method is useful for whenever a sample ID that cannot be assigned to a method is scanned in with
the barcode reader.
Resources
319
Note
● In the case of a distributed installation, instrument printers installed on PCs or servers running the "Server"
LabX component are available for selection.
● Peripheral devices can also be connected directly to a balance, in which case these are configured at the
balance rather than in LabX.
8.1.4.5 Drivers
This tab displays a list of the drivers available to the system that can be used for the selected instrument. If
multiple drivers are installed, you can assign one to the instrument.
See also
● Managing drivers (page 324)
8.1.4.6 Maintenance
Define what should happen before the service date arrives and after it has passed. The service date is stored on
the instrument and cannot be changed in LabX.
8.1.4.7 FACT
Define the settings for fully automatic adjustment using the internal adjustment weight. FACT (Fully Automatic
Calibration Technology) adjusts the balance fully automatically based on preselected time and/or temperature
criteria.
Note
● For the calibration version of balances, this function is not available, i.e. FACT is always active.
8.1.4.8 MinWeigh
LabX is able to manage up to 50 MinWeigh standards, which are mapped to the MinWeigh methods of each
balance. The MinWeigh standards used in LabX are mapped to the standards for the balances in the Properties
for each balance with MinWeigh activated. You should, therefore, define the necessary MinWeigh standards in
LabX first before starting the mapping process. If you wish balancing to be carried out based on MinWeigh
standards, you must include an "Inspection and settings (page 181)" method function in the method and
select "Activate MinWeigh" in the method.
8.1.4.9 Adjustment and test
This tab page displays information about the adjustments and tests carried out on the instrument.
8.1.4.10 Hardware
This tab lists all the hardware components connected to the instrument. These include:
● Automation units
● External instruments
● Peripheral devices
● Sensors
Note
● For LiquiPhysics instruments: You cannot make any settings in LabX, these are only made on the instru
ment.
8.1.4.11 Chemicals - Titration
In Chemicals, configure and manage the titrant, auxiliary reagents, concentration/titer standard, and other sub
stances for a specific instrument. You can view and print out lists of chemicals that have already been defined.
Auxiliary reagents must be assigned to a pump with which they can be added. Titrants (independently of the
type) must each be assigned to a drive.
320
Resources
Settings
Titrants
Auxiliary reagent
standards
Substances
Explanation
Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive.
Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration
process.
Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors.
The titer standards required to determine the titer for the titrant used can be stored
and managed.
Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be
managed using name, empirical formula, molecular weight, and equivalent num
ber.
Note
PC.
See also
● Titrants (page 347)
● Auxiliary reagents (page 348)
● Calibration standards (page 349)
● Concentration and titer standards (page 350)
● Substances (page 351)
8.1.4.12 Global settings - Titration
In Global settings, you can make general settings on the titrator that apply for all users.
Settings
Analysis and resources
behavior
Solvent Control
Explanation
Settings for monitoring the expiration dates and life span of resources (determin
ing the actions of the titrator before, during and after the performance of an analy
sis). Settings for the response of the titrator when resources are deleted or when
PnP resources are identified.
Prompts the user to replace the solvent. For information on the process for replac
ing the solvent (Manual operation).
Note
PC.
– To open the settings, click [Open] below the corresponding window pane.
See also
● Global settings (page 45)
8.1.4.12.1 Analysis and resources behavior
The settings that you make here relate to the sequence of the analysis of samples or series with the aid of meth
ods.
● You can define the actions of the titrator when started, during an analysis and afterward.
● You can also program the response of the titrator to the deletion of resources or when it identifies PnP
resources.
Analysis sequence settings
The analysis sequence settings can only be modified if no tasks are currently being performed by the titrator.
You can make the following settings that influence the sequence of an analysis.
Resources
321
Parameters
Show required
resources at
start
Show SOP
Description
Values
When an analysis is started a screen appears displaying all
Yes | No
resources required for the analysis and their status (available,
not-available, locked or in use). If an individual entry is selected
from this screen then the user receives additional information
about the respective resource.
However, if "no" is selected, then the required resources are still
checked when the analysis is started and if necessary, an appro
priate error message is issued.
If an SOP (standard operating procedure) has been defined in the Yes | No
Title method function then this will be displayed before the
method is started provided that "yes" has been selected.
Note
● If Show required resources at start and Show SOP parameters were set to "Yes" at the start of a job series,
all SOPs and subsequently all resources for the individual sample series must be confirmed before the job
series is started. In this way a job series can be performed after it has been started without any further inter
ruption.
Confirm after a
completed rack
rotation
Show results
after analysis
This setting affects analyses that are to be performed on the sam Yes | No
ple changer and require more beakers than can be accommodat
ed on the rack of the sample changer.
If Yes has been selected for this parameter, a warning message
is issued after a complete revolution of the sample changer and
before a position is approached on the tray that has already been
titrated. This warning must be acknowledged by the user.
If a manual or external titration stand is being used, then the
Yes | No
results for a sample are automatically displayed after they have
been analyzed and must be acknowledged by the user before the
analysis can be continued. With Auto stand the results are dis
played for a certain period and are not to be confirmed.
The activated parameter is valid for the following functions:
Analysis: the results for a sample are shown
Calibration/Loop: The results of the calibration are shown
(slope, zero point)
Sensor test: The results of the test are shown (slope, zero point,
drift and sensor test OK / not OK)
Check local
printer connec
tion and wait
When selected, the availability of a printer is checked at the
beginning of the method.
If not selected and no printer is connected, the method function
Record is skipped. If a printer is connected, the method function
Record is executed even if this parameter is not selected.
Yes | No
Resources behavior
Use the following parameters to configure how the titrator responds to the deletion of resources and its response
to the automatic identification of PnP resources.
Parameters
Information
when deleting
resources
Information
when recogniz
ing PnP
resources
Description
Defines if a confirmation will be requested before a resource is
deleted.
Values
Yes | No
Defines if a confirmation will be requested every time a PnP
resource is identified.
Yes | No
Pump and stirrer detection
Parameters
Description
Values
Stirrer detection Defines if the automatic stirrer detection is activated. This may be Yes | No
stirrer outputs that are not automatically identified by the titrator.
322
Resources
8.1.4.12.2 Solvent Control
For Karl Fischer titration, the solvent must be replaced at regular intervals to prevent results from becoming cor
rupted. The titrator system monitors the usable life and the capacity of the solvent and the number of samples.
Before you can activate Solvent Control, at least one of the following monitoring parameters must be defined:
● The time interval for the use of the solvent.
● The capacity limit, i.e. a fixed maximum value of the total water volume of samples titrated (including
standby and pretitration) in the same solvent.
● Maximum number of samples to be titrated in the solvent.
In order to monitor the solvent, the system records and adds up the time, water volume and number of samples
for each titration. When the defined monitoring parameters have been reached, a system message is displayed.
The user then has an opportunity to replace the solvent. The Solvent Manager is started to pump the solvent
away. The cell is then filled with new solvent. All counters are reset to zero.
● For sample analysis using the Stromboli oven sample changer, the solvent can only be replaced in standby
mode before analysis of the first sample, or at the end of the series, in case the titrator returns to standby
mode.
Parameters
Monitoring
usable life of
solvent
Usable life
Enforce replace
ment when
exceeding
usable life
Autom.
exchange when
exceeding
usable life
Monitoring
capacity of sol
vent
Enter max.
amount of water
Enforce replace
ment when
exceeding
capacity
Autom.
exchange when
exceeding
capacity
Monitoring no.
of samples
Autom.
exchange at
max. no. of
samples
Enforce replace
ment at max.
no. of samples
Autom.
exchange at
max. no. of
samples
Stir
Description
Values
Specifies whether the usable life of the solvent is to be monitored. Yes | No
Defines the time interval in days for the use of the solvent.
1…104
Yes | No
exceeding the specified usable life.
Yes | No
Specifies whether the capacity of the solvent is to be monitored.
Yes | No
The maximum volume of water in [mg] for a solvent.
Only for Monitoring capacity of solvent = Yes.
0...106
exceeding the specified capacity of the solvent.
Yes | No
Yes | No
Specifies whether the system should monitor the number of sam Yes | No
ples.
Maximum number of samples (concentration and blank value do 0...120
not count) after which the solvent is to be replaced.
Yes | No
exceeding the specified maximum number of samples.
Yes | No
Enables the stirrer during solvent exchange.
Yes | No
Resources
323
Fill time
Drain time
Defines the pumping time for filling a fluid (for Autom.
exchange).
Defines the pumping time for draining a fluid (for Autom.
exchange).
0...1000 | ∞
0...1000 | ∞
The duration of the hose drain operation should be as long as
possible to ensure that the hoses are completely free of fluid fol
lowing draining.
8.1.5 Editing ErgoSens settings
These settings do not apply to balances or Thermal Values instruments. For balances, settings for ErgoSens are
configured directly on the instrument.
You can assign any executable shortcut of your choice to a touch-free ErgoSens sensor. Alternatively, you can
select the option Repeat Last Task. Note that one shortcut can be assigned per instrument and per user.
ErgoSens accepts hand movements only when the device is showing the homescreen.
2 Select [ErgoSens] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Activate the required shortcut in the list.
8.1.6 Managing drivers
Regardless of which interface is used, the necessary drivers must be installed on the system in order for com
munication with instruments to be possible. In LabX, all installed drivers are listed. Whenever you add a new
instrument, the software searches for a suitable driver. If no driver is found, you will be prompted to install one.
If a new driver is installed, it will become available to the entire system.
Navigation: System > Drivers
Installing drivers
1 Click on [Import Driver] in the ribbon bar. The relevant dialog box appears.
2 Select the desired folder and driver and click on [Install].
The newly installed driver is displayed in the list.
8.2 Balance
8.2.1 Managing weights
Enter all the weights to be used in tests and adjustments in balance methods. The individual weights can be
combined into weight sets
Weights can only be used in methods if they have the status Released.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Weights
Parameters
Properties
Certificate
Dependencies
Explanation
All the parameters specified on the weight's certificate.
Details the certificate's date of issue and period of validity.
Details all the methods and tasks in which the weight is used.
Adding a weight
1 Select [New Weight] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Enter the necessary information into the fields and save the data.
See also
● Managing weight sets (page 325)
324
Resources
8.2.2 Managing weight sets
Here, it is possible to combine the individual weights into weight sets.
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Weight Sets
Parameters
Properties
Weights
Explanation
Comprises a name and description.
Any of the weights in the system can be added to the selected weight set.
New Weight Set
1 Select [New Weight Set] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Enter the necessary information into the fields, add the desired weights from the list into the weight set and
save the data.
8.3 Titration
8.3.1 Expired resources
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Expired Resources
Resources for which monitoring was selected in the settings can expire. Select [Expired Resources] to open an
overview of all expired resources with the type, name and date of expiry of the respective resource. The desired
titrator must be "Online".
8.3.2 Hardware
8.3.2.1 Sensors
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Sensors
You can configure and manage sensors to be used with the titrator as well as change settings already stored in
the titrator. The settings for an individual sensor can also be output to a printer. In addition, the corresponding
method for sensor calibration can be accessed from here.
Note
● A maximum of 50 sensors can be defined in the device.
● Each sensor is associated with a specific type. Each sensor type can deliver measured values in one or
more units of measure. The following table provides information regarding which units of measure can be
selected for a corresponding sensor type:
Sensor type
mV
pH
ISE
Phototrode
Polarized
Temperature
Conductivity
1)Plug
Default unit of measure
mV
pH
pM
%T
mV
°C
µS/cm
Eligible units of measure
mV
pH | mV
pM / pX | ppm | mV
%T | A | mV
mV | µA
°C | K | °F
µS/cm | mS/cm | µS | mS
and Play sensors (PnP) are available for pH or mV measurements.
● Changing the unit of measurement for a sensor may render the calibration parameters and expiration date
parameters meaningless and result in their subsequent omission. This may also mean that the calibration
parameters are recalculated by the titrator (for temperature sensors), or that another set of calibration para
meters is displayed (for ISE sensors).
PC.
Resources
325
Adding a sensor
The desired titrator must be "Online".
1 Select [New Sensor] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and the type of sensor.
Plug and Play sensors (PnP)
● If a PnP sensor is connected to the sensor input, this automatically generates an entry in the setup. All infor
mation (sensor name, type or inputs) is updated by the titrator (if a PnP sensor is not connected, the entry
"PnP" appears for the sensor input ).
● The setup may contain several PnP sensors with identical sensor IDs but with different sensor input infor
mation. When the analysis starts, a validation is carried out during which the user is prompted to remove a
sensor. For several PnP sensors with the same ID, all entries apart from one are deleted when the sensors
are removed.
The following settings are available for configuring a sensor depending on the sensor type selected:
Sensor type: mV
Parameters
Type
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Name
Arbitrary
Unit
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Sensor input
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Serial number
Arbitrary
Yes | No
ature sensor
Monitoring life Specifies whether the life span of the resource is to be monitored. Yes | No
span
Sensor type: pH
Parameters
Type
Name
Unit
326
Resources
Description
Description
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Arbitrary
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Sensor input
Serial number
Calibration
The zero point of the pH sensor in the relevant unit.
Zero point
Slope (TCalib)
The slope of the sensor at the calibration temperature in
[mV/pH].
ature sensor
ture
tion.
Monitoring
usable life
monitored.
span
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Linear | Segmented
-100 … 100
-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
-100…100
Yes | No
-20…200
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
● The parameters zero point, slope and the corresponding calibration temperature are required to convert the
mV signal of the sensor to the selected unit. These appear only for the unit [pH].
Sensor type: Phototrode
Parameters
Description
Type
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Wavelength
Zero point
Slope
Calib. tempera
ture
Monitoring
usable life
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Arbitrary
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
The Phototrode DP5 features a selection of 5 fixed wavelengths
520 | 555 | 590 | 620 |
in [nm].
660
-100 … 100
-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
The slope of the phototrode in [mV/%T].
-100…100
Here you can enter the calibration temperature during the calibra -20…200
tion.
monitored.
Resources
327
Monitoring life
span
Note
● The parameter Calib. temperature cannot be edited for segmented calibration; in this case, the system dis
plays an information field.
Sensor type: Polarized
Parameters
Description
Type
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Monitoring life
span
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Arbitrary
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Sensor type: Temperature
Parameters
Description
Type
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Zero point
Monitoring
usable life
Monitoring life
span
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Arbitrary
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
The zero point of the pH sensor in the selected unit.
-100…100
monitored.
Sensor type: Conductivity
Parameters
Description
Type
Name
328
Resources
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Arbitrary
Unit
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
Sensor input
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Serial number
Arbitrary
Yes | No
ature sensor
T compensation For the temperature compensation, the titrator converts the con Linear | Non linear | No
ductivity to a defined reference temperature.
Linear: The conductivity is linearly converted to a reference tem
perature. The linearity is described by the temperature coefficient
[%/°C].
Non linear: The conductivity is converted to a reference tempera
ture non-linearly, in accordance with the EN norm 27 888.
No: The conductivity is determined without temperature compen
sation.
T coefficient
The temperature coefficient in [%/°C] defines the percentage of
0.001…100
the change in conductivity for linear temperature compensation
for a temperature increase of 1°C.
Appears for T compensation = Linear only.
Ref. temperature The reference temperature in [°C] for the temperature compensa 25.0 | 20.0
tion.
Appears for T compensation = Linear or Non linear only.
Cell constant
The cell constant in [1/cm] can be entered here. The cell con
0…100
stant is required for conversion of the measured sensor conduc
tance value [mS | µS] into the conductivity [mS/cm | µS/cm]. The
temperature compensation only affects the conductivity, not the
conductance.
Calib. tempera Here you can enter the calibration temperature during the calibra -20…200
ture
tion.
Monitoring
usable life
monitored.
Monitoring life Specifies whether the life span of the resource is to be monitored. Yes | No
span
Note
● The temperature compensation is only performed for the units µS/cm and mS/cm (conductivity). Tempera
ture compensation is not conducted for units of measure µS and mS (conductance).
● The parameter Calib. temperature is required during the calibration to determine the temperature-dependent
conductivity of conductivity standards.
(Only appears for Unit = µS/cm or mS/cm.)
Sensor type: ISE
You can define the following parameters:
Parameters
Type
Description
Values
mV | pH | ISE | Pho
tivity
Resources
329
Name
Unit
Sensor input
Serial number
Calibration
Zero point
Slope (TCalib)
Monitoring
usable life
Monitoring life
span
Arbitrary
ppm | %T | A | µA | °C |
µS | mS
AB1/Sensor1 |
AB1/Sensor2 |
AB1/PT1000 |
CB1/Conductivity |
More depending on
configuration
Arbitrary
Linear | Segmented
-100 … 100
-20 … 200 [°C]
-4.0 … 392 [°F]
253.2 … 473.2 [K]
The slope of the sensor at the calibration temperature in
-100…100
[mV/pH].
monitored.
Note
● For ISE sensors there are two independent calibration sets, one for the units "pM" or "pX" and one for the
unit "ppm".
● When calibrating an ISE sensor in ppm units, the sensor's slope and zero point are specified in pX or pM
units.
8.3.2.1.1 Sensor calibration
pH, ISE, temperature and conductivity sensors can all be calibrated with the titrator. The phototrode can only be
manually calibrated. To do this the relationship between sensor signal and transmission capacity must be
determined and the calibration parameter to be determined (normally only the gradient from a single point cali
bration) must be entered "manually" in the selected phototrode.
Temperature sensors are calibrated with the temperature standard "freezing water" (0°C). For conductivity sen
sors, you can choose the desired standard for the calibration from a standards list. Here a single point calibra
tion is performed to determine the cell constant.
Two calibration modes are available for the calibrating pH and ISE sensors that can be selected. Linear calibra
tion and segmented calibration.
Starting a sensor calibration
A calibration method needs to be available.
1 Select the sensor that you wish to calibrate in the table view.
2 Select [Start Calibration] in the ribbon bar.
3 Edit the parameters and start the task.
Upon inserting the corresponding PnP burette on the titrator, it can be assigned to the titrant.
330
Resources
Linear calibration
Linear calibration is explained below taking the example of pH sensor.
In linear calibration the 1st step is the capture of measurement data and the interpolation of the pH values with
the buffer table to the effective values (the values used are only provided as an example):
1st Buffer
2nd Buffer
3rd Buffer
Selected buffer
solutions
During the calibra mV values mea
tion of the recorded sured during cali
temperature
bration
4.01 (at 25°C)
7.00 (at 25°C)
9.21 (at 25°C)
17 °C
22 °C
27 °C
172 mV
0 mV
-129 mV
pH (effective) by
interpolation
according to the pH
buffer table
4.00
7.012
9.19
In a second step, the mV measured values are converted to the averaged temperature "TAverage"
(17°C+22°C+27°C) / 3 = 22°C):
Selected buffer solutions mV values measured
during calibration
1st Buffer
2nd Buffer
3rd Buffer
4.01 (at 25°C)
7.00 (at 25°C)
9.21 (at 25°C)
172 mV
0 mV
-129 mV
Temperature-corrected
measured values for
TMean = 22°C
174.96 mV
0 mV
-126.85 mV
In the third stage, the gradient (TMean) and the mV value at pH 0 are determined by linear regression with the
value pairs from mV (TMean) and pH (effective). The zero value is found from the mV value at pH 0, divided by
the gradient (TMean):
● Slope (TMean) = -58.15
● mV value at pH 0 = 407.61 mV
● Zero point [pH]= mV value at 0 pH/Slope (TMean) = 7.010 [pH]
Lastly, the slope at (TMean) is back-calculated to the slope at (25°C).
● Slope (25°C) = -58.74 (=99.3% of the theoretical value)
Segmented calibration
With segmented calibration, no linear regression is performed across all measured points; instead, line seg
ments that connect the individual calibration points are used. In this way allowance can be made for a non-lin
ear performance of the sensor over a larger measurement range. For n standard solutions, (n-1) segments are
evaluated.
The segmented calibration is explained below taking the example of an ISE sensor (F- ).
Resources
331
Just as in the case of linear segmentation initially the readings are recorded:
Standard 1
Standard 2
Standard 3
During the calibration of
the recorded tempera
ture
25 °C
25 °C
25 °C
Standard value (pX) at
measuring temperature
mV values measured
during calibration
4.00 (at 25°C)
2.00 (at 25°C)
9.21 (at 25°C)
162.0 mV
42.0 mV
-15.0 mV
The mV measured values are then converted to the averaged temperature (not necessary in the example
because the temperature is constantly 25°C) and a linear regression is conducted for each segment. Thus for
each segment a gradient and the mV value at pH 0 are determined (both related to the mean temperature) and
from both values the zero point is respectively calculated:
Segment 1
Segment 2
During the calibra
tion of the recorded
temperature
25 °C
25 °C
mV value at 0 pH
(based on TMean)
Slope (TMean)
Zero point [pX]
-78.00 mV
-72.00 mV
60.00
57.00
1.30
1.26
Afterward, the slope is converted to the reference temperature of 25°C (not necessary in this example, because
(TMean) is already 25°C.
8.3.2.1.2 Sensor test
pH, ISE, temperature and conductivity sensors can all be calibrated with the titrator. The phototrode can only be
manually calibrated. To do this the relationship between sensor signal and transmission capacity must be
determined and the calibration parameter to be determined (normally only the gradient from a single point cali
bration) must be entered "manually" in the selected phototrode.
Temperature sensors are calibrated with the temperature standard "freezing water" (0°C). For conductivity sen
sors, you can choose the desired standard for the calibration from a standards list. Here a single point calibra
tion is performed to determine the cell constant.
Two calibration modes are available for the calibrating pH and ISE sensors that can be selected. Linear calibra
tion and segmented calibration.
Starting a sensor test
A test method needs to be available.
1 Select the sensor that you wish to test in the table view.
2 Select [Start Test] in the ribbon bar.
332
Resources
3 Edit the parameters and start the task.
8.3.2.1.3 Sensor calibration history
The date, time and calibration data of the calibrations are displayed in list form on this window.
Displaying a calibration history
1 Select the sensor for that you wish to display the calibration history in the table view.
2 Select [View Calibration History] in the ribbon bar.
The window to display the parameters opens.
Parameter
Data Selection
Calibrations from
Explanation
Defines the date range of calibratios to be displayed. Click [Retrieve Data] to
update that listed entries.
Calibration
Calibration History
Select the calibration entries to be shown by checking the box Show.
Entries
Calibration History Chart Select calibration parameters, and if applicable segments, to be represented
against the date of the calibration from the drop-down lists.
To fit the represented curves, click [Fit Chart].
Selected Calibration
Detailed information in list view are represented for the selected entries.
Details
8.3.2.1.4 Sensor test history
The date, time and test data of the test are displayed in list form on this window.
Displaying a test history
1 Select the sensor for that you wish to display the test history in the table view.
2 Select [View Test History] in the ribbon bar.
Parameter
Data Selection
Calibrations from
Test
Test History Entries
Test History Chart
Selected Test Details
Explanation
Defines the date range of calibrations to be displayed. Click [Retrieve Data] to
update that listed entries.
Select the test entries to be shown by checking the box Show.
Select test parameters, and if applicable segments, to be represented against the
date of the test from the drop-down lists.
Detailed information in list view are represented for the selected entries.
8.3.2.1.5 Value ranges from sensor measuring units and control band
Sensor type
mV
Measur
ing unit
mV
Value range
Value range EP relative
-2x103…2x103
-4x103…4x103
Value range Control
band
0.1…4x103
Resources
333
Sensor type
pH
ISE
Phototrode
Polarized
Temperature
Conductivity
Measur
ing unit
pH
mV
pM | pX
ppm
mV
%T
A
mV
mV
µA
°C
K
°F
µS/cm
mS/cm
µS
mS
Value range
Value range EP relative
-100…100
-2x103…2x103
-100…100
0…106
-2x103…2x103
0.001…100
0…5
-2x103…2x103
0…2x103
0…220
-20…200
253.2…473.2
-4…392
0…106
0…106
0…108
0…108
-100.00…100.00
-4x103…4x103
-100.00…100.00
-107…107
-4x103…4x103
-1x103…1x103
-106…106
-4x103…4x103
-2x103…2x103
-220.0…220.0
-220.0…220.0
-220.0…220.0
-396.0…396.0
-106…106
-106…106
-106…106
-108…108
Value range Control
band
0.01…100
0.1…4x103
0.01…100
0.001…107
0.1…4x103
0.1…1x103
0.01…106
0.1…4x103
0.1…2x103
0.1…220
0.1…220.0
0.1…220.0
0.1…396.0
0.001…106
0.001…106
0.001…106
0.001…106
8.3.2.2 Pumps
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Pumps
You can configure a maximum of 20 pumps for use with the titrator. Starting from the pump list, you can add
new pumps or select existing ones and change their settings. The list can also be printed and pumps can be
deleted.
You can set up different pumps. For each pump, you need to specify an explicit, user-defined name, the pump
ing rate and the connection from which the pump should operate.
Note
● The Karl Fischer Solvent Manager is predefined in Setup when connecting to the back of the instrument, and
cannot be configured individually. All pump ports on the InMotion autosampler are available for connection.
● Only one Solvent Manager or Air pump can be defined per instrument.
PC.
Adding a pump
1 Select [New pump] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of pump.
Parameters
Type
Description
Defines the type of pump.
Name
Max. pump rate Displays the pump rate in [mL/min] when the pump is operated
at 100%. This is stated by the manufacturer or determined exper
imentally.
334
Resources
Values
Membrane |
Peristaltic | Solvent
Manager | Reversible |
Air pump
Arbitrary
0.1…1000
Pump output
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Note
8.3.2.3 Peripherals
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals
These settings encompass all input and output devices that belong to the titrator environment but that are not
essential instruments for processing an analysis (peripherals cannot be accessed in methods). The computer
also counts as a peripheral device. The list of all peripheral instruments defined in the titrator, together with the
parameters of each individual instrument can be printed out by a printer.
Note
PC.
Editing peripherals
2 Select [Edit Peripherals] in the ribbon bar.
The window with several tabs to edit the parameters opens.
8.3.2.3.1 Balance
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Balance
Balances can either be connected directly to the instrument or to LabX. here you find the description for a direct
connection to the instrument.
Note
PC.
Before defining a balance, you need to select the balance type. The titrator supports the following types of bal
ance:
Balance type
Mettler
Sartorius
More
Supported balances
AB | PB | PB-S | AB-S | PB-E | AB-E | College-S | SB | CB | GB | College-B |
HB | AG | PG | PG-S | SG | HG | XP | XS | XA | XPE | XSE | XVE | AX | MX |
UMX | PR | SR | HR | AT | MT | UMT | PM | AM | SM | CM | MS | ML
Sartorius
--
METTLER TOLEDO Balances
These balances support Plug'n'Play and are automatically recognized and configured by the titrator.
For automatic balance recognition, you need to ensure the following:
1. The balance has been started up and is connected to the titrator by a suitable cable,
2. The balance has been set to "Bidirectional" (if necessary, set the "Host" parameter accordingly),
3. The parameters for the RS-232 interface on the balance correspond with those on the titrator.
● As long as the balance is not connected to the titrator, the settings "Baud Rate", "Data Bit", "Stop Bit", "Pari
ty" and "Handshake" can be entered manually. These are however automatically overwritten with the values
identified by the PnP as soon as the user sets the same transmission parameters at the balance and the
titrator.
Resources
335
Sartorius | Others
After you have selected this option and the system has recognized the balance, you can define the following
parameters:
Parameters
Name
Serial number
Connection
Baud rate
Data bit
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
Description
conductivity board.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
7 | 8
Even | Odd | None
9600.)
● The settings for the baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, and handshake must agree for the balance and titra
tor!
● If None is selected as balance type that means that no balance is to be connected to the titrator.
8.3.2.3.2 Barcode reader
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Barcode reader
When a barcode is imported, the system checks whether the imported barcode is suitable for starting the
method. If so, the analysis start dialog is opened; all known data is entered there. If not, the barcode is ignored.
If an analysis is already running with the same method ID, the sample is added to the end of the current analy
sis. An exception to this occurs if the End series barcode has previously been read. In this case, a new analy
sis is started (with the same method).
● Only one barcode reader can be defined.
Define the following parameters for a barcode reader:
PC.
Parameters
Name
Serial number
Transfer Smart
Codes to LabX
Description
Transfer barcode to LabX.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Yes | No
8.3.2.3.3 USB stick
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > USB-Stick
Commercially available USB sticks from USB Version 1.1 are supported.
You can assign a relevant name to the USB stick.
8.3.2.3.4 Printer
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Printer
Printer/RS-232 data export
The printer types listed below as well as the RS232 interface for data export are supported by the titrator:
336
Resources
● USB printer with PCL protocol Version 4 and higher.
Visit this site to find a list of compatible printers: http://www.mt.com/titration-printers
● RS232 data export for the output of data via the RS interface (not supported by LabX 2014 and later ver
sions).
Stripe printers
● RS-232 (RS-P26)
The following data is printed using the stripe printers:
Results
All except for curves and tables of measured values
Method function Record
Overview
Results
Raw results
Resource data
Sample data
Method data
Setup
List printouts
Parameter printouts
Total printouts
Methods
List printout
Parameter printouts
Series
List printout
Parameter printouts
● The USB2 port on the mainboard is exclusively reserved for LabX.
● If an RS printer or RS data export has been specified in the setup and the corresponding settings have been
saved, PnP recognition for the sample changer and balances is deactivated on this COM port.
● The compact printer does not allow the printing of manual operations. No automatically generated printouts
are produced either for: Calculations, instructions, referenced resources, equivalence point learn titration
(LearnEQP) or changes to an analysis when in progress. The compact printer does not support all lan
guages.
For Karl Fischer determinations, manual concentration, drift and blank value analyses are printed out auto
matically.
Depending on the selected printer type, the following parameters appear:
● USB printer
Status
Name
Serial number
Connection
Installed
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
MB1/USB1 | PnP
Status
Name
Serial number
Connection
Information on the name of the installed printer is displayed.
conductivity board.
Baud rate
Information on the baud rate for data transmission via the
RS-232 interface.
Information on the parity defined for the report is displayed.
Information on data transmission via the RS-232 interface.
Installed
RS-P26
Arbitrary
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
2400
● RS-232
Data bit
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
8
1
No
None
Resources
337
Status
Name
Serial number
Connection
Installed
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
MB1/USB1 | PnP
● RS-232 data export
Status
Connection
Baud rate
The serial interface for the RS-232 data export.
Data bit
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
Data transfer via the RS-232 interface.
Installed
MB/COM1 | MB/COM2
1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
8
1
Even | Odd | None
None | Xon-Xoff
The max. Xoff duration for transmitted data is around 30s.
8.3.2.3.5 Fingerprint reader
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > Fingerprint reader
You can use a fingerprint reader to authenticate users on the titrator. In order to do this, the fingerprint reader
must be activated on the titrator. The following parameters are available for this:
Note
PC.
Parameters
Activate finger
print reader
Status
Name
Connection
Description
Activates the fingerprint reader for authenticating users when log
ging onto the titrator.
Indicates whether the fingerprint reader is connected to the titra
tor.
The designation of the fingerprint reader.
Information on the USB port to which the fingerprint reader is con
nected. PnP is displayed if the fingerprint reader is not connected
to the titrator.
Values
Yes | No
Installed | Not
installed
Arbitrary
PnP | USB 1
8.3.2.3.6 LevelSens
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
The level sensor (LevelSens) can be used either to monitor the fill level of titration or solvent vessels or to pre
vent the overflow of waste vessels.
The level sensor is connected to the "LevelSens box", which is connected to the titrator via the CAN interface.
The titrator automatically recognizes up to two of these boxes (PnP recognition). These appear in the settings.
Navigation: Home > Setup > Hardware > Peripherals > LevelSens
1 In LevelSens, tap on a "LevelSens box".
2 The parameters Level, Waste or Inactive can be defined for the relevant sensor type
Activating level monitoring
● At the start of a method or a manual operation.
The level is checked for all activated and connected sensors, regardless of whether they are used in the
method.
● At the start of each sample (GT).
● After completion of a Karl Fischer analysis (KF).
● Before the start of a KF Stromboli method.
338
Resources
● Before replacing the solvent.
● During the course of the following manual operations: Burette (Rinse, Rinse multiple burettes, Dispense,
Manual titration), Pump, Auxiliary instrument (output 24V), Sample changer (Pump, Rinse).
If the fill level is not reached or exceeded, a message appears with a prompt either to empty or fill the vessel
(depending on the Setup setting: Waste or Level). The analysis is interrupted during this time. After the vessel
has been emptied or filled and the message has been confirmed, the analysis is resumed.
● Only two LevelSens boxes can be entered in the settings. Additional boxes do not generate an additional
entry.
● Entries in the settings can only be deleted if the corresponding LevelSens box is not installed.
● The sensor must be fitted in such a way that when the maximum fill level is reached, the analysis of a sam
ple, the entire loop of a Stromboli method or a solvent replacement can be performed.
● The fill level is only checked before a sample analysis, at the start of a Stromboli method or before a solvent
replacement.
PC.
Parameters
Name
Chip ID
Position
Sensor 1
type…Sensor 4
type
Description
Values
Information on the designation of the LevelSens box.
In the settings, the first detected box is entered as LevelSens Box
1, the second as LevelSens Box 2.
Information on the Chip-ID of the detected LevelSens box.
Information on the position of the LevelSens box connected to the PnP | PnP1 | PnP2
titrator.
Specifies the sensor type to be used.
Level | Waste | Inactive
8.3.2.3.7 TBox
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Peripherals > TBox
Note
PC.
The following parameters are available for the METTLER TOLEDO TBox: TBox connected. This parameter speci
fies whether or not the TBox is connected to the titrator.
If the TBox is installed on the titrator, then the TTL-outputs of the titrator are available in the pump setup.
8.3.2.4 Titration stands
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Titration Stands
Starting from the titration stand list, you can add new titration stands or select existing ones and modify their
parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out or individual titration stands can be deleted, whereby one of
each type must be in the list.
Configure the following titration stands that can be connected to the titrator.
● Manual stand
● Auto stand
● External stand
● Rondo/Tower A and Rondo/Tower B
● InMotion T/Tower A and InMotion T/Tower B
● Rondolino TTL
● Stromboli TTL
● KF stand
Resources
339
Note
PC.
Adding a titration stand
1 Select [New Titration Stand] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of titration stand.
Parameters
Type
Description
Values
Rondo/Tower A |
Rondo/Tower B |
Rondolino TTL |
tion T/1A | InMotion
T/1B | Rondo60/1A |
8.3.2.4.1 Manual stand
The manual stand is typically used for the METTLER TOLEDO Manual Titration Stands. Before each sample in
the series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the respective sample is in place will
appear. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a
function Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
ration
8.3.2.4.2 Auto stand
If you use an auto stand, the popup window that reminds you to add the respective sample does not appear.
Thus an interruption-free analysis sequence can be guaranteed for multiple determinations with an automation
unit. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions requiring a func
tion Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
ration
8.3.2.4.3 External stand
The external stand is typically used for stands not directly attached to the titrator. Before each sample in the
series is analyzed, a popup window requesting confirmation that the resepective sample in place will appear.
340
Resources
Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
ration
8.3.2.4.4 Rondolino TTL
The Rondolino sample changer can hold 9 samples to be tested in sequence. The Rondolino connects to the
TTL port on the titrator. The selected titration stand defines the stirrer output used in following method functions
requiring a function Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Connection
Description
Values
More depending on
configuration
MB/TTL
8.3.2.4.5 Stromboli TTL
The Stromboli Karl Fischer Drying Oven sample changer can hold 14 vialed oven samples and one blank vial.
The Stromboli connects to the TTL port on the titrator.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Connection
Drift
Determination
method
Date / Time
Performed by
Description
Values
ration
MB/TTL
Value of the last drift determination [µg/min].
0.0…106
Method name of the method used for the determination.
Method name
Date and time of the determination.
Name of the user performing the determination.
Date and time
User name
8.3.2.4.6 InMotion
The InMotion Autosamplers can hold multiple samples depending on the base unit (Flex, Pro or Max) and the
accompanying sample rack. The InMotion Autosampler connects to USB1 on the titrator. InMotion Autosam
plers and attached towers are PnP devices that are automatically recognized and installed upon connection to
the titrator. If a second InMotion Autosampler is to be attached, a USB expander must be used at the titrator for
the second USB connection. The USB expander ports on the back of the first InMotion Autosampler attached can
also be used for the connection. The first InMotion device attached is labelled InMotion T/1A and the second
attached to the system will be labeled InMotion T/2A in the list. If unattached and reattached after the initial
installation, the titrator will know which InMotion Autosampler is /1 and /2 according their Chip ID. An InMotion
Autosampler can also manually be added to the Titration Stand list with default parameters if needed for method
programming.
Resources
341
Parameters
Type
Name
Base type
Stirrer output
Description
Defines the name of the titration stand. Additional titration stands
Indicates the sample changer type.
Connection
Chip ID
CoverUp
Shows the ID of the identification chip of the sample changer.
RFID inner
Indicates whether the RFID option is installed for the second row
of the rack.
RFID outer
Barcode reader
Rack
Rack size
Beaker height
Conditioning
beaker
Rinse beaker
Special beaker
1…Special
beaker 4
Only the outer rack row can be used with the barcode option.
Indicates the type of the installed rack.
Standard: Standard rack.
Waterbath: Rack including a wather bath.
Dual: Rack type with two types of beaker sizes.
PnP: No rack is detected.
Indicates the size of the installed rack.
Defines the beaker height [mm].
For COD kit = Yes the value range is different.
Defines if a specific condition beaker is used. The last beaker
position of the rack is the specific conditioning beaker position.
This parameter is stored in the rack.
Defines if a specific rinse beaker is used.
Defines if specific special beaker are used. Rinse beaker posi
tions are next to the conditioning beaker.
These parameters are stored in the rack.
Values
List of available names
Flex | Pro | Max
InMotion1/Stir
rer6 | InMotion2/Stir
rer6 | More depending
on configuration
PnP | MB/USB 1
Unique number
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Standard | Waterbath /
Dual / PnP
Number of positions on
the rack
65…215
Yes | No
Yes | No
Yes | No
Note
When fixed beakers are defined, they cannot be used for samples and are reserved for Conditioning, Rinse
and Line rinse method functions only. The fixed beakers reserve the last available positions on the rack, in the
order stated above, with conditioning beaker being last.
COD kit
Aliquot beaker
Defines if the system is used with the Aliquot Kit.
For InMotion Pro with 25 mL rack only.
Defines whether the extension on InMotion is installed for an
aliquot beaker. Aliquoting is not possible with all rack types. For
InMotion Pro only.
Yes | No
Yes | No
8.3.2.4.7 Rondo60
The Rondo autosampler can hold 12-60 samples depending on the accompanying sample rack. The Rondo is
connected to either MB1/COM or MB2/COM ports on the titrator. The Rondo60 is automatically named /1 or /2
according to the COM port is attached. The Rondo and attached Towers are PnP devices that are automatically
342
Resources
recognized and installed upon connection to the titrator. A Rondo can also manually be added to the Titration
Stand list with default parameters if needed for method programming.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Connection
Rack
Beaker height
Tower position
Conditioning
beaker
Rinse beaker
Special beaker
1
Special beaker
2
CoverUp
Description
Values
Rondo/1A Stirrer |
Rondo/2A Stirrer |
More depending on
configuration
PnP | MB1/COM |
MB2/COM
Indicates the size off the installed rack.
20 | 12 | 15 | 30 | 60
Beaker configuration of the installed rack.
90 | 110 | 150 | 210
Indicates the tower position configuration off Rondo.
Left | Right
Conditioning beaker setting of the installed rack.
Installed | Not
installed
Indicates the beaker setting of the installed rack.
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Installed | Not
installed
Defines whether a CoverUp unit is connected to the Rondo and, if Rondo/1 TTL-Out 1 |
so, to which port. Select None if there is no CoverUp unit on your Rondo/1 TTL-Out 2 |
Rondo.
Rondo/2 TTL-Out 1 |
Only appears when Rack = 20 has been selected.
Rondo/2 TTL-Out 2 |
MB/TTL-Out 1 |
MB/TTL-Out 2 | None
8.3.2.4.8 KF stand
Stir.
Parameters
Type
Name
Stirrer output
Description
Values
ration
8.3.2.5 Auxiliary instruments
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Auxiliary instrument
Auxiliary instruments can be any instruments that access a titrator's TTL or 24 V output, stirrer or RS-232 con
nection and that are to be used in a method (e.g. valves, dispensers).
An auxiliary instrument is switched on for a predefined period or switched on and then switched off again via
the corresponding command. The instruments are controlled via the method function Auxiliary instrument.
Auxiliary instruments form part of a method, while peripherals are classified as input/output devices (printers,
balances, barcode readers etc.), which do not have direct access to methods.
Starting from the auxiliary instrument list, you can add new auxiliary instruments or select existing ones or
modify their parameters. Furthermore the list can be printed out at a printer or selected auxiliary instruments can
be deleted.
Resources
343
● A maximum of 50 auxiliary instruments can be saved in the titrator.
PC.
Adding an auxiliary instrument
1 Select [New Auxiliary Instrument] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and the control type.
Parameters
Name
Control type
Description
Information on the manner in which the auxiliary instrument is
controlled.
Output 24 V/Stirrer (0-18V output)
Parameters
Description
Output
iary instrument.
TTL
Parameters
Output
Input
RS-232
Parameters
Connection
Baud rate
Data bit
Stop bit
Parity
Handshake
Description
Indicates which port and which pin on the titrator you want to use
for the auxiliary instrument.
Does not appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin).
Only appears for Control type = Input TTL (Single pin).
Description
conductivity board.
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Homogenizer
Resources
Values
MB/PUMP1 |
MB/PUMP2 |
AB1/PUMP | More
ration
Values
MB/TTL-Out 1 |
MB/TTL-Out 2 |
MB/TTL-Out 3 |
MB/TTL-Out 4 | More
ration
Values
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
More depending on
configuration
1200 | 2400 | 4800 |
9600 | 19200
7 | 8
Even | Odd | None
9600.)
8.3.2.6 Homogenizers
344
Values
Arbitrary
Output 24 V | Out TTL
(Single pin) | Input TTL
(Single pin) | TTL
(Multipin) | Stirrer |
RS-232
Editing Homogenizers
1 In the list view, choose the desired Homogenizer.
2 Select [Edit Homogenizer] in the ribbon bar.
Homogenizer TTL
Parameters
Output
Description
Defines the output to which the device is connected.
Values
MB/TTL-Out
1…MB/TTL-Out 4 |
Rondo/1 TTL-Out
1…Rondo/2 TTL-Out
4 | (More depending on
configuration)
Description
Determines whether or not the titrator is connected to the homog
enizer.
Indicates which port on the titrator you want to use.
Values
Installed | Not
installed
MB/COM1 |
MB/COM2 | AB1/COM |
(More depending on
configuration)
Homogenizer RS
Parameters
Status
Output
● For the homogenizer of type PT 1300D (RS interface), the panel for changing or saving the speed during
operation is blocked via the titrator (GLP conformity).
● It is not possible to change an entry while a method that uses a homogenizer is running.
● For the status Installed, balance and sample changer polling is deactivated.
● The parameters for serial connection are for information only and cannot be changed.
8.3.2.7 Liquid Handlers
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Hardware > Liquid Handler
If a Liquid Handler is connected, the titrator detects the Liquid Handler automatically (PnP) and the identifica
tion parameters are transferred to the titrator's setup. Specify the setup parameters, for example to assign the
ports to the related connections. Port 6 is fixed assigned to the waste port. The waste port is required to dis
charge residual solutions upon liquid exchange or to remove excessive liquid volumes from the burette.
Note
PC.
Editing Liquid Handler
1 Select [Edit Liquid Handler] in the ribbon bar.
Parameters
Name
Description
Values
The first connected Liquid Handler is displayed as Liquid Handler Liquid Handler 1 | Liq
1 and the second one as Liquid Handler 2.
uid Handler 2
For T90 you can change the name only if one Liquid Handler is
available and is not connected.
Chip ID
Position
Information on the ID of the Liquid Handler's PnP chip.
Information on the position of the Liquid Handler.
Burette volume
Information on the volume [mL] of the Liquid Handler's burette.
Arbitrary
1 | 2 | PnP (default val
ue)
50 mL (default)
Resources
345
SNR Burette
glass
Port 1…6
Connection
The serial number of the burette glass can be entered.
Arbitrary
Indicates the position of the multiport valve.
The corresponding ports and the connected components can be
designated. The names can then be selected within the method
function Liquid Handling.
Yes | No
Arbitrary
Note
● After the removing of the Liquid Handler, the data (name, chip-ID, burette volume, SNR burette glass, con
nections and port assignments) remain at the titrator's setup.
● When a Liquid Handler is connected, the chip-ID will be overwritten.
● When more than one Liquid Handler are connected, the existing Setup entries will be assigned to the relat
ed.
Liquid Handler, according to the connection order.
● The last Liquid Handler in the list cannot be deleted.
8.3.3 Values
8.3.3.1 Blanks
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Values > Blanks
Blanks can be used in formulas for calculations. They can either be created manually with the aid of their vari
ous parameters or generated as the result of a method. A resulting blank (or calculated mean value) can then
be assigned to a blank using the method function Blank. The blank will then appear under the assigned name
in the Blank list in Setup.
Adding a blank value
1 Select [New Blank] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator.
Parameters
Name
Unit
Value
Monitoring
usable life
Description
monitored.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
-108…108
Yes | No
Note
● A maximum of 100 blanks can be saved in the titrator.
● Blanks cannot be deleted or modified if they are currently in use.
● When a blank is assigned with the "Blank" method function, this is updated in the setup immediately after
completion of the method function.
8.3.3.2 Auxiliary values
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Values > Auxiliary values
You can use auxiliary values in formulas. They can either be manually created and edited or can be generated
using a method. A result, a mean derived from several results or a raw result can be assigned to an auxiliary
value by means of the "Auxiliary Value" method function. The auxiliary value then appears under the assigned
name in the auxiliary values list in the Setup.
346
Resources
Adding an auxiliary value
1 Select [New Auxiliary Value] in the ribbon bar.
Parameters
Name
Value
Monitoring
usable life
Description
monitored.
Values
Arbitrary
-108…108
Yes | No
Note
● A maximum of 100 auxiliary values can be saved in the titrator.
● Auxiliary values cannot be deleted or modified when they are currently in use.
● When an auxiliary value is assigned with the method function Auxiliary value, this is updated in the setup
immediately after completion of the method function.
8.3.4 Chemicals
8.3.4.1 Titrants
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Titrants
Titrants are managed together with burettes and burette drive (PnP with chip and traditional burettes without
chips).
For classical burettes, the relevant titrant data is entered manually. For PnP (Plug&Play) burettes, the data is
automatically read from the chip and automatically transferred to the instrument and to LabX.
Note
PC.
Adding a titrant
1 Select [New Titrant] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and the type of titrant.
Parameters
Type
Description
The type of titrant. You can select from the following three types
of titrant:
General titration: Classical titrants for general titration.
Auxiliary reagent: If you are adding reagents manually using a
burette.
Karl Fischer titration: Karl Fischer titrant.
Name
Concentration
The concentration of the titrant, in [mol/L].
Values
General titration | Aux
iliary reagent | Karl
Fischer titration
Arbitrary
0.00001…100
0.00001…104
The non-dimensional concentration of an auxiliary reagent.
For Type = Auxiliary reagent.
Titer
The titer for the titrant.
0.00001…10
Resources
347
Reagent type
Nominal conc.
Current conc.
Monitoring
usable life
Lot/Batch
Fill rate
Burette volume
Drive
Serial number
The type of Karl Fischer titrant can be selected. This Influences
the control behavior of a titration.
Specified concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL].
Actual concentration of the Karl Fischer titrant in [mg/mL].
monitored.
mum filling rate.
Select the burette volume in [mL].
Defines the drive on which you will use the burette containing the
titrant. Select the "PnP" entry for available but unused PnP
burettes.
1-comp | 2-comp
0.1…100
0.1…100
Yes | No
Arbitrary
30…100
1 | 5 | 10 | 20
1…8 | PnP
Arbitrary
Note
● Titrants (independently of the type) must each be assigned to a drive.
● A maximum of 100 titrants can be defined in the instrument.
● In PnP burettes, the serial number is entered automatically. This can, however, be changed.
8.3.4.1.1 Titrant history
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Titrants
The date, time and test data of the test are displayed in list form on this window.
Displaying a test history
1 Select the titrant for that you wish to display the history in the table view.
2 Select [View Titrant History] in the ribbon bar.
Parameter
Data Selection
History from
Titrant History Entries
Titrant History Chart
Explanation
Defines the date range to be displayed. Click [Retrieve Data] to update that listed
entries.
Select the entries to be shown by checking the box Show.
Select parameters, and if applicable segments, to be represented against the date
from the drop-down lists.
8.3.4.2 Auxiliary reagents
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Auxiliary reagents
Auxiliary reagents are liquid chemicals that can be used to aid the titration process. Auxiliary reagents must be
added using a pump and can be used via the method functions Pumps and Rinse.
Note
PC.
Adding an auxiliary reagent
1 Select [New Auxiliary Reagent].
348
Resources
Parameters
Name
Pump
Description
Values
Arbitrary
8.3.4.3 Calibration standards
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Calibration Sandards
Calibration standards are used for the calibration of sensors. The instrument contains various calibration stan
dard lists for the calibration of pH sensors (pH buffer lists), ISE sensors (ISE standard lists) and conductivity
sensors (conductivity standard lists) (see Appendix). In this dialog, you can view and print the predefined lists
stored in the titrator, and create additional user-defined calibration standard lists for pH buffers and ISE and
conductivity standards.
Note
PC.
Adding a new user-defined calibration standard lists
1 Select [New Calibration Standard] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of standard.
3 After you have created a calibration standard list, you can add various buffers and standards to this list,
depending on the type selected.
Parameters
Type
Description
Select the corresponding type for the new calibration standard
list.
The unit of measure to be used will depend on the type selected.
Values
pH | pH | Auto pH |
ISE | Conductivity
Name
Arbitrary
Unit
pH | pM | pX | ppm |
mS/cm | µS/cm
Base list
Add the calibration standard lists of various pH buffers by select List of available calibra
ing them from the list.
tion standards
Only for Type = Auto pH.
Ref. temperature Define the reference temperature of the buffer.
-20…200
Note
● To delete a self-defined calibration standard list from the titrator, you must first access the parameters in the
list via [Info]. From this window, you can delete the calibration standard list by tapping [Delete].
● A maximum of 20 user-defined calibration standard lists and 10 auto pH buffer lists can be defined in the
titrator.
Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH Buffer)
After creating a calibration standard list of the type pH, add various pH buffers to it.
1 In New buffer at 25°C, enter the respective pH value of the buffer, based on the reference temperature from
the calibration standard list and click [Add buffer]. Repeat this step for additional buffers.
To reflect the temperature influence of a pH buffer, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each individu
al buffer composed.
2 In New temperature [°C], enter the respective temperature value, based on the reference temperature from
the calibration standard list and click [Add Temperature]. Repeat this step for additional temperatures.
3 Enter the pH values for each buffer in all given temperatures rows in the table.
4 Save the list by clicking [Save and Close].
Resources
349
Adding a pH Calibration Standard (pH buffer) of type Auto pH
For a calibration standard list of the type Auto pH, the various pH buffers are detected by the titrator auto
matically. In order to ensure positive identification, the pH values of the individual solutions must differ from
each other by at least two pH points.
1 In New buffer at 25°C, select the respective pH value of the buffer and click [Add buffer]. Repeat this step
for additional buffers.
Note
The temperature dependency of the individual pH buffers is also taken from the base list and cannot be edited,
only viewed.
Adding an ISE Calibration Standard (ISE Standard)
After creating a calibration standard list of the type ISE, you can add various ISE standards to it.
1 In New standard at {0}°C, enter the corresponding value for the standard in the desired unit of measure,
based on the reference temperature from the calibration standard list and tap [Add Standard]. Repeat this
step for additional standards.
To reflect the temperature influence of an ISE standard, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
individual standard composed of the temperature and corresponding standard value.
3 Enter the values for each buffer in all given temperatures rows in the table.
Adding a Conductivity Calibration Standard (Conductivity Standard)
After creating a calibration standard list of the type Conductivity, add various pH buffers to it.
1 In New standard at {0}°C, enter the respective conductivity value of the buffer, based on the reference tem
perature from the calibration standard list and click [Add Standard]. Repeat this step for additional buffers.
To reflect the temperature influence of a conductivity buffer, enter a maximum of 20 value pairs for each
individual buffer composed.
3 Enter the conductivity values for each buffer in all given temperatures rows in the table.
8.3.4.4 Concentration and titer standards
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Concentration and Titer Standards
Enter and manage the and titer standards required for titer determinations and the Karl Fischer water standards
for the concentration determination of KF titrants.
Note
PC.
Adding a standard
1 Select [New Concentration or Titer Standard] in the ribbon bar.
2 Choose the desired titrator and type of standard.
Parameters
Type
Name
350
Resources
Description
Defines the type of standard.
Values
solid | liquid | KF
Arbitrary
Purity
Concentration
Water content
Unit
The purity of a solid standard, in percent.
Only for Type = solid.
The concentration of a liquid standard, in [mol/L].
Only for Type = liquid.
The water content of a Karl Fischer standard.
Unit for the water content of the Karl Fischer standard.
M
Density
The molar mass of a solid standard, in [g/mol].
The density of a liquid standard, in [g/mL].
Only for Type = liquid or KF.
Equivalent num The equivalent number "z" of the standard
ber
Lot/Batch
0.001…100.000
0.00001…100
0.00001…106
mg/g | mg/mL | % |
ppm | mg/piece
10-5…103
0.0001…100
1…9
Arbitrary
Monitor Usable Life
Parameters
Monitoring
usable life
Time period
Usable life
Reminder
Description
monitored.
Specifies the time range.
Defines the time span of the expiration dates either in days or
hours (depending on: Time period).
Determines whether the titrator should issue a warning before the
service life or usable life of a resource elapses.
Values
Yes | No
Days | Hours
Days: 1…1000
Hours: 1…104
Yes | No
Note
● All fields except for Lot/Batch must be filled before the standard can be saved.
● A maximum of 50 titer standards can be defined.
8.3.4.5 Substances
Navigation: Resources > Titration > Chemicals > Substances
Any chemical substances that are required for performing your analyses can be managed using name, empiri
cal formula, molecular weight, and equivalent number.
Note
PC.
Adding a substance
1 Select [New Substance] in the ribbon bar.
Parameters
Name
Empirical formu
la
Molecular
weight
Equivalent num
ber
Description
Defines the empirical formula of the substance.
Values
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Defines the molecular weight of the substance.
0.0001…104
The equivalent number "z" of the standard
1…9
Note
● A maximum of 100 substances can be defined.
Resources
351
8.4 LiquiPhysics
You can create new sets and delete existing ones (when deleting you receive a prompt with the option to can
cel). Before an adjustment or test can be performed, an adjustment or test set must be defined. A maximum of
six different adjustment sets or test sets respectively can be entered in the set list. Before an adjustment or test
can be performed, an adjustment or test set must be defined.
8.4.1 Managing adjustment sets
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Adjustment Sets
Enter all adjustment sets that are used for adjustment in LiquiPhysics methods. The adjustment set Air&Water
20.00C is always available and cannot be deleted. You can select the sets to view more detailed information.
Adjustment sets can only be used in methods if they have the status Released. Existing adjustment sets cannot
be modified.
Parameter
Description
Displayed, if
Set name
The set is uniquely identified in the system via this name.
Adjustment mode Defines with which standard the adjustment will be performed. If
visc. correction is activated during measurment, adjustment must
be performed in the "Air&Water" mode.
Temperature
Defines at which temperature the adjustment will be performed.
Adding an adjustment set
1 Select [New Adjustment Set] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
Note
● When a set is deleted, the set history will also be deleted. Methods that refer to the deleted set are no longer
executable.
See also
8.4.2 Managing test sets
Navigation: Resources > Balance > Test Sets
Enter all test sets that are used for testing in LiquiPhysics methods. The test set Air&Water20.00C is always
available and cannot be deleted. You can select the sets to view more detailed information. Test sets can only
be used in methods if they have the status Released. Existing test sets cannot be modified.
Parameter
Set name
Test mode
Standard name
Description
The set is uniquely identified in the system via this name.
Defines with which standard the test will be performed.
Temperature
Defines at which temperature the adjustment will be performed.
Displayed, if
"Test mode" = "Stan
dard" or "Brix standard"
-
Adding a test set
1 Select [New Test Set] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
Note
● When a set is deleted, the set history will also be deleted. Methods that refer to the deleted set are no longer
executable.
See also
352
Resources
8.5 Thermal Values
8.5.1 Managing reference substances
Navigation: Resources > Thermal Values > Reference Substances
Reference substances can be defined and used for the adjustment of your Thermal Values instrument in order to
check the measurement accuracy. Melting point values that are entered on sample bottles and the accompany
ing certificates may deviate slightly from the values listed below for T nominal. These are assigned to the refer
ence substances as "lots" with individual values.
The data for the calibration substances below is already available in LabX. Additional reference substances can
be added to the system.
Substance
Benzophenone
Vanillin
Benzoic Acid
Saccharin
Caffeine
Potassium Nitrate
T nominal
47.8 °C
81.7 °C
122.2 °C
228.3 °C
236.0 °C
334.0 °C
Tolerance
± 0.2 °C
± 0.4 °C
± 0.2 °C
± 0.3 °C
± 0.3 °C
± 0.3 °C
Note
● If necessary, the temperature values given in °C above can be converted to °F or K when adding batches.
Parameters
Properties
Nominal
Explanation
Reference substances are uniquely identified and displayed in the system by means of their
names.
Specifies whether the lot information relating to the melting point should be entered accord
ing to Pharmacopeia or Thermodynamic. Alternatively, the batch information relating to
the melting range can be selected according to Pharmacopeia.
Adding a reference substance
1 Select [New Reference Substance] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
You can now add batches to the reference substance.
8.5.1.1 Managing lots
Navigation: Resources > Thermal Values > Reference Substances
The melting point values entered on the sample bottle and accompanying certificate are managed individually
as lots. Prior to this, either a reference substance must be defined or one of the predefined substances is used.
A lot whose expiration date has passed can no longer be used and is no longer displayed, but is still listed in
reports. If multiple lots of a reference substance are known to the system, the list is displayed for selection at
the start of an analysis.
Parameters
Identification
General
Melting
point/range
Explanation
Displays the reference substance. Entry of a name for the lot.
Details the certificate's date of issue and period of validity. Selection of the temperature
unit.
Details the melting point according to Pharmacopeia or Thermodynamic. Details the melt
ing range according to Pharmacopeia.
Adding lot
1 Select the required reference substance in the table view.
2 Select [New Lot] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
Resources
353
8.6 Managing value tables
Navigation: Resources > Value Tables
In a value table, values that are used for the conversion of results are aligned as value pairs. The output values
are interpolated according to the selected settings. If the input value is outside the range of defined values, the
result is marked as incorrect. For better clarity and readability you may create additional folders within the fold
er.
Value tables can also be imported.
Parameter
Table Properties
Input value
Output value
Value Table
Explanation
Enter a name for the table and select the type of interpolation.
Specify the name and unit for the input value.
Specify the name and unit for the output value.
Displays the value pairs.
Adding values
1 Open an existing value table.
- or Create a new value table.
2 Enter the table properties on the left-hand side of the window.
3 Click on [New] and enter the first value pair.
4 For each further value pair, click on [New] again.
See also
● Applicable functions (page 394)
● Importing value tables (page 354)
8.6.1 Importing value tables
Navigation: Resources > Value Tables
Instead of entering value tables manually, you can also create and import CSV files.
1 Select [Import Value Table] in the ribbon bar. The Import Value Table dialog opens.
2 Define the import settings and click on [Import ...].
3 Select the desired file and click on [Open]. The imported values are displayed.
4 If the values are displayed correctly, click on [Save].
Parameter
Input value
Output value
Fit type
Value Table
354
Resources
Explanation
Specify the name and unit for the input value.
Specify the name and unit for the output value.
Select the type of interpolation.
Preview of the imported value pairs.
9 System
The System workspace contains the following objects.
width.
Object
Audit Trail
Schedules
Background Jobs
Report Templates
User Management
Import and Export
Instrument Driver
SmartCode
Description
The audit trail records all important activities.
Here you create schedules for the time-controlled execution of tasks.
The running background jobs are displayed.
The Report templates object defines the form and content of reports.
You can define user access rights here.
In the import settings, you can define the structure and save location of automated
task imports. In the export settings, you can define the structure and save location
of automated result exports.
Here you can manage the drivers required for communication with the instru
ments.
The purpose of managing barcodes is to automate methods in combination with
products or sample series.
See also
9.1 Audit Trail
The function Audit Trail records all important activities to provide documentary evidence of the sequence of
activities that have affected at any time a specific operation, procedure, or event. This function enables auditing
of data access, deletions, changes and manipulations.
ing your own search folders makes it is easier to gain an overview of large amounts of data. You can add mul
tiple criteria to one search folder and thereby create combinations that meet several criteria.
Navigation: System > Audit Trail
Search folders
New Search Folder
Edit Search Folder
9.2 Background jobs
The following processes are listed as “Background jobs”:
● Processes from export templates
● PDF generation
● Printing processes
Background jobs can be started manually or automatically and have various statuses. In the event of an error,
the system will try repeatedly to execute these jobs automatically.
Status
Waiting
Explanation
This background job is waiting in the queue.
Jobs that cannot be completed due to an error are also displayed. Also displayed are the
cause of the error, time of the next run and the number of attempts.
System
355
Status
Running
Stopped
Completed
Explanation
This background job is currently in progress.
This background job was stopped because an error meant it could not be completed
despite repeated attempts. This background job can be restarted.
This background job has finished successfully. This will no longer be displayed when the
display is refreshed.
Editing background jobs
Navigation: System > Background jobs
1 Select the required background job in the table view.
2 Select the desired command in the Administration or Edit group on the ribbon bar.
9.3 Report templates
The form and content of reports are defined in the report templates. You can modify the report templates using
the Editor to customize the generated report to your needs. Using the Report Editor, it is possible to modify the
grid of the templates in the sequence, and the individual sections and contents can be shown or hidden individ
ually.
With the optional Report Designer, you are free to tailor the design of your reports as you wish. You can incor
porate all the information available from the methods and variables via data binding and arrange them the way
you want.
Report templates are versioned objects. See also "Versioned objects (page 20)".
Navigation: System > Report templates
9.3.1 Reports
Reports containing data are created based on report templates. They can be generated automatically at the task
runtime or manually after a task has been completed. Reports can also be generated for instruments.
Topic-oriented basic report templates are available. These report templates can be used as a basis for creating
new templates, which enables you to quickly and simply create a new template.
9.3.1.1 Creating a new report template
1 Select New Report Template in the ribbon bar. A selection of templates is displayed.
2 Select an appropriate template from the list and choose Report Editor or Advanced Designer. The relevant
tool is opened.
Two different tools are available for editing reports.
356
System
● The Report Editor, for the quick and simple configuration of a template.
● The Advanced Designer, for the flexible creation of an individual template.
These two tools and their options for creating a report template are described in separate chapters. The
Advanced Designer is not included in the standard LabX package.
9.3.1.2 Editing a report template
1 Select the required report template in the table view.
2 In the ribbon bar, select either Open in Report Editor or Open in Enhanced Report Designer. The relevant
tool is opened.
Note
● Once a template has been edited using the Report Designer, from then on it can only be edited with this
tool.
9.3.1.3 Data management
A distinction is made between data (results and result sets), report templates, and reports. Independently of the
status of a task, data can be recorded at any time by specifying a report template, and this report can be saved
and released separately.
If a report is generated automatically from a task at runtime (method function used: "Report"), it can only con
tain data that refers to its own task.
However, if a report is generated subsequently by selecting multiple result sets, depending on the report tem
plate used, this can contain cross-task information such as diagrams or statistics.
Once report templates have been created they remain available globally, and are therefore managed at system
level.
9.3.1.4 General report functions
Independently of the tool used for creation, the following general report functions are available in the ribbon bar.
Recreate report template, open, delete, tag, export, import, approve, and release. Approval and release are gen
erally available for signable objects, if the "Regulation" option is licensed.
9.3.1.5 Automatic report generation
To generate a report automatically from a current task, the "Report" method function must be integrated in the
method used. A link must therefore be made to an existing report template. For automatic report generation,
System
357
only those report templates can be used that reference task-based fields.
As an option, it is also possible to select a printer to have the report printed out at the same time.
9.3.1.6 Data from multiple tasks in one report
Only the data from one task can be used as a basis for an automatically generated report. A report containing
data from different tasks can be generated by selecting multiple results sets. The data from the individual tasks
is then automatically arranged together.
Data that originates from different tasks cannot be linked to a report, for example, for calculations or statistics.
9.3.1.7 Module-specific data source
The preset topic-specific report templates reference a (module-)specific data source. Within this data source,
the fields can be used in any way to create or adjust the report template. It is not possible to refer to data from
different data sources within one report template.
9.3.2 The report editor
The editor can be used to edit different templates used in the system. The basic structure or grid of the templates
can be modified, and the individual sections and contents can be shown or hidden individually.
When you open the editor, the selected report template appears in the preview, which ensures that you have a
good overview. The top part of the window contains a ribbon bar in which you can make changes to the lay
out. The right-hand part of the window features two tabs for displaying content-specific information. The Proper
ties tab displays the name of the template. On the Configuration tab, you can define the order of sections and
determine which sections should be shown.
The visibility of the contents can be determined individually for each selected section. If necessary, the name of
contents (label name) can be edited.
To integrate a particular company's logo into the templates, select "Logo" and enter the path to a graphic. The
graphic must be in JPG, BMP, GIF or PNG format. The size of the placeholder for the graphic is 52 x 25 mm.
As graphics cannot be scaled here, you should have the graphic scaled to the desired size and saved at this
size in a graphics program. From the correct size, it is possible to derive the resolution of the graphic in dpi. A
typical size is, e.g., 50 x 22 mm, 200 dpi (394 x 173 pixels). With GIF graphics, the resolution in dpi cannot
be changed and is always 72 dpi. Therefore, this type of graphic should not exceed 147 x 71 pixels.
358
System
Joined Results
The "summarized results" section of a report is used to represent
the results in a horizontal direction. The placeholders are used to
assign return values from the relevant method functions.
The exact name of the method function is entered in the "Title"
formula column, which is used for referencing.
Note: This function is not available for LiquiPhysics and Thermal
Values instruments when using the report editor.
Placeholder
R1…R15
T1…T10
N1…N5
Method function
Result
Selection | Text
Number
Note
This function is not available for LiquiPhysics and Thermal Values instruments when using the report editor.
Headings
For report creation, headings are not copied from the method definition, but instead according to the definition
in the report template.
Exporting report templates
To export and re-import a created template complete with data binding, select the template in the list of report
templates and choose the "report templates export" function in the ribbon bar. The import function is also avail
able here.
9.3.3 The report designer
Just like the report editor, you can use the report designer to create report templates or edit existing templates.
In contrast to the report editor, in the report designer, the structure of the templates, the individual data elements
they contain, and the links to data can be freely selected.
System
359
Items on the screen
When you open the Designer, example data for the selected report template appears on the left-hand side of the
preview, to ensure a clear overview. The top part of the window contains a ribbon bar in which you can make
changes to the layout. The right-hand part of the window features up to five tabs for displaying content-specific
information. These can be shown or hidden by choosing Window View in the ribbon bar.
Tab
Properties
Report template
parameters
Field List
Tool Box
Report Explorer
Property Grid
360
System
Description
The name of the template is entered here.
You can also define report template parameters here. These act as an alias for results
and must be created if you want to align results horizontally in a report. The data bind
ing is then created in accordance with the defined alias.
In this area, the LabX data available for a report is displayed. This window can also be
used to link existing report items with data, or to create this type of linked item directly.
Contains the graphical control elements, which can be dragged into the report template
using drag and drop.
This area provides simple navigation through the existing items of the report template.
The whole report structure is visible and the properties of the item can be quickly
accessed directly from the item.
This area displays all the properties of a selected item. It is possible to make the
required settings in the properties of an item, or by selecting the smart tag that belongs
to an item.
Joined Results
The "summarized results" section of a report is used to represent
the results in a horizontal direction. The placeholders are used to
assign return values from the relevant method functions.
The exact name of the method function is entered in the "Title"
formula column, which is used for referencing.
Note: This function is not available for LiquiPhysics and Thermal
Values instruments when using the report editor.
Placeholder
R1…R15
T1…T10
N1…N5
Method function
Result
Selection | Text
Number
Smart Tags
This function enables context-sensitive access to the properties of an arbitrary report template item. The corre
sponding item must always first be selected, and then the smart tag icon is displayed.
9.3.3.1 Insert bands
The preview of the report template on the left-hand side shows the sections and detailed reports currently used
in the template, together with the data elements they contain. The hierarchy of the bands is represented using
different colors.
A distinction is made between different types of bands and items from the tool list, which can in turn be linked
to data from the LabX database.
The data is organized in the report template using "bands". Since the data is hierarchical, the bands must also
be arranged accordingly. This means that the report template is logically broken down into different areas with
different properties. The following band types are defined:
Band
Top margin
Record header
Page header
Group header
Detail
Group footer
Page footer
Report footer
Bottom margin
Meaning/Function/Example
For specific margin information.
Can be used in the report and in every detailed report where it is inserted.
For header line information on every report page.
Can be used any number of times with the report and the detailed report (e.g. for table
headers)
Special feature: The view of the data within this group can be determined by entering
this group field. (e.g. After sample ID1 > Selected data can be listed after sample ID1).
Must be used at least once at report level. This can be used to design detailed reports,
etc. (the actual data is contained in detailed reports)
Can used additionally for each group header line.
For footer line information on every report page.
Can be used in addition to the report header line in the report and in every detailed
report.
For specific margin information.
System
361
Bands can be added, moved, or deleted directly in the report template using a right click. On the left-hand ruler
scrollbar, you can use drag and drop to move the band types that are selected.
9.3.3.2 Inserting detailed reports
The basic report template already consists of a large number of detailed reports. As you can see, the detailed
reports can be used for simple grouping of data according to different topics.
Right-clicking on a free report space or within the Report Explorer enables you to insert additional sections for
linked or unlinked detailed reports.
Linked detailed reports can no longer draw on data, as defined in the scope of the selected data field. In order
to draw on more data, an unlinked detailed report must be selected. This can be useful, in particular, for dia
grams.
Repetition of data
The selection of the data field of a detailed report also determines how the section containing this data is
repeated within the whole report.
9.3.3.3 Items on the Tool Box tab
Items
Text
Description
Can be used for labels and for data fields. Typically used for free-standing
information such as the headers of report areas immediately before or after a
band definition.
Table
The cells of a table can be used for both labels and data fields. Right-click to
define the number of rows and columns in the table.
Picture Box
Enables you to insert pictures that exist as a file in image format.
Panel
This is a container item that is used as an aid for grouping together individu
al elements within layouts.
Lines, Shapes and Check Boxes These are purely graphical design elements with no data binding options in
LabX.
Bar Code
This item can be linked, and displays the text in the form of a bar code. Can
be linked, e.g. with a sample ID to automate a process sequence. Note:
Module automation must be selected in the properties.
Rich Text
Enables free writing and formatting of text sections.
Zip Code
Can be used to display zip codes. The output character set is supported by
specialist scanners.
Chart
A powerful wizard enables the creation of highly flexible charts. The data
binding must be entered for every defined range.
Pivot Grid
This item can be used for the summarized representation of referenced data.
The pivot grid is an aid for reducing large datasets to a manageable size
and performing simple evaluations. This enables the display of summaries
and statistical calculations.
Page Info and Page Break
Used to structure whole pages in terms of adding typical document informa
tion in header and footer lines.
Cross-band Line and CrossEnable the use of graphical elements across band boundaries.
band Box
362
System
9.3.3.4 Pivot grids
The following aggregate functions are supported within the pivot grid: Sum, Average, Count, Min, Max, StdDev,
StdDevp, StdVar, StdVarp.
The pivot grid contains the following separate areas in which fields can be created:
Row area (Row field)
If a field is dragged or referenced to here, the output data is grouped according to this field. One row in the pivot
grid is displayed for each different field content that occurs in the output data. If two fields are selected as row
fields, all groups that belong to the second field are displayed within every group that belongs to the first field in
the pivot table. If there are more than two row fields, the same division continues for all fields. The order of the
row fields is relevant, and is selected by the user to make the result as transparent as possible.
Column area (Column field)
Enables grouping, similarly to the fields in the row area, whereby the different contents of a column field are
displayed in columns instead of rows. If the user uses row fields and column fields together, this creates a
cross table.
Data area (Data field)
Determines what is displayed at the intersect point of the rows and columns. For each data field, the use of an
aggregation function (e.g. "Sum" or "No. of Data Records") means that exactly one value is entered in every
cell of the pivot table, even if there is a large number of data records that are members of the group belonging
to the cell. If multiple data fields are selected, the user can decide whether the different data fields are displayed
next to each other in columns or underneath each other in rows (the same as for column and row fields). The
same field can also be used more than once as a data field (for practical reasons, with different aggregate
functions).
Filter area (Filter field)
Enables filtering, i.e. restriction of the pivot table to include only the data records of the output set resulting from
the values defined in the selected filter fields. The division of the fields into row fields and column fields deter
mines the structure of the pivot table. If this division or sequence is changed, the data displayed is not more or
less, but simply in a different format. For example, changing between column and row fields (maintaining the
same sequence) results in a transposed table.
Moving a row or column field to a different position is also described as "pivoting" this field.
9.3.3.5 Structuring a simple template
Using the basic report template "balanceMeasurementreport1", we can see that the following structure can typi
cally be applied:
1st Band:
PageHeader
Various individual items in the header area of the report
System
363
2nd Band:
Detail
1st Detailed report (here e.g. methods)
Then within this detailed report: a ReportHeader, followed by a Label, followed by the detail block containing
the data e.g. in table form, and the data binding of individual cells.
2nd Detailed report (here e.g. BalanceMeasurementResults)
Then in this detailed report: a ReportHeader, followed by a Label, followed by (as a variant) a GroupHeader
for all headers of a table and the corresponding detail block containing the actual data, here for example in
table form, and the data binding of cells in a range.
This is followed by further detailed reports, until the final band follows at the end:
n th Band:
PageFooter
Plus various individual elements
9.3.3.6 Linking items with data
For linking items to data from the LabX database, you can use either the table item, the text item or other items
such as charts from the tool list. The Smart Tag of this item (in tables, this is the individual cell) can be used to
enter the required data binding.
The Task node in the field list is a central starting point for the data binding. For task-based reports, the access
point is "Document" (so that data are repeated correctly in the case of multiple tasks). Under this node, all
results and further data generated from a task are structured in a list.
9.3.3.7 Filtering the data
LabX displays the data fields preselected according to a certain topic (Task, Instrument, Sample, Products,
etc.). By choosing the data field parameter in each band of the report template you can define the data scope
and the orientation used to draw data. For example, if you only want to access the results of one task, fields
within the task structure must be selected from the field list. However, if you want to access results of several
tasks, for example, the fields from the MainResultData data must be selected.
9.3.3.8 Using formatting rules
Formatting rules stored for the report template can be used to dynamically control the formatting of items, e.g.
depending on a result. Formatting rules are created using an editor, which can be called directly from every
Smart Tag selection list of an item.
9.3.3.9 Reviewing in the preview
The ribbon bar can be used to display a print preview and an HTML view of the current report template.
9.3.3.10 Further information
The LabX Knowledge Base contains further information such as additional report templates.
Tutorials and other general information on the operation of the Report Designer and its tools and elements can
be found on the Internet under http://www.devexpress.com/Help/?document=XtraReports. Note that the func
tions available within LabX are restricted to the concept of LabX.
9.4 User management
This chapter explains how to manage users and their assignment to roles or groups. Users can be added,
changed, deleted or temporarily disabled. In the roles, you define the rights that are available to the assigned
user. By default, 4 roles or groups are predefined in LabX. However, these can be edited, deleted or new roles
added as desired. Each user should be assigned at least one role. However, a single user can also be allocat
ed multiple roles, whereby the rights available to the user are increased cumulatively. The rights assigned to
roles and thus to users are subdivided by System and Modules, e.g. LabX balance.
Note
● If only one administrator is defined, it can neither be deleted nor otherwise modified in such a way that the
associated administrator rights would be lost.
364
System
9.4.1 Managing users
Users can be added, changed, deleted or temporarily disabled. In the roles, you define the rights that are avail
able to the assigned user. Each user should be assigned at least one role. However, a single user can also be
allocated multiple roles, whereby the rights available to the user are increased cumulatively.
Navigation: System > User Management > Users
Parameter
User
Full Name
E-Mail
Mail Distribution
Explanation
Value range
The full name, typically comprising first name and last name.
The e-mail address of the user.
Here you specify the destination to which notifications are to be
sent.
Any
Any
Messages only | Mes
sages and E-Mail
Account
User Name
Password
The user's login name.
User's password.
Confirm
Confirmation of password.
State
Roles
Available
Defines the status of a user account.
Any
Defined in Account Poli
cies.
Same string as defined
for password.
Active | Inactive
Defines the assignment of users to roles.
List of all roles set up
on the system.
Adding users
1 Select [New User] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
See also
● Assigning rights (page 365)
● Managing roles (page 365)
9.4.2 Managing roles
Roles can be added, changed or deleted. In the roles, you define the rights that are available to the assigned
user. At least one role must be assigned to each user. The rights get accumulated if multiple roles are assigned.
The rights assigned to roles and thus to users are subdivided by system and modules, e.g. LabX balance. This
is represented by two or more tabs in the view. Depending on the installed modules, additional tabs may be
displayed. The tabular option feature enables you to assign specific rights to specific roles. See also "Assigning
rights (page 365)" for this purpose.
Navigation: System > User Management > Roles
Adding roles
1 Select [New Role] in the ribbon bar. The Editor is opened.
2 Activate or deactivate the checkboxes on the various tabs according to your requirements, and save the
data.
Editing roles
1 Select the role that you wish to edit.
2 Select [Edit Role] in the ribbon bar. The Editor is opened.
data.
9.4.3 Assigning rights
The rights assigned to roles and thus to users are subdivided by system and modules, e.g. LabX balance.
Navigation: System > User Management > Roles
System
365
Selectable rights
Rights
Objects
View
Explanation
Authorized users who are able to view details of the object concerned (method,
scheduling, …). If the user does not have this right, the preview pane remains
blank and the Open command in the Editor is inactive.
Edit
Authorized users who are able to create new objects of the type concerned (by
editing or importing) or are able to modify existing objects and save the changes.
If an object, e.g. a method, is modified, a new version will be created. However, a
copy of the existing version will be retained and can be viewed by users having
the appropriate permission and restored by them if necessary.
Delete
Authorized users who are able to remove objects from the system. This right also
includes the View right.
View History
Authorized users who are able to view the details of previous versions of selected
objects. This right also includes the View right. The ability to restore a previous
version requires the “Edit” right.
Release
Authorized users who are able to release new versions of objects with “Sign”. As a
result, objects change status from “Proposed” to “Released”.
Export
Authorized users who are able to transfer data from an object, e.g. a method, to a
file. This right also includes the View right.
Execute / view proposed Authorized users who are able to view unreleased objects and create or start tasks
based on them.
Unlock
Authorized users who are able to cancel the screen lock of another user.
Allow execute
Authorizes users to execute certain actions.
Allow
Authorizes the user to execute certain actions.
Rights on the system
Analysis
Objects
Methods
Sample Series
Products
Value Tables
Results
Reports
Report Templates
Shortcuts
Schedules
Private shortcuts
Explanation
A method represents the program for conducting the analysis. It consists of a
series of method functions that are processed in sequence by the instrument.
You can use sample series to group several individual samples together into a
sample series, so that all samples in the series can be analyzed in sequence
using a defined method.
Products are helpful for specifying parameter values for samples with similar
properties.
In a value table, values that are used for the conversion of results are arranged as
value pairs.
If you click on the Data navigation pane, a list of saved results and reports is dis
played in chronological order.
If you have used a Reports method function in a method, the corresponding
entries will be displayed for each task processed.
Using the Report Editor, it is possible to modify the grid of the templates in the
sequence, and the individual sections and contents can be shown or hidden indi
vidually.
Shortcuts enable you to start tasks directly from the Shortcuts list in LabX or from
an instrument.
Schedules are used to assign tasks to instruments and insert them in the wait
queues of the selected instruments.
This type of shortcuts is displayed only to the author of the shortcut.
Task
Objects
Tasks
366
System
Explanation
Tasks are assigned to instruments and inserted into the wait queues of the select
ed instruments.
System
Objects
Configuration
Explanation
Labels
Labels are headers for freely definable fields, in which you can enter additional
information for the properties of instruments, products, and sample series.
Mail Settings
You use these settings to define which e-mail server is used for sending mes
sages.
SmartCodes
Barcodes can be used to start the relevant methods in combination with products
or sample series.
Drivers
Regardless of which interface is used, the necessary drivers must be installed on
the system in order for communication with instruments to be possible.
Security Settings
Account Policies
Account policies are a combination of settings governing password and account
lockout policies.
User Management
Users can be added, changed, deleted or temporarily disabled. In the roles, you
define the rights that are available to the assigned user.
Screen Lock
Signature Policies
Audit Trail
Archiving
Defines whether the screen should be locked after a defined period.
These policies define the operations that can be configured to require signing.
The audit trail records all the important activities such as: logging on, starting a
task, creating methods, changing methods, performing recalculations and reeval
uations.
An archive is a data backup file that has been generated before previous data was
deleted from the database.
Instruments
Objects
Instruments
Manual operations
Explanation
Instruments, e.g. balances, can be connected to the system, depending on the
activated modules in LabX.
Defines whether manual operations can be displayed or edited.
Rights in the balances module
Weight
Objects
Weight / Weight set
Explanation
Weights and weight sets are managed in Resources and are used for tests and
adjustments in balance methods.
MinWeigh Standard
Objects
MinWeigh Standard
Explanation
LabX is able to manage up to 50 MinWeigh standards, which are mapped to the
MinWeigh methods of each balance.
Rights in the LiquiPhysics module
Sets
Objects
Adjustment Sets
Test Sets
Explanation
Adjustment sets are used for making adjustments in LiquiPhysics methods.
Test sets are used for tests in LiquiPhysics methods.
System
367
Rights in the Thermal Values module
Reference Substance
Objects
Reference Substances
Explanation
Reference substances can be defined and used for the adjustment of your Thermal
Values instrument in order to check the measurement accuracy.
Instrument
Objects
Adjustments
Explanation
The melting point measurements taken when using reference substances form the
basis for an adjustment.
Video
Objects
Videos
Explanation
In the Results Editor, the videos created during the execution of a task on an
instrument are displayed.
9.5 Import and export
Navigation: System > Import and Export
Import templates
In the import templates, you can define the structure and save the location of automated task, product, and
sample series imports. The import can also be performed manually. Select the desired template in the table
view and click on [Execute] in the ribbon bar.
Export templates
In the export templates, you can define the structure and save the location of automated result, product, sample
series and melting point/range measurements exports. The export of products and sample series can also be
performed manually. Select the desired template in the table view and click on [Execute] in the ribbon bar.
9.5.1 Adding import templates
In the import templates, you can define the structure and save location of task, product, and sample series
imports.
Navigation: System >Import and Export > Import Templates
New Import Template
1 Select [New Import Template] in the ribbon bar and choose the type of setting. The corresponding dialog is
opened.
2 Define the structure and save the location of automated task, product, and sample series imports.
See also
● Import and export (page 368)
● Editing import templates (page 368)
9.5.2 Editing import templates
In the import templates, you can define the structure and save location of task, product, and sample series
imports.
Tasks
Products
Sample Series
The data for new tasks is imported.
All products are imported with the folder structure. If an "Internal product ID" is already
available, one product is overwritten.
All sample series are imported with the folder structure. New sample series are always
added and are not overwritten.
Navigation: System > Import and Export > Import Templates
368
System
Edit Import Template
In the import templates, you can define the structure and save location of automated task, product, and sample
series imports.
1 Select the import template that you wish to edit.
2 Select [Edit Import Template] in the ribbon bar. The corresponding dialog is opened.
3 In the Settings tab, you specify the properties of the file to be imported and define, if required, the time inter
vals at which the imports are carried out. Specify the actions for handling the imported files.
4 In the Field Mapping tab, you specify the file type and the fields to be imported. The available fields are pre
defined.
Settings
Parameter
Import Settings
Name
Type
Automatic Import
Import interval
Value
Import File
Server import directory
File Extension
Import Success Action
Action
Renamed extension
Import Failure Action
Action
Renamed extension
Server log location
Explanation
Specifies the name of the import template.
Specifies the type of import template.
Defines the unit of time for the interval.
Specifies the value of the interval.
Specifies the path for the files to be imported.
Specifies the file extension of the files to be imported.
Specifies the action for further handling of the imported file.
Specifies the new file extension for the imported files.
Specifies the action for further handling of the imported file.
Specifies the new file extension for the imported files.
Specifies the path for the log files to be exported for errors.
Field Mapping
Parameter
File Type
Type
Column separator
Nested separator
Line break
File encoding
Header line in file
Fields in quotes
Field Mapping
Selected
Available
Explanation
Specifies whether the file is in CSV or XML format.
Specifies the column separator.
Specifies the nested column separator.
Specifies the characters used for a line break.
For CSV files, indicates whether UTF-8 or ASCII encoding is used.
For CSV files, defines whether the first line is a header line.
For CSV files, defines whether every field is contained in quotation marks.
Displays the selected elements. The sequence can be changed. Each item repre
sents the assignment of an element from the file to an element within LabX.
Position: Defines the position of the field. Not relevant for XML files.
Name in LabX: Specifies the name of the field as it appears in LabX.
Name in file: Specifies the expected name of the field. This must be identical with
this information.
Manual Value: Not used.
Format String: Not used.
Settings: Used for entering task parameters for sample series and products. These
are assigned to the method and the respective task parameter.
Displays all available elements within LabX when using CSV files.
System
369
Special items
Items
Task priority
Internal Method ID
User Name
Info Fields
Explanation
"True" if the task has a high priority, or "False" for normal priority.
The ID automatically assigned by the system that cannot be changed.
Corresponds to the name used for logging in.
Corresponds to the fields that can be updated by Labels.
See also
● Items for export and import templates (page 392)
9.5.3 Adding export templates
In the export templates, you can define the structure and save location of automated result, product, sample
series and melting point/range measurements exports.
Navigation: System > Import and Export > Export Templates
New Export Template
1 Select [New Export Template] in the ribbon bar and choose the type of setting. The corresponding dialog is
opened.
2 On the Settings tab you can define the name of the file to be exported and specify the intervals at which the
exports should be carried out. The file name may contain dynamic text fragments such as Instrument
name, User Name or Sample ID. To this end, select an appropriate placeholder from the drop-down list.
3 In the Field Mapping tab specify the file type and the fields to be imported. The available fields have a
structured format, but the groups are not exported in their entirety, rather the individual subordinate informa
tion units, such as Instrument serial number or Sample ID 1.
See also
● Editing methods (page 132)
● Editing export templates (page 370)
9.5.4 Editing export templates
In the export templates, you can define the structure and save location of automated result, product, sample
series and melting point/range measurements exports.
To run automated exports for results and melting point/range measurements, you need to select a matching
setting in the corresponding Export Templates of the method.
Products and sample series are exported manually.
Results
Products
Sample Series
Melting point/range
The data of a completed task are exported.
All products are exported with the folder structure.
All sample series are exported with the folder structure.
Videos and intensity curve data are exported.
Navigation: System > Import and Export > Export Templates
Edit Export Template
1 Select the export template that you wish to edit.
2 Select [Edit Export Template] in the ribbon bar and choose the type of template. The corresponding dialog
is opened.
3 On the Settings tab you can define the name of the file to be exported and specify the intervals at which the
exports should be carried out. The file name may contain dynamic text fragments such as Instrument
name, User Name or Sample ID. To this end, select an appropriate placeholder from the drop-down list.
4 In the Field Mapping tab specify the file type and the fields to be imported. The available fields have a
structured format, but the groups are not exported in their entirety, rather the individual subordinate informa
tion units, such as Instrument serial number or Sample ID 1.
370
System
Settings
Parameter
Export Settings
Name
Type
Export File
Server export directory
File name
Explanation
Specifies the name of the export template.
Specifies the type of export template.
Path to which files are exported.
Either specifies a fixed file name, or is set automatically when one or more fields
are selected from the drop-down list.
File Extension
Specifies the file extension of the files to be exported.
File Update (Only for results)
Update at end of task
Defines the type of update. Multiple selection is possible.
Update if task is paused
Update if task is stopped
Update at end of sample
Update after signing of
result set
Export only results 'OK'
Field Mapping
Parameter
File Type
Type
Write mode (Only for CSV
files)
Column separator
Nested separator
Line break
File encoding
Header line in file
Fields in quotes
Line layout (Only for
results)
Selected
Explanation
Specifies whether the file is in CSV or XML format.
Overwrite the existing file: Defines whether an existing file is overwritten during
export.
Append to file: The existing file is updated.
Specifies the column separator.
Specifies the nested column separator.
Specifies the characters used for a line break.
For CSV files, indicates whether UTF-8 or ASCII encoding is used.
For CSV files, determines whether the first line will contain a header line with the
field name.
For CSV files, defines whether every field is contained in quotation marks.
One line per result: One line is used for each result.
One line per sample: One line is used for each sample.
If this option is selected in conjunction with Export only results 'OK' only those
results with the status “OK” will be exported.
Displays the selected fields. The sequence can be changed. Each item represents
the assignment of a field from the file to a field within LabX.
When exporting results in XML format, all fields are always exported.
Available
Position: Defines the position of the field.
Name in LabX: Specifies the name of the field as it appears in LabX.
Name in file: Specifies the name of the field as it is exported. For XML files, this
cannot be changed.
Manual Value: If a Manual Value field is inserted, the value can be entered here.
Not available for XML files.
Format String: For certain fields, format identifiers can be entered here.
Settings: Used for entering task parameters for sample series and products. These
are assigned to the method and the respective task parameter. One item is
required for each task parameter.
Displays all available items within LabX. In the case of the export template for
results in XML format, all items are always populated.
System
371
See also
● Editing methods (page 132)
● Standard date and time formats (page 401)
● Standard number format character strings (page 402)
● Items for export and import templates (page 392)
9.6 SmartCodes
Encoded barcodes and RFID data (SmartSample) can be used to start the relevant methods in combination
with products or sample series. Barcode readers can be connected to instruments, InMotion sample changer or
to a PC. SmartSample readers are connected to InMotion sample changer.
To enter a barcode manually, LabX must be in the foreground. If a code can be applied to several SmartCodes,
LabX always chooses the most complex SmartCode.
For manual scanning, we recommend the use of a METTLER TOLEDO barcode reader. For optimum function,
we recommend the use "Code 128 - Code set B" barcode.
"Code set B" barcodes are used for alphanumeric data including both uppercase letters/capital letters and low
ercase letters, as well as the numbers 0-9, and punctuation marks. "Code set B" is very close to the full lower
128 ASCII character set.
Navigation: System > SmartCode
9.6.1 Adding SmartCodes
1 Select [New SmartCode] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
2 Enter the properties and check the expected string in Test.
3 Click [Save and Close].
See also
● Editing SmartCodes (page 372)
9.6.2 Editing SmartCodes
1 Select the required SmartCode in the table view.
2 Select [Open SmartCode] in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 Enter the properties and check the expected string in Test.
4 Click [Save and Close].
Parameter
SmartCodes
Explanation
Name Defines the name of the SmartCode.
Active Activates this SmartCode.
SmartCode Composition
Available items All available items, such as Method ID and Product ID are listed here. To add an
required item, double-click it or select it and click [Add].
Note The specific placeholders are required for unused components of the code.
Contained items All added items are listed here. The sequence of the items can be changed using
the arrow buttons. To delete an item, double-click it or select it and click
[Remove].
SmartCode Item
In this area, the item selected under SmartCode Composition is displayed and can be edited.
Item is active Individual items selected under SmartCode Composition can be activated or
deactivated. In the sequence, deactivated items are treated in the same way as if
they were not contained.
Name The name of the item selected under SmartCode Composition is shown.
372
System
Parameter
Explanation
Prefix Enter a prefix to be used for separation of the selected item. If the items have a
fixed length, no prefix is required. Prefixes from RFID reading use hyphen "-".
Length If the item has a fixed number of characters, enter the number of characters here.
SmartCode Validation
The validation of the selected parameters is displayed in this area.
Result Displays whether the validation is successful.
Expression Displays the selected parameter as a character string including the defined prefix
es or delimiters.
SmartCode Context
Here you define where a code is to be read.
Selection Automation: Enables an automation unit to perform barcode or RFID reading.
Instrument / Workbench: Enables barcode reading on the instrument or from the
workbench that is in the foreground.
Sample ID: Enables a barcode to be read when the user is requested to enter a
sample ID.
Task list: Enables searching for matches in the list of tasks that are queued. More
than one are shown if the pattern is fulfilled in these.
Test
This area is used for manual verification of the defined parameters.
SmartCode content Enter a character string to be verified via keyboard or use a barcode reader
attached to the PC to read a barcode.
Interpretation An interpretation of the character string to be checked is displayed here. The items
are listed in similar way as in Contained items.
Result Displays whether the code recognition is successful.
9.6.2.1 SmartCodes examples
Example 1
This code contains of two elements. The first element of this code needs a placeholder although it is not used
after the interpretation. The number of characters of the two elements of the code are variable as we are using
delimiters. We search for PET in the string, which defines the method ID.
● Code: P001-PET
● Searched item: Method ID
Elements
Placeholder
P001
Prefix
-
Method ID
PET
SmartCode definition
Contained items
Placeholder 1
Method ID
SmartCode Item
-
Prefix
Unused
Used
Length
Variable
Variable
Test
Interpretation
P0001
PET
Example 2
This code contains of three elements. The first and third elements of this code need a placeholder although they
are not used after the interpretation. The number of characters of the three elements of the code are variable as
we are using delimiters. We search for PET in the string, which defines the method ID.
● Code: P001-PET-21234
Elements
Placeholder
P001
Prefix
-
Method ID
PET
Prefix
-
Placeholder
21234
System
373
Contained items
Placeholder 1
Method ID
Placeholder 2
SmartCode Item
-
Prefix
Unused
Used
Used
Length
Variable
Variable
Variable
Test
Interpretation
P0001
PET
21234
Example 3
This code contains of three elements. The first and third elements of this code need a placeholder although they
are not used after the interpretation. The number of characters of the three elements of the code are fixed as we
are not using delimiters. We search for PET in the string, which defines the method ID.
● Code: P001PET21234
Elements
Placeholder
P001
Method ID
PET
Placeholder
21234
Contained items
Placeholder 1
Method ID
Placeholder 2
Prefix
SmartCode Item
Length
Unused
4
Fixed
Unused
3
Fixed
Unused
5
Fixed
Test
Interpretation
P0001
PET
21234
9.6.3 Importing and exporting SmartCodes
SmartCodes definitions can be exported or imported. This enables you to send SmartCode definitions to another
location, for example, by e-mail or using a data storage medium. The file extension .bcp is used for Smart
Codes.
Import SmartCode
1 Select [Import SmartCode] in the ribbon bar.
3 The SmartCode is displayed in the Editor and can be edited according to requirements.
The import process is not complete until the method has been saved.
Export SmartCode
1 Select the required SmartCode in the table view and click on [Export SmartCode] in the or ribbon bar.
The SmartCode is saved in the file system.
9.7 Managing schedules
Schedules are used to assign tasks to instruments and enter the tasks into the queues of the selected instru
ments. The list of tasks can be viewed in LabX; on instruments, these tasks do not appear until the set times
have been reached. Tasks that are set to "Auto start" can be assigned only to the one instrument and are started
as soon as the current task (if applicable) allows them to be.
Navigation: System > Schedules
9.7.1 Adding a schedule
Navigation: System > Methods
1 Select New Schedule in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
374
System
2 Select the desired method.
data.
See also "Editing a schedule" (page 375).
9.7.2 Editing a schedule
Navigation: System > Schedules
1 Select the desired schedule in the table view.
2 Select Open Schedule in the ribbon bar. An Editor window is opened.
data.
"Execution" tab
Parameters
Scheduling
Schedule Execu
tion
Time
Execution
Pattern
Explanation
Enter the name of the schedule and select a method. Activate automatic execution
Specifies whether the task should be an "Auto start" task and defines the priority.
A maximum of three times of the day can be defined.
Specifies the interval and whether execution should occur once or multiple times.
The pattern of repetitions can be modified, depending on the interval settings.
Instruments and Users tab
Parameters
User
Roles
Explanation
In addition to users, you can also assign roles. The assignment is performed cumulatively
between users and roles.
Instruments
One schedule can be assigned to multiple instruments. Tasks are listed for all selected
instruments.
Executing Instru "Auto start" tasks must be assigned to one instrument.
ments
Note
System
375
10 Data Backup
All documents stored on a PC must be backed up regularly. Backup means that your files and programs are
copied to another storage medium. Data backup can be done in a number of different ways using different stor
age media.
It makes particular sense to save the copied data to a physically separate location from the original data, e.g. a
different disk or even on a different computer. This reduces the risk of data loss caused by failure of a storage
medium. Centralized data backup is particularly important on a network. It is essential that one person is desig
nated as being responsible for the routine backup of data. This includes setting up automated backups.
10.1 Database backup
LabX data are organized and stored in an SQL server database. To save or manage a LabX database, you can
use either third-party data backup software or the "LabX DB Maintenance" program. The latter is recommended
if only a simple form of data backup is required. If LabX is installed on a dedicated SQL server, the IT depart
ment will usually determine which tools are used for database administration.
A scheduled backup strategy is vital for sensitive data. For example, the data could be backed up at regular
intervals of a few hours or even minutes. However, this is not possible with the tools supplied. To achieve this
level of data safety, it will be necessary to consult professional database administrators.
Hints
● In order to prevent data loss, any manipulation of the database should be performed only by a specialist
from the IT department.
10.2 LabX DB Maintenance
With the LabX 2014 DB Maintenance application, you are able to create a data backup routine manually for
the database or restore a database from an existing backup. The database can be restored to its initial state. All
data will be deleted in the process. Archives can be created and published for viewing.
Launching DB maintenance
– Under Windows, select Start > Programs > METTLER TOLEDO > LabX 2014 >LabX 2014 DB Mainte
nance
376
Data Backup
Parameter
Database Server
Database
Published
Archive Data
Explanation
Displays information about the database server in use.
Displays the database installed, the last backup and the version history.
Displays the currently published archive.
Note
● To enable connection to the LabX database, LabX 2014 DB Maintenance must be started on the PC host
ing the database server.
● With the standard installation, the connection to the LabX database can be established only by a user who
has local administrator rights and also belongs to the database administrators group.
10.2.1 Automating data backup
The database backup can be automated using the Windows function "Scheduled Tasks" and the LabX 2014
DB Maintenance program. This enables you to execute the backup at regular intervals, for example every
evening at 7 p.m.
1 Open the "Control Panel" in Windows and double-click on [Scheduled Tasks].
2 Double-click on [Add Scheduled Task]. The "Scheduled Task Assistant" will appear.
3 You must indicate the path to the "LabX DB Maintenance" program component. You can find this program
component under: C:\Program Files\METTLER TOLEDO\LabX 2014\LabXDBMaintenance.exe.
4 In the advanced settings, add the backup parameter, the target directory and the name of the backup file to
be created to the command line, e.g.:
"C:\Program Files\METTLER TOLEDO\LabX 2014\LabXDBMaintenance.exe" -backup "z:\mybackup.bak"
-backup
This is the parameter for a data backup.
z:\mybackup.bak
This is the target path for the data backup. The target directory
must exist, the user under whose name the scheduled task is
being run must have write permission.
Data Backup
377
Note
● For the LabX database backups, please use a network drive that is also backed up at regular intervals by
the IT department.
● Always enter the path details in quotation marks (").
● If the backup fails, check the log file of LabX 2014 DB Maintenance for detailed information.
10.2.2 Performing a manual data backup
In a manual data backup, you are prompted to enter a path and file name for the backup file. You must have
the appropriate write authorization for the specified target directory.
1 Start LabX 2014 DB Maintenance.
2 Select [Backup Database] in the ribbon bar.
The backup file has been saved.
Note
● The process can take several minutes.
10.2.3 Restoring a database
Restoring a database must be well thought out and prepared in advance. The current database is overwritten as
part of this process. Before you perform the following action, we strongly recommend that you always save
your data in order to prevent loss of data.
Stop the LabX Service (PC clients, instrument clients and API clients).
1 Stop the LabXHostService 2014 service in Windows task manager. Wait until the service has actually
stopped.
2 Start LabX 2014 DB Maintenance
3 Select [Restore Database] in the ribbon bar.
5 After successful restoration, close LabX 2014 DB Maintenance.
6 Restart the LabXHostService 2014 service.
As soon as the service has been restarted, LabX is ready for operation.
Note
● Before performing a database restore, stop the LabX Service (PC clients, instrument clients, API clients)
● The name of the database cannot be changed.
10.2.4 Initialize a database
A database initialization irrevocably deletes all data in the LabX database that has been created since the instal
lation of LabX. Before you perform the following action, we strongly recommend that you always save your
data in order to prevent loss of data. The following steps must always be adhered to:
Stop the LabX Service (PC clients, instrument clients and API clients).
1 Stop the LabXHostService 2014 service in Windows task manager. Wait until the service has actually
stopped.
3 Select [Initialize Database] in the ribbon bar.
4 After successful initialization, close LabX 2014 DB Maintenance.
5 Restart the LabXHostService 2014 service.
As soon as the service has been restarted, LabX is ready for operation.
378
Data Backup
Note
● Before performing a database initialization, ensure that no LabX clients remain open (PC clients, instrument
clients, API clients)
● The name of the database cannot be changed.
10.2.5 Creating an archive
An archive is a data backup file that is created before data is deleted from the database.
When an archive is created, a data backup is performed with subsequent purging of past data for results,
reports and the audit trail. All other data, such as methods, resources and users, are left intact.
You can define the time at which the purging of past data should begin. The time taken for the archive file to be
created depends on the size of the database.
2 Select [New Archive] in the ribbon bar. The relevant dialog appears.
3 Define the date on which the purging of past data should begin. Enter a meaningful name for the archive.
A data backup is performed with subsequent purging of past data.
Note
● The file is saved in a backup directory on the SQL server.
● Please ensure that archive files are backed up.
● The purging process may take several hours.
● The performance of LabX may be affected by the purging process. The demands on the database may result
in timeouts. Archiving should therefore be performed at an appropriate time.
10.2.6 Publishing an archive
Publishing an archive makes it possible to view its contents on the LabX client. Files that were saved by the
"New Archive" function can be selected directly from a list.
2 Select [Publish Archive] in the ribbon bar. The relevant dialog appears.
3 Select an archive from the list.
- or Click [File] and select a data backup file.
The archive or data backup file can be viewed in LabX.
Note
● A published archive will not be displayed until the LabX client has been restarted.
● You can publish any archived LabX backup files of your choice, regardless of which version of LabX they
were created by. This must have been generated with the Backup Database or New Archive function.
10.2.7 Displaying an archive
Published archives can be viewed on LabX clients.
The following data of a published archive can be viewed in LabX:
● Results
● Reports
● Audit Trail
When a search folder is displayed, you can toggle between the active database and the archive. To do this,
select the desired database on the Groups toolbar. To display the desired archive data, you need to create the
appropriate search folder.
Data Backup
379
Note
You can create new reports from the archive data. These are saved in the active database.
380
Data Backup
11 Appendix
11.1 Quick Guide
11.1.1 Where to find Information
● The Quick Guide enables you to quickly become familiar with the basic operation of LabX.
● E-learning videos on many different topics are available on the LabX Quick Start window and at
www.mt.com/LabX.
● The context-sensitive Help integrated in LabX provides a complete description of all components and mod
ules, and a detailed description of all method functions and parameters.
● The context-sensitive help is accessed via the question mark in the upper right-hand corner of the appropri
ate title bar, or using the F1 key on the PC keyboard. A help button is also sometimes provided in dialog
boxes.
11.1.2 Log on to LabX
1 Start LabX. Select Start > All Programs > METTLER TOLEDO >LabX 2014 > LabX 2014
- or double-click on the shortcut [LabX 2014] on the desktop.
The login dialog only appears if user management is activated.
2 On a newly installed system, the standard administrator "PredefinedUser" is created and shown under User
Name. Without entering a password, click on [OK].
LabX is started.
11.1.3 The LabX User Interface
By default, the “Quick Start” window is displayed whenever LabX is started unless you check the option for it not
to be shown at startup. This window contains several buttons which allow fast access to central functions.
Appendix
381
If the window is not displayed, click on the LabX button and select [Quick Start]. The window opens.
382
Appendix
1
Designation
LabX Button
2
Ribbon bar
3
Folder list
4
5
Navigation pane
Status bar
6
Reading pane
Description
Under this button you will find various menu options for the general settings
and for activating the software.
Different groups of folder objects are displayed here depending on the
workspace selected in the navigation pane.
Folders shown are displayed depending on the workspace you select here.
The status bar displays the status of the connection, logged-in users and
number of clients. Connected instruments are also counted as clients.
The contents of the object selected in the folder list are displayed in the read
ing pane.
7
Designation
Context menu
8
Table view
9
Shortcuts
10
Links
11
Help
Description
Like the ribbon bar, a context menu (right-click) contains commands. The
commands in the context menu vary depending on the object currently
selected so that only relevant commands are available.
When you select an object in the folder list, the contents are displayed in
table format.
This area displays all the shortcuts for the current user. These shortcuts are
each assigned to an instrument.
Various objects are available as links, which are structured according to top
ic. Links are direct jumps to predefined search folders. The filters can be
edited (and renamed), but cannot be deleted.
The context-sensitive help is accessed via the question mark in the upper
right-hand corner of the title bar or by using the Help button in dialog boxes.
11.1.4 Connecting a Balance (RS)
Perform the necessary steps on a balance model from the METTLER TOLEDO line of "Excellence" balances to
link it to LabX.
Configuring the RS interface of the balance
1 To call up the system settings, press the key and then the [System] button. The System window will be
displayed.
3 Under LabX choose RS232 built-in > Define. We recommend that you use the default parameters.
4 Exit the settings and click on [Online] on the home screen.
You will find additional information for the configuration of the Ethernet interface in the LabX Online Help.
Adding the balance in LabX
Connect the instrument to a serial interface, e.g. COM1 on the PC.
1 On the Quick Start window, click on [New Instrument]. The wizard is displayed, which guides you step-bystep through the required settings.
2 Select Balance. Then click on [Next].
3 Select the link type Serial connection. Then click on [Next].
4 Select the PC (instrument server) to which the instrument is connected. Then click on [Next]. This selection
is only displayed if multiple instrument servers are installed.
5 Select the connection relevant to the instrument. Then click on [Next].
when several are connected. Then click on [Finish].
Appendix
383
The instrument has been added.
11.1.5 Connecting a Quantos (Ethernet)
Quantos is operated via two Ethernet interfaces. One interface is located in the balance and is used to commu
nicate with LabX. The second interface is located in the Quantos Server that controls the communication
between LabX and the sample changer. You will find details about the Quantos Server settings in the documen
tation provided with the server.
Configuring the Ethernet interface of the balance
1 To call up the system settings, press the key and then the [System] button. The System window will be
displayed.
Configuring the global settings of the balance
displayed.
Adding the Quantos to LabX
1 Connect the instrument to a network connection.
2 On the Quick Start window, click on [New Instrument]. The assistant is displayed, which guides you stepby-step through the required settings.
3 Select Quantos. Then click on [Next].
4 Select the link type Ethernet. Then click on [Next].
6 Enter the connection settings of the balance and the Quantos server. Then click on [Next].
384
Appendix
11.1.6 Connecting an Instrument (Ethernet)
Perform the necessary steps on a compatible instrument to connect it to LabX.
Configuring the Ethernet interface of the instrument
tings.
Adding the instrument in LabX
1 Connect the instrument to a network connection.
2 On the Quick Start window, click on [New Instrument]. The assistant is displayed, which guides you stepby-step through the required settings.
3 Select an instrument and click on [Next].
4 Select the link type Ethernet. Then click on [Next].
6 Enter your chosen connection settings for the instrument. Then click on [Next].
11.1.7 Creating a Method
In order to conduct an analysis using an instrument, you need a method. A number of method templates are
included and available to you in LabX. You can modify the method templates according to your own specifica
tions and save them as user methods.
1 On the Quick Start window, click [New Method] and select the relevant instrument type. All available
method templates are displayed.
Appendix
385
2 Select an appropriate template and click on [Open]. The Method Editor is opened with the selected tem
plate.
3 Enter a method ID and name of your choice in the Method tab. Choose unique and informative names for
methods so that they are easily identifiable.
4 Select the method function in the graphic editor and click on the [Parameters] tab. The parameters are dis
played.
5 Change the parameters so that they are all correct, then click on [Save and Close].
The method is saved and can be executed on an instrument.
The Library tab contains all the available method functions, which can be dragged into the graphical editor
using Drag&Drop.
Note
● If a mandatory field is not completed or the value in a field is outside limits, this is indicated by a red excla
mation mark. Clicking on an exclamation mark displays the associated information.
11.1.8 Starting the Method
1 Log on to the instrument with a LabX user account. The corresponding home screen is displayed.
386
Appendix
2 Tap on [Analysis] or [Methods / Products] and then on [Methods]. The list of methods is displayed.
3 Tap on the method you have just created and follow the instructions on the screen.
4 Perform the analysis using suitable substances or weights.
The analysis has been performed and the results can be seen in LabX.
Balance and Quantos home screen
Exit
Analysis
Tasks
Shortcuts
Logout
Lock Screen
Offline
You use this button to log out of LabX.
Activates the screen lock.
Switches to offline mode, so that the balance can be used
without LabX.
Methods
A method is an analysis program that consists of a
sequence of method functions.
Products
Products are always linked to one or more methods, and
multiple products may be linked to the same method.
Series
A series is used as a starting point for several tasks.
The task list shows tasks that are currently in the queue and tasks that are currently running.
Shortcuts enable you to start methods, products or sample series directly from the home
screen. Shortcuts are identified by a small arrow.
Appendix
387
LiquiPhysics home screen
Exit
Methods /
Products
Series
Results
Manual
Tasks
Shortcuts
388
Appendix
Logout
Lock Screen
Offline
Switches to offline mode, so that the instrument can be
used without LabX.
Methods
Products
For starting tasks involving multiple samples.
The results of your analyses are displayed here.
With the help of the manual operations, you may call up various functions of the instrument
that are independent of the immediate execution of an analysis but which for example, may
be helpful during the preparation of the samples.
Shortcuts enable you to start methods, products or sample series or manual operations
directly from the home screen. These are identified by a small arrow.
Home screen Titration
Exit
Start
SmartCodes
User data
Methods
Series
Results
Setup
Manual
Tasks
Shortcuts
Logout
Lock Screen
Offline
used without LabX.
To start the last used analysis or the defined default method.
Start a task, using SmartCodes in connection with an InMotion sample changer and RFID
reader or barcode scanner.
Information on the logged in user.
A method is an analysis program that consists of a sequence of method functions.
The results of your analyses are displayed here.
Find the options for setting up the instrument according to your requirements.
You can use manual operations to access various titrator functions that are not directly con
nected to the execution of an analysis, but that might be useful during the sample prepara
tion, for example.
Appendix
389
Home screen Thermal Values
Exit
Logout
Lock Screen
Offline
Analysis
Adjustment
Manual
Task
Shortcuts
used without LabX.
Methods
Products
Series
In order to perform an adjustment, at least two analyses must be available that were carried
out using reference substances. The appropriate analyses for performing a manual adjust
ment can be selected.
Manual operations can be used to set the furnace temperature and to switch the temperature
control on or off. A live video from inside the furnace can also be displayed.
11.1.9 Displaying the Result
1 Click on [Data] in the navigation pane. The results folder structure is displayed in the folder list.
2 Within the folder structure, click on [Results] and then on [My Latest Results]. The result of the analysis is
displayed in the list.
In the title bar, you can change the column width. When you click on a column header, the column is
sorted according to the selected column. If you click on the column header again, the sort order is
reversed.
3 Select the result and select [Open Result] within the menu bar.
The result is displayed in the Results Editor.
390
Appendix
Data pane
Object
Results
Result Sets
Reports
Explanation
If a Sample Scope method function was used in a method, an entry is displayed
for each sample processed.
You will find one entry for each task processed. Click on Result Sets to open the
display of the individual results.
If a Reports method function was used in a method, the corresponding entries will
be displayed for each task processed.
Reports can also be created at a later time. Reports that contain the system con
figuration or audit trail, for example, are also displayed here.
Displaying additional results
It is possible to show results directly in the table view by displaying additional columns.
1 Select the appropriate search folder.
2 Select [Edit Result Columns] in the menu bar. An Editor window is opened.
3 For referencing, the names entered as the title in the Results method function are used. To this end, select
the required result from the drop-down list.
The additional column is displayed in the table view for the selected search folder only.
11.1.10 Generating a Report
1. Creating a report template
1 In the navigation pane, click on [System] and then on [Report Templates].
2 Select [New Report Template] in the menu bar. Select an appropriate template and click on [Report
Editor]. The Editor is opened with the selected template.
To integrate a company's logo into the templates, select Configuration > Logo and enter the path to a
compatible graphic format. The graphic must be in JPG, BMP, GIF or PNG format.
The option to show or hide separate sections and their contents individually is provided in the Configu
ration tab.
The headings of the sections can also be adapted in the Configuration tab by overwriting the specified
"names".
3 In the Properties tab, enter any name and click on [Save and Close].
Appendix
391
2. Generating a report
1 In the navigation pane, click on [Data]. The results folder structure is displayed in the folder list.
2 Within the folder structure, click on [Results] and then on [My Latest Results].
3 Select the result and select [New Task Report] within the ribbon bar. Select the new Report Template. The
Report Editor is opened with the selected template.
4 In the Properties tab, enter any name and click on [Save and Close].
The report can be viewed under Data > Reports.
11.2 Items for export and import templates
Result set
Items
Sample ID
task
Methods
Product
User
Result set
Result
Text
Selection
Number
Not used
Line Counter
Manual Value
Explanation
Contains the sample IDs used for the analysis.
Contains the properties used for the task.
Contains the properties used for the method.
Contains the properties used for the product.
Contains user-specific properties.
Corresponds to the status of the result set.
Contains result and instrument properties.
Corresponds to the text from the “Text” method function and the instrument proper
ties.
Corresponds to the selection from the "Selection" method function and the instru
ment properties.
Corresponds to the number from the "Number" method function and the instru
ment properties.
Inserts a column as a placeholder.
Each line in the export file is numbered.
A free text can be entered that is exported once for each line.
Melting point/range measurements (for Thermal Values)
Items
Transmitted light videos /
Reflected light videos
Intensity curve data
Explanation
Video pairs of the analyses are exported in AVI format.
Intensity curves of all capillaries in analyses are exported as CSV files.
Products
Items
Product ID
Product name
Product internal ID
Product description
Info Fields
392
Appendix
Explanation
Contains the product IDs used.
Contains the names entered.
Contains the LabX internal product IDs.
Contains the product descriptions.
Corresponds to the fields that can be updated by “Labels”.
Items
Task Parameters
Not used
Line Counter
Manual Value
Explanation
Corresponds to the task parameters of one or more referenced methods. For each
task parameter of the method to be referenced, the individual items of “Task
Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, one column per task parameter
will be created in the file, or exported, for each linked method.
Each line in the export file is numbered.
A free text can be entered that is exported once for each line.
Sample series
Items
Sample series ID
Sample series name
Sample series comment
Internal method ID
Info Fields
Sample ID
Product internal ID
Global task parameters
Task Parameters
Not used
Instrument internal ID
Task name
User Name
Task priority
Explanation
Contains the sample series IDs used.
Contains the sample series names entered.
Contains the sample series comments entered.
Corresponds to the fields that can be updated by “Labels”.
Contains the sample IDs.
Corresponds to the global task parameters of one or more referenced methods.
For each global task parameter of the method to be referenced, the individual
items of “Global Task Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, one col
umn per global task parameter will be created in the file, or exported, for each
linked method.
task parameter of the method to be referenced, the individual items of “Task
Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, one column per task parameter
will be created in the file, or exported, for each linked method.
Contains the LabX internal instrument IDs.
task
Items
Task name
Internal method ID
User Name
Sample series ID
Instrument internal ID
Task priority
Sample ID
Product internal ID
Global task parameters
Task Parameters
Not used
Explanation
Contains the sample series ID used.
Contains the LabX internal instrument ID.
Contains the sample IDs.
Corresponds to the global task parameters of one or more referenced methods.
For each method to be referenced manually, the individual items of “Global Task
Parameters” need to be inserted. Based on these, additional columns for the glob
al task parameters will be exported for each linked method.
method to be referenced manually, the individual items of “Task Parameters” need
to be inserted. Based on these, additional columns for the task parameters will be
exported for each linked method.
Appendix
393
11.3 Applicable operators
Operators
Operator short Operator
form
*
Multiplication
/
Division
Application
List=List * individual value or
List=Single value * list
List=List / single value
List=Single value / list
DIV
Division with
remainder
List=List DIV single value
List=Single value DIV list
%
Modulo
List=list % single value
List=Single value % list
+
Addition
List=List + single value or
List=Single value + list
-
Subtraction
List=List - single value
List=Single value - list
Each item in the list is multiplied by the
single value. A list containing the same
number of items is returned.
Each item in the list is divided by the sin
gle value. A list containing the same num
ber of items is returned.
The single value is divided by every item of
the list value. A list containing the same
number of items as input variables is
returned.
Each item in the list is divided by the sin
gle value. A list containing the same num
ber of items is returned.
The single value is divided by every item of
the list value. A list containing the same
returned.
Each item in the list is calculated using the
number of items is returned.
The single value is calculated using every
item of the list value. A list containing the
same number of items as input variables
is returned.
Each item in the list is added to the single
value. A list containing the same number
of items as input variables is returned.
The single value is subtracted from every
item in the list. A list containing the same
returned.
Each item in the list is subtracted from the
returned.
11.4 Applicable functions
Functions
Operator short Functions
form
firstdefined
This function returns the first
defined argument, starting from
the first argument from the left.
There can be any number of
arguments.
Concatenate
The "concatenate" function joins
all arguments in a list together.
There can be any number of
arguments.
Sqrt
Square root
Ln
Natural logarithm
Log
Common logarithm
394
Appendix
Application
a = firstdefined(zero; zero; 1; 2; 3)
in this case, a is 1.
a = [1;2;3;4;5]
b = 99
x = concatenate (a;b)
x = [1;2;3;4;5;99]
Single value=sqrt(single value), List=sqrt(list)
Single value=ln(single value), List=ln(list)
Single value=log(single value), List=log(list)
Operator short
form
inv
abs
Mean
SD
SDn-1
min
Max
RSD
Functions
Application
Single value=inv(single value), List=inv(list)
Single value=abs(single value), List=abs(list)
Single value=mean(single value), Single value=mean(list)
Single value=SD(list)
Single value=SDn-1(list)
Single value=min(single value), Single value=min(list)
Single value=max(single value), Single value=max(list)
Single value=RSD(List)
Count
Median
Inverse
Data Area
Average
Standard deviation
Standard deviation n-1
Minimum value
Maximum value
Relative standard deviation
based on the standard devia
tion SD.
Relative standard deviation
based on the standard devia
tion SDn-1.
Quantity
Median
sum
range
SLOPE
Intersect
Pow
Sum
Pane
Slope
Intersection
Potential
Logb
Logarithm to the base
ND
Normal distribution based on
the standard deviation SD.
Normal distribution based on
the standard deviation SDn-1.
For the calculation of trends, a
linear regression is applied. A
regression line is calculated
based on the present values.
The searched value is on this
line.
Counts all elements between
the lower and upper limits.
In a value table, values that are
used for the conversion of
results are arranged as value
pairs. The single value parame
ter is interpolated in accordance
with the selected setting in the
value table. Also see "Manag
ing value tables" (page 354).
RSDn-1
NDn-1
Trend
BinRange
vt
Single value=RSDn-1(list)
Single value=count(single value), Single value=count(list)
Single value=median(single value), Single
value=median(list)
Single value=sum(single value), Single value=sum(list)
Single value=range(list)
Single value=Slope(yList; xList)
Single value=Intersect(yList; xList)
Single value=Pow(single value; single value),
List=Pow(List; single value)
Single value=Logb(single value; single value),
List=Logb(List; single value)
Single value=ND(List; x)
Single value=NDn-1(List; x)
Single value=Trend(yList; xList; xSingle value)
Single value=BinRange(lowerLimit; upperLimit; List)
Single value=vt( 'valueReferenceTableName'; single value)
11.5 Global variables
Variables
SampleId1
SampleId2
SampleId3
SampleId4
SampleId5
SampleId6
Description
The sample ID 1
The sample ID 2
The sample ID 3
The sample ID 4
The sample ID 5
The sample ID 6
Modul
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Appendix
395
Variables
TaskInternalId
TaskName
TaskResponsibleName
TaskResponsibleFullName
MethodInternalId
MethodName
IsMethodExecutableOnBlockedInstrument
MethodComment
IsAdjustmentMethod
IsCalibrationMethod
InstrumentName
InstrumentSerialNumber
InstrumentCategory
InstrumentModel
IsInstrumentBlockedByDateExpiration
IsInstrumentBlockedByMethod
IsInstrumentUnblockedByUser
ButtonOk
ButtonCancel
Ok
NotOk
Uncertain
True
False
ProductInternalId
ProductId
ProductName
ProductLabel1
ProductLabel2
ProductLabel3
ProductLabel4
ProductLabel5
ProductLabel6
SampleSerieId
SampleSerieInternalId
SampleSerieName
SampleSerieLabel1
SampleSerieLabel2
SampleSerieLabel3
SampleSerieLabel4
SampleSerieLabel5
SampleSerieLabel6
MaxNumberOfSamples
WeighBridgeSerialNumber
WeighBridgeSoftwareNumber
WeighBridgeSoftwareVersion
TerminalSerialNumber
396
Appendix
Description
The system internal task ID
The name of the task
The name of the responsible user
The fullname of the responsible user
The system internal method ID
The name of the method
Method is: Can run on blocked instru
ments
The comment of the method
Method is of type: Adjustment analysis
Method is of type: Calibration method
The name of the instrument
Instrument's serial number
Instrument's category
Instrument's model
Instrument is blocked for the following rea
son: Expiry date
son: Method
son: Users
The button "OK" variable
The button "Cancel" variable
The "OK" variable
The "not OK" variable
The uncertain variable
The "true" variable
The "false" variable
The system internal product ID variable
The product ID variable
The product name variable
The product label 1 variable
The sample series ID
The sample series internal ID
The name of the sample series
The sample series label 1
The maximum number of samples for the
current scope
Serial number of the weigh bridge
Software number of the weigh bridge
Software version of the weigh bridge
Serial number of the terminal
Modul
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Platform
Balance
Balance
Balance
Balance
Variables
TerminalSoftwareNumber
TerminalSoftwareVersion
QuantosSrvSerialNumber
QuantosSrvSoftwareNumber
DosingUnitSerialNumber
DosingUnitModel
HeadTypeSolid
HeadTypeLiquid
InclinometerStateLeveled
InclinometerStateNotLeveled
InclinometerStateNotAvailable
InclinometerStateMalfunction
InclinometerStateUndefined
MinWeighStateViolated
MinWeighStateNotViolated
MinWeighStateUndefined
AnalysisStatusOk
AnalysisStatusInterrupted
AnalysisStatusStopped
AnalysisStatusInterruptedAndStopped
TestStatusPassed
TestStatusFailed
CapillaryStatusIncluded
CapillaryStatusExcluded
CapillaryStatusEmpty
Description
Software number of the terminal
Software version of the terminal
Serial number of the QuantosServer
Software number of the QuantosServer
Serial number of the dosing unit
Model of the dosing unit
Constant for solid dosing head
Constant for liquid dosing head
Constant for inclinometer state: leveled
Constant for inclinometer state: not leveled
Constant for inclinometer state: not avail
able
Constant for inclinometer state: malfunc
tion
Constant for inclinometer state: undefined
Constant for MinWeigh state: violated
Constant for MinWeigh state: not violated
Constant for MinWeigh state: undefined
The analysis status "OK" variable
The analysis status "interrupted" variable
The analysis status "stopped" variable
The analysis status "interrupted and
stoppe"d variable
The test status "passed" variable
The test status "failed" variable
The capillary status "included" variable
The capillary status "excluded" variable
The capillary status "empty" variable
Modul
Balance
Balance
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Quantos
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
Thermal Values
11.6 Data markings
Data markings
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Parameter
Modified
Excluded
Outside limits
Resource expired
srel above max. srel
srel above srel for multi
ple determination
Value outside limits
Sample data outside lim
its
Standard evaluation
used
Result from buffer
Service is due
Sample spoiled
Measurement(s) deleted
Reset performed
Termination due to error
Sample suspended
Explanation
This value has been modified
This value has been excluded
This value it outside the defined limits
This resource has expired
The srel is above the defined limits
The srel is above the defined limits for multiple determination
This value is outside the defined limits
This value is outside the defined limits
A standard evaluation has been used for calculation
Result exchanged via result buffer of the titrator
The service for this instrument is due
The sample was spoiled and will not be used for further analysis
Marked measurements are deleted
A reset on the instrument has been performed
A termination due to an error occurred
This sample has been suspended
Appendix
397
Index
17
18
19
20
22
23
Parameter
Data compression on
instrument occurred
Intermediate data
New result
Sample skipped
New (Manual)
New (Reevaluated)
Explanation
Measured values were compressed
Temporary data that has not yet been saved
The result was added after analysis by recalculation
The sample was skipped by user interaction
New EQP was added by user in reevaluation
Titration curve was reevaluated by the defined evaluation and recognition
parameters
11.7 Determination type
These types are shown in the list views of Results or Result Sets.
Determination type
None*
Multiple*
Measurement
Good Weighing Practice
Test
Adjustment
Clean
Balance
Quantos
Titration
LiquiPhysics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
GT sample determination
Titer determination
Sensor Calibration
pH sensor test
Concentration determi
nation
Blank determination
Drift determination
KF sample determination
Manual Operation
Adjustment
Clean
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* Only appear in Result Sets
● None: If no samples are configured to be handled in the method.
● (multiple): If more than one and different determination types are present in the result set.
11.8 User-defined date and time formats
Format identifier for date and time formats
Format identi Description
fier
d
The day of the month, from 1 to 31.
Example
6/1/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 1
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 15
dd
The day of the month, from 01 to 31.
6/1/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 01
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 15
ddd
The abbreviated name for the day of the
week
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
398
Appendix
Thermal Val
ues
•
•
•
•
fier
dddd
The full name for the day of the week
Example
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
f
ff
fff
The tenth of a second in a date and time
value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617 -> 6
The hundredth of a second in a date and
time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617 -> 61
The millisecond in a date and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617 -> 617
6/15/2009 13:45:30.050 -> 0
6/15/2009 13:45:30.005 -> 00
6/15/2009 13:45:30.0005 -> 000
ffff
fffff
ffffff
The ten-thousandth of a second in a date
and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.6175 -> 6175
The hundred-thousandth of a second in a
date and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.61754 -> 61754
The millionth of a second in a date and
time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617542 -> 617542
6/15/2009 13:45:30.00005 -> 0000
6/15/2009 13:45:30.000005 -> 00000
6/15/2009 13:45:30.0000005 -> 000000
fffffff
The ten-millionth of a second in a date and 6/15/2009 13:45:30.6175425 -> 6175425
time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.0001150 -> 0001150
F
If not zero, the tenth of a second in a date
and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617 -> 6
If not zero, the hundredth of a second in a
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617 -> 61
If not zero, the millisecond in a date and
time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617 -> 617
FF
FFF
6/15/2009 13:45:30.050 -> (no output)
6/15/2009 13:45:30.005 -> (no output)
6/15/2009 13:45:30.0005 -> (no output)
FFFF
If not zero, the ten-thousandth of a second 6/1/2009 13:45:30.5275 -> 5275
in a date and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.00005 -> (no output)
FFFFF
If not zero, the hundred-thousandth of a
second in a date and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.61754 -> 61754
If not zero, the millionth of a second in a
6/15/2009 13:45:30.617542 -> 617542
FFFFFF
6/15/2009 13:45:30.000005 -> (no output)
6/15/2009 13:45:30.0000005 -> (no output)
FFFFFFF
If not zero, the ten-millionth of a second in 6/15/2009 13:45:30.6175425 -> 6175425
a date and time value.
6/15/2009 13:45:30.0001150 -> 000115
g, gg
h
The period or time frame.
The hour from 0 to 11 when using a
12-hour display.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> A.D.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 AM -> 1
12-hour display.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 AM -> 01
24-hour display.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 AM -> 1
24-hour display.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 AM -> 01
hh
H
HH
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 1
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 01
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 13
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 13
Appendix
399
fier
m
The minute from 0 to 59.
Example
6/15/2009 1:09:30 AM -> 9
6/15/2009 1:09:30 PM -> 9
mm
The minute from 00 to 59.
6/15/2009 1:09:30 AM -> 09
6/15/2009 1:09:30 PM -> 09
M
MM
MMM
The month from 1 to 12.
The month from 01 to 12.
The abbreviated name of the month.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 6
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 06
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
MMMM
The full name of the month.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
s
ss
t
The second from 0 to 59.
The second from 00 to 59.
The first character in the AM/PM tag.
6/15/2009 1:45:09 PM -> 9
6/15/2009 1:45:09 PM -> 09
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> P (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> (fr-FR)
tt
The AM/PM tag.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> PM (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> (fr-FR)
y
The year from 0 to 99.
1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 1
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 0
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 0
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 9
yy
The year from 00 to 99.
1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 01
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 00
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 00
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 09
yyy
The year, with a minimum of three digits.
1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 001
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 900
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 1900
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 2009
yyyy
The year as a four-digit number.
1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 0001
1/1/0900 12:00:00 AM -> 0900
1/1/1900 12:00:00 AM -> 1900
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 2009
yyyyy
The year as a five-digit number.
1/1/0001 12:00:00 AM -> 00001
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 02009
z
zz
zzz
400
Appendix
Hour offset from UTC, without preceding
zeros.
Hour offset from UTC, with one preceding
zero for a single-digit value.
Offset from UTC in hours and minutes.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -07:00 -> -7
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -07:00 -> -07
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -07:00 -> -07:00
fier
:
The time delimiter.
Example
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> : (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> . (it-IT)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> : (ja-JP)
/
The date delimiter.
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> / (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> - (ar-DZ)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> . (tr-TR)
11.9 Standard date and time formats
Standard format character strings use format labels to define how text is displayed. Any date and time format
character string that contains more than one character (including space characters) is interpreted as a userdefined format character string for date and time.
Format identifier for date and time formats
fier
d
Short date format
Example
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2009 (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 15/06/2009 (fr-FR)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 2009/06/15 (jaJP)
D
Long date format
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> Monday, June 15,
2009 (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> Montag, 15. Juni
2009 (de-DE)
g
General date/time format (short time)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2009 1:45
PM (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 15/06/2009 13:45
(es-ES)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 2009/6/15 13:45
(zh-CN)
G
General date/time format (long time)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 6/15/2009 1:45:30
PM (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 15/06/2009
13:45:30 (es-ES)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 2009/6/15
13:45:30 (zh-CN)
s
t
Sortable date/time format, according to ISO 6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM ->
8601
2009-06-15T13:45:30
Short time format
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45 PM (en-US)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 13:45 (hr-HR)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 01:45 ‫( م‬ar-EG)
T
Long time format
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 1:45:30 PM (enUS)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 13:45:30 (hr-HR)
6/15/2009 1:45:30 PM -> 01:45:30 ‫( م‬ar-EG)
Appendix
401
11.10 User-defined time and date functions
Time and date functions
Function
year(timeSpan)
month(timeSpan)
day(timeSpan)
hour(timeSpan)
minute(timeSpan)
second(timeSpan)
time(hour;minute;second)
date
time(day;month;year;hour;
minute;second)
date(day;month;year)
now()
today()
Description
This function returns the time span in years based on 365 days.
The function can be used to add a time span in years to a date that is creat
ed using the following functions:
now(), today(), datetime(...), date(...)
This function returns the time span in months based on 30 days.
The function can be used to add a time span in months to a date that is cre
ated using the following functions:
This function returns the time span in days.
The function can be used to add a time span in days to a date that is creat
ed using the following functions:
This function returns the time in hours.
The function can be used to add a time in hours to a date or a time that is
created using the following functions:
now(), today(), datetime(...), time(...), date(...)
This function returns the time in minutes.
The function can be used to add a time in minutes to a date or a time that is
created using the following functions
: now(), today(), datetime(...), time(...), date(...)
This function returns the time in seconds.
The function can be used to add a time in seconds to a date or a time that is
created using the following functions
: now(), today(), datetime(...), time(...), date(...)
This function can be used to output a time in a specified format in hours,
minutes and seconds.
This function can be used to output a time and date value a specified format
in days, months, years, hours, minutes and seconds.
This function can be used to output a date value in a specified format in
days, months and years.
This function returns a date value for the current date and time.
This function returns a date value for the current date.
Formatting is performed according to the specifications described in the appendix. For more information, see
"Standard Date and Time Formats" (page 401).
See also
● Managing value tables (page 354)
● User-defined date and time formats (page 398)
11.11 Standard number format character strings
Format identifiers for number format character strings
fier
C
Currency
- or c
Example
123.456 ("C", en-US) -> $123.46
123.456 ("C", fr-FR) -> 123,46 €
123.456 ("C", ja-JP) -> ¥123
-123.456 ("C3", en-US) -> ($123.456)
-123.456 ("C3", fr-FR) -> -123,456 €
-123.456 ("C3", ja-JP) -> -¥123.456
402
Appendix
fier
E
Scientific (exponential)
- or e
Example
1052.0329112756 ("E", en-US) ->
1.052033E+003
1052.0329112756 ("e", fr-FR) ->
1,052033e+003
-1052.0329112756 ("e2", en-US) ->
-1.05e+003
-1052.0329112756 ("E2", fr_FR) ->
-1,05E+003
F
- or f
Fixed point
1234.567 ("F", en-US) -> 1234.57
1234.567 ("F", de-DE) -> 1234,57
1234 ("F1", en-US) -> 1234.0
1234 ("F1", de-DE) -> 1234,0
-1234.56 ("F4", en-US) -> -1234.5600
-1234.56 ("F4", de-DE) -> -1234,5000
P
- or p
Percent
1 ("P", en-US) -> 100.00 %
1 ("P", fr-FR) -> 100,00 %
-0.39678 ("P1", en-US) -> -39.7 %
-0.39678 ("P1", fr-FR) -> -39,7 %
11.12 LiquiPhysics formula syntax and tables
11.12.1 Conditions and formulas
A logical condition can be defined to determine whether a particular method function should be executed based
on a result (true or false). The condition is in the format of a formula. An empty condition is interpreted as true.
Formulas may be used in various method functions. You can enter calculated results Rx, temperature-compen
sated values (TCx), tables and raw data in formulas.
A formula may be formed, for example, as follows:
"CT[1]=0". This formula checks whether the first cell test of the method has failed ("0" stands for "False" and
"1" for "True").
The raw data of the method functions is indexed (e.g. CT[1], CT[2]). If the index is missing, [1] is assumed
automatically (CT=CT[1]).
Application example: The following method functions have been integrated into one method:
Method function: Cell test
"Interrupt if failed": Disabled
"Condition": Disabled
Method function: Cleaning
"Condition: Enabled
"Formula": CT[1]=0
Method function: Cell test
"Interrupt if failed": Enabled
"Condition": Enabled
"Formula": CT[1]=0
The following behavior has been programmed with this sequence:
Appendix
403
● If the first cell test was successful, cleaning and the second cell test are skipped (Conditions "CT[1]=0").
● If the first cell test has failed, cleaning and the second cell test are carried out (Conditions "CT[1]=0").
● If the second cell test has failed, the execution of other tasks is interrupted (on account of the enabled set
ting, "Interrupt if failed").
Mathematical Functions and Operators
The following mathematical functions and operators can be used in formulas:
Functions
Logarithm to the base 10
Logarithm to the base e
Exponential to base 10
Exponential to base e
Square
Square root
lg(x)
Ln(x)
pw(x) or
scientific notation
ex(x)
sq(x)
sr(x)
Mathematical operators
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
+
*
/
Comparison operators
equal to
larger than
larger than or equal to
smaller than
smaller than or equal to
x in the range of
not equal to
Logical operators
and
or
correct
False
=
>
>=
<
<=
... < x < ...
<>
AND
OR
TRUE
FALSE
● Logical operators are only permitted within formulas of the subfunction "Condition".
● The use of mathematical operators (+, -, * and /) within a parenthetical expression is not possible.
Formula Syntax
- Brackets
There are three types of brackets that can be used in formulas:
● Round brackets "( )":
e.g. T[Table_name(d)] and mathematical operators ln(d)
● Curly brackets "{ }": Relation to the cell, e.g. d{DX}. if the cell is not specified, then the internal cell is used
as default.
● Square brackets "[ ]"
- Indexing of the raw result, e.g.CT[1]: corresponds to the result of the first method function "Cell test" (if the
method has several "Cell test" method functions)
- Table name T[Table_name()] , e.g. T[Brix_d_NBS(d)];
- Auxiliary value H[Auxiliary_value], e.g. H[Auxiliary_Value_1]
- Color results with subscale/wavelength COL[Color_scale()], e.g. COL[CIELAB(L)];
COL[x]; x= color scale without subscale
COL[x(y)]; x= color scale with subscale
COL[T..(z)]; z= spectral value
T = Transmission %, T = Transmission abs; T = Extinction
(The color scales shown can be selected in the formula editor using the C button; button 1 in the formula
editor calls up C.)
- Fixed abbreviations
The following abbreviations are defined:
DM
Internal density cell
DX
RX
R1 ... Rx
TC1 … TCx
A, B, C, D, x, y
Density - module
Refractive index module
Results from the method function "Calculation"
Results from the method function "temperature compensation"
Coefficients (A-D) and variables (x,y) can be used in formulas, e.g. Ax + B.
- Syntax examples
404
Appendix
● Simple raw result: R1 = d
● Temperature compensation: R1 = TC1
● Tables: R1 = T[Brix_d_NBS(d)]
The following values can be entered for tables:
- Internal tables: d, dRaw, dvisc, nD, TC
- User-defined tables: All analysis data generated
- Rules for color results
● Color scales with subscales:
The colorimeter sends up to four results (subscales) for each color scale. The subscales are inserted
between the round brackets. If only one color value is sent for a particular color scale, no round brackets
are needed, e.g. COL[Scale(Subscale)] or COL[Scale].
● Transmission and extinction:
The Lovibond colorimeter sends the results for all wavelengths, in increments of 5 nm between 420 and
710 nm, e.g. COL[Extinction(450)]. If you wish to define a wavelength between the results sent from the
colorimeter, this will need to be interpolated. "–" is displayed if the inputted wavelength is not within the
420 to 710 nm range
11.12.2 Result proposals
List of the predefined results
Application d: Others
Twaddell number
Baumé degree
Application d: Alcohol
Jap. Sake deg.
Milk degrees
Alc. (%v/v) OIML @20°C
Alc. (%v/v) OIML @60°F
Alc. (%v/v) OIML @15°C
Alc. (%w/w) OIML
Alc. d @20°C
Alc. d @60°F
Alc. d @15°C
Alc. dA @20°C
Alc. dA @60°F
Alc. dA @15°C
Alc. SGA @20°C
Alc. SGA @60°F
Alc. SGA @15°C
Alc. (Proof) USA
Alc. (%v/v) HM C&E
Alc. (%w/w) HM C&E
Alc. (%v/v) Canada @20°C
Based on the specific weight SG at meas. temperature.
°Twad = 200 * (SG-1)
For samples heavier than water:
H. °Be = ((1/SG) - 1) * -144.3), at 15°C
H. Bé (US) = ((1/SG) - 1) * -145), at 60°F
For samples lighter than water:
Lt. °Bé = 10 + 144.3 * ((1/SG) - 1), at 15°C
Lt. °Bé (US) = 10 + 145 * ((1/SG) - 1), at 60°F
Sake Grade (Japan), based on the specific weight SG, measured at
15°C
Jap. Sake deg. = ((1/SG) - 1) * 1443
Milk deg. =1000 * (SG-1)
% volume of ethanol at the stated temperature, as per the OIML R-22
(International Organization of Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22:
alcohol tables), temperature scale IPTS 68, based on the absolute
density (in vacuum)
% weight ethanol, as per the OIML R-22 (International Organization of
Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22: alcohol tables), temperature
scale IPTS 68, based on the absolute density (in vacuum)
True density (in vacuo) of an ethanol sample at the stated tempera
ture, as per OIML R-22
Apparent density (in Air) of an ethanol sample at the stated tempera
ture
Apparent relative density (in air), SG(t/t), of an ethanol sample at the
stated temperature
US proof degree at 15.56°C (60°F), based on the true density
% volume ethanol as per H.M. C&E Table, at 20°C
% volume ethanol at 20°C, as per the Canadian ethanol tables
Appendix
405
Alc. (proof) UK
Alc. (%v/v) OIML ITS90 @20°C
Alc. (%v/v) OIML ITS90 @60°F
Alc. (%v/v) OIML ITS90 @15°C
Alc. (%w/w) OIML ITS90
Alc. (%v/v) AOAC
Alc. (%v/v) Gay-Lussac
Application d: Sugar
Plato d
Brix d NBS 113
Brix d Emmerich
HFCS42 d
HFCS55 d
Invert sugar d
KMW d
Babo (KMW) d
Oechsle d
Application nD: Others
Zeiss (14.45)
Zeiss (15.0)
Application nD: Sugar
Brix nD @ Tx
Brix nD comp 20C
Invert sugar nD
HFCS 42 nD
HFCS 55 nD
Oechsle nD
UK proof degree at 15.56°C (60°F)
% volume of ethanol at the stated temperature, as per the OIML R-22
(International Organization of Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22:
alcohol tables), new temperature scale ITS 90, based on the true den
sity (in vacuum)
% weight ethanol, as per the OIML R-22 (International Organization of
Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22: alcohol tables), new tempera
ture scale ITS 90, based on the true density (in vacuum)
% volume ethanol at 60°F, or % weight ethanol, as per AOAC tables
(American Organization of Analytical Chemists), based at the true den
sity at 20°C.
%-volume ethanol at 15°C, as per OIML R-22 (International Organiza
tion of Legal Metrology, Recommendation 22: (alcohol tables), new
temperature scale IPTS 68, based on the true density (in vacuum)
Extract-content in percentage weight (% w/w), Plato table, from true
density at 20°C
Saccharose content in percentage weight (% w/w), NBS table 113,
from true density at 20°C
Saccharose content in percentage weight (% w/w), according to A.
Emmerich, Zuckerindustrie 119 (1994), from true density at 20°C
%-weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 42 % fructose
fraction, based on true density at 20°C. Must be measured at 20°C.
%-weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 55 % fructose
fraction, based on true density at 20°C. Must be measured at 20°C.
%-weight invert sugar, based on true density at 20°C. Must be mea
sured at 20°C.
Klosterneuburg sugar grade (Austria). Precise sugar content in grape
juice. Based on true density at 20°C.
Sugar content in grape juice (Italy). Based on true density at 20°C.
Oechsle degree in grape juice, based on the specific weight at 15°C.
°Oe = (SG-1) * 1000, with d in g/cm3
Zeiss number, based on nD(20°C). Pure water gives a value of
14.45.
Zeiss number, based on nD(20°C). Pure water gives a value of 15.0.
Saccharose content in %.weight as per ICUMSA, 20th session in Col
orado Springs (1990). Also corresponds to OIML R 108 (1993).
Result without temperature compensation to 20°C.
Saccharose content in %.weight as per ICUMSA, 20th session in Col
orado Springs, 1990. Also corresponds to OIML R 108 (1993). Result
compensated to 20°C.
% weight invert sugar, as per ICUMSA, 20th session in Colorado
Springs (1990). Result without temperature compensation to 20°C.
% weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 42 % fructose
fraction. Based on the refractive index at 20°C. Must be measured at
20°C.
% weight HFCS syrup (High Fructose Corn Syrup) with 55 % fructose
fraction. Based on the refractive index at 20°C. Must be measured at
20°C.
Oechsle degree from grape juice, based on the refractive index at
20°C.
11.12.3 Color scales
Chromaticity()
406
Appendix
Klett
Tristimulus()
CIELAB()
CIELCH()
Lovibond RYBN
AOCS RY
Saybolt
EBC
Gardner
ASTM Color
PT-Co/Hazen
Iodine
Delta E
IP Units
AF960 AOCS
Chlorophyll a & b
beta Carotene
Hess Ives
Yellowness Index
Yellowness E313-73
Yellowness E313-96
Yellowness D1925
Hunter lab ()
Icumsa (420)
Icumsa (4560)
Icumsa (420 - 720)
EP Red
EP Yellow
EP Brown
EP Brown/Yellow
EP Green/Yellow
CH YG
CH Y
CH OY
CH OR
CH BR
PFUND
ADMI 3F
EBC (430nm)
ASBC
ASBC (430nm)
Series 52
Transmission %
Transmission absolute
Extinction
11.13 Arithmetic model
Calculations in LabX are performed according to IEEE-754-2008. The IEEE 754 standard requires support for a
number of operations. These include arithmetic operations such as add, subtract, multiply, divide, square root,
conversion operations, scaling, and comparisons. The results of these operations are to be the same for all
implementations of the standard, for a given format and rounding mode.
11.13.1 Computations and accuracy
LabX performs each of the computational operations that return a numeric result by using the maximum avail
able accuracy and then performs the rounding as the last step, according to the settings in the result calcula
tions if necessary.
Example
Where N is a number and R a result.
● Result R1 to be presented to the nearest 3 decimal points.
N1
N2
R1 without rounding
R1 with rounding
+
=
1.123456
1.1234567
2.2469127
2.247
● Result R2 to be presented to the nearest 4 decimal points.
● N3 = 2.21311
● R2 = R1 + N3
R1
N3
R2 without rounding
R2 with rounding
+
=
2.247
2.21311
4.46011
4.4601
Appendix
407
Note
For R2 the available accuracy regarding R1 is three decimals and not the full accuracy, according to the set
tings in the result calculations.
11.13.2 Infinity and NaN
● For both “NaN” and “Infinity”, LabX indicates all result states as Not OK .
● LabX preserves all representations of "NaN" and "Infinity" numbers upon importing and exporting data.
11.13.3 Rounding
LabX is also applying the default rounding of the IEEE-754 for all computations. Negative and positive numbers
are treated the same way by "Round half to even". This procedure treats positive and negative values symmetri
cally, and is free of sign bias.
Examples
Number
+ 13.5
+ 14.5
– 13.5
– 14.5
Number rounded
+ 14
+ 14
– 14
– 14
All numbers are rounded to +14 or – 14 because it is an even number. All other numbers which are not ending
in 0.5 round to nearest digit as usual.
Further examples
Number
+ 13.6
– 13.4
+ 6.6
+ 6.4
Number rounded
+ 14
– 13
+ 7
+ 6
11.13.4 Trailing zeroes in calculations and results
LabX adds trailing zeros according to the settings in the result calculations.
Example
Where N is a number and R a result.
N1 entered as 1.2
R2 is defined to 2 decimal places
R3 is defined to 4 decimal places
+
=
1.2
1.23
2.4300
11.13.5 Significant digits
LabX is using fix point arithmetic based on the Microsoft .NET data type decimal. For database persistence rea
sons LabX supports 14 digits before and after the decimal separator.
Significant digits
When using the calculation functions the significant digits are limited to 15. This is related to the internal
Microsoft .NET data type double conversion. At the end a decimal is used to store the data. Because of the
floating point behaviour, the decimal point is not fix.
408
Appendix
1. ln
2. logb
3. log
4. ND
5. NDn-1
6. Pow
7. RSD
8. RSDn-1
9. Sqrt
10. SD
11. SDn-1
11.13.6 Standard deviation
LabX statistic calculations follow the Bessel's correction. For sample standard deviation n – 1 is used, where n
is the number of observations in a sample. This corrects the bias in the estimation of the population variance,
and some of the bias in the estimation of the population standard deviation.
11.14 Grubbs table G (N, 90%)
N (number of samples)
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
90 %
1
11
2.23
21
2.58
31
2.75
41
2.88
51
2.97
61
3.03
71
3.08
81
3.12
91
3.17
101
3.21
111
3.24
2
12
2.29
22
2.6
32
2.77
42
2.89
52
2.97
62
3.04
72
3.08
82
3.13
92
3.17
102
3.22
112
3.22
3
1.15
13
2.33
23
2.61
33
2.78
43
2.9
53
2.98
63
3.04
73
3.09
83
3.13
93
3.18
103
3.22
113
3.25
4
1.46
14
2.37
24
2.63
34
2.79
44
2.91
54
2.99
64
3.05
74
3.09
84
3.14
94
3.18
104
3.22
114
3.25
5
1.67
15
2.41
25
2.65
35
2.81
45
2.92
55
3
65
3.05
75
3.1
85
3.14
95
3.19
105
3.23
115
3.26
6
1.82
16
2.44
26
2.67
36
2.82
46
2.92
56
3
66
3.06
76
3.1
86
3.15
96
3.19
106
3.23
116
3.26
7
1.94
17
2.48
27
2.69
37
2.83
47
2.93
57
3.01
67
3.06
77
3.11
87
3.15
97
3.2
107
3.23
117
3.26
8
2.03
18
2.5
28
2.7
38
2.84
48
2.94
58
3.02
68
3.07
78
3.11
88
3.16
98
3.2
108
3.23
118
3.26
9
2.11
19
2.53
29
2.72
39
2.86
49
2.95
59
3.02
69
3.07
79
3.12
89
3.16
99
3.21
109
3.24
119
3.27
10
2.18
20
2.56
30
2.74
40
2.87
50
2.96
60
3.03
70
3.08
80
3.12
90
3.17
100
3.21
110
3.24
120
3.27
Appendix
409
Version
Mettler-Toledo AG, Software Factory SWF
CH-8603 Schwerzenbach, Switzerland
Tel. +41 (0)44 806 77 11
Fax +41 (0)44 806 73 50
www.mt.com
Subject to technical changes.
© Mettler-Toledo AG 11/2013
410
Version
Dialog
Bubble Check
Buffer capacity
Index
Symbols
[i]
[s]
166, 167, 169
166, 167, 169
C
Callback Port
Cell test, method function
Chemicals
Auxiliary reagents
standards
Substances
Titrants
Color results
Formula syntax
Concentration and titer stan
dards
Managing
Condition, method function
Conditions
Conductivity Sensors
Configure barcode reader
Configure USB stick
Configuring a balance
Configuring Sensors
Conductivity Sensors
Connecting a TBox
Connection
Constants Within Constant
Determination
Content Determination
Control
Titration EP(Coul)
Titration KF(Coul)
Titration KF(Vol)
Control band
Current increments
Titration EP(Coul)
Titration KF(Coul)
Curve progression
A
233, 240, 245
Action When Exceeding Usable
47
Life
Activation
Offline
28
Online
28
EQP
309
Adjustment
320
Adjustment sets
Managing
352
an archive
Create
379
Display
379
Publish
379
Analysis and Resources Behav
ior
Action When Exceeding
47
Life Span
Action When Exceeding
47
Usable Life
Analysis Sequence Set
46, 321
tings
Resource Behavior
47, 322
Analysis data
260
Using
256
Analysis Data in Formulas
256
Arithmetic model
Computations and preci
407
sion
Infinity
408
NaN
408
Rounding
408
Significant digits
408
Trailing zeroes
408
Audit Trail
355
Authentication
29
Auto ID generation
124
Auto Stand
66, 340
Automatic weight detection
185, 187,
189, 190
Auxiliary reagents
51, 348
Auxiliary values
74, 346
AuxInst
210
Availability
Editing
315
B
Background jobs
Balance
Managing weights
Balances
Ethernet Interface
Beep
BETAHNV
Blank value
355
324
36
73
260
73
288, 289, 291
260
52, 349
317
279
320
51
52
53
54
50, 51
404
53
350
403
169, 169
328
61, 336
61, 336
60, 335
58
65, 339
319
258
258
234
236
235
333
234
236
268
D
Data
Displaying results
Data backup
Automatic
Creating an archive
Database
DB Maintenance
Displaying archives
Initializing a database
Manual
PC/Server
Publishing an archive
Restoring a data base
Data binding
apply
Example
304
304
377
379
376
376
379
378
378
376
379
378
138, 147,
149, 150,
154, 165
165
161
Index
411
Data storage
DB Maintenance
Determination type
Dosing rate
Control
Driver
Changing
Drivers
Drying
Dynamic weighing
147, 148,
153, 304
376
398
Sample scope
Transferring data
Global settings
Analysis and Resources
Behavior
Graph
Displaying
235
320
324
98, 281
185
Hardware
Peripherals
Sensors
Home screen
Homogenizer
Methods
TTL / RS
Hyperlinks
320
238
309
324
47
45
Formula examples
External extraction
GT
Stromboli
Formula syntax
Formulas
Example
In method functions
Initials
Functions
IEEE-754-2008
import templates
Adding
Editing
Managing
Increments
Index
InMotion
Instruction, Method function
Instrument server
Instruments
Adding
Availability
Editing properties
Lock
Managing
Network connection
Serial connection
Settings
Unblock
Unblocking
Unlock
USB connection
Ion Selective Sensors
ISE Sensors
370
370
368
320
64, 338
29
22
398, 401,
402-403
258
258
258
404
166, 166, 256
405
403
404
394-395, 402
G
General method functions
Beep
Communication with
peripheral device
Display message
Information method
Notify
Number
Pause task
Pausing a task
Report
Request selection
Request text
Result
Sample cycle
Sample IDs
412
Index
110
55
60, 335
55, 325
75, 95
218
218
24
I
F
FACT settings
Fingerprint reader
Fingerprint readers
Folders
Managing
Format identifier
45, 321
H
E
Editing maintenance settings
End-Point Titration
EQP
Editing
ErgoSens
Settings
Exceeding Usable Life
Expired Resources
Export templates
Adding
Editing
Managing
159
149
407
368
369
368
234, 236
166, 167, 169
68, 341
44, 94
281
319
316
315
319
143
315
317
316
318
155
315
143
318
58, 329
58, 329
K
Karl Fischer Titration
Keyboard layout
Define
KF Stand
137
144
138
139
154
139
147
148
152
141
142
150
157
137
235
73
69, 343
L
labels
Applying
Managing
Languages
Learn Titration (EQP)
Level sensor
LevelSens
Activate
Licenses
License Manager
134
31
25
237
64, 338
64, 338
27
27
License options
Life Span
Linear Calibration
Liquid Handler
Liquid Handlers
LiquiPhysics
Managing shortcuts
Managing shortcuts on
the PC
Manual operation
LiquiPhysics method functions
Adjusting
Atmospheric pressure
Calculation on the instru
ment
Clean
Cleaning
Import adjustment data
Instruction
Measuring
Standard data
Temperature compensa
tion
Test
Waiting
LiquiPhysics method subfunc
tion
Adjustment
Fill
Measure (adjustment)
Measure (Measurement)
Measure (Test)
Online Display
Set Sample Parameters
(Measurement)
Set Sample Parameters
(Test)
Setting Sample Parame
ters (Adjustment)
Test
Lock screen
Loop
Types and numbers
27
48
331
71
345
99
99
97
272
275
278
273, 280
279
274
281
274
277
283
276
283
291
292
287
288
290
294
286
285
284
292
18
74, 94, 101
207
M
Managing
Manual operation
Burette
Conductivity sensor
Dispense
Manual titration
Polarized sensor
Pump
Sample changer
Temperature Sensor
Manual operations
Sensor
Stirrer
Manual Stand
126, 129
88
84
83, 114
85
85
82, 114
81, 113
87
91
81, 112
80
80
66, 340
Mathematical functions and
259, 404
operators
Measure (MVT)
224
Measure (Normal)
222
Measured value acquisition
185
Messages
169
Defining
23
Displaying
24
Method functions
Adding
134
Cell test
279
Condition
403
Indexing
255
Instruction
281
Maximum number
204
Overview
201
Pretitration
252-253
Standby
228, 252-253
Temperature compensa
282
tion
Method functions balances
Adjustment - external
171
weight
Adjustment - Internal
176
Weight
Corner load
171
Draft shield
179
Info-Lines
179
Inspection and Settings
181
Maintenance inspection
180
Repeatability test
173
174
175
Method functions general
Audit Trail
154
Decide
158
Decision tree
157
Delay
153
Do while
161
Label Printer
146
Lock instrument
143
Recreate task
146
Tape printer
149
Unblock instrument
155
Method functions miscellaneous
Sample changer position
144
Method functions, parameters
Auxiliary Instrument
207
Auxiliary value
211
Blank Value
211
Calculation
212
Calibration
253
Conditioning
214
Dispense (Controlled)
215
Dispense (Normal)
217
Drain
217
Drift Determination
218
Instruction
218
Line rinse
216
Measure (MVT)
224
Measure (Normal)
222
Mix Time
254
Index
413
Park
Pump
Record
Rinse
Sample
Sample (KF)
Sample (Titer)
Stating
Stir
Sync
Titer
Titration (EP Coul)
Titration (EQP)
Titration (KF Coul)
Titration (KF Vol)
Titration (LearnEQP)
Titration Stand
Methods
Approving
Creating
Edit
Editing
Exporting
Importing
Manage
Managing
Method templates
Releasing
METTLER TOLEDO balances
Mssages
Managing
mV Sensors
225
226
226
227
250
246
247
251
228
231
227
252
234
238
236
235
237
245
21
92, 132
374
132
132, 135
132, 135
106
132
132
21
60, 335
pH Sensor
pH Sensors
Phototrode
Plug and Play Sensors
Setup
Polarized Sensors
Policies
Account
Auto-release
Display signatures
Release
Signing
Print list
Settings
Printer
Selecting a default printer
Setup
products
Adding
Editing
Managing
Task parameters
Pump and Stirrer Detection
Pumps
Quantos
Editing tasks
Ethernet Interface
Home screen
Logging off and locking
the screen
Manual operations
Operating
Selecting analyses
Switching on and logging
in to
Quantos method function
Blocking the head
Dosing
Front doors
Read/Write from/to RFID
Quick Guide
Quick search
Quick Start
23
56, 326
260
O
Open read-only
Operators
Outlier test
Overall result state
Assignment
Overview
Method functions
21
169, 394
312
33
201, 204
P
Index
31
32
21
32
32
33
319
61, 336
130
131
107
129
48, 322
59, 334
42
40
41
42
42
40
41
41
197
196
194
195
194
381
23
18
R
Parameters
Editing
passwords
Changing
peripheral devices
Adding
Peripherals
Balance
Balances
Barcode reader
Fingerprint reader
Printer
TBox
USB stick
414
55, 325
57, 328
Q
N
Naming conventions for calcula
tions
56
326
57, 327
135
29
39
60, 335
60, 335
61, 336
61, 336
64, 338
61, 336
65, 339
61, 336
Raw data
Reactivation
Reevaluation
Report
Multiple tasks
Report Designer
Filtering data
Formatting rules
Information
Insert bands
Insert detailed reports
Linking items
Overview
Pivot Grids
295
27, 28
308
358
364
364
364
361
362
364
359
363
Preview
Structuring a report
Tools
Report editor
Overview
Report functions
General
Report templates
Creating
Data management
Data sources
Editing
Reports
Automatic generation
Resetting
Titrator
Resources
Auxiliary reagents
standards
Expired resources
Liquid Handlers
Pumps
Sensors
Substances
Titrants
Result buffer
Displaying
Result set
Results
Adding EQP
Color settings
Displaying
Displaying on instru
ments
Edit comments
Edit sample data
Editing EQP
Managing
Measured values
Method data
Raw data
Recalculating
Reevaluating
Resource data
Result details
Show
Statistics
Task data
Return values
Measurement
Thermal values
RFID
Reading
Rinse Burette
Rinse Multiple Burettes
role
Add
roles
Edit
Managing
364
363
362
358
357
356, 356
356
357
358
357
357-358
79
348
349
350
325
345
334
325
346, 351
347
111
304, 391
304, 391
309
33
109
305
310
306
309
305
311
314
310, 310
307
308
314
310
310
312
312
176, 192-193
302-303
373
84
85, 119
365
365
365
Rondo
Rondolino
RS-232 data export
69, 342-343
67, 341
61, 336
S
Sample
Sample (KF)
Sample Changer
Move Titration Head
Move to Position
Rinse
sample ID
Request
Requesting
Sample series
Adding
Editing
Managing
sample series
Schedule
Editing
Schedules
Managing
Screen Lock
Screen, setting
Search folder
Sensor Calibration
Linear Calibration
Segmented Calibration
Sensor Test
Sensors
Calibration history
Configure
Test history
Sensors, manual operations
Series sequence
Adding
Editing
Shortcut
Adding
Shortcuts
Adding
Manage
Managing
Show old version
SmartCodes
Adding
Editing
Exporting
Importing
Starting
SmartSample
SmartTrac
250
247
91, 116
91, 116
92, 116
158
137
127
128
106
126
375
374
18, 31
72
121, 304, 355
330, 332
331
331
330, 332
325
333
55, 325
333, 348
80
129
129
77
125
72
105, 125
20
372
372
372
374
374
120
372
184, 185,
187, 189
Solvent
Monitoring
Standard deviation
Bessel's
Standby
Method Function
Stating
Stating method function
49, 323
409
228
228
270
Index
415
Statistics
Displaying
Recalculating
Stirrer
Stromboli
Substances
Balance
Symbol List
Symbols
Inserting
Network settings
PC settings
Peripherals
Printer
Sample weighing
TBox
Titration stands
USB-Stick
Titration (EP Coul)
Titration (KF Coul)
Titration (KF Vol)
Titration (LearnEQP)
Titration stands
Transferring data
109
313
80
67, 341
54, 346, 351
37
266
24
T
Table of measured values
Displaying
Table view
tags
Applying
Editing
Managing
Task Parameters
Using
Tasks
Adding
Controlling
Editing
Managing
Status
TBox
Temperature compensation,
method function
Temperature Sensor
Temperature Sensors
Test
Test sets
Managing
the balance
Operating
Thermal Values
Adjusting the instrument
Adjustment
General settings
Managing batches
Manual operations
Reference substances
Set the furnace tempera
ture
Switch off the furnace
Thermal Values method func
tions
Melting point/range
Melting point/range test
Titrants
Titration
Balance
Balance settings
Barcode reader
Fingerprint reader
Global settings
Homogenizer
LevelSens
416
Index
111
23
U
30
30
30
167
168
Usable life
USB driver
LiquiPhysics
Titration
user
Add
User interactions
User Interface
User settings
Keyboards
Screen
Shortcuts
users
Managing
121
123, 123
76, 108, 122
107
78, 96
65
282
57
328
320
Value ranges
Control band
Sensors
value tables
Importing
Managing
Values
Auxiliary
Blank
Versioned objects
37
94
44
365
105
16
73
72
72
365
333
333
354
354
74, 346
73
20
W
Weighing method functions
Interval weight
Pretare
Tare
Weight
Zero
Weights
Managing
Weight sets
Window layout
Workbench
103, 103
300
297
297
50, 51, 347
70, 343
60, 335
34
61, 336
64, 338
45, 321
71, 344
64, 338
48, 48
V
352
102
300
34
353
103
353
103
64, 64
63, 63
60, 335
61, 336
34, 38
65, 339
339
61, 336
234
236
235
237
65
110
183
189
187
184
188
324
325
18
104
Z
Zooming
25
www.mt.com/LabX
For more information
Mettler-Toledo AG, Software Factory SWF
CH-8603 Schwerzenbach, Switzerland
Tel. +41 (0)44 806 77 11
Fax +41 (0)44 806 73 50
www.mt.com
Subject to technical changes.
© Mettler-Toledo AG 10/2013
51710858E
*51710858*

LabX 2014 Operating Guide

Transcription

Similar documents

Communication instrument which can be used in

Placing a New Order - Springbok Pharmacy

Karl Fischer Titration Theory

Two forces working with the weather…

AlcoMate Prestige (Model AL-6000)

PREMET® C

Karl Fischer titrators

live interactive game channel

The idea with modifying stock down pipes is to gut the pre

Symphonics - FSG Australia